Decolonizing International Health: India and Southeast Asia, 1930-65 (Cambridge Imperial and Post-Colonial Studies)

Decolonizing International Health India and Southeast Asia, 1930–65

Sunil S. Amrith

Cambridge Imperial and Post-Colonial Studies Series General Editors: Megan Vaughan, King’s College, Cambridge and Richard Drayton, Corpus Christi College, Cambridge This informative series covers the broad span of modern imperial history while also exploring the recent developments in former colonial states where residues of empire can still be found. The books provide in-depth examinations of empires as competing and complementary power structures encouraging the reader to reconsider their understanding of international and world history during recent centuries. Titles include: Sunil S. Amrith DECOLONIZING INTERNATIONAL HEALTH India and Southeast Asia, 1930–65 Tony Ballantyne ORIENTALISM AND RACE Aryanism in the British Empire Anthony J. Barker SLAVERY AND ANTI-SLAVERY IN MAURITIUS, 1810–33 The Conflict between Economic Expansion and Humanitarian Reform under British Rule Robert J. Blyth THE EMPIRE OF THE RAJ Eastern Africa and the Middle East, 1858–1947 Roy Bridges (editor) IMPERIALISM, DECOLONIZATION AND AFRICA Studies Presented to John Hargreaves T. J. Crib (editor) IMAGINED COMMONWEALTH Cambridge Essays on Commonwealth and International Literature in English Ronald Hyam BRITAIN’S IMPERIAL CENTURY, 1815–1914: A STUDY OF EMPIRE AND EXPANSION Third Edition Robin Jeffrey POLITICS, WOMEN AND WELL-BEING How Kerala became a ‘Model’ Gerold Krozewski MONEY AND THE END OF EMPIRE British International Economic Policy and the Colonies, 1947–58 Ged Martin BRITAIN AND THE ORIGINS OF CANADIAN CONFEDERATION, 1837–67

W. David McIntyre BACKGROUND TO THE ANZUS PACT Policy-Makers, Strategy and Diplomacy, 1945–55 Francine McKenzie REDEFINING THE BONDS OF COMMONWEALTH 1939–1948 The Politics of Preference John Singleton and Paul Robertson ECONOMIC RELATIONS BETWEEN BRITAIN AND AUSTRALASIA 1945–1970

Cambridge Imperial and Post-Colonial Studies Series Series Standing Order ISBN 0–333–91908–4 (outside North America only) You can receive future titles in this series as they are published by placing a standing order. Please contact your bookseller or, in case of difficulty, write to us at the address below with your name and address, the title of the series and the ISBN quoted above. Customer Services Department, Macmillan Distribution Ltd, Houndmills, Basingstoke, Hampshire RG21 6XS, England

Decolonizing International Health India and Southeast Asia, 1930–65 Sunil S. Amrith

© Sunil S. Amrith 2006 All rights reserved. No reproduction, copy or transmission of this publication may be made without written permission. No paragraph of this publication may be reproduced, copied or transmitted save with written permission or in accordance with the provisions of the Copyright, Designs and Patents Act 1988, or under the terms of any licence permitting limited copying issued by the Copyright Licensing Agency, 90 Tottenham Court Road, London W1T 4LP. Any person who does any unauthorized act in relation to this publication may be liable to criminal prosecution and civil claims for damages. The author has asserted his right to be identified as the author of this work in accordance with the Copyright, Designs and Patents Act 1988. First published 2006 by PALGRAVE MACMILLAN Houndmills, Basingstoke, Hampshire RG21 6XS and 175 Fifth Avenue, New York, N.Y. 10010 Companies and representatives throughout the world PALGRAVE MACMILLAN is the global academic imprint of the Palgrave Macmillan division of St. Martin’s Press, LLC and of Palgrave Macmillan Ltd. Macmillan® is a registered trademark in the United States, United Kingdom and other countries. Palgrave is a registered trademark in the European Union and other countries. ISBN 13: 978–1–4039–8593–4 hardback ISBN 10: 1–4039–8593–6 hardback This book is printed on paper suitable for recycling and made from fully managed and sustained forest sources. A catalogue record for this book is available from the British Library. Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data Amrith, Sunil S., 1979– Decolonizing international health : India and Southeast Asia, 1930–65 / Sunil S. Amrith. p. cm. – (Cambridge imperial and post-colonial studies series) Includes bibliographical references and index. ISBN 1–4039–8593–6 1. Public health–India–History–20th cent. 2. Postcolonialism–India. 3. Public health–Southeast Asia–20th cent. 4. Postcolonialism–Southeast Asia. I. Title. II. Series. RA529.A47 2006 362.10954–dc22

10 15

9 14

8 13

7 12

6 11

2006046405

5 10

4 09

3 08

2 07

1 06

Printed and bound in Great Britain by Antony Rowe Ltd, Chippenham and Eastbourne

For My Parents

This page intentionally left blank

Contents List of Tables and Figures

ix

Acknowledgements

x

List of Abbreviations

xiii

Introduction The problem The argument

1 4 11

Chapter 1 Depression and the Internationalization of Public Health The limits of colonial medicine The internationalization of public health Two visions of rural hygiene Bandung, 1937 The ‘modernist’ challenge Conclusion

21 22 26 29 36 42 46

Chapter 2 War and the Rise of Disease Control DDT and disease control Building expertise Planning for the health of the world A new international health organization Conclusion: The ghosts of Bengal

47 48 50 56 63 69

Chapter 3 The Political Culture of International Health Health and the United Nations Envisioning Asia’s health Crisis and sovereignty Public health and the Cold War The birth of technical assistance Rights and technologies of health The argument for public health Conclusion

72 73 76 79 83 85 87 90 98

vii

viii Contents

Chapter 4 Building A New Utopia Projects and policies Health and nationalism A post-colonial discourse? Journeys to health Seeds of doubt

99 100 103 106 108 116

Chapter 5 The Techno-politics of Public Health Human and non-human obstacles Poverty and politics The return of community Rationality and resistance ‘A form of quackery’ Conclusion: the ambiguities of success

121 122 127 130 135 137 146

Chapter 6 The Limits of Disease Control Curing tuberculosis in Madras and Bangalore Problems of policy Dangerous journeys The end of eradication Eradication and evolution The triumph of population control Conclusion: dispersion and ‘medical pluralism’

149 150 156 161 165 170 171 175

Conclusion The effects of health policy Faith and doubt Enduring utopias

179 185 187 190

Notes

192

Bibliography

231

Index

255

List of Tables and Figures Tables 3.1 WHO Income, 1949–57 5.1 WHO/Indian Government BCG Vaccination Campaign in Madras State, 1954–55 C.1 Infant Mortality Rates, 1945–65

91 141 181

Figures 1.1 A Mantri’s House Visit 2.1 Singapore is Sprayed with DDT, 1945 C.1 Estimates of World Population, 1920–60

ix

31 54 181

Acknowledgements I acknowledge, gratefully, financial support from: The Ellen MacArthur Fund of the Cambridge Faculty of History; The Cambridge Commonwealth Trust; Universities UK; Christ’s College, Cambridge and Trinity College, Cambridge. Additional funding for the extensive travel needed to undertake the research came from the Centre for History and Economics; Christ’s College; The Ellen MacArthur and Holland Rose Funds of the Cambridge Faculty of History; the Smuts Memorial Fund of the University of Cambridge, and a Grant-in-Aid from the Rockefeller Archive Centre. Archivists and librarians on three continents have facilitated this research in many ways. I would particularly like to thank the staff of: The Cambridge University Library; The National Archives of the UK; The British Library (and newspaper library); The London School of Economics library; The London School of Hygiene and Tropical Medicine library and archives; The Bodleian Library; The National Archives of India, Delhi; The National Medical Library of India; the library of the All-India Institute of Medical Sciences; the Planning Commission library, Delhi; The Nehru Memorial Archives and Library; the Southeast Asian Regional Office of the World Health Organization, Delhi; The Tamil Nadu State Archives, Chennai; The Hindu’s library in Chennai; The National Archives of Singapore; The National University Library and Medical Library, Singapore; the archives of the International Labour Organization, Geneva and Yale University Library, New Haven. I am particularly grateful to Mrs Murthy at the National Tuberculosis Institute, Bangalore; Carole Modis and Ineke Deserno at the World Health Organization library and archives, respectively; Mme Pejovic at the League of Nations Archives, and Darwin Stapleton, Thomas Rosenbaum and Erwin Levold at the Rockefeller Archive Centre in Tarrytown, New York. I have accumulated a trail of personal and intellectual debts in researching and writing this book, and I can only begin to acknowledge them here. For helpful discussions, advice and support I would like to thank Sabina Alkire, D. Banerji, Susan Bayly, Jens Boel, the late Raj Chandavarkar, Susan Daruvala, Angus Deaton, Shane Doyle, Richard Drayton, B. Eswar, Andrew Hardy, Mark Harrison, John Iliffe, Sriya Iyer, K.S. Jomo, Pratap Bhanu Mehta, Angela Meijer, Thandika x

Acknowledgements xi

Mkandawire, V.R. Muraleedharan, Lion Murard, Thelma Narayan, Francesca Orsini, M.S.S. Pandian, N. Ram, the late C.V. Ramakrishnan, Mohan Rao, David Reynolds, Ralf Richter, Charles Rosenberg, Leo Saldhana, Amartya Sen, Glenda Sluga, Richard Smith, Helen Tilley, Frank Trentmann, Hans Van de Ven, Michael Worboys and Patrick Zylberman. I am grateful to seminar audiences at Cambridge, Manchester, Warwick, and Goettingen for their comments on earlier versions of this material. For their expert comments on draft chapters, I would particularly like to thank Alison Bashford, J. Devika and Simon Szreter. I have benefited enormously from Lincoln Chen’s perspectives as a practitioner of international public health. Sugata Bose was the external examiner of the Ph.D. dissertation on which this work is based; I am grateful for his incisive comments and for his continuing support. An anonymous reviewer for Palgrave helped immensely in the final stages with constructive criticisms of the manuscript. I am especially grateful to those who have guided me through several years in Cambridge. Christopher Bayly’s support and counsel have made many things possible and I am grateful for his continuing generosity and inspiration. Martin Daunton has always been a source of ideas and encouragement and has opened many new avenues for me. The work owes much to all I have learned from Tim Harper; I am grateful for his kindness over the years. Megan Vaughan has been unfailingly supportive, as an examiner of the original thesis, as a series editor, and as a colleague; her own work has provoked many of the ideas here. I am grateful, finally, to the Master and Fellows of Trinity College for providing a congenial environment in which to complete this book. John Lonsdale’s lectures and supervisions on African history when I was an undergraduate remain a highlight of my academic career to date, without his inspiration I doubt I would have embarked on research. The sudden death of Raj Chandavarkar, as this book was going to press, was a terrible blow. Raj did so much when I was a student to draw me to Indian history, and since my arrival as a fellow at Trinity he had been a wonderful colleague and friend; memories of his kindness – and his wicked sense of humour! – will stay with all who knew him. Most of all, I would like to thank Emma Rothschild, who supervised the original thesis from which this book developed: I could not imagine a better or a more generous supervisor. Emma always allowed me complete freedom to follow my own path with this research, while sharing her unerring instinct for finding good stories in unpromising places.

xii Acknowledgements

I have continued to benefit from her wisdom in the process of writing this book. The example of her own work has been an inspiration throughout. For this, and much else, I am very grateful to her. Needless to say, any shortcomings that remain despite all this good advice are entirely my own responsibility. I would like to thank Michael Strang and all at Palgrave for making the process of publication so painless; their friendly efficiency has been much appreciated by this first-time author. One of the pleasures of having completed this book is the chance to acknowledge the support and kindness of some wonderful friends. I would particularly like to thank Sharad Chari, Ai Lin Chua, Tracy Dennison, Abdul Fakhri, Mike Finn, Mark Frost, Nilima Gulrajani, Sarah Hodges, Ananya Jahanara Kabir, Inga Huld Markan, Magnus Marsden, William O’Reilly, Shomikho Raha, Nate Roberts, Florian Schui, Rhiannon Stephens, Rosie Vaughan and Rupa Viswanath. I do not know quite how to thank my family in India (and elsewhere), and John, Barbara and Rachel in England. All of them have helped in ways they may not realize. Above all, I am grateful to my sister Megha, my parents, Jay and Shantha, and my wife Ruth for their love and support.

List of Abbreviations AIIMS BCG DDT FAO IESHR ILO INH IOR LN LNHO NAI NAS NMML NPC NTI OR RAC TNA TNSA UN UNESCO UNICEF UNRRA WHO

All-India Institute of Medical Sciences, Delhi Bacille Calmette-Guérin Dichloro-diphenyl-trichloroethane Food and Agriculture Organization Indian Economic and Social History Review International Labour Organization Isoniazid (anti-tuberculosis drug) India Office Records, British Library, London League of Nations League of Nations Health Organization National Archives of India, Delhi National Archives of Singapore Nehru Memorial Museum and Library, Delhi National Planning Committee National Tuberculosis Institute, Bangalore Official Records of the World Health Organization Rockefeller Archive Centre, Tarrytown, New York The National Archives of the UK (Public Record Office) Tamil Nadu State Archives, Chennai United Nations United Nations Educational, Scientific and Cultural Organization United Nations Children’s Fund United Nations Relief and Rehabilitation Administration World Health Organization

xiii

This page intentionally left blank

Introduction

In the middle decades of the twentieth century, Asia was at the heart of international efforts to create a new utopia: a world free from disease. This is a political, intellectual and social history of those efforts, from the late-colonial era through the first generation after independence. The work is positioned at the boundary between international history, the history of Asian nationalism and decolonization, and the history of post-colonial public health and medicine. These fields come together in my focus on international institutions as a site for the exchange of ideas and policies on disease, welfare and development. The book focuses primarily on India, but suggests that debates and interventions in the field of public health were pan-Asian, sometimes even global, as a result of the intellectual, personal and technological connections forged through international health institutions. As a result, the story takes us from Delhi to Djakarta, Rangoon and Zagreb. The starting point for my analysis is the observation that the problem of Asia’s health emerged, during the inter-war years, in an increasingly transnational arena of debate and exchange. The 1930s saw the rise of a new language and a new set of connections bringing together local experiments in public health scattered from China to India, most of them decidedly on the fringes of state policy. Writing in 1936, Dr A.S. Haynes, a former British administrator in Malaya, who had just completed a tour of Southeast Asia on behalf of the League of Nations, observed that ‘From Bombay to Batavia, from Hanoi and Manila to Colombo, there is no more familiar cry in the newspapers of every country than Rural Reconstruction’. Having inspected medical and sanitary facilities across the continent, Haynes was convinced that ‘among large sections of the rural population in these lands there is occurring a gradual awakening; with the perception 1

2 Decolonizing International Health

of the possibility of improved conditions of life is the growing desire to attain them’. Indeed, he concluded that ‘no longer does all the peasantry live as in the words of the Malay proverb, seperti katak dibawah tempurong – like a frog under a coconut shell, in a tiny world of its own’.1 Haynes’ comments reflected the convergence and contention, in the aftermath of the Depression, of international, colonial, and nationalist ideas about health, focusing particularly on questions of nutrition and rural welfare. The Second World War transformed a sense of the possible with the revolutionary new technologies of disease control that it produced. The insecticide DDT (dichloro-diphenyl-trichloroethane) and antibiotic drugs made it possible to imagine that the control of infectious disease might be a realistic prospect in large parts of the world. Such was the power of the new technology, the images of aircraft trailing plumes of DDT in their wake, that the localized, ‘ecological’ methods of public health advocated by the rural hygienists of the 1930s seemed, to many, outdated. The promise of a world without disease led directly to the establishment of the World Health Organization (WHO) as one of a number of agencies constituting the United Nations (UN) after 1945. Perhaps the most fundamental shift occurring during the war was the emergence of the notion that health was a responsibility of government and a right of citizenship. This was radically different from earlier approaches to public health in the colonized world, where colonial states had never been more than ‘fire fighters’, preventing epidemics and ensuring the productivity of labour. Health, the WHO constitution declared, was a ‘fundamental human right’. The foundation of the WHO coincided with the culmination of anticolonial struggles in India, Indonesia, Burma and Indochina. Looking beyond the immediate crises of war, mass migration and Partition, each of the newly independent countries made plans to develop staterun health services for their populations. In a very short space of time, to possess a health service had become a universal element of the functions of a state; any state. Asian states were not slow in calling in the help of the WHO and other international agencies to assist in the forbidding task of extending health services to the excluded and the dispossessed. Health became part of the broader promise that gripped large parts of the world after 1945: the promise of ‘development’. The WHO, working through and with national governments, set out to transform the world. South and Southeast Asia constituted by far the largest arena for its interventions. Subject to the pressures of the Cold

Introduction 3

War, working with straitened resources, and fighting the charge that public health work would intensify the ‘population explosion’, the WHO found its strength in technology. Moving away from discussions about the social and economic roots of ill health and the structure of health services, the WHO offered targeted interventions as a simple tool of ‘technical assistance’, allowing countries to maximize economic productivity. Starting from myriad ‘pilot projects’ and demonstration sites, the WHO envisaged the ceaseless expansion of its campaigns, using BCG vaccination against tuberculosis, penicillin against the disfiguring yaws, and DDT against malaria. In the minds of the WHO’s medical consultants, travelling from Indonesia to Nepal, inspecting malaria spray teams and venereal disease treatment centres, these disparate attempts to activate new forms of technical expertise assumed the ordered form of a pan-Asian ‘policy’. The techno-centric campaigns against infectious disease engendered much optimism, and an ever-greater sense of ambition in the 1950s. The commencement of a global malaria eradication programme in 1955 encapsulated the sense of mission that emerged not only from international debates, but also from countless local experiments, tied together by the discourse and the practices of international public health. The technology of the 1950s was genuinely effective, and, for many, liberating. The impact of these campaigns upon rates of mortality across the Third World was, in the words of one contemporary observer, ‘amazing’.2 Yet the onward march of technological medicine was never unchallenged. The techno-politics of public health encountered resistance at every turn, belying the notion that the international health campaigns represented a planned triumph of technology over nature. The degree to which internationally administered programmes relied on local agency and improvisation in practice proved uncomfortable for the planners. However effective the biomedical and chemical technologies at their disposal, the architects of disease control confronted constant practical obstacles, requiring constant adjustments to the plans: broken down trucks, interrupted supplies, harsh terrain, and the irruption of politics into the domain of technical endeavours. The questions international public health sought to surmount using technology – questions of poverty, of the limits of state control – asserted themselves unbidden. By the early 1960s, the whole project of disease control and eradication faced serious challenges. The problems inherent in the technocentric campaigns of the 1950s grew to the extent that malaria

4 Decolonizing International Health

eradication slipped out of the WHO’s grasp: insecticide resistance developed; technology could not surmount the fact that much of Asia possessed little in the way of rural health services to detect and report cases of malaria. Similarly, attempts to introduce powerful drugs to treat tuberculosis proved unworkable when the WHO and national health administrations confronted the limits of their control over patients’ bodies and their movements. The earlier charge, that public health would contribute less to ‘development’ than would the control of population growth, became increasingly strident in the 1960s. With the emergence of simple contraceptive technologies, population control began to supplant public health on the international agenda, in Asia above all. This, then, is the basic narrative of this book: it is a story of the origins, rise and decline of a set of ideas about health, illness, and their management on a mass scale, in a regional arena shaped by the crisis and collapse of European imperialism.

The problem International health and international organizations The history of international health can be told as part of a broader story about the rise of international organizations. According to this narrative, recently constructed by the historian Akira Iriye, the increasingly complex manifestations of international organization, both intergovernmental and non-governmental, are a significant trend in the history of the twentieth century.3 Iriye’s work is at the forefront of a move beyond the traditional focus of international history on questions of diplomacy and high politics.4 The ‘new’ international history has begun to take more seriously the importance of cultural exchange and cultural politics; the history of ideas (such as the idea of economic development), and the roles played by non-state actors.5 Technical and scientific matters have always lent themselves especially well to international cooperation, and the field of medicine provides an early and conspicuous example of this exchange. The formal internationalization of medicine can be traced back to professionalization, standardization, and centralization of medical knowledge during the ‘long’ nineteenth century.6 The internationalization of medicine coincided with a gradual shift in medical perception, from a local, ‘classificatory’ view of illness resulting from systems and humours out of balance, to a more circumstantial view of epidemics as singular, limited events.7

Introduction 5

As Charles Rosenberg has argued, however, the collective recognition of epidemics is a gradual and often reluctant process.8 It took the dramatic cholera epidemics that swept Europe between 1830 and 1847 to provoke concerted efforts at inter-governmental cooperation in public health. There was initially much hesitation when it came to concerted action: conflicting commercial interests and different views of disease causation stood against international agreement on quarantine and disease control.9 Eventually, a series of 11 international sanitary conferences were convened, between 1851 and 1903, to coordinate international information and policies on quarantine regulations and the containment of outbreaks of disease. The conferences proceeded haltingly, finding it very difficult to reach agreement. At the sixth of the conferences, held in Rome in 1885, the Italian hosts remarked upon the ‘most complete anarchy’ which continued to reign ‘in quarantine matters’. Indicating the extent to which nineteenth century internationalism had progressed, the Italian memorandum expressed particular surprise that no sanitary convention had yet been agreed, since ‘our epoch is characterized by the vast number’ of international agreements which ‘embrace almost the entire universe’.10 The first International Sanitary Convention finally came into force in 1892. The sanitary convention led to the establishment of the permanent international health organization, charged with overseeing the implementation of the Conventions and undertaking epidemic surveillance: the Office International D’Hygiène Publique, in Paris.11 The move towards internationalization in public health was not simply an official one. The second half of the nineteenth century saw the growth of transnational voluntary activity in the field of public health, exemplified by the International Red Cross, founded in Geneva in 1863 by Henri Durant to send an army of ‘volunteers, motivated by Christian charity, into the battlefields, to make up for shortcomings of military medical organizations’.12 Numerous professional bodies, too, existed on an increasingly international plane. This multiplicity of national and international, public and private organizations is characteristic of international health in the first half of the twentieth century, a period that witnessed significant growth in the range of international institutions concerned with health and welfare. The period after the First World War saw a flourishing of international agreements that ‘embrace almost the entire universe’. The founding of the League of Nations in 1919 epitomized this trend towards internationalization. The Covenant of the League of Nations formed part of the Treaty of Versailles, with its origins in the internationalist

6 Decolonizing International Health

thought of the First World War. The United States government, however, did not ratify the Paris Peace Treaties, leaving the League of Nations compromised from the outset in its function as an organization for collective security.13 Nevertheless, the League of Nations took an early and active interest in ‘social’ questions. In 1920, a Committee on Social and General Questions began work, its concerns ranged from the condition of refugees to the opium trade, the ‘traffic in women and children’, and questions of economic management. The League had a direct involvement, too, in colonial questions. At the end of the First World War, the Ottoman and German colonial territories were assigned to the victorious allied powers as ‘mandates’, divided into three categories according to the ‘stage of development of the territory’. The League’s institution of Mandates heralded a new era of ‘trusteeship’, wherein ‘the well-being and development of such peoples form a sacred trust of civilization.’14 Within this broad context of an internationalization of responsibility for ‘social’ questions, public health naturally became one of the League’s responsibilities.15 The League of Nations Health Organization had its origins in the Epidemics Committee, established in 1918 to coordinate efforts against the epidemics of typhus sweeping Eastern Europe after the First World War. Under the leadership of the Polish physician and bacteriologist, Ludwik Rajchman, the League of Nations Health Organization, in collaboration with the Rockefeller Foundation, extended the boundaries of international health work.16 The League established an epidemiological surveillance station in Singapore, and convened expert commissions of enquiry on subjects ranging from tuberculosis and malaria to biological standardization. In the aftermath of the Depression, the League’s health committee became more radical, moving beyond narrow technical discussions to consider the deeper social and economic roots of illness.17 A defining feature of the League’s health organization was the relative autonomy it afforded to independent ‘experts’ in relation to government representatives. The League initially confined its interest to Europe, and particularly Eastern Europe, but I will argue in this book that Asia (and Africa) soon became important areas of concern for the organization. Throughout its life, the League of Nations Health Organization had a close working relationship – intellectual, institutional, and financial – with the Rockefeller Foundation, which expanded its own work in international health during the inter-war period.18 Following the early work of the Rockefeller Sanitary Commission for the Eradication of Hookworm Disease from the southern states of the USA, the Foundation

Introduction 7

established its International Health Division in 1913. The health division played a role in war relief during the First World War, and proceeded to initiate research-driven public health campaigns in Europe, Latin America, South Asia, and China, targeting yellow fever, malaria, and tuberculosis, as well as developing medical education.19 From the late 1920s, the Foundation focused increasingly upon laboratory research, reflected, for example, in the Yellow Fever Commission’s efforts to trace the contours of the global distribution of the disease.20 The Foundation also established a series of rural health units, in 17 countries by the 1930s. Recent histories have gone beyond narrowly ‘instrumentalist’ or ‘idealist’ approaches to the Foundation’s health work, highlighting both the relative autonomy of the scientific networks it established, and the ways in which the Rockefeller Foundation’s initiatives were appropriated and adapted by a range of local actors. A prosopographical approach has proved particularly fruitful, highlighting the personal and intellectual connections forged by the Foundation’s networks that crossed both national and institutional boundaries.21 On one view, then, the establishment of the WHO under the auspices of the UN organization in 1946 (its constitution was ratified in 1948) might appear to mark the culmination of more than a century of internationalism in health. Certainly, this narrative was widely accepted at the time of the WHO’s inception. At the opening meeting of the WHO’s preparatory commission, Andrija Stampar, a Yugoslavian physician who had played a major role in promoting ideas of rural public health in the 1930s, submitted a lengthy memorandum that began with an historical narrative of the rise of international health, from the Sanitary Conferences of the nineteenth century to the League of Nations. Each stage, in his view, represented an extension of international responsibility, and an expansion of the power of international expertise.22 Colonial and post-colonial health The underlying model in much of the literature on internationalization is one of diffusion, with international organizations and transnational networks covering more and more of the world over the course of the twentieth century, gradually stretching to encompass Asia and Africa. Yet a very different narrative about the globalization of modern medicine emerges from the historiography of colonial medicine. This literature is founded upon a much more sceptical view of ‘science’ than that taken by the historians of internationalization.23

8 Decolonizing International Health

The starting point of this alternative narrative is that to speak of ‘global’ health is to speak of the expansion of Western medicine as an inherent element of imperialism, and thus also of a history of violence and domination which the liberal or humanitarian narrative of internationalism obscures. The expansion of ‘Western’ medicine was part of a centuries-long process of expansion of trade, migration, and communication. The earliest priority of imperial medicine was the health of European soldiers. Philip Curtin has shown the extent to which the tropical world was a ‘white man’s grave’ in the late eighteenth and early nineteenth centuries. The dramatic improvement in the health of Europeans in the tropics, over the course of the nineteenth century, owed much to the improvisations and empirical adaptations of military surgeons and sanitary engineers and often preceded the medical advances of the era.24 Colonial medicine was equally concerned with ensuring the reproduction of labour, focusing on the health of slaves and, later, ‘free’ plantation labourers.25 With the consolidation of imperial control in the nineteenth century, medicine became an increasingly important ideological justification for empire, and an essential part of the self-image of ‘civilizing’ imperialism. A central concern of this historiography on colonialism and medicine has been the question of how medicine related to colonial power over ‘native’ societies and economies, bodies (and souls). At the risk of generalizing about an increasingly diverse literature, the fundamental proposition of work on colonial medicine is that biomedicine was a constitutive element of colonial power. Modern medicine served both as a symbolic legitimation of colonial rule, and as a means for the colonial state to regulate and discipline the bodies of colonial subjects.26 David Arnold, in one of the pioneering works in this field, argued that the diffusion of western medical practices in India played an important role in the increasing regulation of colonial subjects by an expanding state.27 Medical discourse demonstrated the ‘superiority of Western science over the “inertia” and “prejudice” of the East’, thus ‘promoting the security and legitimacy of colonial rule, and concurrently eliminating or subordinating all rival systems of authority’.28 Writing about British colonial Africa, Megan Vaughan has argued that ‘medicine and its associated disciplines played an important part in constructing “the African” as an object of knowledge, and elaborated classification systems and practices which have to be seen as intrinsic to the operation of colonial power’.29 However, unlike histo-

Introduction 9

rians who see colonial medical discourse in monolithic terms, Vaughan illustrates its inherent limitations.30 She suggests that whilst colonial medical discourse constructed an image of an uncontrolled, pathological African sexuality, in practice, the impact of colonial medicine in colonial Nyasaland (now Malawi) was limited. Colonial medical officers were seldom willing to follow through on the implications of their constructions of ‘the African’.31 From the early twentieth century, there emerged a strand of thought which suggested that though diseased and dirty, ‘native’ bodies could ultimately be reformed into the bodies of hygienic citizens – a conversion no longer dependent on conversion to Christianity; the language of mission was secularized and turned towards the question of maternal and child health.32 Led by more self-consciously ‘progressive’ colonies like the Philippines under American rule, or the Dutch East Indies, colonial governments began to talk more about the health of indigenous populations. Often, as I will argue in these pages, the shift began on the fringes of the state, in the discussions and activities of an increasingly mobile group of nutritionists, reformers and nationalists which were then taken up, almost defensively, by colonial states. Some historians have seen this shift in terms of a more fundamental change in the nature of colonial rule, encapsulated by Michel Foucault’s notion of the ‘governmentalization of the state’.33 This was a process – which Foucault traced to the second half of the eighteenth century in Europe – whereby ‘the welfare of the population, the improvement of its condition, the increase of its wealth, longevity [and] health’ become the ‘ultimate end of government’.34 Although Foucault neglected resolutely the question of colonialism, historians have seen a process of governmentalization at work in Europe’s colonies, albeit in a way shaped by the racial divide between colonizer and colonized.35 As a result of the governmentalization of colonial states, argues Warwick Anderson, Native bodies were increasingly recognized not simply as the body of the Other, but more importantly perhaps, as the body of the worker, or the body of the future worker’s mother. These were bodies to be studied, surveyed, disciplined and, when necessary, reformed to ensure their efficiency as parts of the emerging world system.36 Across Asia, nationalist thinkers and activists responded to the governmentalization of colonial states through a process of appropriation and

10 Decolonizing International Health

translation. They turned the colonial discourse about the welfare of the population into claims of entitlement – Asian nationalists argued that they could care for the welfare of ‘their’ populations better than alien colonial governments.37 Into the 1930s, colonial states remained content to secure welfare through the small network of voluntary associations that had developed on the fringes of the state, from missionary organizations to cooperative societies.38 Yet such was the gulf between the tiny realm of ‘civil society’ and the mass of the population in most parts of Asia that many nationalists – and, by the 1940s, some colonial administrators too – believed that the ‘population’ could only be acted upon by the state.39 Not the least consequence of this was to make the capture and exercise of centralized state power an absolutely fundamental aspiration of maturing nationalist movements across South and Southeast Asia.40 At the moment when nationalists across Asia took over colonial states, a wide set of technologies for the government of the population were freely available for adoption and adaptation.41 Amongst these were new technologies to control mortality. International organizations like the WHO played a crucial role in circulating and legitimizing new techniques for the government of health and illness. The WHO acted on a scale above the nation, surveying and seeking to improve the health of the world (or, less ambitiously, of ‘Southeast Asia’ or the ‘Eastern Mediterranean’). Individual states were subject to certain ways of knowing (reporting to the WHO the ‘causes of death’ each month in standardized form),42 and intervening (following acceptable and legitimate policies of disease control). Does this represent a globalization of colonial governmentality? Randall Packard has argued that the ‘hegemony’ of the WHO in the international arena allowed the organization to incorporate large populations into its exercise of governmental power, turning them into more productive workers and opening their lands while securing their ‘hearts and minds’ against communism.43 I would suggest, however, that there is a danger in presenting the rise of colonial and post-colonial governmentality in too monolithic a fashion. It is possible to exaggerate the power of government (and, consequently, of international organizations) to transform or even to understand the ‘regularities’ governing the population. It is important to remember that for all of the rhetoric about the welfare of the population, colonial states neglected public health to a remarkable degree. Colonial public health was intrusive, but it was also fundamentally exclusive. It

Introduction 11

touched a tiny proportion of indigenous populations. Historians of India have written that a ‘critique of the colonial state [should] concentrate on its inaction, if not complete dereliction of responsibility in public health’ rather than on rare moments of intensive intervention, as during the plague epidemic of the 1890s.44 There is a fundamental tension here, and it recurs throughout this book; a tension between evidence of the governmentalization of colonial and post-colonial states, bolstered by international organizations, and the equally compelling evidence for the weakness, the absence, and the ineffectiveness of repeated interventions – colonial, national and international – to govern the health and welfare of large populations. More broadly, the juxtaposition of the international and colonial historiographies raises questions that motivate the analysis that follows: did the internationalization of public health emerge from the activities of a vanguard of cosmopolitan doctors, or from the inexorable process of governmentalization, itself a response to the challenge of governing growing populations increasingly integrated into the world economy? What role should we accord to ideas and imagination relative to ‘interests’ in explaining the development of international public health? What exactly is the relationship between colonial, national and international public health? In what sense was international public health post-colonial?

The argument Locating international health: ‘Southeast Asia’ The field of public health in mid-twentieth-century Asia was, irreducibly, both transnational and international. The problem of the health of the vast majority of Asia’s population emerged with greater urgency as a result of transnational (initially trans-colonial) debates between nutritionists and rural health officials, channelled through the primary international organization of the time, the League of Nations. The League’s reports, its statistics on health and universal standards, bolstered the arguments of nationalists and activists across Asia, who used this information to mount a critique of colonial neglect. Colonial states, in turn, were often goaded by the spotlight of the League of Nations into defending their records in the field of health and welfare, submitting lengthy reports that began to systematize ‘health policies’ that were, in reality, disparate and haphazard. A model of ideas moving from metropolitan core to colonial periphery does not capture the complexity of the ways in which ideas about

12 Decolonizing International Health

health moved through Asia in the 1930s. International public health first arrived in Asia with the visits of Eastern European physicians (from Europe’s own ‘periphery’) working for the League of Nations in China (on the margins of European imperial control in Asia), and funded by the Rockefeller Foundation. From there it spread through reports, tours of inspection, statements and published statistics that began to constitute a discourse on ‘public health in the Far East’. The Second World War cemented a shift, already underway in the 1930s, towards the notion that science, technology and expert knowledge ought to be employed by the State, supported by international organizations, to bring about a planned transformation of social and economic life in Asia and Africa. The WHO, on this view, emerged out of a widely shared faith that ‘modern’ methods of disease control, like strategies of economic management or progressive labour policies, could be standardized and implemented in a rational manner by a new generation of professional technocrats.45 Coinciding with the moment of decolonization for many Asian states, the new organizations established after 1945 were more consciously inter-national than the League of Nations, recognizing the primacy of the nation state as the appropriate agent for carrying out such policies. The central role of the WHO, from the 1940s onwards, was as a site for the formulation of goals and the establishment of the bounds of possibility in public health policy. The WHO was enthusiastically embraced by so many post-colonial governments because, to adapt Frederick Cooper’s characterization of international labour policy, the WHO ‘provided a forum at which the ideas of progressive … policy could be detached from their specifically colonial context, and slowly and subtly shifted from a discourse among colonial powers to a discourse among independent nations’.46 By disseminating universal norms (what sociologists have called the assumptions of ‘world society’) the WHO could govern what it meant to speak of ‘health policy’ (and, of course, what fell beyond the realm of ‘health policy’), to such an extent that modern public health meant something similar in states with widely different political cultures.47 India played a central role in shaping this growing consensus, and formed the nodal point in a network of expertise and policies that spanned Southeast Asia, but which touched some parts of the region more than others. This can be explained by the intersection of epidemiological, imaginative, and political geographies. First, India presented a uniquely complex and internationally important disease environment, both because of its size and its diversity. Now integrated

Introduction 13

within a state that claimed to put the welfare of the population above all else, India seemed an obvious place to begin to test the new technologies and the new policies, that had emerged out of the war. Poverty-stricken India seemed, to many, to encapsulate the range of conditions in what would come to be the under-developed world. India had, of course, long occupied a place in the European imagination as a pathogenic heart of darkness: source of the most malaria, the most cholera, the most plague. The openness of the post-colonial Indian state to international assistance in health, and to new technologies, made India an ideal ‘testing ground’ for new approaches to malaria, tuberculosis and smallpox prevention and control. At the same time, knowledge of prevailing health conditions in India was significantly better than for many other parts of Asia. A reasonably effective system of vital registration and a good bank of census data existed; more immediately, the comprehensive survey carried out by the Health Survey and Development Committee in 1944 presented a detailed picture of health conditions and medical facilities across the country.48 Such depth of information was manifestly absent in warravaged Southeast Asia (or, for that matter, China). India thus provided an ideal ground for ‘pilot projects’, demonstration areas, and other such concentrations of new technical expertise. Second, the relative stability of the post-colonial transition in India made the Indian state particularly amenable to working with new international organizations. Crucially, the non-revolutionary nature of the transfer of power in India meant that the ‘Keynesian’ assumptions that shaped international approaches to social policy after 1945 accorded closely with the assumptions of India’s new technocratic elite.49 Not for India the heavily militarized medicine based on mass mobilization that was taking shape in China, or Vietnam in the late 1940s.50 The Indian state placed more faith in planned expertise, and in advanced technology, to bring about gradual transformation. At the same time the retention by Indian nationalists of most of the institutions of the colonial state and bureaucracy, meant that an institutional basis for policy was in place, however ineffective and incomplete it might have been. Thus India, and Indians, played a greater role in shaping approaches to Asia’s health problems than did Indonesians or Burmese, their respective countries absorbed by more fundamental problems of constructing state authority amidst much violence and numerous revolts by ethnic and religious minorities. The comparison between India and Pakistan, which played a very limited role in shaping international approaches to public health, is instructive: constructing a

14 Decolonizing International Health

state, consolidating territorial boundaries, and negotiating the place of the military in political life proved much more pressing concerns in Pakistan.51 The relative dominance of India over the field of public health in the region owed much, too, to the fact that many more Indians (mainly upper caste Hindus) had been trained in biomedicine than their counterparts in the Dutch East Indies, or in British Burma.52 The biopolitics of international public health reconciled, to an extent, Indian aspirations for regional leadership with Southeast Asian fears of Indian ‘imperialism’; it also helped to reconcile a more general post-colonial fear of American dominance. Acting against infectious disease was something on which all could agree, and the blue flag of the United Nations made external assistance, and American largesse, more palatable. This was, at least in part, because despite being an inter-governmental organization, the WHO facilitated and allowed transnational connections to flourish, and it was often through these connections that assumptions, practices and policies concerning health were transmitted. Thus, I argue in the later part of the book that even after the cementing of Asia into nation-states, transnational (as opposed to intergovernmental or international) linkages remained important in structuring the field of public health. International public health was held together by a series of what I call ‘administrative pilgrimages’ – borrowing, here, from Benedict Anderson: journeys by a coterie of experts that were often intra-Asian journeys.53 Often, these were journeys by Indians to other parts of South and Southeast Asia, where they met other Indian doctors, nutritionists and technicians, to discuss a set of problems that resembled those of India itself. Yet these networks, or pilgrimages, were themselves shaped by pre-existing links – the British imperial links between India, Burma and Ceylon – and by international politics: Indian doctors were much in evidence in non-aligned Indonesia, and studiously avoided Pakistan. Within this regional arena, straddling the former British empire and non-aligned Asia, international organizations like the WHO were relatively free from the constraints of both colonial and communist rule. At the same time, direct American influence was qualified, despite massive aid, by the ambivalent positions taken by non-aligned countries in the Cold War. The WHO carved a space, between American hegemony and the aspiration of Asian nation-builders, for the practice of biopolitics. Modern public health in the Pacific region – in the Philippines, or even Japan – was more directly shaped by the United States; in Latin America, by pre-existing regional organizations that

Introduction 15

only reluctantly joined the WHO; and in Africa by a newly energetic, reforming colonialism. China and Indochina stood apart, forging a very different path to health and hygiene. This serves to explain why Southeast Asia, with India at its heart, constitutes the focus of this book. The region was central to the development of international health in an age of decolonization, the site of its most ambitious programmes, its greatest successes and its most disappointing failures. Many of the goals of international public health – malaria eradication, for instance – were global in scope, but they took on additional layers of meaning in this part of Southeast Asia. My argument is that a particular approach to problems of health, life and death, was forged in the intersection between the legacies of the British Empire and the imperatives of nation-building; between American hegemony and non-alignment; between medical expertise and quotidian politics in societies where the memory of mass anti-colonial mobilization was still fresh. This configuration of forces meant, in turn, that South and Southeast Asia assumed a centrality in global plans, as their most challenging site and their most enthusiastic constituency. This regional formation was, however, historically bounded. It began to fragment in the 1960s. After the fall of Sukarno, Indonesia moved closer to the orbit of an East Asian economy, centred on Japan; the slaughter of half a million ‘communists’ in 1965 took the gloss off the egalitarian discourse of the 1950s.54 Burma withdrew into hermetic isolation.55 And the Indian state scaled back its ambitions, faced with the fractious demands of mass democracy.56 As the final part of the book will argue, the 1960s also witnessed renewed scepticism about the fundamental premises of a world without disease, and about the ability of technology to transform the tropical world. The colonial inheritance Three main themes run through much of what follows. The first is that the relationship between colonial public health and post-colonial, internationalized public health was complex and unpredictable. On the one hand, post-colonial public health can be characterized by the self-conscious attempt by both international agencies and national governments to break from colonial precedents, assumptions, and interventions. On the other hand, the institutional, intellectual and epidemiological legacies of the colonial medical past continued to shape and constrain post-colonial debates and policies on public health.

16 Decolonizing International Health

The very limitations of the earlier colonial attempts at transformation necessitated a change in approach. The chief transformations in the colonial era, so far as health practices are concerned, took place in the small and restricted realm of bourgeois civil society: in the bedrooms and living rooms of the colonial middle classes. The agents of this attempted transformation were missionaries or social reformers more often than they were state officials. The end of the Second World War saw a rather abrupt shift, wherein public health came to be one of the services which any government, whatever its nature, was expected to take responsibility for. As a result, public health expanded outwards, to ‘the people’. In order to do so, it had to rely on the institutions of the post-colonial state, crucially bolstered by the technologies and techniques circulated around Asia by the new international organizations. But this entailed weaknesses as well as strengths. The fractured and halting process through which health came firmly within the realm of the state reflected many of the weaknesses of colonial approaches to public health; weaknesses that persisted in an era where public health was more ambitious than it had ever been. The engineers of the international health campaigns, that is to say, were constrained in the kind of power they could exercise. The rural hygienists of the 1930s had believed, like secular missionaries, in the power of conversion to new ways of being, new ways of inhabiting the body. The prospect of bringing this about on a large scale, as ‘policy’, was not promising. The technologies of the Second World War provided a way out of this dilemma; their use seemed not to require conversion in quite the same way. From then on, technology – antibiotics, DDT and vaccines, as well as aircraft, spray guns and motor vehicles – was both the main source of power for international public health, and its fundamental weakness. Technology and its discontents Technology, then, provides the second major theme of this work. Many scholars have suggested that the political culture of development after the Second World War was founded upon the use of conspicuous technology as an end in itself, and often as a means of exercising governmental power over the poor.57 I hope to show, in what follows, that the availability of effective technologies of disease control after the Second World War undoubtedly oriented the policies and goals of international public health in a particular direction, but that a simple equation of ‘dominance’ does not capture the nature of this process. Specific technologies allowed the architects of international public

Introduction 17

health to intervene intensively, and over huge areas of the world, but this intervention was on a very narrow front. DDT, antibiotics and vaccines gave the power to WHO teams of just three men to vaccinate thousands of people over vast areas. This dominance – to invoke Ranajit Guha’s famous dictum – could not pretend to ‘hegemony’, in the sense of internalizing itself in the form of new kinds of behaviour and subjectivity on the part of local people.58 The very attraction of a techno-centric approach to public health was that it appeared to detach the WHO from the need to intervene deeply, in matters of ‘culture’ or social transformation. This was the strength of technology, and also its weakness. Repeated efforts to ‘decolonize’ public health through technology – by moving away from colonial assumptions about the natives’ cultures and behaviours – remained incomplete, never fully achieved. In part, the power of biotechnology in the 1940s and 1950s lay in its ability to capture the imagination. Disease control was used, by international organizations and national governments, to create a series of associations between medical technology, economic development, family happiness and national ‘progress’ and security. Yet I suggest that these associations sometimes failed to ring true, in a context where material poverty and social inequality continued to condemn large numbers of people to suffering and illness that appeared, now, ‘unnecessary’ in the light of the unrealistic expectations raised by promises of a world without disease. The meanings of medical technology were neither stable nor monolithic. The uncertainties of biotechnology were, and are, particularly profound because of their direct impact upon the body. A key argument in the book is that the technologies of public health meant different things to, say, a WHO consultant in rural Madras, a locallytrained health ‘auxiliary’ wielding a spray gun of DDT, and the parents of a child who had reacted adversely to a vaccination. If, as Bourdieu argued, we ‘learn bodily’, the lessons delivered by contact with the biotechnologies were complicated.59 The dramatic success of yaws vaccination was ‘internalized’ very differently to the uncertain prophylaxis of the anti-tuberculosis BCG vaccine, when tuberculosis continued to exact a heavy toll even after hundreds of millions were vaccinated. Biotechnology in the 1950s was a source of excitement and frustration, hope and fear. It would be a mistake to underestimate the degree of faith involved in the whole enterprise of disease eradication, on the part of its architects and planners as much as of its beneficiaries (or its victims).

18 Decolonizing International Health

The boundaries of medicine The third theme running through the narrative concerns the boundaries of medicine. I suggest that the internal and external boundaries of ‘medicine’ were fluid throughout the international expansion of disease control. International public health – both a form of knowledge and a set of practices – stood astride numerous kinds of expertise. Often the authority of international public health came from its command of ‘medical’ authority – knowledge of diseases, and the techniques to cure or prevent them – but just as frequently, international public health distanced itself from clinical medicine (as, in a sense, public health has always done).60 At times, international public health strengthened its position relative to the medical profession with reference to the authority of political economy, or ‘development economics’ as it came to be known when applied to the Third World. Certain interventions might be less than optimal from a medic’s point of view, they could argue, but they would bring maximum utility to the greatest number. This latent conflict often revolved around questions of professionalization. What kinds of personnel would take the massive campaigns of international public health forward? Would they be doctors or ‘auxiliaries’, healers or technicians? At the same time, the WHO became the site for debates within public health itself. In particular, the story of international public health in the Asian arena highlights the constant tension between the perspective of ‘social medicine’ and what might be called the ‘magic bullet’ approach to public health. Social medicine highlighted the importance of social and economic conditions to the practice of public health, and to the explanation of patterns of disease.61 ‘Social medicine’ included a diverse body of thought, but its currents were united, Patrick Zylberman suggests, by their ‘sharp criticism of a clinical, technical, specialized medicine and of the administrative policing of health’.62 The ‘magic bullet’ approach, on the other hand, focused upon the advances in technology made possible by germ theories of disease. Proponents of this school of thought, like the Rockefeller Foundation’s Fred L. Soper, believed that since specific diseases were a result of specific causative organisms (the tubercle bacillus, or the malaria parasite, for example), public health ought to focus upon narrowly attacking those ‘specific’ causes.63 The contention, sometimes the contradiction, of the two approaches to public health is a theme that recurs throughout this book. My approach to sources has been eclectic. This was dictated partly by the nature of the subject and partly, alas, by the continuing unavail-

Introduction 19

ability of certain kinds of archival material, even 40 or 50 years after the events in question.64 In the end, many of the sources are international ones. This is partly because so many ‘local’ sources I examined – books, pamphlets and newspapers in English and in Indian languages, as well as quite a few interviews – pointed back to the chambers of the United Nations, the WHO, as the ultimate authority deciding policies governing the health of millions. It is also because, over the period in question, English emerged, overwhelmingly, as the language of international public health. We can see in the field of health the broader process which Sudipta Kaviraj describes, of a growing gulf between vernacular political discourse and the Anglophone world of government and expertise.65 In my approach to these sources I have tried, perhaps in vain, to follow the sterling example of Rudolf Mrázek: probing speeches, letters, diaries and photographs for ‘unseemly technology trivia’, while searching the ‘dry technical texts of the period … for their poetry’.66 The cyclostyled ‘grey literature’ typewritten on scratchy yellow paper that inhabits many of the footnotes herein is indeed loquacious, it tells stories, both comic and tragic, of adventure and of terrible failure; of expectation, faith and frustration. The book proceeds in broadly chronological sequence, with some degree of overlap as from chapter to chapter the perspective changes, from the level of policy debates to the village clinic and back again. Chapter 1 opens the discussion with an account of the internationalization of public health in response to the global economic depression of the 1930s, and the concomitant crises of colonialism. Chapter 2 moves to a discussion of the transformations brought by the Second World War: new technologies of disease control and new expectations of the responsibilities of national and international government. Chapter 3 describes the constitution of the field of international health after 1945, centred upon the development of the WHO. The chapter seeks to explain why, by the early 1950s, the WHO had opted to focus its efforts on large, techno-centric campaigns of disease control and eradication, seemingly leaving behind the ‘rural hygiene’ of the 1930s. Chapter 4 moves from debates to practices, exploring the ways in which international public health was in fact built up from myriad local ‘pilot projects’ and experiments scattered across Asia. The chapter explores the confident visions of a world without disease provoked by the early practical experiences, visions at once technocratic and romantic. The sense of ambition culminated in the declaration of a global malaria eradication programme in 1955. Chapter 5 provides a

20 Decolonizing International Health

parallel narrative to chapter four, suggesting that the techno-politics of disease eradication in Asia confronted a range of obstacles from the start: the reliance of carefully planned campaigns on improvisation and local agency proved uncomfortable for their architects. Perhaps more importantly, the chapter suggests that the utopian visions sometimes failed to convince, provoking critiques. The final chapter (Chapter 6) examines the decline of disease control in the 1960s. New technologies to treat chronic diseases like tuberculosis required a degree of medical and administrative control that neither the WHO nor national governments possessed; at the same time, the centrepiece malaria eradication campaign fragmented in the face of resistant mosquitoes and absent medical infrastructures.

1 Depression and the Internationalization of Public Health

This chapter is concerned with the constitution of an international discourse of public health in the 1930s, a discourse that wove previously fragmented experiments in medicine and sanitation across Asia into a more unified set of ideas and practices. While colonial public health efforts remained fragmented and touched a very small proportion of Asia’s populations, the language of rural public health brought together a somewhat unlikely range of visions on the fringes of colonial policy. Rural hygiene came to unite a range of aspirations, from Mahatma Gandhi’s quest for bodily and hygienic reform, to the attempts of a Rockefeller Foundation official to transform the health of a village in the Dutch East Indies. Rural hygiene was built upon new scientific knowledge, above all the knowledge of nutrition, and advances in understanding of vitamins and deficiency diseases. It brought together a set of techniques of public health, pioneered in locales across both Asia and Eastern Europe – health centres, experimental projects and institutes of medical research – in response to an overwhelming problem posed by the worldwide depression: the problem of agrarian decline, (and the potential for political unrest in its wake). I argue in this chapter that the new international discourse of public health often, though not always, stood removed from what we might call ‘policy’. Where public health specialists writing in the 1930s took a critical view of the impact of commercialization on rural Asia, colonial states and their local collaborators intensified their commitment to industrial and agricultural development in the aftermath of the depression. Consequently, the reception, translation and appropriation by Asian nationalists of the new discourse of international health varied along the lines of internal divisions, between – to simplify – ‘modernists’ 21

22 Decolonizing International Health

and communitarians. Modernists across Asia and beyond wondered if the universal standards set by the League of Nations did not, in fact, support their vision of an activist, state-centred transformation of society and economy; quite contrary both to Gandhi’s rural idyll and to colonial indifference. The constitution of the field of international public health, which I describe in this chapter, provided a new language that translated and transformed both the nature and the scale of the problems of public health. From the reports and conferences of the 1930s and, not least, the personal voyages of a number of cosmopolitan doctors, there emerged a new problem, on a new scale: the health of ‘Asia’, or even the world.

The limits of colonial medicine As suggested earlier, recent historical work has emphasized the importance of medical discourse in establishing colonial authority. By claiming access to a unique truth about the human body, colonial medicine often led to a devaluation of indigenous knowledge, and the authorization of new modes of intervention in the lives (and on the bodies) of colonial subjects. But colonial medical discourse had complex relations with practice. The desire to know, to classify and to quantify did not correspond to the will or the ability to intervene.1 In general, only when key aspects of colonial rule were threatened did concerted state intervention came forth. That is to say, colonial states only mobilized their medical police at moments of crisis and emergency, and particularly in response to epidemic disease; there is a reason why so much of the literature on medicine and colonialism, particularly in the South Asian context, has focused on particular epidemics. On the whole, colonial medical police was characterized by its absence, its weakness, and its neglect. Hugh Tinker’s meticulous work in the early 1950s made the point very clear. He showed the inadequacy of personnel, infrastructure and resources in the public health system of British India and Burma: just 56 health officers, for example, in all of the municipalities of Madras Presidency; only four serving all of rural Burma.2 The main problem, in Tinker’s view, was that public health was the responsibility of local government in India, and that local governments lacked the will and the capacity to discharge their obligations. He listed countless examples of the ‘ephemeral’ nature of commitment to public health: In 1930 the Satara District Board would only sanction measures to check a cholera epidemic two months after the outbreak of the

Depression and the Internationalization of Public Health 23

disease. Schemes for village water supplies in Bombay dragged on for years without completion. The organization of village sanitation was often put on ‘for the benefit of the public health staff’ only; as soon as they departed the system would lapse.3 Statistics, he pointed out, ‘only … demonstrate the feeble resources available’. In countless cases, ‘the attempt to provide a service merely revealed the existence of vast problems previously only half suspected’. As a result, ‘local authorities at best could only select the most pressing cases for relief; at worst the slender local funds were dissipated in tiny sporadic ventures from which no permanent benefit was derived’.4 Indian nationalists were not slow to recognize the level of colonial neglect. Public health was, by the early twentieth century, a subject of extensive popular discussion. With the revolution in printing technology that swept India in the second half of the nineteenth century, there was an increase in popular writing about health and illness, targeted at a new middle class reading public, and often at Indian women. Debates over ‘western’ ideas about the body, about diseases and their treatment, particularly in relation to indigenous traditions of thought about these subjects, featured prominently in the press. The output of vernacular literature on health flourished, particularly in Tamil and Bengali. Particular hygienic practices gained an inextricable association with being modern, with escaping ‘backwardness’ and ‘superstition’. With the growth in the number, and the confidence, of medically trained Indians, the critique of colonial neglect intensified. Thus Nil Rattan Sircar, a prominent member of the Indian Medical Association, told the annual meeting of the organization, in 1928, that India’s ‘medical backwardness’ was a consequence of imperial neglect: An alien trusteeship of a people’s life and fortune is almost a contradiction in terms. For among the governing factors in all sanitary reforms and movements are the social and economic conditions of life, the environment, material as well as moral, and above all the psychology of the people – and an alien administration, out of touch with these living realities, will either run counter to them and be brought up against a dead wall of irremovable and irremediable social facts or … grow timid and fight shy of all social legislation, even in the best interests of the people’s lives and health.5 The relatively large number of Indians trained in western medicine – unparalleled in other parts of colonial Asia – allowed for a new level of

24 Decolonizing International Health

debate, which scrutinized colonial public health efforts, while staking a claim that Indian medical officials might be better placed to improve the health of the Indian population. In some cases, this led Indian doctors, like Ram Nath Chopra of the Indian medical service, to argue for recognition of the ‘rationality’ of indigenous systems of medicine.6 Others, like T.M. Nair, of the Madras Legislative Council in the early twentieth century, wholeheartedly embraced ‘western’ therapeutics, but criticized the colonial government for its inaction, and its failure to invest enough in public health.7 Demographic evidence supports the case that colonial public health interventions in South Asia were very limited. Indeed, there is something of a consensus in recent literature that the gradual decline in mortality in British India from the 1920s was due to factors other than the effects of public health policies and medical interventions. Ira Klein has made a powerful case that the significant decline in mortality in the late colonial era owed very little to public health policies and advances in medical technology, and still less to any improvements in incomes or nutrition. He argues, rather, that the mortality decline came about as a result of ‘biological immunization’: the reduced lethality of infectious diseases after a generation of particularly intensive exposure.8 Sumit Guha, too, suggests that neither nutritional improvement nor public health policies can account for the mortality decline, but emphasizes not ‘biological immunization’ but climatic factors. He argues that the Indian population experienced an increased life expectancy after the 1920s because ‘the weather gods enabled it to maintain a stable level of moderate malnutrition rather than alternately plunge between adequate nutrition and severe malnutrition’.9 This is not to say that there did not exist a steadily growing medical infrastructure in South and Southeast Asia by the 1920s. The argument of this chapter is that the forms of expertise and technical knowledge emerging from myriad localized ‘experiments’ played a key role in the internationalization of public health in the 1930s, which in turn allowed various localized techniques to be woven together into a singular expertise on rural public health in Asia. At times, colonial states financed and controlled the expansion of medical infrastructure in Asia, but missionary institutions also played an important role in establishing particular institutions – hospitals, schools – in which sanitary experiments could flourish. In South and Southeast Asia, however, they lacked the cultural sway that came with mass conversion to Christianity in colonial Africa.10 The real impact of missionary medicine often lay in its activation of internal debates

Depression and the Internationalization of Public Health 25

within colonized societies: Maneesha Lal’s work on the hygienic discourses of Indian nationalist women, for example, shows how a number of upper-caste social reformers appropriated (and transformed, sometimes refuting) the missionary critique of Indian hygienic practices.11 The disciplinary institutions of industrial capital, too, played their role in the expansion of medical surveillance and intervention, above all on the mines and plantations of colonial Southeast Asia, where tens of thousands of Indian and Chinese labourers lived and died.12 The expansion of medical research and the establishment of medical institutions in the tropical colonies gained support from networks of international scientific research and philanthropy, which expanded into Asia during the inter-war years. The Pasteur Institutes exemplified the new scientific networks which, by the 1920s, crossed imperial and colonial borders.13 In French Indochina, as Andrew Hardy has shown, the Pasteur Institute played a significant role in mapping the epidemiology of malaria.14 But no network had the reach of the Rockefeller Foundation by the 1920s. The Foundation, established in 1909, first intervened in public health activities through the work of its Sanitary Commission for the Eradication of Hookworm Disease in the US Deep South. With the opening of the Panama Canal in 1914, General William Gorgas, Surgeon-General of the US Army, urged the Rockefeller Foundation to support efforts to eradicate yellow fever.15 Following relief efforts during the First World War, the Foundation expanded its health work further overseas, initiating, in 1917, a tuberculosis control and education project in France.16 Despite the US government walking away from the League of Nations, the Rockefeller Foundation took an early interest in the League’s Health Organization: between 30 and 40 per cent of the League’s health budget came from the Rockefeller Foundation.17 The health division went on to launch research-driven public health campaigns in Europe, Latin America, South Asia, and China, targeting yellow fever, malaria, and tuberculosis, as well as developing medical education.18 A number of the ideas and practices from the transnational medical networks of the 1920s came together in unlikely ways as parts of a significant shift in the nature and scope of public health across Asia in the 1930s. Historians have hitherto failed to recognize that this shift was global, not colonial, in nature. That is to say, international developments, channelled through the League of Nations, activated a new level of debate on public health in individual Asian colonies, while at the same time, a range of localized ‘experiments’ in nutrition and

26 Decolonizing International Health

sanitation across Asia were themselves constitutive of a newly recognized international expertise in public health.

The internationalization of public health The Depression played a catalytic role in launching rural public health onto the global agenda, bringing together colonial and metropolitan concerns. It was the republican government of Spain that persuaded the League of Nations to call a conference on rural hygiene in Europe, in 1931, expressing a widely shared concern about the exploitation of rural economic distress by the far right and the far left. The following decade witnessed an accelerated global circulation of a set of techniques, institutions and discourses, many of which had emerged earlier in Eastern Europe. The lands of Eastern Europe were an early focus of the Rockefeller Foundation’s activities in the 1920s. The Foundation had established schools of public health in Warsaw, Zagreb and Budapest, Prague and Bucharest by 1930. The Rockefeller approach to Eastern Europe came out of its experience in the US Deep South, which had convinced them that only the State, supported by philanthropic funds, could effect a transformation of public health in ‘backward’ agricultural areas. The American approach gained a number of admirers throughout Europe, including the French social medic Jacques Parisot, and the Croat Andrija Stampar.19 At the Zagreb School of Public Health, Stampar pioneered an approach to rural medicine based on mass education, agricultural extension projects and the techniques of the cooperative movement. Stampar was close to Stepan Radic, head of the Croatian Peasant Party, and was expelled from the Yugoslav Ministry of Health in 1931, accused of being a socialist.20 A socialist he was, but his vision of public health was much closer to the educative social medicine of the Rockefeller Foundation and the rural hygiene of the League of Nations than to Soviet medicine, which was resolutely committed not to rural but industrial health, at a time when Stalin was visiting the terror of collectivization upon the Soviet countryside.21 Thus, in 1933 Stampar accepted an invitation by the League of Nations to travel to nationalist China as a consultant on rural public health. He stayed for three years, travelling from the four northwestern provinces to Szechuan and Fukien.22 After three years travelling through China, Stampar was convinced that ‘successful health work is not possible where the standard of living falls below the level of tolerable existence’.23 Stampar found the ideas

Depression and the Internationalization of Public Health 27

of social medicine confirmed by his own observations in China: the prevalence of disease in China was due, above all, to ‘bad water-supply, unhygienic housing conditions, [the] ignorance and poverty of the population’. The best health policy, he argued, would be to ‘raise the standard of living of the people and to increase their resources’. Education would be central to this project. Stampar pointed out that ‘unless the farmer can read pamphlets, and is given a rudimentary scientific attitude, it is very difficult to reach him by propaganda’. Even more important was ‘the removal of social grievances, such as the sense of exploitation by the landlord’. Ultimately, public health was dependent upon the ‘cooperation of the people, and this will only be given by a population which is reasonably optimistic about the future, and which is willing to give at least qualified acceptance [to] the social order’.24 Upon his departure, the Chinese government presented Stampar with a testimonial, on a ‘wonderful silk and coloured paper’, extolling his contribution to China’s ‘rural reconstruction’, but the government proved more than a little reluctant to implement Stampar’s proposals for wide-ranging agrarian reform.25 Nevertheless, the very fact of an Eastern European physician going to China with the League of Nations, taking with him techniques he had perfected in Yugoslavia with American philanthropic support, suggests an expansion in the international scale of public health by the early 1930s; an acceleration in the transmission of ideas and practices across colonial and international frontiers. The onset of the Depression also served to increase the international visibility of arguments relating ill health to poverty and under-consumption. The League of Nations played a catalytic role, from the early 1930s, as a forum for debate, and as a body which could lend significant legitimacy to new ideas about health. The League’s Health Organization was itself in an unusually activist mood by the early 1930s. The early 1930s saw an increasingly close relationship between the League and the International Labour Organization (ILO). Pressure from workers’ delegations to the ILO, combined with the sympathetic attitude of its new director, Harold Butler, led the ILO to work closely with the League’s Health Organization on the issues of public health made visible by the economic shock of the Depression. The League’s Health Organization’s own director, the Polish doctor Ludwik Rajchman, exhibited an increasing radicalism in his desire to see the League Health Organization tackle broader socio-economic questions.26 In September 1932, the League expressed this growing concern in a report on ‘The Economic Depression and Public Health’. The report

28 Decolonizing International Health

pointed out the problems associated with aggregate poverty statistics, suggesting ways of measuring the quantity and the effects of morbidity and malnutrition.27 From the early 1930s, then, the League began to embrace broader socio-medical concerns.28 The ‘marriage of health and agriculture’, which the League of Nations championed, focused on the question of nutrition. Developments in the scientific knowledge of vitamins provided a language that could draw together Europe and the colonies, ‘core’ and ‘periphery’, economics, geopolitics, and the government of the individual human body. The explicitly comparative framework of nutritional discourse was open to application to colonial problems. A significant amount of the ‘new knowledge of nutrition’ emerged from colonial laboratories. Perhaps the best known of the new nutritional studies were John Boyd Orr’s contrast of the diets and health of the Maasai and Kikuyu, and Robert McCarrison’s experiments contrasting the health and vigour of rats fed with Punjabi diets with the malnutrition experienced by their counterparts fed on the rice-based diet of the ‘Bengalis and Tamils’.29 McCarrison made the comparison between metropolitan and colonial bodies quite explicit: in a series of vivid posters, he contrasted the plump rats with glossy coats fed on Sikh diets, with the stunted creatures fed on the typical diet of the ‘poorer classes’ in Britain.30 There was an immediate interest within India in the new knowledge aired at and circulated by the League of Nations. Not only had a number of Indian medical officials been involved directly with the League – W.R. Aykroyd served as its Health Secretary after 1930 – but the new knowledge of nutrition served as a stimulus to work that was already flourishing in India.31 There was no direct link, however, between the colonial and international debates on health and nutrition and any concerted action on the part of colonial states. The global economic depression hit the colonial empires hard after 1929. The evaporation of credit put great strain on rural economies in South and Southeast Asia. The interlinked colonial economies of the Indian Ocean began to turn inwards, and all of the major empires experienced an upsurge in political unrest and nationalist activity, from the Indonesian Communist Party’s attempted insurrection in 1926–7, brutally crushed, to the Saya San Rebellion in Burma, and Gandhi’s mass campaign of Civil Disobedience. In the main, colonial states in Asia responded with retrenchment and repression. The Dutch authorities in the East Indies turned away from their ‘ethical policy’ of the early twentieth century which had encouraged associational life, and towards a repressive austerity. One historian of

Depression and the Internationalization of Public Health 29

Indonesia has described the period after 1927 as the ‘most conservative and repressive phase of [the Dutch regime’s] twentieth century history’.32 By the mid-1930s, there were fewer than 400 Indonesian doctors in the entire archipelago. The colonial state, under pressure from falling revenues and Dutch business interests, supported isolated hygiene projects, often administered by voluntary and charitable organizations: the Muhmadiyya, Protestant and Catholic missions.33 But, as will be shown, the neglect of the colonial state did not in any way restrain the ambitions of some hygienists on the fringes of the state, notably those of a Rockefeller Foundation official working in one of the Indies’ model hygienic sites. In British India, countless reports from provincial public health officials stressed the need for austerity in the light of the Depression; now was hardly the time for an expansion in the public health services. The Surgeon-General of Madras Presidency, Major-General Sprawson, wrote to Delhi that ‘during the last year the world depression has forced on us retrenchment to an extent that not only restricts expansion, but would actually in some respects narrow our activities.’34 The inspector of civil hospitals in the United Provinces was even more pessimistic in his assessment. ‘No real advance in medical relief was made during this year’, he wrote in 1933, ‘indeed, the net increase since 1918 has been only 9 dispensaries…. In spite of an apparent increase in popularity of our dispensaries, the actual individual patient must be receiving less efficient treatment than in 1914.’35

Two visions of rural hygiene The Indies and the world It was on the fringes of the state that the discourse of nutrition and social medicine flourished. In the view of the protagonists of rural hygiene, much more ambitious than colonial states running on a shoestring, public health was nothing less than an alternative to communism. A manifestation of ‘biopolitics’, rural hygiene put the welfare of the rural population, the quality of the race, ahead of economic accumulation.36 It provided space for unlikely intellectual alliances between colonial officials, scientists and Asian nationalists. The experiments of Dr J.L. Hydrick exemplify the transformation of local expertise into a global discourse of health. A Rockefeller Foundation officer sent to advise the Dutch colonial government on rural public health, Hydrick was, from 1924, in charge of an experimental health centre at Poerwokerto, in Java. Hydrick wove his experiences into

30 Decolonizing International Health

a manifesto for the new gospel of rural hygiene, published in 1936 in Dutch and English (the English title was Intensive Rural Hygiene Work in Netherlands India), and soon translated into French. The context for his experiments in Java was a Dutch colonial state committed to austerity, and intensely worried about political unrest.37 We can nevertheless detect in Hydrick’s social medicine a palliative for the disease of socialism. Hydrick’s aims for rural hygiene were nothing less than the internalization by Javanese villagers of new bodily practices and dispositions; his task, to use Michel Foucault’s oft-quoted phrase, lay in the ‘conduct of conduct’.38 The aim was to ‘awaken in the people a permanent interest in hygiene and to stimulate them to adopt habits and to carry out measures which will help them secure health and remain healthy’. An appreciative colonial health minister wrote of Hydrick’s miraculous techniques, ‘so planned that they quietly and gradually penetrate and become a part of normal village life’.39 The rationale for deploying the subtle power of persuasion to shape individual and communal conduct, lay in the very weakness of the colonial state in large parts of rural Java. ‘There would be no objection whatever to the use of coercion’, Hydrick declared, ‘if its use could secure permanent results’. Yet that would require ‘a large personnel to enforce all the rules and regulations and this makes it far too expensive’. He concluded, not without reason, that ‘If it were possible to secure results at a reasonable cost by coercion then conditions in all countries would be much better than they actually now are’.40 Hydrick chose to rely, instead, on the persuasive powers of specially-trained mantris, or hygiene nurses. The mantri would, in his own bodily conduct and hygienic practices, mould the behaviour of those around him. The successful mantri had to meet rigorous criteria. He was to be ‘polite and modest and no circumstances will excuse rudeness or misuse of authority’, on the other hand he could not be ‘too shy’, as this would ‘not inspire confidence’. The list of virtues continues, rapturously: He must possess an inexhaustible patience, because he will be obliged to talk daily to many people about things which they do not understand. A monotonous voice practically disqualifies an applicant … efforts for improvement of his technic [sic.] must never cease. … The manner in which the mantri approaches the house and calls to the people to see if anyone is at home; the way in which he enters the house and finally gets all the members of the family

Depression and the Internationalization of Public Health 31

together; his method of leading the conversation; where he sits; his manner of talking; his skill in keeping the interest of all members of the family; his patience; his answers to questions which are asked; his ability to make people talk, etc., are all points of the technic for which a long and thorough training is necessary.41

Figure 1.1

A Mantri’s House Visit

Source: J.L. Hydrick, Intensive Rural Hygiene Work in Netherlands India (Batavia Centrum, 1937), insert.

To be a mantri was a craft, a cultivated set of dispositions and practices. Simply trained mantris were always to be preferred to haughty nurses, according to Hydrick, since ‘the people felt at once that the nurse was of much higher rank and the nurse was unwilling to speak in simple language. They used large words and technical words which they had learned during their training in the hospital, so that the people could not understand their explanations’.42 Hydrick’s vision was of a village in which the conduct of the residents was shaped to ensure a maximum of health and hygiene, from the pit latrines, regularly inspected, to the coconut wire toothbrushes which all would use. Inherent in Hydrick’s project was the unrealized – perhaps

32 Decolonizing International Health

unrealizable – intention that all the Indies would, in time, come to resemble Poerwokerto. This was not a question of state policy; rather it was the mobilization of new technologies of government to solve a particular social problem which had posed itself to scientists, experts and administrators in the 1930s: the problem of rural hygiene. Through the League of Nations, the Rockefeller Foundation and other transnational networks, the local techniques of Hydrick and his counterparts across the region began to coalesce into a set of ideas and prescriptions gaining ethical force, as a body of knowledge and practice: ‘international public health’. The ways in which very different political and ethical concerns could come together to define a discourse of ‘rural hygiene’ is evident from the rather unlikely juxtaposition of Hydrick’s utopia with another micro-site of hygienic transformation: Gandhi’s ashram. What is most striking is that despite their very different political motivations and moral visions, an American public health advisor to the Dutch colonial government and the preeminent Indian nationalist leader could speak within the same discourse of rural hygiene. ‘Green Leaves’ When Gandhi invited a number of village workers to his ashram for a communal meal in 1934, it was by way of inducting them into a new consciousness of the importance of diet and health. Though he was himself on a self-imposed diet of uncooked nuts, seeds and fruit, Gandhi – an ‘experienced cook’ – prepared a meal for the 98 workers, at a carefully-calculated 6 pice per head. He explained to the workers the process of cooking, and the ingredients: ‘Before the dough [for the rotis] was kneaded’, he told them, ‘it was treated with linseed oil. This rendered it both soft and crisp’. In addition, ‘as we must have some greens and raw vegetables’ – the ‘must’ was both a moral and a nutritive injunction – Gandhi prepared ‘tomatoes and two chatnis … Koth fruit is known for both its aperient and astringent properties and jaggery goes well with it to make a delicious chatni’.43 Healthy and nutritive food was but the beginning of the transformation Gandhi envisaged. A transformation in bodily practice would herald, in his idiosyncratic vision, a growth in national consciousness and – in a further step – an improvement of the Indian ‘race’. Declared Gandhi: If we would be national instead of provincial we would have to have an interchange of habits as to food, simplify our tastes and produce

Depression and the Internationalization of Public Health 33

healthy dishes all can take with impunity …. Volunteers will have to learn the art of cooking and for this purpose they will have also to study the values of different foods and evolve common dishes easily and cheaply prepared.44 Gandhi made a direct link between the weakness of the body induced by an excess of polished rice in the diet and national weakness. Indeed, he concluded that ‘we need every ounce of the bran of wheat and rice if we are to become efficient instruments of production’, (a rather ‘unGandhian’ turn of phrase), ‘not to be beaten on this earth by any race, and yet without the necessity of entering into killing competition or literally killing one another’.45 If ahimsa and bodily self-government were at the heart of Gandhi’s vision of a new nutritionally-based public health, he nevertheless nourished it with the authority of modern science. Gandhi embraced the science of nutrition wholeheartedly, quite aside from his suspicion of biomedicine. Gandhi’s writings on nutrition are full of references to the latest research on the subject: he referred, for example, to Robert McCarrison’s experiments with rats; to The Newer Knowledge of Nutrition by E.V. McCollum; and to home-grown texts such as Balanced Diets, by H.V. Tilak of the Bombay Presidency Baby and Health Week Association.46 He carried on a public correspondence with both Robert McCarrison and W.R. Aykroyd, successive directors of the Nutrition Research Laboratory in Coonoor.47 On one occasion, Gandhi invoked a speech by Aykroyd, in which he had argued that ‘well-balanced diet need not cost more than Rs. 4 per month’. Gandhi reported Aykroyd as having told a meeting in Bangalore that The dietary requirements of an adult man per day were 16 oz. of soya bean, two oz, of arhar dal, an oz of jaggery, four oz each of spinach and amaranth, an oz each of potatoes and colacacia, 1.5 oz of cocoanut oil and six oz of buttermilk – all costing about 2 annas.48 Gandhi gave pride of place – because of its authority and its universality – to the League of Nations Health Committee’s seminal findings on the Physiological Bases of Human Nutrition in 1936; a summary of the report immediately appeared in the pages of Harijan, one of Gandhi’s main outlets of publication.49 In his search for a diet that would bring national vigour and vitality, Gandhi turned to the scientific authority of the League of Nations, and its claim to have discovered universal minimum standards.

34 Decolonizing International Health

Translated into specifically Indian terms (as, for example, in Gandhi’s argument that the Indian digestive tract was adapted to a vegetarian diet) those international standards would go towards increasing national vigour and vitality. Underlying his experiments with food and hygiene was a critique of the economic impact of colonial rule on rural India. Not only did polished rice weaken the vitality of the Indian ‘race’, it was an example of the (economic and moral) impoverishment of India’s villages through mechanization: If rice can be pounded in the villages after the old fashion the wages will fill the pockets of the rice pounding sisters and the rice eating millions will get some sustenance from the unpolished rice instead of pure starch which the polished rice provides. Human greed, which takes no count of the health or the wealth of the people who come under its heels, is responsible for the hideous rice-mills one sees in all the rice-producing tracts.50 In an article entitled ‘Green Leaves’, Gandhi declared that ‘since the economic reorganization of the villages has been commenced with food reform, it is necessary to find out the simplest and cheapest foods that would enable villagers to regain lost health.’ Gandhi’s critique culminated in the redefinition of his Constructive Programme in 1940: ‘it is impossible for unhealthy people to win swaraj (self-rule)’, Gandhi declared, ‘therefore we should no longer be guilty of the neglect of the health of our people’. Gandhi suggested, tying nutrition to sanitation, that ‘if rural reconstruction were not to include rural sanitation, our villages would remain the muck-heaps they are today … it needs a heroic effort to eradicate age-long insanitation’.51 Strikingly, however, it was not Gandhi but his occasional correspondent, British nutritionist W.R. Aykroyd, who used the language of nutrition to develop a systematic critique of the deleterious impact of colonial capitalism on health, particularly in the aftermath of the Depression. Aykroyd’s pioneering research had shown that the preponderance of highly milled rice in the south Indian diet led to a range of nutritional deficiencies, as a result of the lack of proteins and of ‘protective foods’, and a particular lack of leafy vegetables and proteins. Aykroyd himself was amongst the foremost international ‘experts’, a member of the League of Nations committee which had provided great legitimacy to the new discourse of nutrition, in reports that were cited around the world by health reformers with very different agendas. This demonstrates, again, what a number of historians have argued: the

Depression and the Internationalization of Public Health 35

traffic of ideas and expertise between metropole and colony was not simply in one direction;52 in this case, knowledge gained in a colonial laboratory in south India allowed Aykroyd to make authoritative interventions in setting the international agenda. It also suggests that ‘colonial medicine’ was internally differentiated, with leading colonial scientists like Aykroyd taking a rather different view of health and illness in India, and their underlying causes, to certain policymakers in London and Delhi. Aykroyd with his colleagues at Coonoor, G. Krishnan, R. Passmore and A.R. Sundararajan, presented a speculative but detailed explanation for the apparent shift to highly polished rice in the south Indian diet. The most immediate cause, they argued, was in the spread of rice mills, which had ‘appeared even in areas remote from large towns’.53 Contrary to the image of large factories, however, they suggested that ‘it is the spread of the small mill, often worked by a group of 5 individuals or less, which so impressed our correspondents’. These mills operated machines modelled on the American-made Engleberg huller & polisher, which had been ‘copied and modified in Indian foundries’, to the point where they were widespread ‘in villages of 2000 people or less’.54 Underlying this technological shift were social and economic transformations: chief among them was the development of transport and improvement of roads (‘the ubiquitous motor-bus’, they wrote, ‘has loosened the bonds which attach the villager to his own plot of ground and traditional manner of life’). Cheap electric power accelerated the change.55 Aykroyd’s committee heard much evidence from a range of ‘experts’: political and social leaders, invariably drawn from the middle class elite, but nevertheless representing a range of political opinions. Many of the experts argued that villagers’ fondness for mechanizations stemmed from innate ‘laziness’.56 Yet Aykroyd and his colleagues suggested, rather, that a reduction in the domestic burden of home pounding was welcome for ‘many village women, exhausted by malnutrition, ill health and continuous child-bearing’.57 In examining the rapid decline of the ‘healthy’ habit of pounding rice at home for domestic consumption, the committee published the lengthy testimony they had received from Pattabhi Sitaramayya, a Gandhian Congressman from the Telugu-speaking region of Madras Presidency. The Congressman’s report on the ‘rice problem’ in the Godavari and Krishna deltas traced causation back to inequalities in the distribution of land. ‘Home produced rice’, he pointed out, ‘means home storage of paddy’. Yet the majority of small landowners possessed less than three acres. Heavy levels of debt meant that

36 Decolonizing International Health

immediately after the harvest, farmers were compelled to sell the paddy, only to live on more credit until the next harvest: ‘in effect’, Sitaramayya concluded, ‘the villager has no paddy to pound.’ Wage labourers were in a worse position still, lacking the ‘spacious accommodation’ needed to pound paddy at home, if indeed there were any paddy to be had.58 Aykroyd and colleagues concluded that paddy therefore ‘becomes an article of commerce’, lamenting that with the proceeds of paddy sales villagers would buy (less nutritious) machine-milled rice, often imported from Burma or Siam. Aykroyd’s critique focused on the negative impact of the regional colonial economy, involving the import of rice by the densely-settled parts of eastern India (and southern China) in exchange for the export of labour and skills to the frontier lands of Burma, Malaya and Ceylon.59 During the Depression, the price of rice fell more sharply even than that of other commodities, and cheap, poor quality imported rice continued to flood south India.60 Throughout the report on the ‘Rice Problem’, critiques of the colonial state and economy are left implicit, with Aykroyd simply warning that though the commercialization of rice production had advanced furthest in Madras ‘it is quite conceivable that in 20 years’ time the practice may be as rare in Bengal and elsewhere in India as in Madras’. He concluded, carefully, that ‘it is therefore important to decide what attitude should now be adopted towards the penetration of the mill into areas in which domestic methods of preparing rice for consumption are still followed by the majority of the population’.61 The strong implication, however, was that this development should not be ‘allowed’; that government nutritional policy ought to restrain the spread of capitalism into the Indian countryside. It was only during the Second World War that Aykroyd argued, more explicitly, for concerted state intervention in the production and distribution of food.62

Bandung, 1937 The League of Nations gave voice to the new technical knowledge, the new discourses on health and nutrition emerging on the fringes of colonial states and within nationalist movements in Asia. It was with a view to understanding the complexity and diversity of Asia’s health problems, and formulating a concerted international response to them, that a group of three League of Nations consultants set out on a journey across the continent in 1936. The team consisted of: A.S. Haynes, formerly Colonial Secretary of the Federated Malay States;

Depression and the Internationalization of Public Health 37

C.D. De Langen, formerly Dean of the Batavia Faculty of Medicine, and E.J. Pampana, a Venezuelan malariologist who was Secretary of the League of Nations’ Malaria Commission. Between April and August of 1936, the three men toured India, Burma, Siam, Malaya, Indo-China, the Philippines, the Netherlands East Indies, and Ceylon.63 They sought to identify the different approaches to public health that were on display for their consideration across imperial frontiers; and they sought a language with which to discuss these changes. The diaries of the journey, during which the three men covered 45,000 kilometres, paint an expansive picture of public health. They focused on precisely those local sites of transformation exemplified by Hydrick’s health centre and Gandhi’s experiments. Bombay was one of the first stops on the tour, and one of their first diary entries gives a revealing glimpse of what the commission saw: April 10 [1936]: Bombay Health visitors’ school; Presidency Infant Welfare Society; The National Baby and Health Week Association; David Sassoon’s industrial school, nutritional experiments on the boys. Two days later, the commission went by ‘motor to villages under the activity of the “Deccan Agricultural Association”’, stopping at the ‘village of Shivpur’ to examine the ‘activity of an unqualified lady social worker’ before proceeding to inspect ‘villages under the activities of local cooperative societies’.64 The League’s consultants focused on a range of institutions managed by voluntary bodies, and saw, in their ambitious attempts at hygienic transformation, a vision of the future. The particular significance of the League’s increasing interest in problems of public health across Asia lay in its ability to bring together a range of unrelated sites; the comparative, classifying perspective of the League’s consultants allowed them to see, in all of their inspections, a broader set of forces at work. Haynes, for one, could barely contain his enthusiasm on the voyage home. Writing on board the S.S. ‘Maloja’, traversing the Red Sea, he wrote to the Private Secretary of the Viceroy of India, thanking him for receiving the commission, and summarizing his impressions of his visit: The countries we have visited are almost entirely agricultural … in each country, ‘rural reconstruction’ is prominent in the papers, and is on everyone’s lips. It is perhaps somewhat strange that this

38 Decolonizing International Health

should occur simultaneously in all the countries concerned and that it should be so recent and so comparatively sudden. But it is indisputable that a reorientation of governmental policies is taking place and that the needs of the distant and inarticulate peasant are being weighed in the council chambers … where his voice has been little heard. The letter concludes with Haynes expressing excitement about the upcoming League of Nations Conference on Rural Hygiene in Bandung: ‘there has been no such meeting of Eastern Nations before’.65 The August 1937 League of Nations Conference on Rural Hygiene in the Far East included representatives from across South and Southeast Asia, perhaps the first such formal dialogue on questions of health and welfare which was at once inter-imperial, and international. The conference was attended by representatives from each of the British territories in Asia, including separate representation of individual provinces in British India, and the Indian princely states; French Indo-China; Japan (despite its withdrawal from the League after the Manchurian invasion, and, indeed, after the outbreak of the Sino-Japanese war); the Netherlands Indies; the Philippines, China and Siam.66 The meeting gave much scope, too, to a range of ‘experts’ not directly linked to colonial or national states, including both W.R. Aykroyd and J.L. Hydrick, whom we have already encountered. The conference on the problems of rural life met in the heart of Asia’s most consciously ‘modernist’ city: Bandung; the ‘Paris of the East’, boasting many examples of modernist architecture, and the home of the Technische Hogeschool, one of Asia’s first technical colleges (where the young Sukarno trained as an architect).67 This irony was not inappropriate, perhaps, given the later tensions that would emerge between visions of rural hygiene and those of modernist development. The discussions at the Bandung conference established a complex narrative of the spread of modern (‘western’) medicine in south and Southeast Asia, moving beyond the triumphalist colonial narratives so prevalent at the time. The conference report argued that colonial medicine in Asia was such that ‘the first representative of preventive medicine to become known to tropical populations was the vaccinator, whose ministrations, except in the case of epidemics, are not likely to strike the individual’s imagination’.68 Furthermore, vaccinations almost inevitably ‘imply a coercive element’. There is an implicit reference, here, to the widespread resistance to vaccination witnessed in the early years of colonial rule. ‘The sanitary inspector, the anti-mosquito

Depression and the Internationalization of Public Health 39

squad, and lastly, the medical officers of health’ followed the vaccinator. Whatever their merits, ‘from the population’s point of view’ such health workers ‘do not possess the merit of easing suffering’.69 The committee thus suggested that if ‘a friendly attitude towards public health is to be induced in rural districts’, then curative medicine needed to feature heavily in the initial approach, as this would ‘enable the population to benefit by, and to appreciate, the advantages of certain forms of treatment. This is a very simple matter, since diseases such as yaws … yield rapidly to medical treatment’.70 The fundamental problem, however, was one of poverty. In this connection, the new nutritional thought was never far from the forefront of discussion. In particular, the Bandung conference focused on the ‘problem’ of rice ‘throughout the east’. The conference proceedings echoed the views presented earlier, of nationalists like Gandhi, colonial scientists like Aykroyd, and reformers like Hydrick. The conference resolution on the rice problem is worth quoting at length: The Conference emphasizes the fact that the degree of milling to which rice is subjected is of vital importance in connection with the problem of nutrition throughout the East. In many countries, the poorer classes consume foods other than rice in small quantities, and it is very difficult, for economic reasons, to increase the amount of supplementary foods in the diet. … It deplores the tendency of urban and rural populations in the East to consume highly-milled rice. It strongly recommends that Governments should make a thorough investigation of the nutritional, commercial, economic and psychological aspects of the problem, attention being given to the possibility of checking the spread of mechanical rice mills in rural areas … with a view to conserving the healthy habit of consuming home-pounded rice.71 Unease with the processes of colonial development is evident here. Influenced by the likes of Aykroyd, the League of Nations saw that restraining the advance of mechanization might be necessary to ‘conserve … healthy habits’. As important as nutrition was the problem of malaria, and here, too, the potential tension between health and (colonial) wealth was all too evident. Going back to the 1920s, the League of Nations committee on malaria had long taken a social approach to the problem, arguing that a focus on the problems of poverty and the environment, rather than a medicalized focus on the vector of transmission, was the most sensible

40 Decolonizing International Health

approach to the problem of malaria in Eastern Europe.72 The 1937 conference’s consideration of the problem of malaria illustrates the concern of this new international public health with the relationship between health, poverty, and agricultural development. Some of the blame for the devastation caused by malaria lay squarely upon the efforts of colonial capitalism to transform the countryside across Asia, which had deleterious effects on public health. The 1937 conference issued a resolution declaring that: The amount of engineer-made malaria … is appalling. Specifically, the conference draws attention to malaria due to improper siting and housing; indiscriminate aggregation of labourers; uncontrolled jungle clearing … obstruction of natural drainage by road, railway and canal embankments with culverts too few and too high; impounding of water without regard to leakages, seepages and raised water-table levels; irrigation without drainage.73 Despite this growing recognition of common factors underlying the causes and consequences of malaria, the League’s experts stated emphatically that ‘the problems which it raises cannot be dealt with – or settled – without intimate knowledge of local conditions. Any attempt to proceed on standardized lines would be disastrous’.74 The conclusion of the commission’s discussion of malaria encapsulates the growth of international social medicine in Asia: It must be admitted that, except for a few quinine tablets distributed here and there, the health conditions of, say, a peasant living with his family in a hut in the middle of a marshy plain … have received very little attention. … Malaria is a health and social problem; it must be attacked simultaneously from both these angles. While, on the one hand, marked economic progress may depend on the success of anti-malarial measures, these, on the other hand, will be facilitated by an adequate diet, healthier dwellings, more widespread education – in a word, by rural reconstruction.75 This was the perspective of concerned scientists, disillusioned with the neglect of their findings in the operation of the colonial state and economy. More expansively, the views expressed on malaria and nutrition alike at the Bandung conference reflected the aspirations of those who saw in rural public health a panacea to ‘extremism’, and even a path to national consciousness.76

Depression and the Internationalization of Public Health 41

These developments marked the culmination, in many ways, of myriad local level interventions and experiments, devised at different times by scientists and social reformers. The Bandung meeting expressed, in an authoritative way and on the international stage, the kinds of ideas which motivated, amongst others, the Central Cooperative Anti-Malaria Society of Bengal, established by Dr G.C. Chatterjee in 1912, and which had, by the 1930s, 2,000 similar bodies affiliated to it: local-level initiatives carried out by elite reformers. Through the missionary fervour of the societies, one admiring British official declared, ‘the illiterate, suspicious and apathetic peasant could be moved to action’. Yet the income of this valiant society, ‘from the endowments collected and invested by Dr Chatterjee’, was ‘small in comparison with the task before it’.77 To some extent, these international discussions of nutrition and health in the wake of global depression influenced colonial states. The government of the Dutch East Indies was furthest advanced in this, making a display of their commitment to widening and implementing the kinds of reforms Hydrick had advocated (although the extent of measures actually taken is debatable).78 British colonial governments, too, indicated their increasing interest in public health. The ‘model colony’ of Ceylon saw an expansion of maternal and child welfare services.79 Reflecting the influence of rural hygiene and nutritional thinking on colonial officials, one 1935 report on public health in India, (which later shaped British colonial thinking on the African Survey), argued that: No preventive campaign against malaria, against tuberculosis or against leprosy, no maternity relief or child welfare activities, are likely to achieve any great success unless those responsible recognize the vital importance of this factor of defective nutrition and from the very start give it their most serious consideration…The first essentials for the prevention of disease are a higher standard of health, a better physique, and a greater power of resistance to infection.80 Yet such views coexisted with a deepening colonial pessimism about their ability to affect the conditions of health in tropical Asia. As David Arnold has argued, colonial officials faced a ‘growing awareness of the complex and vulnerable nature of the Indian environment and the cultural and political difficulties involved in trying to effect any change’.81 The missionaries of rural hygiene put their faith in a wholesale transformation of rural society and economy; however, colonial administrators were in search of a quicker, cheaper solution. In the words of a

42 Decolonizing International Health

colonial public health official in British Burma, writing at the time of the 1937 Bandung conference: ‘In rural areas the amount of ground to be covered renders anti-mosquito measures impracticable save at prohibitive cost’, instead he suggested that ‘the problem can best be attacked by the wide and systematic distribution of quinine’.82 Referring explicitly to the findings of the League of Nations, British health officials conceded that ‘adequate diet, healthier dwellings, more widespread education are all needed if anti-malarial measures are to be fully effective’.83 Yet those were hardly realistic aspirations for a colonial state running on a tight budget. Instead, British colonial authorities argued that ‘it would be difficult to over-estimate the importance from an economic aspect of a successful campaign against the disease’.84 If rural reconstruction was too expensive, at least ‘the provision of anti-malarial drugs’ could be given ‘an important place amongst the essential social services directed towards building up of national health and efficiency’.85 The logic was clear: if a cost-effective intervention against malaria could be found, ‘there could hardly be a more important contribution in present circumstances to the prosperity and well-being of tropical countries than an effective attack upon the disease.’86 The underlying question was one which would emerge and reemerge over the decades to come, and which later chapters will continue to consider: was public health a means to an end, or an end in itself? The language of rural reconstruction and nutritional reform privileged public health as the end of a widespread social, cultural and economic transformation in rural life, including – if necessary – restraints upon the expansion of colonial capitalism. Colonial states, by contrast, saw public health as a means of reducing economic inefficiency and waste; as such, public health interventions had to be cheap and widespread, rather than intensive and localized. Even the distribution of quinine was extravagant, in the eyes of the colonial state: the authorities made prisoners in Rangoon Central Jail manufacture quinine tablets for the whole of the Asian empire, as a way of cutting costs.87

The ‘modernist’ challenge On the view of so many present at Bandung, ‘policy’ implicitly and explicitly meant restraining the expansion of industrial capitalism into rural areas, quite the opposite of the classic colonial use of public health as a means of ‘clearing the bush’, allowing for ever more inten-

Depression and the Internationalization of Public Health 43

sive exploitation of the countryside. The apparent crisis of global capitalism, a sense of which was pervasive in the 1930s, might have given confidence to the proponents of rural reconstruction. However, the timing for such an approach to the conjoined questions of public health, agricultural development and colonialism was not propitious. The focus of public health reformers on the body and the environment, exemplified at the 1937 Bandung conference, came at just the moment when, in British India and elsewhere in the region, colonial states began to foster Asian industrialization. As C.J. Baker concluded in his exhaustive study of the south Indian rural economy, ‘the advance of state intervention in the economy was founded on a fear of public disorder and a despairing realization of the extent of agrarian decline.’88 Far from halting the spread of commercial agriculture, as the proponents of nutritional reform advocated, the new alliance between the colonial state and dominant elements in the Indian economy sought to develop indigenous agrarian capitalism. In the thinking and practice of the colonial state, the developmental plans had no real hygienic component beyond ensuring the efficiency and productivity of labour.89 But elements within Asian national movements, above all in India, harnessed the new global vogue of planning to a far more sweeping vision of state intervention to transform economy and society.90 No less than enthusiasts for rural reconstruction and individual bodily and diet reform, proponents of modernism drew on the legitimating force of the League of Nations’ universal standards and statistics, in support of their very different vision. For Gandhians the ability to control scientifically the body’s minimum needs was part and parcel of a project of bodily self-abnegation; for a number of nutritional scientists and public health officials, nutritional knowledge suggested the need to discipline or control the expansion of colonial capitalism into the Asian countryside. For the modernists, however, nutritional control was to be one arm in a much more systematic regulation of social and economic life, from the regulation of reproduction and ‘racial quality’ to the regulation of the commanding heights of the economy. The theme of rural reconstruction struck a sympathetic chord with a range of political imaginations in the 1930s; but so too did the high modernism of the New Deal, the steel and concrete of the Tennessee Valley Authority, not to mention the images of Magnitogorsk. This was a widespread tendency across Asia. Although the Indonesian nationalist movement might have lacked anything resembling the concerted commitment to planning on the part of some Indian nationalists,

44 Decolonizing International Health

Rudolf Mrázek’s brilliant work has demonstrated that the allure of modernism, of smooth roads and gleaming machines, was seductive to the engineers of Sukarno’s generation.91 Nowhere in the colonial world was an important strand of nationalism more committed to modernism of this kind than in the India of the 1930s. Even as Gandhi elaborated on his hygienic village utopia, the left wing of the Congress Party made the case for science and socialism; the establishment of the Congress Socialist Party in 1934 gave the left an institutional platform within the nationalist movement. Following sweeping provincial election victories in 1937, the Congress established their National Planning Committee [NPC], its membership divided between experts from the Congress left and a number of industrialists. The flourishing of international nutritional thought in the 1930s found a ready audience amongst the NPC, but from it they drew very different lessons. Drawing on League of Nations studies on the deficiencies of the Indian diet, the NPC decried the vicious circle of poverty and under-nutrition leaving the Indian poor with ‘inadequate safeguards against the rigours of nature or ravages of disease to resist which they are very poorly equipped’.92 The nutritional thought of the League of Nations committees focused on the nutritional deficiencies of individual bodies – a state of individual lack which was statistically widespread within particular populations: the poor, the unemployed and above all the peasantry. In the eyes of the NPC, the qualitative issues of individual nutrition linked more closely with the mass spectre of Malthusian catastrophe. Increasing food production, as much as redistributing its consumption, was at the heart of the NPC’s vision. Going much further than the reformers who wished to spread the gospel of hygiene, the NPC declared that: ‘all social customs, religious taboos and injunctions which now stand in the way of the husbandry of soil resources and efficient utilization of available food resources have now to be abjured to mitigate the effects of chronic food shortage and poverty’.93 This was but a first step. If Gandhi saw in ‘diet reform’ a path to the improvement of the Indian race, one meal at a time, the NPC took the notion of racial improvement much further. In their view, nutrition and sanitation were but elements in a thoroughgoing, planned transformation of India, directed by the foremost experts in the land. The NPC set out its aims in the most expansive terms: In the interests of social economy, family happiness, and national planning, family planning and a limitation of children are essential;

Depression and the Internationalization of Public Health 45

and the State should adopt a policy to encourage this. It is desirable to lay stress on self-control, as well as to spread knowledge of cheap and safe methods of birth control … A eugenic programme should include the sterilization of persons suffering from transmissible diseases of a serious nature, such as insanity or epilepsy.94 A combination of legislation and the very latest technologies of government (birth control clinics, schemes of social insurance) would relieve India from the ‘terrible waste of life spilling on all sides’.95 This ‘waste’ flowed from a range of ills. Some had been dear to social reformers in India for more than a generation: child marriage above all, as well as all manner of ‘superstitions’. Although the nutritional thought of the 1930s touched on concerns about India’s growing population, the emphasis on nutrition and sanitation worked, in many cases, against the popular claims of eugenicists. Gandhi and Aykroyd alike argued that a change in food habits, rather than selective breeding, would transform the health and vitality of the Indian ‘race’. The NPC, on the other hand, linked the two strands of thought according to its own, modernist vision of national development. The NPC’s epistemology of planning brought the hygienic/ nutritional nexus of diet studies, pilot schemes and rural reconstruction projects together with other networks of civic and voluntary activism which had flourished across Asia in the inter-war years, such as the birth control movement and the science of eugenics.96 Both would find expression in the state – which the modernists had firmly in their sights – and in case of conflicting imperatives, decisions would be made on ‘scientific’ grounds. It may not be going too far to view the thinking of the Indian NPC as an instance of the nutritional and sanitary utopia of the League of Nations ‘seen like a state’.97 However, as we will see, the institutional structures which the European colonial empires bequeathed to their successors across Asia were hardly propitious. To use the language of political science, the ‘state capacity’ to implement schemes as ambitious as the NPC’s simply did not exist. The constraints of resources (if not the constraints of imagination) which had led British colonial officials to look to cheap quinine as a solution to the malaria problem in the empire would confront their successors in a major way. In Asia, it was only within the Japanese empire in the Northeast, perhaps, that the more ambitious hygienic ideas of the 1920s and 1930s found expression in concerted state policy. Unlike the British or the Dutch, the Japanese instituted an ‘organized, architectonic colonialism

46 Decolonizing International Health

in which the planner and the administrator was the model’.98 The Japanese exercised a level of sanitary control over Korea and Taiwan which the most enthusiastic hygienists in the British Empire could only dream of.99

Conclusion The League of Nations brought together a number of forces – techniques, types of expertise, practical experiences – on the margins of state power, which together seemed to address the pressing problems of the day: the relationship between health, consumption and economic development, particularly agricultural development. Among the key contributors to the League’s debates were colonial scientists who were able to use their prior experiences in order to shape international debates on hygiene and nutrition. Equally, the League of Nations’ embrace of nutritional and social medical concerns lent legitimacy – through reports, declarations, statistics and investigations – to ambitious experiments carried out by nationalist reformers and colonial officials alike This process was underway, however, at the precise moment when national/colonial states were developing within hardened boundaries, and where the state emerged more firmly committed to colonial industrialization. The story of the 1930s was one of internationally circulating norms taken up by nationalist intellectuals in colonial states; following chapters will consider what would happen when the scope and nature of internationalism changed, when colonial states became post-colonial. On the eve of the Second World War, the field of international public health was poised between the minimal and the maximal state, between liberal-individual and social governmentality.100 The coming together of these strands of thought shaped the future of public health at the colonial, national and international levels in the years to come. But first we turn our attention to the Second World War. War and consequent decolonization led to the realization of a very different configuration of forces, technologies and ideas in South and Southeast Asia after 1945, and the meanings and potentialities of public health stood transformed.

2 War and the Rise of Disease Control

The Second World War marked a watershed in the practice of public health. The impact of the war on the field of public health was such that we can see a fundamental paradigm shift; a change in the way public health was conceived, discussed, and acted upon. Technological transformation played a central role in engendering a new sense of the possible. The wartime discovery of the insecticide DDT and a range of pharmaceutical technologies made effective, cheap disease control more feasible than it had been previously. The experience of wartime relief operations put these technologies into practice, in ways that came to shape their civilian use in the post-war era. The previous chapter argued that the internationalization of public health between the wars brought together a range of practices and aspirations, often on the fringes of the state. The proponents of rural reconstruction in the inter-war years often had an uneasy relationship with the progress of capitalist development in Asia and Africa. This chapter argues that the nature of internationalism in public health changed completely by the end of the war, and is particularly concerned with two sets of questions. Why, firstly, did the modernist vision of public health prevail over the rural romanticism so prevalent in the 1930s? Why did a vision of public health centred on technology come to supplant the more expansive notions of rural public health? I suggest, in the first part of the chapter, that this shift owed much to the global circulation of DDT, a technology that required much less ‘incorporation’ than anything that had gone before, leading to a new sense of the possibilities for disease control in unpropitious circumstances. Secondly, the chapter is concerned with the kinds of States, national and international, that emerged from the war. What was the process whereby health emerged as a ‘right’? How was this related to changing 47

48 Decolonizing International Health

capacities of states to provide the conditions of health? What underlies the shift from an international public health composed of loose networks of experts and voluntary groups to a post-war set of connections based on the notion that States, of whatever kind, were responsible for the health and welfare of their populations?1

DDT and disease control The Second World War expanded the frontiers of international medicine. The war precipitated a technological revolution, and necessitated massive campaigns of medical relief. Public health was mobilized and motorized to an unprecedented extent. It is difficult to over-state the importance of the military medicine of the Second World War to the future of international health: in the realms technology and organization, the war saw significant developments.2 Above all, the experience of the war held out the prospect of a world free from disease. The symbolic and practical power of this possibility was immense. Nothing symbolized the transformations of the Second World War more clearly than the arrival of DDT, a new technology created and mobilized during the war. The war revived and energized a model of transnational public health that had begun to fall from favour amidst the discussions of social medicine and rural hygiene in and around the League of Nations, including its conference on Rural Hygiene in the Far East. DDT was a new tool, but in fact the Rockefeller Foundation had pioneered the method of vector eradication in Latin America in the 1930s.3 Fred Lowe Soper was particularly influential in developing and advocating this method of public health.4 Soper had made his career with the Rockefeller Foundation in the 1920s and 1930s, pioneering the techniques of vector eradication using what he called ‘search and destroy’ methods in the Amazon rainforest, in his successful campaign against yellow fever.5 Soper was instrumental in persuading the Egyptian government to embrace DDT in the midst of the devastating malaria epidemic of 1943–44. As his visit to Cairo coincided with the onset of the epidemic, Soper was in a position to advise the Egyptian government on its response, despite British opposition.6 By 1944, Soper was advising the Egyptian government to use DDT rather than pyrethrum (then the most popular insecticide) in the vector eradication campaign in Southern Egypt. Teams of malaria workers sprayed a DDT-kerosene mixture on trains and houses, ‘an innovation later copied around the world’.7 Within five years, Soper would be at the

War and the Rise of Disease Control 49

forefront of the World Health Organization’s attempt to eradicate malaria worldwide. The Swiss chemist Paul Müller, employed by the Geigy corporation, had discovered DDT to be toxic against insect vectors of disease in 1941, and after further trials in Britain and the United States, the British Ministry of Supply began to manufacture DDT on a priority basis in April 1943.8 Like pyrethrum, hitherto the insecticide of choice, DDT worked by interrupting the breeding cycle at the point when plasmodium spores were concentrated in the bodies of female mosquitoes. Unlike pyrethrum, DDT was long lasting. Experiments with the new insecticide suggested that a single spraying of the walls and ceilings of a house would protect it for a considerable period. Entire areas could now be ‘secured’ from malaria through the massive aerial spraying of DDT. The first concerted campaign using DDT began in December 1943, when the insecticide was used to arrest an epidemic of typhus – an insect-borne disease – in Sicily. At the height of the campaign, 75,000 people were being sprayed each day, despite the fact that Allied authorities had little knowledge of the toxicity of the chemical.9 From March 1944 onwards, Allied forces used DDT in the Central Mediterranean theatre against malarial mosquitoes.10 Towards the end of the malaria season in 1944, Allied armies brought DDT into widespread use in Southeast Asia.11 The advent of DDT revolutionized malaria control. The methods hitherto used – ‘gigantic drainage projects, widespread larvicidal operations and systematic daily spraying with pyrethrum insecticide’ – paled in comparison with DDT.12 Military medical officials suggested that ‘unlike the anti-mosquito measures previously employed, DDT ground spraying, if properly exploited, had immense potentialities in that such spraying could be easily and rapidly organized under diverse conditions’.13 The impact of the technological revolution in insect control emerges clearly from a report by the British War Office’s Director of Hygiene during a tour of Southeast Asia. He suggested, emphatically, that the extensive drainage works being carried out were redundant after the advent of DDT and the intensified use of mepacrine, a synthetic anti-malarial drug: ‘If all 1000 men employed in keeping the Manipur drains in order, were used in the distribution of DDT, I am convinced much better results would be obtained’.14 The war put a premium on ‘temporary measures’.15 Before long, DDT almost completely replaced the ‘anti-larval measures, which had hitherto formed the backbone of the entire malaria control scheme’.16 This transformation ‘could be effected all the more readily, because control through

50 Decolonizing International Health

DDT did not require prolonged training of personnel and the slow building up of the ponderous organization essential for anti-larval measures’.17 Building on these early experiments and improvisations, the use of DDT was extensive by 1945.18 The aerial spraying in preparation for the Lombardy Plains offensive of 1945 required 50,000 gallons of DDT solution, as well as 30 tons of Paris Green.19 Further east, the aerial spraying of Rangoon with DDT was complete within three days of the Allied reoccupation. By the end of June 1945, Liberator aircraft had sprayed an area of 68 miles around the city.20 A naval medical report on malaria control work in Rangoon between May and July 1945 described the ‘mopping up operations’ after the end of the aerial spraying. Clouds of DDT covered the side streets of Rangoon, which archival photographs show strewn with detritus and replete with stagnant ponds: The Fordson truck was driven slowly up and down those streets with a six foot jet of oil [mixed with DDT] directed into the drains from a knapsack sprayer on the back. At first the power sprayer was used with spray guns, and a fine spray shot out of each side of the truck. This was not found sufficient to deal with the large numbers of culicines and a more powerful spray was used … All streets from China Street to Thompson Street, and north from Strand Road to Montgomery Street were dealt with in this fashion.21 Some of the most dramatic successes with DDT came not on the battlefield, but in Ceylon, headquarters of the Southeast Asia Command. DDT sprayings were initiated in military camps at Trincomalee and Kandy in February 1945, and death rates from malaria showed a great reduction which was all the more remarkable for coming in the midst of an epidemic of malaria in surrounding areas which led to widespread mortality and morbidity in the civilian population.22

Building expertise The story of Wilfred Chellapah, a malaria worker from Malaya who worked on some of the earliest trials of aerial spraying with DDT in Orissa in 1943, brings out the excitement, and terror, of the introduction of DDT.23 Chellapah’s narrative also shows the ways in which the implementation of the new technology built upon kinds of technical knowledge built up on a local level during the inter-war years, includ-

War and the Rise of Disease Control 51

ing his own. Having graduated from a course in public sanitation in Singapore in 1939, Chellapah obtained a job as a malaria assistant in Ceylon, from where his family originated. Stationed in Kandy, Chellapah was responsible for anti-malaria activities in the plantations of the region. ‘Two of us covered the whole area’ around Kandy, he recalled, ‘we had motorbikes, and later cars’. The methods Chellapah employed typified the environmental approach to malaria control which was common in urban areas and plantations in the inter-war years. He would go to estates, and teach the workers ‘how to construct temporary drains to drain away marshy areas … how to efficiently carry out oiling’ and ‘how to deal with stagnant pools’. In each estate, Chellapah would conduct a survey, using a map to mark out ‘all the water courses, streams, rivers’. He would then ‘ma[ke] a sketch map, following it and marking the places where draining was needed’. Without a job after the end of his contract on the estates, Chellapah received a telegram in late 1943 from J.W. Sharp, a senior medical officer in Southeast Asia Command, asking him to come to a hotel in Kandy. At the secret encounter, Sharp asked Chellapah to join the experimental DDT project as his personal assistant. Within days, Chellapah was at an RAF base in Orissa, near Cuttack, where military scientists were carrying out tests of the aerial spraying of DDT.24 Chellapah’s duties as a civilian malaria assistant covered ‘two villages, three and six miles from the camp’, to which he had to ‘cycle every morning, and collect all the dead insects’. Chellapah recalled the atmosphere of desperation to find an effective insecticide to replace pyrethrum, which was in short supply. Chellapah’s daily reports ‘helped them to work out that the DDT was a success’; there was great optimism about the miracle of DDT. Chellapah’s oral testimony brings out a significant undercurrent of violence in the experiments with DDT. The war gave rise to DDT, and thereafter the insecticide remained inscribed with the circumstances of its introduction: military necessity, and an urgency that pushed aside caution. ‘Lots of birds were dying’, Chellapah recalled, ‘… the villagers eat insects too, and some of the garden insects were affected by DDT’. On his return from Orissa to Ceylon, ‘they put me in an enclosed room which had been sprayed with DDT, and would release, say, 200 mosquitoes into the room, and I would have to collect their bodies. The fumes affected me’. More frightening still was an episode that Chellapah witnessed: ‘two Singhalese workmen were brought into the office and there was a naval officer [who] soaked DDT solution in cotton wool and with a razor blade he made a slit on that man’s arm’

52 Decolonizing International Health

and bandaged it. The second workman, who served ‘as a control’, had cotton wool soaked in pure kerosene oil rubbed into his wound. ‘Within a few minutes’, the men ‘fell on the ground and had all sorts of tremors’ and convulsions; Chellapah’s own tremors lasted for five years. Chellapah might not have been an expert, in the sense of carrying scientific authority, but his body of practical knowledge, accumulated at a local level on the plantations of Ceylon, was mobilized in order to make DDT work. The new insecticide was an exciting, sometimes frightening, technology; the abruptness with which it supplanted earlier forms of malaria control belies the fact that its utilization initially depended on knowledge and practice of malaria-control demonstrations and projects from the 1930s and early 1940s. From military bases and ‘theatres of war’, DDT gradually reached civilian populations by 1945. The residents of Kanara district in Bombay Presidency were amongst the first beneficiaries, under the leadership of D.K. Viswanathan, the province’s director of anti-malaria services. The memoirs of Viswanathan, one of India’s foremost malariologists, highlight this process of mobilizing existing technical knowledge in service of the new technology. Viswanathan had spent his early career as a malaria officer on the tea plantations of Assam. In late 1942, he was relieved of his military duties to take up the directorship of the Bombay malaria organization, based in Kanara district; the Viceroy, Linlithgow, decreed that Bombay ought to have a permanent anti-malaria organization when the governor of the Province, Sir Roger Lumley, came down with a nasty bout of malaria after a tiger shoot!25 Viswanathan and his colleague Ramachandra Rao conducted intensive local experiments on mosquitoes over the course of 1943 and 1944; it was ‘a most thrilling period in our technical pursuits’. These ‘experiments’, however, ‘were attended with poor results’; indeed, ‘in one village there was a greatly enhanced prevalence of malaria after a programme of pyrethrum spraying’. The experiments proceeded by trial and error. Each new technology called forth a new set of problems which, in turn, needed new technical solutions.26 The malaria workers cleared streams and water courses of ‘marginal vegetation’ and mosquito breeding stopped in those locales, only to flourish in the terraced rice fields. Trials of new synthetic anti-malarials ‘were none too successful, for the sole reason that we could not get the public to take a sustained interest’.27 Nevertheless, with each setback ‘we were able to find a reason for our failures, determine a remedy for them and actually prove the beneficent results of our painstaking investigations’.28

War and the Rise of Disease Control 53

And then there came DDT. The ‘painstaking investigations’ of two years proved ‘wholly unnecessary with the wartime discovery of DDT’.29 This is a turning point in Viswanathan’s narrative, which is a story of a gradual, linear progression towards the eradication of malaria, parallel to the unfolding of his own career. Yet even Viswanathan points out the importance of what had gone before: We … venture to doubt if we would have had the daring to propose a service of such great magnitude as to serve about a million population if we did not have the benefit of worship at the altar of science, of patient investigations into the habits of the mosquito, careful reasoning for our earlier failures, planning newer methods of worship in the light of this reasoning and having science grace our fresh attempts with patent results.30 Viswanathan argued that the detailed knowledge of local ecology built up by his centre in Kanara provided them with the ability to implement DDT quickly. Furthermore, earlier technical expertise provided ‘technical personnel with a confidence with which to embark on control procedures’.31 It would not be long, however, before proponents of DDT forgot these ‘messy’, improvised origins. The success of DDT, Viswanathan wrote ‘has given rise to the impression that pre-control surveys of the relevant epidemiological features were no longer necessary and that spraying service could be undertaken in any and every malarious area.’ 32 The reasons for this confidence are evident from Viswanathan’s narrative itself. Viswanathan was ‘thrilled’ with the results of the early results of DDT – the first civilian home in India was sprayed on July 1, 1945 – DDT was a ‘wonder drug’, and before long, Viswanathan had canvassed enough support to launch an intensive programme of DDT spraying from his base in Kanara district. The anti-malaria campaigns using DDT heralded a transformation in international public health. Technological medicine had been conspicuously absent from many of the discussions of the League of Nations’ Health Committees.33 Now the technological advances of the war – which involved new biological agents, and new means of using them – placed the ‘magic bullet’ at the heart of international medicine. The localized, permanent measures of malaria control work in the inter-war years declined under the pressures of war, despite the fact that they were, in many ways, essential to the mobilization of DDT. By

54 Decolonizing International Health

Figure 2.1

Singapore is Sprayed with DDT, 1945

Source: West, T.F. and G.A. Campbell, DDT and Newer Persistent Insecticides (London: Chapman & Hall, 1950), Frontispiece [Crown Copyright]

1945, the size and scope of these health campaigns dwarfed all that had gone before. However, the apparent success of DDT rested on a paradox. The urgent need to control infectious diseases on the battlefield led to a significant amount of improvisation; at the same time, much faith was placed in the seemingly limitless power of the new medical technology, making the health campaigns appear to be a planned, concerted ‘victory’ over nature. Timothy Mitchell, writing of the early use of DDT during the Egyptian malaria epidemic of 1942–44, captures this paradox particularly well: The chain of events that took DDT from the Peet-Grady chamber to the field was a process of borrowing, translations, and things invented for one purpose taken over by other forces, all modulated by US-British rivalry over Egypt, the needs of war, the accidents and ambitions of [Fred L. Soper’s] Rockefeller career, and the impact of sugarcane production and irrigation works.34

War and the Rise of Disease Control 55

Despite not knowing exactly how DDT worked as an insecticide, Allied medical authorities put it into immediate use.35 In fact, as Frank Snowden has shown, the dramatic successes against malaria in Italy resulted not merely from the use of DDT, but from the supplementation of DDT with older, more localized measures of public health and environmental sanitation. That DDT could be so effective, he suggests, was because Sicilians were ‘already medicalized’, after generations of anti-malarial work. As much as to DDT, success in the anti-malarial campaign was down to ‘literacy, the familiarity of the population with quinine, the widespread understanding of the mosquito theory of transmission…and the availability of trained and experienced health personnel’.36 Furthermore, the use of DDT coincided with a reconstruction of rural health centres, a renewal of swamp drainage and works of sanitation, and massive public investment by the United Nations Relief and Rehabilitation Administration (UNRRA) in providing employment, public works, and nutritional supplementation to vulnerable groups.37 All of this leads Snowden to conclude that, in focusing purely on the miraculous results of DDT, international health authorities had ‘drawn misleading lessons from the Italian triumph’.38 DDT was far from the only new medical technology to emerge out of the war. Major advances in sulpha drugs, X-ray technology and synthetic anti-malarial agents each played a significant role. As Mark Harrison has shown in his recent book on Allied military medicine, transformations in the nature of medical organization, and an increase in the mobility of medical facilities made the new technologies more effective.39 The transformations in international medicine resulted in the amalgamation of military and civilian medicine during the campaigns of humanitarian relief mounted towards the end of the war. A turning point in the relief efforts came in November 1943, with the establishment of the UNRRA. Directed by Herbert Lehman, the Democratic governor of New York, UNRRA’s first task was to coordinate food supplies for liberated areas in Southern and Eastern Europe. The history of UNRRA was one of immediate, emergency measures. From the beginning, an early document by the medical sub-committee stated that ‘health work will necessarily constitute one of the primary and fundamental responsibilities of UNRRA. The relief and rehabilitation programme must aim toward the maximum of health security.’ The priority of UNRRA’s work was to provide a level of relief sufficient to avert ‘disease and unrest’. 40 The organization’s planners defined food requirements narrowly and, in theory, ‘scientifically’.41 UNRRA drew on the advances of nutritional research

56 Decolonizing International Health

in the 1930s, considered in the previous chapter, not to change the habits of whole populations, but to forestall social unrest.42 The meaning of nutrition shifted, under the pressures of war, into a simple question of supply: James Gillespie has shown that UNRRA’s approach to the health of children in liberated Europe focused on the distribution of milk supplies, which ‘soon became a universal panacea’. To a significant extent, this approach was determined by the availability of plentiful supplies of powdered milk.43 Similarly, health itself became a question of the supply of tangible goods. ‘Health’ was the ‘15,000 vials of penicillin, 600 bottles of isotonic solution of sodium chloride for use with penicillin, 10 tons of DDT, 9,987 gallons of velsicol for use with DDT and 39 long tons of contributed clothing’ sent to China, for example.44 UNRRA provided over $117 million worth of medical supplies – 4 per cent of the entire supply programme – with China as the largest beneficiary, followed by Poland and Yugoslavia. Over 80 per cent of the medical supplies came from the United States.45 The experiences of UNRRA showed what could be done with the new technologies, channelled through a more global organization; it provided a formative experience for medical officers used to working on a very local level with next to no money.

Planning for the health of the world New medical and chemical technologies were given meaning and ethical force by the concurrent circulation of new technologies of government: social insurance, planned health services, new techniques of economic management, and a newly revived language of political rights. The publication, in 1942, of William Beveridge’s Report on Social Insurance and Allied Services was a watershed in the history of welfare provision, not only in Britain, but also throughout the world.46 Beveridge declared his report, an ‘attack upon five great evils’: Upon the physical Want … upon Disease which often causes Want and brings many other troubles in its train, upon Ignorance which no democracy can afford among its citizens, upon Squalor which arises mainly through the haphazard distribution of industry and population, and upon Idleness which destroys wealth and corrupts men.47 A National Health Service was at the centre of Beveridge’s proposals for a universal welfare state.48 From South Africa to the West Indies,

War and the Rise of Disease Control 57

reports emerged planning for a future of expanded welfare provision, in which public health would play an important role.49 This ‘universalization’ of the welfare state was a process that was strengthened by the institutionalization of these new ideas about welfare at an international level, in the new organizations that emerged in the midst of the war. I will consider these international organizations later in this chapter, but turn first to an exercise in planning for the health of the most important part of the British Empire: India. The Bhore Committee The initial motivation for re-thinking the future of welfare in India arose from simple necessity. The resignation of the provincial Congress ministries in 1939, in protest at the Viceroy’s declaration of war on India’s behalf and without consultation, left the British casting around for allies. The outbreak of the Quit India movement in August 1942 left the colonial state facing the greatest threat to its authority since 1857. In this context, and even whilst suppressing the Quit India movement brutally, with all the force at their disposal, the government of India turned to plans for post-war reconstruction to make a display of their concern for the ‘national welfare’, and to assuage key sections of the Indian elite.50 This was a period, as Benjamin Zachariah has shown recently, when fundamental assumptions of imperial governance were undergoing a shift: the laissez faire budget balancing of the past gave way to an interventionist colonial state.51 Our main concern is with the plans for India’s public health services, but health planning took place alongside a range of other plans for ‘post-war reconstruction’ in industry, agriculture and social security. The plans for India’s health service also coincided with the publication of the so-called Bombay Plan by a number of leading industrialists: an economic plan which used socialist language carefully to ‘preserve what was essential in capitalism’.52 The Viceroy appointed the Health Survey and Development Committee in early 1944, under the chairmanship of Sir Joseph Bhore. On the surface, the Bhore Committee – as it was known – exhibited a somewhat predictable membership, similar to countless colonial commissions of inquiry in preceding years. Bhore himself was the quintessential Indian member of the Civil Service. He entered the ICS in 1902, having taken a degree at University College London. Married to Margaret Stott, Bhore served as high commissioner for India in London in the early 1920s, and subsequently entered the Governor-General’s Executive Council, a carefully-selected body of advisors and collaborators. Bhore’s

58 Decolonizing International Health

credentials led him to represent India at the Silver Jubilee celebrations in London in 1935. Over the course of his public service, Bhore served in departments of agriculture and lands, labour and industry. Also on the committee was the Diwan Bahadur Dr A. Lakshmanaswami Mudaliar, who would later occupy a leading position in the World Health Organization. A gynaecologist by training, he was, at the time of the Bhore survey, the vice-chancellor of Madras University and, again, a reliable collaborator for the colonial state. Most of the practical work of the committee fell on the able shoulders of K.C.K.E. Raja, a medical statistician at the All-India Institute of Public Health in Calcutta; Raja would proceed to become Director-General of Health Services in independent India.53 But all was not as it seemed. The circumstances of the war brought together, within the Bhore Committee, a combination of conservative Indian civil servants and progressive international doctors, at least one of whom was openly communist in his views. Perhaps as a result of this unlikely meeting of minds, the committee was – for an ‘official’ body – unusually open to new ideas. The thinking of the Bhore Committee owed much to its discussions with a group of international consultants, who toured India in late 1944 on a trip sponsored by the Rockefeller Foundation.54 The British members of the international committee were hardly conventional choices: John Ryle, the first ever professor of Social Medicine at the University of Oxford and a communist, and Janet Vaughan, also of Oxford, who had played a central role in organizing the blood bank during the Blitz.55 Joining them were doctors from Australia, Canada and the United States. Perhaps the most selfconsciously radical member of the international committee was Henry E. Sigerist. Born in Paris, and educated in medicine at Zurich University, Sigerist arrived in the United States in 1931, taking up the directorship of the Institute for the History of Medicine at the Johns Hopkins School of Public Health in 1932. Sigerist’s diaries and correspondence provide a clear indication of the sense of opportunity and the flourishing of communication engendered by the global networks planning for the future of public health. Sigerist’s wartime interest in India resulted from his chance friendship with a young Indian doctor named Kamala Ghosh. Ghosh had written to Sigerist at Johns Hopkins in early 1941, introducing herself as ‘an Indian (Hindu) woman doctor’ who had been ‘working for 8 years in India, as a member of the Women’s Medical Service, being in charge of small (45–65 bed) hospitals for women and children in different parts of the country’.56 Ghosh, the daughter of a former Justice of

War and the Rise of Disease Control 59

the Calcutta High Court,57 happened to be in the United States on leave. She was moved to contact Sigerist, she wrote, ‘because, reading your book on “Socialized Medicine” a few weeks ago, all the problems in public health and education that I have been facing, were presented in an entirely new aspect and became suddenly capable of solution’.58 Sigerist invited Ghosh to visit him at Johns Hopkins, which she did, and in their subsequent correspondence, she expressed a desire to return to India to play a part in medical relief and planning for the future. Unable to secure a passage home on an ordinary ship, Ghosh took the position of medical officer on an oil tanker: a radio broadcast about her heroic journey described her as a ‘small, dynamic charming woman, under thirty, she insists that she is first and foremost a doctor and refuses to say anything about her adventures’.59 On board the oil tanker, traversing the North Atlantic, Ghosh wrote to Sigerist again: ‘I have been reading some books on the Chinese industrial cooperatives, and a surgeon’s book on the experiences of the Republican medical services during the Spanish War, and also have your little “Medicine and Human Welfare” with me to dip into for a tonic at low moments’.60 A more evocative idyll of social medicine in the 1940s would be hard to find. Tragically, Kamala Ghosh died at sea. Enemy fire destroyed the tanker. ‘It is really terrible’, Sigerist wrote, ‘I am more upset than I can tell’.61 The following year, Sigerist received an invitation from the Government of India to join the tour of international experts studying India’s health problems and advising the Health Survey and Development Committee. Noting that his fellow international experts included John Ryle, Sigerist concluded that ‘I think the choice is interesting. It shows that liberal forces are involved’.62 In Sigerist’s mind, this was a symptom of the flourishing of progressive and radical thinking about health in the 1940s, which – more than anyone – his late friend Kamala Ghosh epitomized. ‘I think Kamala Ghosh prepared the ground’, he wrote in his diary.63 Sigerist’s path to involvement in India suggests that the outcome of the Bhore Committee’s discussions cannot be explained wholly by the workings of techno-politics: a set of unintended outcomes flowing directly from the consolidation of new discourses and new kinds of expertise. Imagination, even emotion, played an important part. The most influential of the international consultants, and the only one who was formally a member of the Bhore Committee, John Grant represented the American variant of social medicine.64 A career Rockefeller officer, and the son of a missionary, Grant spent much of

60 Decolonizing International Health

the 1930s in China. During the war, Grant headed the All-India Institute of Hygiene and Public Health in Calcutta. Despite his extensive experience in public health in poor rural areas, Grant later told an audience in New York, ‘India shocked me’. ‘I knew the Asiatic countries, and all of them had features way ahead of India. Medically it is the most backward country in the world’.65 Grant had pioneered rural health centres and health education in China, and had been involved with the establishment of the Rockefeller Foundation’s model health centre in Singur, Bengal. Where Sigerist brought to the committee a detailed knowledge of (and great enthusiasm for) Soviet industrial medicine, Grant brought the expertise of the 1930s which the previous chapter considered: a focus on the problems of rural areas, and the relationship between health and agriculture.66 The committee’s ‘ideas of India’ harked back to the 1930s. In the committee’s analysis, India’s poverty was at the root of the problems of public health. The Bhore Report, finally published in 1946, expressed its interest in widening the ‘conception of disease … by the inclusion of social, economic and environmental factors which play an equally important part in the production of sickness’. The committee went on to associate public health firmly with plans for economic development, suggesting that ‘unemployment and poverty produce their adverse effect on health through the operation of such factors as inadequate nutrition, unsatisfactory housing and clothing and lack of proper medical care during periods of illness.’67 The report channelled the language of rural reconstruction, suggesting health was a moral as much as a technical endeavour. Grant had been closely involved with rural public health in the 1930s, and it was also an endeavour of interest to various members of the ICS.68 The committee drew on the wealth of nutritional knowledge from the surveys of the 1930s to emphasize the point so widely made before the war, that poor nutrition was at the root of many of India’s health problems. In suggesting the need for a cadre of simply trained health workers to serve India’s rural masses, the Bhore Committee went back to the concerns of the League of Nations Conference on Rural Hygiene. The workers would receive simplified medical training, and be left in charge of medical statistics, water purification, and the ‘spray killing of mosquitoes’. In keeping with the transformative, almost missionary, aims of social medicine, the Committee declared that a ‘social outlook should be developed in every health worker’. The ‘woman who, through lack of knowledge of mothercraft, feeds, bathes, clothes, or nurses her baby improperly, the tuberculosis patient who, through

War and the Rise of Disease Control 61

ignorance, disseminates infection by indiscriminate spitting or coughing’, each of them required the ‘technical knowledge and skill that the doctor, the nurse and the social worker can make available to them’. However, they also needed ‘understanding and sympathy, tact and patience’.69 Interestingly, and like a number of rural hygienists in the 1930s, the Bhore Committee turned itself against the use of birth control, and here the voice of the conservative civil servant spoke clearly: ‘Conduct divorced from responsibility injures the individual and the community’. Worse still, in their view, and ‘fraught with serious consequences to the national welfare’, was the fact that ‘contraceptive practices are … more likely to be used by the more successful and intelligent sections of the community than by those who are improvident and mentally weak’.70 Up to this point, the findings of the Bhore Committee are familiar in terms of the language of the 1930s. But the Bhore Committee proceeded to signal a crucial shift in perspective in its insistence that public health was a fundamental responsibility of the state, rather than for social reformers and voluntary organizations. This was exactly what the Congress’ National Planning Committee had argued in 1939, but now the recommendation came from an official commission of inquiry. The Bhore Committee was implicitly critical of the prior neglect of public health by the colonial state (even though the report began with a conventional narrative of the beneficent medical progress which British rule brought to India), the more so in their confidential correspondence with the government. A memorandum by the British advisors to the committee declared that ‘the Provinces … are jealous of an autonomy in respect of public health, medical relief and medical education, which they are not as yet strong enough in personnel or material resources to wield’. Similarly, they were critical of the prevalent attitudes of the civil service: ‘there is a too widespread attitude of apathy of defeatism: i) because the problems are so vast; ii) because the political situation is so difficult and uncertain and iii) because of the frequently reiterated lament that “India is a poor country”’.71 In making its case for a national health service, the Bhore Committee cast its net wide, examining, in detail, plans for post-war health services in Britain, the United States, Canada, Australia and New Zealand, as well as making frequent reference to Henry Sigerist’s admiring account of the development of Soviet health services in the 1930s.72 This was a significant departure from the perspectives of the 1930s, which had suggested the need for a completely different approach to health in poor agricultural (and, of course, colonial) countries to those of advanced

62 Decolonizing International Health

industrial societies. Based upon this comparative view, the Bhore Commission suggested that ‘the comprehensive conception of what a community health service should undertake has led to the development of modern health administration, in which the State makes itself responsible for the establishment and maintenance of the different organizations required for providing the community with health protection’.73 At the centre of the Bhore Committee’s proposals for the Indian health services was their ‘Three Million Plan’, a national network of district health centres linked to more specialized centres of medical care in larger urban areas.74 Perhaps the most significant strategic move on the part of the Bhore Commission was to make the case for the economic benefits of public health. Where the League of Nations’ discussions had expressed unease with the consequences of economic development and commercialization in agriculture, the Bhore Committee tied their plans for health closely to the legitimating language of planned development. The committee’s advisors accused the finance department of the Government of India of indifference to public health. They spoke of a …failure on the part of the Finance Departments to realise a) that health is one of the greatest economies and b) that disease is one of the most expensive and wasteful of a nation’s enemies. Famine, chronic malnutrition, malaria, plague, cholera, typhoid, the dysenteries, leprosy and tuberculosis do not only entail high expenditure for relief: they also mean a devitalized population, unable to work efficiently or advance with the times.75 Indeed, Vaughan and colleagues concluded that ‘it seemed to us that the education of the civil servant and the legislator in regard to health as a national and economic asset was even more urgently needed in India than elsewhere in the world’.76 The British advisors went further than the Bhore Committee’s final report in advocating a public health targeted towards national efficiency: The building of hospitals and multiplication of doctors still has priority in the public mind, but for erroneously conceived humanistic reasons. … more effective measures for malaria-control alone would probably save more lives and render more people efficient than the work of all the hospitals and practitioners put together.77 The Bhore Committee ultimately proved unwilling to abandon a conception of public health centred on hospitals – it was on their recommenda-

War and the Rise of Disease Control 63

tion that the government built India’s most glittering institute of advanced medicine, the All-India Institute of Medical Sciences, in 1956. Yet the argument for prioritizing effective (and cheap) malaria control was prescient, suggesting exactly the arguments that prevailed in the 1950s. The Bhore Committee said many things, its arguments and recommendations were not necessarily internally consistent, yet ultimately their argument for the economic value of public health was the one which made the deepest impression on the shape of future debates on health. As suggested in the previous chapter, colonial states had on many occasions made the argument that ill health weakened the vitality of workers; less familiar was the concomitant argument that this necessitated state action. The argument about health and economic efficiency is one reason why the Congress leadership, when it emerged from prison at the end of the war, was so ready to accept the findings of the Bhore Report. Although the Congress’ National Planning Committee did not meet after 1940, its reports emerged only in 1947, by which time the editors had taken account of the Bhore Report, and cited it on almost every page.78 There were, of course, differences between Bhore and the Congress. The Bhore Committee advocated a health service funded by central taxation, along the lines of the British National Health Service; the Congress preferred a system of contributory health insurance. The Congress Health Committee viewed birth control with much more favour than the Bhore Committee, hoping initially that population control would form an integral part of the public health programme. Finally, anxieties about a specifically Indian modernity meant the Congress had to pay lip service to India’s indigenous medical traditions, though this seldom translated into direct support for Ayurveda or Unani (as opposed to a desire to control their practice). The Bhore Committee was quite direct in its support of ‘modern’ medicine: The committee noted with approbation the move towards abolishing indigenous systems of medicine in Japan and the Soviet Union.79 The question of the place of indigenous medicine within the post-colonial state remained unresolved, periodically emerging as a matter of debate but seldom leading to any substantive changes in the status quo.

A new international health organization Even as the architects of India’s new health service cast their net wide in looking for models and for intellectual inspiration for their plans, efforts were underway to institutionalize the global convergence in thinking about public health and welfare.

64 Decolonizing International Health

The war witnessed an upsurge in the production of pamphlet literature on health conditions around the world: awareness increased of the interconnected nature of health problems.80 The increasingly international framework for the discussion of public health reached well beyond a small group of international experts. One of the Bhore Committee’s international advisors, for example, received a letter from the Nagpur Municipal Voters Association highlighting, in a curious way, the international significance of their city’s health problems: … We have read how you have seen ‘the tragic, the sad and the terrible’ prevailing in our country. But we would like to request you to visit our city which enjoys the reputation of the highest death rate in the whole world. We have started our Association for the last ten years for this very purpose and have agitated over a number of health problems urgently required to be tackled by the Government. The problems of our town have now assumed an international importance since we are the worst affected spot in the whole world.81 Associated with this newly comparative perspective on the problems of public health was the notion that an international body ought to oversee the new responsibilities of governments in the field of health, and to decree which ‘spots’ were ‘worse’ than others. The problem was that although public health was a conspicuously international issue during the war, the international health organizations of the inter-war years, the League of Nations’ Health Organization and the Office International D’Hygiène Publique, were effectively dead. The League retained a skeletal administration, whilst the German Occupation severely compromised the Paris Office. The head of the League of Nations’ Eastern Bureau in Singapore, Dr C.L. Park, had fled on the floor of a seaplane to Batavia in February 1942, leaving the League’s files and equipment behind.82 UNRRA, when established in November 1943, took over much of the epidemiological intelligence work of both organizations. In the meantime, as James Gillespie has recently shown, other international organizations began to take up questions of public health.83 The ILO was the only organization associated with the League of Nations that survived the war intact. The ILO, exiled to Montreal during the war, began to formulate wide-ranging proposals for social security in a post-war world. The acting director, Edward Phelan, an Irishman who had made a career at the ILO after attending its found-

War and the Rise of Disease Control 65

ing conference as a member of the British delegation, called for a recognition of the ‘unity of all social risks’. The ‘Social Mandate’ of the ILO pointed towards a post-war world in which universal medical services would be funded by compulsory insurance.84 The ILO’s proposals provoked the immediate ire of the American Medical Association and the US insurance industry.85 Nevertheless, the ILO was an important forum for the legitimation and circulation of new governmental technologies of social and medical insurance on an international level. Also concerned with questions of health, in this case nutrition, was the first of the new United Nations agencies: the Food and Agriculture Organization (FAO), created at a conference in Hot Springs, Virginia, in 1943.86 With John Boyd Orr as its founding director general, and W.R. Aykroyd as the head of its nutrition section, the FAO showed an early interest in the links between health and nutrition, following from the work of the League of Nations in the 1930s.87 The presence of Aykroyd, amongst others, suggests the continuity of thought linking the new organization with the debates of the 1930s. The Hot Springs Conference passed a resolution declaring that it was ‘deeply impressed by the dominant role played by adequate food in the reduction of sickness and death rates and the maintenance of health’. The resolution recognized that ‘malnutrition is responsible for widespread impairment of human efficiency and for an enormous amount of ill health and disease’.88 Aykroyd wrote in a memorandum, upon his return to India, that ‘it was not primarily a health conference … nevertheless, the relation between proper food and health was one of the basic ideas underlying the deliberations’. The meeting had not, however, gone so far as the League of Nations had in the 1930s, in its call to ‘marry health and agriculture’.89 In the years after the war, the creation of separate international bodies concerned with agriculture and with health would have important consequences in dissociating ‘public health’ from its earlier conjunction with nutritional thought. Given the central place of health in wartime relief and post-war planning, the question of designing an international institution to replace the League of Nations Health Organization became increasingly urgent. One of the first, and boldest, proposals came from Ludwik Rajchman, the Polish doctor who had been director of the League’s Health Organization from 1921 to 1938, and particularly involved with work on rural health in China. Rajchman (1881–1965) was a Polish Jew, politically ‘on the extreme left’, yet an ally of Chiang Kai Shek (through his close friendship with T.V. Soong, Chiang’s brother-in-law and foreign minister). After being forced out of the League of Nations

66 Decolonizing International Health

in 1939 by the deeply conservative French director, Avenol, whose efforts to appease the Axis powers extended to a ‘purge’ of the League, Rajchman focused his energies into gaining American aid for the Polish resistance, and helping T.V. Soong in his efforts to gain American support in China.90 Rajchman’s proposal on the future of international health was widely circulated. He submitted a memorandum to the British foreign office in late July or August 1943, and published his paper ‘A United Nations Health Service. Why Not?’ in the journal Free World in September 1943.91 The internationalization of health, Rajchman suggested, was a symptom of a ‘century of common people’ which ‘was born with the break up of mighty empires in 1918’.92 International health, in this analysis, was an inherently democratic phenomenon, but it had not established lasting roots in the inter-war years. Writing from obvious personal disappointment, Rajchman lamented the League of Nations Health Organization’s ‘slump into oblivious suspension’ at the start of the War. The problem, in Rajchman’s analysis, was one of representation. The League ‘lacked a solid foundation of organized support from the “consumers of health”’. This striking invocation of ‘consumers of health’ – a locution very much in advance of its time – referred to ‘the common people’, or the beneficiaries of public health. ‘However wholehearted, support of the “administrators of health” was not sufficient, and as an appendage to a political body, the Health Organization had to suffer the fate of its principal’. The new United Nations Health Service thus needed stronger foundations, and greater autonomy. Citing the ‘vested interests’ of organized labour and employers’ federations as an important explanation for the ILO’s survival, Rajchman suggested that a similar system of direct, ‘organized representation’ be considered for his UN Health Service. He proposed that social security organizations, local governments, and central governments be represented: the medical profession was notably absent from his plans.93 With representation would come taxation, and this was one of Rajchman’s most innovative proposals. ‘The support of the electorate should be tangible’, he argued, and ‘adequate machinery for the election of delegates’ needed to be formulated. This support would be underscored by a ‘health tax levied in each participating country’. Rajchman suggested that the tax should be ‘assessed at a fraction of 1% of annual appropriations for public health and social medicine on the budgets of the three constituents: Local Governments … Social Security Agencies, and National Governments.’ ‘Imagine’, he suggested ‘a

War and the Rise of Disease Control 67

penny added to each water bill in civilized communities everywhere. An infinitesimal charge, but millions in dollars for constructive health projects throughout the world’. The other theme in Rajchman’s proposals concerned global inequalities in health. This built directly upon the realization of the deeply unequal provision of health services in different parts of the world: The task is considerable: thus, for example, Great Britain for 46 million people has 62,000 doctors and 110,000 nurses; Japan for 100 million has 50,000 doctors. But India for 400 millions has only 42,000 doctors and 4,500 nurses while China for 460 million, just 9,000 doctors and 2,000 nurses. The 350 million Europeans, 130 [million] North Americans, 100 million Arabs, and 200 million Latin Americans stand between the two extremes. Here we have the clearest example of the discussion of the provision of public health with the world as the scale of comparison. Perhaps Rajchman’s most dramatic proposal was that ‘under whatever name, Colonial Empires, particularly in the Pacific Area and in Africa, would be administered multi-nationally. Health and medicine were used to “open up” new, to maintain, and develop old areas; An United Nations Public Health and Medical Service can effectively perform these functions’. Interestingly, Rajchmann did not express any particular sympathy for nationalist arguments about the colonial neglect of public health; he argued, rather, that the UN would use health as a tool of economic exploitation just as effectively as its colonial predecessors. In the first instance, ‘a Special Joint Commission (USA, British, French, Dutch, Spanish, Portugese and independent experts) should take over forthwith all existing National Services under the United Nations’ authority’. The initial response to Rajchman’s proposals at the British Foreign Office was positive, even enthusiastic. A handwritten note appended to Rajchman’s draft states that: This is an interesting example of the ‘functional’ approach to the question of international co-operation, which has found much recent support (Cf. Prof Mitrany’s ‘A Working Peace System’, which Chatham House has just published). The idea is, roughly, to bypass problems of national sovereignty, formal alliances, federal constitutions, etc. by a series of ad hoc organizations on the basis of the ILO to perform definite functional services (in health, nutrition, etc.) on

68 Decolonizing International Health

an international basis. Such organizations would develop naturally from the immediate needs of reconstruction.94 Another Foreign Office official, the noted internationalist Philip NoelBaker, wrote to a colleague that under Rajchman’s direction, the League’s Health Organization had ‘a marvellous record of practical work, in spite of the fact that they were constantly hampered by lack of funds and other difficulties’. He concluded that ‘Rajchmann’s paper is very ambitious, and, in my view, none the worse for that’.95 It was decided, however, that the Foreign Office ‘should not be committed to any expression of opinion on Dr Rajchman’s plan until the Ministry of Health gives their views’.96 By October 1943, the consensus at the Ministry of Health, having considered Rajchman’s draft, was decidedly antagonistic.97 Melville MacKenzie, in his detailed critique of the plan, shared Rajchman’s concern with the question of representation, but reached different conclusions, suggesting that the League of Nations Health Organization had been undermined by the fact that ‘members of the Health Committee did not sit as representatives of their Governments, but as experts only’.98 Contrary to Rajchman’s view, MacKenzie suggested that an international health organization was inherently unrepresentative. ‘It must be constantly remembered: a fact that is too often forgotten, that an international body does not feel so direct a responsibility to an elected public body as is the case with Officers of a National Health Service or of a Local Authority’. MacKenzie concluded that ‘impracticable idealism in administrative medicine or even what may be regarded as extreme medico-social views, may in the end defeat their own object and do irreparable damage to the cause of international collaboration.’99 The growing consensus within the British government was to treat the UNRRA as the basis for any permanent international health organization after the war. Of great importance was the fact that the constitution of UNRRA ‘commits the American Government on its own initiative and Russia to international collaboration in medical work and this might be very difficult to obtain at a later date with a new organization’.100 By the following year, the British government saw that the best way to retain American support would be to plan for UNRRA to evolve into an ‘international health commission which would be associated with, or a constituent body of, the proposed Economic and Social Council’ of the United Nations.101 The birth of a new international health organization, in the aftermath of war and

War and the Rise of Disease Control 69

in the midst of decolonization, will form the subject of the next chapter.

Conclusion: The ghosts of Bengal This chapter has considered the activation, by the Second World War, of new medical technologies, and the new governmental technologies that gave them force. It was far from being a smooth process; the fractures and contradictions inherent in the developments described in this chapter would have a profound influence on public health after the war. Events in Bengal, gripped by devastating famine in 1943–44, exemplified these contradictions. The Bengal Famine showed, first, that the grand declaration of international responsibility for health, indeed for life, rang hollow as long as the interest of imperial rule took precedence over the welfare of the population. Events in Bengal showed that the demands of sovereignty were well capable of prevailing over the imperatives of biopolitics into the mid-twentieth century and beyond, particularly in an imperial context.102 In response to a relatively mild request on the part of the colonial government of India for relief supplies for Bengal from UNRRA, the British government in London panicked. The India Office in London wrote indignantly to the Foreign Office, claiming that: ‘In a matter of this sort on which HMG obviously have views and which affects a good many issues of foreign policy and supply it would have been proper for the Government of India to have consulted us before they took any such action’.103 The main problem, for the British government, was the potential embarrassment that would follow from UNRRA’s intervention in India. The Secretary of State for India put it concisely in a telegram to the Governor-General: If UNRRA operated in India in the sphere of supply and public health they would no doubt wish to send supervisors or inspectors whose operations would presumably be concentrated on Bengal and you must expect undesirable attention to be directed, e.g. on the breakdown of administration there.104 The British government quickly brushed off the Indian proposal. Officials were instructed to respond to parliamentary questions on the matter by pointing out that ‘food grains have been sent to India to the full extent which the shipping resources of the United Nations permit’,

70 Decolonizing International Health

and that ‘India has … large external balances with which to purchase her import requirements, including relief supplies’.105 The pressure that London brought to bear meant that the Government of India quickly desisted.106 The glaring gap between the rhetoric of UNRRA as harbinger of international responsibility for welfare, and the tragedy of Bengal, did not go unnoticed. With characteristic force and eloquence, Jawaharlal Nehru, writing his Discovery of India from Ahmadnagar jail, made the connection between the tragedy of Bengal and the global discourse of the Four Freedoms. ‘Famine came, ghastly, staggering, horrible beyond words’, Nehru wrote. Men, women, and children ‘dropped down dead before the palaces of Calcutta, their corpses lay in the mud-huts of Bengal’s innumerable villages’. The horrors of the famine stood in the sharpest contrast to the language of the Atlantic Charter. Nehru pointed, scathingly, to ‘President Roosevelt’s Four Freedoms. The Freedom from Want. Yet rich England, and richer America paid little heed to the hunger of the body that was killing millions in India, as they had paid little heed to the fiery thirst of the spirit that is consuming the people of India’.107 By relating the famine to the language of the Four Freedoms, as well as the ‘thirst’ of Indian nationalism, Nehru begins to make a link between famine, social crisis, and a lack of political freedom. The Bengal Famine undermined, perhaps fatally undermined, the imperial claim to be working for the national welfare. It strengthened the nationalist argument that only a new international order of nation-states could make good on the promises of health and wealth for all which had spread so rapidly around the globe during the war. Thus, Nehru suggested that whilst the ‘hundreds of millions of Asia and Africa … welcome all attempts at world cooperation and the establishment of an international order’ they nevertheless ‘wonder and suspect if this may not be another device for continuing the old domination’.108 The fundamental question about any new form of international organization was: ‘does it hold forth the promise of an early liquidation of poverty and illiteracy, and bring better living conditions?’.109 In the inter-war years, internationalism was often strengthened by the networks of colonial rule – scientific, intellectual, institutional – building on a thin layer of voluntary associations established in the image of their Victorian counterparts in the metropolis; in the post-war era, internationalism would be tied to the voluntary association of post-colonial states. The Bengal Famine was not the only cause for this shift, but it played a contributing role.

War and the Rise of Disease Control 71

The second fundamental contradiction exposed by the Bengal Famine, in the light of the great ambitions for health in the post-war world, was the potential gulf between the newly assumed responsibilities of governments and their capacities. Even more sharply than the investigations of commissions like the Bhore Committee, the inquiry into the causes of the Bengal Famine highlighted how shallow and incomplete was the expansion of modern medicine before the war. ‘The calamity of famine fell on a population with low physical reserves’, the commission found, ‘and circumstances were favourable for a flare-up of epidemic disease. The association between health conditions in normal times and the high famine mortality must be underlined.’110 Thus one of the causes of the very high levels of mortality from the famine lay in the existing weaknesses of Bengal’s medical infrastructure – and Bengal was relatively advanced when compared with other parts of south and southeast Asia: If a public health organization is to be capable of meeting emergencies, it must reach a certain degree of efficiency in normal times. In Bengal the public health services were insufficient to meet the normal needs of the population and the level of efficiency was low …Clearly, one sanitary inspector, even with the help of a health assistant, a medicine carrier and a few temporarily employed vaccinators, cannot deal adequately with the health problems of a population which may exceed 200,000 and inhabit an area of over 150 square miles.111 There is a hint here of why the prospect of a technological fix, through the civilian use of DDT and other new technologies, proved so seductive after the war.

3 The Political Culture of International Health

This chapter examines the reconstitution of the field of international public health, in the light of transformations brought by the Second World War. It begins with the establishment of the World Health Organization in 1946, and culminates with the debates surrounding the relationship of public health to population growth in the mid1950s. Within this period, there was a fundamental shift in the way that international public health was thought about, discussed, and acted upon. The decade after 1945 saw the establishment of a bureaucratic and political field of ‘development’ policy, within which international health had to find its place. At stake was nothing less than the definition of the relationship of health, medicine, hygiene, and economic development. Previous constellations of ideas unravelled, and re-formed.1 In the 1930s, the discourse of rural hygiene had brought together questions of poverty, agricultural development, land ownership and health; now health was identified with ‘economic, social and cultural rights’, and as a form of ‘technical assistance for economic development’. Asia played a central role in these debates, both because of its epidemiological centrality as a ‘source’ of epidemic disease, and because of the politics of decolonization. The transformations, both technological and ideological, brought by the Second World War dented the environmental determinism of tropical medicine. The boundaries of the debate remained relatively fluid until the late 1940s. However, the international context – the unresolved legacies of the Second World War and decolonization, as well as the intensifying Cold War – narrowed the boundaries of possibility. Given the uncertainty and tension of international relations, the new international agencies as well as national governments chose to concentrate on the piecemeal extension of their short-term emergency measures. Broadly 72

The Political Culture of International Health 73

based debates on international social and economic policy narrowed to focus almost exclusively upon economic development as the overriding goal of international cooperation. In this context, the champions of international health had to defend the utility of public health against the neo-Malthusian argument that, by aiding population growth, international health was a fetter on economic development.

Health and the United Nations The United Nations (UN) organization played the central role in the internationalization of responsibility for welfare after 1945. The UN charter was signed by 50 countries at the San Francisco conference of 1945, based on the proposals drawn up by the ‘Great Powers’ at Dumbarton Oaks in late 1944. From the outset, the new organization was to have an Economic and Social Council, reflecting the expanded conception of security emerging after the war, extending the idea of security from States to individuals, and from the realm of military security to economic and social security.2 Expanding on the League of Nations’ concern with ‘social’ questions, the Economic and Social Council of the UN was to oversee the work of a number of specialized agencies.3 The first of these, the Food and Agriculture Organization (FAO), was established towards the end of 1943. By 1946, it had been joined by the UN Educational, Social and Cultural Organization (UNESCO), the United Nations Children’s Fund (UNICEF), and the World Health Organization (WHO). Shaped by the values and the political language emerging from both anti-fascist and anti-colonial struggles, the UN enshrined a new international order founded on democracy. The massive inequalities that remained, in the new order, would be remedied by the all-encompassing notion of ‘development’, aided and assisted by the UN’s new agencies. The WHO was the central arena for many of the debates on health after the war.4 The debates on the future of international health during the war, considered in the previous chapter, culminated in the establishment of the WHO between 1946 and 1948. Given the controversy that had surrounded Ludwik Rajchman’s proposal of 1943,5 British and American policymakers had hoped to keep the question of an international health organization off the agenda at the San Francisco conference of 1945.6 Hugh Cumming, director of the Pan-American Sanitary Board was told by the State Department that ‘the question would not be brought up at San Francisco’. Cumming had gained the impression from American planners that ‘health was not considered important

74 Decolonizing International Health

enough to be a separate subject’, but would be incorporated into a ‘conglomerate mass’ known as a ‘commission on education, labour, and social welfare’.7 However, Chinese and Brazilian delegates at San Francisco, Szeming Sze and Paula Souza, oblivious to their AngloAmerican counterparts’ prior discussions, called for a conference to be convened to design a new international health organization. The British and American delegates could not, for fear of embarrassment, openly oppose such a proposal, and thus it passed unanimously.8 Much of the debate during the initial discussions on the WHO revolved around the extent to which the new international health organization would develop the more interventionist, even radical, angle of the League of Nations’ approach in the 1930s. Despite disagreements over the extent of the new organization’s powers, and over the question of how far it would endorse social medicine, a level of consensus did emerge.9 Although the American delegation sought to limit the powers of the organization, the US Surgeon-General, Thomas Parran, concurred that the WHO ought to ‘co-operate with other international organizations … in developing standards of human dietary requirements, working conditions, housing or other factors which may affect physical or mental health’.10 How ambitious a task the WHO set itself emerges from the preamble to its constitution. The wording owed much to Andrija Stampar, the radical Yugoslavian social medic who (as I showed earlier) took his ideas of rural hygiene to China and beyond with the League of Nations and the Rockefeller Foundation. Stampar was a key member of the WHO’s preparatory committee, and succeeded in defining the organization’s mission (the ‘world’s health’) thus: The right to health is one of the fundamental rights to which every human being, without distinction of race, sex, language or religion, is entitled. Health is not only the absence of infirmity or disease but also a state of physical fitness and mental and social well-being. Health is an essential factor in the attainment of security and well-being for individuals and nations.11 This declaration, which appears almost verbatim in the final Constitution of the WHO, encapsulates the ways in which health emerged as part of the language of human rights, security and development, out of the upheavals of war. In 1948, the year the WHO Constitution was finalized, the Universal Declaration of Human Rights made a parallel

The Political Culture of International Health 75

commitment, that ‘everyone has the right to a standard of living adequate for the health and well-being of himself and of his family, including food, clothing, housing, medical care and necessary social services’.12 The WHO’s Constitution was signed at the International Health Conference, held in New York in June 1946, which was attended by all 51 members of the UN, 13 non-members, and representatives of ten other organizations interested in health, including UNESCO, the FAO, and the Rockefeller Foundation. All states, with the exception of Britain and China, made their signatures conditional upon domestic ratification.13 It would be a further two years before the required minimum of 26 signatures appeared and the WHO formally came into force. When its constitution was finally ratified in 1948, the WHO had 55 member states, including colonial territories that were given ‘associate membership’ upon the application of their colonial rulers. All member states were represented in the World Health Assembly, the main legislative body of WHO, by up to three delegates ‘technically qualified in health’ and ‘preferably representing the national health administration of the member state’.14 An Executive Board oversaw the implementation of the Assembly’s decisions. The daily running of the organization was the responsibility of the Secretariat, dominated by medical professionals, based at the WHO headquarters in Geneva.15 Brock Chisholm, the Canadian psychiatrist and former deputy-director of health in the Canadian government, took office as the first DirectorGeneral. At the start, the staff of the WHO was nearly 200 strong, including ‘a small nucleus of ex-League, UNRRA and Paris Office employees, with previous international experience.’16 Notably, the WHO opted for a decentralized structure, with six regional offices, each with a degree of autonomy unparalleled within the United Nations system.17 On the verge of independence from colonial rule and anxious to take their place on the international stage, the newly post-colonial states of South and Southeast Asia would play a central role in the organization’s debates and activities. The establishment of the WHO coincided with the moment of independence in South Asia, and the new international health organization received the enthusiastic support of Asia’s new leaders.18 In particular, the WHO’s ‘Southeast Asian’ regional office, which included the two most populous Asian nations – India and Indonesia, as well as Afghanistan, Burma, Thailand and Ceylon – was a focus of the new organization’s work, and will provide the focus for this chapter, and indeed the rest of the book.19

76 Decolonizing International Health

Envisioning Asia’s health How would the new international system give effect to the ambitions of the wartime planners for a new order of welfare for all? How would aspirations for the enactment of health as a right of citizenship, rather than the object of charitable relief, take effect? How could the new technologies governing life – from the statistical technologies of social insurance to the biochemical technologies of vaccines and insecticides – be implemented in large, poor Asian countries on the verge of independence from colonial rule? A number of discussions in 1947 revolved around the idea that Asia posed a particular, and unified, set of problems with respect to the government of welfare; a set of commonalities and regularities in the sphere of political economy, governed by climate, resources, population and – as a residual category – ‘culture’. Implicit in these discussions was a quest to define the scope of action open to post-colonial Asian states. But this was done in such a way as to privilege the welfare of the greatest number over questions of sovereignty. While consensus emerged that public health was a fundamental duty of government, it was also suggested that the space of government might stretch beyond the limits of particular national sovereignties. The prior decision to organize the WHO on regional lines gave a ready-made, though always contested, arena for the formulation and implementation of policies for Asia. Asian governments and the new international organizations alike saw a set of deeper regularities governing the conditions of life and health across Asia. The conception of ‘Asia’ as an administrative category for the government of life and welfare drew on a range of disciplines, many of them colonial disciplines. The first was tropical geography and tropical medicine. ‘Asia’ found its unity, on this view, in patterns of climate and disease ecology. In the words of a WHO expert, writing in 1947: The Central and South-Eastern parts of Asia, together with Indonesia, i.e. the ‘Monsoon Asia’ of geographers, should be considered as one epidemiological area. It would include the endemic foci of cholera and territories most readily infectible [sic.] by that disease … it is free from yellow fever but is severely affected by malaria, by flea-borne and miteborne rickettsioses and by the ubiquitous smallpox. Most of the area suffers from the food deficiencies of the rice eaters, from a high tuberculosis morbidity and mortality in its cities and the extension of the prevalence of that disease in the rural districts.20

The Political Culture of International Health 77

The leaders and administrators of post-colonial states reinforced this view of ‘Asia’, as possessing a certain unity, but their focus was less on the disease environment and more on the ontological fact of Asia’s poverty. Indeed, a focus on Asia’s poverty undermined the power of tropical nature as an explanation for the region’s disease patterns. Jawaharlal Nehru suggested, at the anti-colonial Asian Relations Conference of 1947, that ‘backwardness’ was the essential problem that united Asia; across the region, he said, ‘standards of life are appallingly low’.21 There was an unfortunate commonality in that ‘most of the Asian countries suffered from extreme backwardness in respect of health’. A committee at the Asian Relations Conference explained the persistently high mortality and morbidity across Asia in terms of material deprivation: ‘the reason for infant mortality and lower vitality’, they argued, ‘is also largely economic. It was stated that in Ceylon twofifths of the population did not obtain sufficient energy from their diet’.22 The social welfare committee of the Asian Relations Conference discussed the continent’s problems in singular terms. The high levels of mortality and morbidity in ‘Asia’ were due to a veritable catalogue of ills: ‘an extreme inadequacy of existing health services’; ‘unhygienic environmental conditions’; a ‘lack of education and certain social practices which have had an adverse impact on the physical and mental health of the people’. Above all, illness was due to poverty.23 This definition of the problem of public health as part of a broader nexus of poverty and under-development had clear implications. The new international organizations and post-colonial Asian governments held the view that concerted policies of public health might form part of a broader series of interventions to bring about agrarian transformation and industrial development. A number of modernizing colonial administrators, and some British and American doctors, concurred with this view. 24 The perceived similarities in the underlying conditions producing health and illness in Asia led to a number of solutions which took ‘Asia’ as their targets of intervention. Discussions at the International Labour Organization (ILO) turned specifically to the question of policy, arguing that ‘even a cursory survey of existing conditions in the rural areas of Asiatic countries points to the conclusion’ that its health problems ‘should, in fact, be treated as one and indivisible’.25 The ILO’s first meeting in Asia, also held in Delhi in 1947, concluded that common problems afforded common solutions;26 Asia’s health problem was singular, but also alterable

78 Decolonizing International Health

through public policy. Taking a holistic view of public health, the ILO recommended to its Asian members that Collective provisions must first be made for such elementary measures as the removal of refuse and night soil, a water supply protected from contamination, the prevention of malaria by the oiling of stagnant ponds … the cementing or asphalting of village roads which now turn into puddles or rivulets in the rainy season, the ventilation of huts or houses to allow the smoke to escape and the air to enter, the destruction of rats and vermin, and so forth.27 Taking into account the ‘community structure, health conditions and the general lack of health facilities in rural Asia’, the ILO was strongly in favour of a ‘public medical care service’. The subsequent discussion of the precise organization of health services across Asia ends with a strong presumption in favour of centralization and universalization. Public health, on this view, was part of a wider move towards a centralized welfare state: ‘a stage in the evolution from poor relief via social assistance to a system under which the beneficiary emerges from the status of a recipient of charity … and becomes a citizen entitled to medical care as of right’.28 The question, then, was how the ‘right’ to health could be given effect. The discussions emanating from both the Asian Relations Conference and the ILO meeting in Delhi reflected, or coincided with, an argument from within medical thought that challenged the ‘naturalness’ of Asia’s disease patterns. The pioneering social medic John Ryle, of Oxford University, had argued against the determinism of tropical medicine in a series of lectures given in 1947. He suggested that students in Britain were ‘misled’ by talk of the ‘tropical diseases’ that continued to devastate the lives of the populations in Asia and Africa. ‘Cholera, malaria, plague … these great endemic diseases of backward populations still prevail in India, China and Africa’, he argued, as once they had prevailed in Europe. ‘Nearly all of them’, Ryle argued, ‘are pre-eminently “social” diseases and due to alterable social causes.’29 Clear in all of this was a desire to establish international health work on a basis other than that of emergency charitable relief, and to use a conception of Asia’s ‘natural’ poverty to justify a coordinated Asian policy. Yet by the second half of 1947, immediate crises intervened, again, to undermine the realization of these grand plans for the government of health, none greater than the aftermath of the Partition of the Indian subcontinent in August 1947.

The Political Culture of International Health 79

Crisis and sovereignty India lay at the centre of the ‘new Asia’; in August 1947 it was divided into the new states of India and Pakistan in what Lord Mountbatten was pleased to call the ‘greatest administrative operation in history’. The human tragedy of Partition soon overwhelmed everything before it.30 In this context, medical policy could not but take the form of ad hoc interventions, piecemeal extension of wartime emergency relief extended to refugees and to women and children.31 Thus Janet D. Corwin, a nursing officer of the Rockefeller Foundation who went to India to help the Indian Government and the WHO develop plans for a comprehensive national nursing service, confronted the far more immediate horrors of Partition. ‘The need for people with medical training is so great’, she wrote, ‘that I have been helping out, first in Irwin hospital and then in one of the refugee camps’. She continued: I have never seen such concentrated tragedy in my life. So many people have been hacked up and shot at, one sees women with arms cut off and heads cut open and even little babies of four or five months … There is no human word for it, and I do not see how human beings can do such things to fellow countrymen, even if they are of a different religion.32 The Kurukshetra relief camp was the largest in India, with over 100,000 inhabitants by 1949. Mass vaccination against smallpox and inoculation against cholera became urgent priorities. Inevitably, epidemics followed closely in the wake of the concentrations of human misery that were the refugee camps.33 In the east, the hospitals of divided Bengal felt the strain acutely, and were ill equipped to deal with it.34 The Bhore Committee report had outlined the desperate shortcomings in India’s medical infrastructure; these weaknesses were shown in sharp relief by the demands of Partition. An article in Calcutta’s Statesman newspaper contained a lurid indictment, simply entitled ‘Hospitals’. Fever and isolation hospitals are even worse than others, for distinguished visitors are rare, and dissuaded by suggestions of danger; in fact the stench might be adequate deterrent, for often excreta lie upon the floor and filth everywhere. Outside one cholera ward a doctor found a whole pile of blankets covered with faeces; on asking what was being done with them he was told that they were to be

80 Decolonizing International Health

issued to incoming patients. A cholera patient should be prevented from the smallest exertion; in practice, drinking water is sometimes placed by his bed in buckets, and help in getting a drink can only be obtained by bribing an attendant.35 Making direct reference to the commitments of the time, on the lips of politicians and constitution-makers everywhere, the Statesman proceeded to declare that ‘responsibility, however, rests squarely on the shoulders of Governments … the remedy lies with Governments, and the public is entitled to insist that Governments act’.36 It would not have been hard to conclude, though, that the aspirations of the fledgling WHO seemed a very long way indeed from realization. Questions of welfare and public health quickly retreated before more pressing issues of sovereignty asserting themselves across Asia – in the Indian constituent assembly, as within the provisional government of Indonesia, fighting a rearguard action by the Dutch, and the cabinet of the beleaguered government of Burma, facing insurgencies on three fronts.37 The discussions of the Indian Constituent Assembly, for one, hardly touched on the question of public health at all. In striking contrast with the centrality of health to earlier nationalist discourse, by the time the Constituent Assembly embarked on its discussions, almost every mention of ‘health’ was in connection with the ‘health of the body politic’; with ‘healthy’ and opposed to ‘unhealthy’ criticism of the state; with ‘healthy’ national sentiment.38 The Bhore Committee’s plans for the transformation of India’s public health were an early victim of the overwhelming interest in consolidating state power and preserving national unity. Arguments for public health within India’s constituent assembly were plaintive, almost desperate. Renuka Ray of West Bengal, in a rare reference to public health at the assembly, attempted to twist the language of a ‘healthy body politic’ to raise the question of public health care. She argued that ‘if we are to progress and prosper I suggest that in the matter of the two nation-building services of education and public health there should be some provision in the Constitution of the type that is there in the Chinese Constitution’. The latter, she suggested, specified minimum levels of state expenditure in each of those fields.39 The new state rapidly found itself having to secure and enforce its own boundaries – using force to secure the accession of the princely states of Hyderabad and Junagadh to the union, and at war with Pakistan over Kashmir within months of the transfer of power. The architect of the Indian Constitution, the conservative ‘iron man’,

The Political Culture of International Health 81

Sardar Vallabhbhai Patel, argued for a substantial retention of large parts of the colonial coercive and administrative apparatus. This meant, amongst other things, retaining the decentralized, fractured structure of the public health services. Public health, as a relatively ‘inessential’ subject, remained the responsibility of provincial government, without the funding to match.40 Providing for public health, in the final version of the Constitution of India, was one of the directive ‘principles of governance’ which was ‘non-justiceable’, that is to say, it was not binding. The new state focused on consolidating its hold over territory, and it increasingly focused on a goal around which there was much consensus: industrialization.41 In this context, India’s interest in the new international bodies shifted away from an engagement with fundamental questions regarding the organization and the responsibilities of the state. Rather, the new international bodies now faced demands for immediate and effective action. Inaugurating the first session of the Southeast Asian regional committee of WHO, held in Delhi in 1948, Jawaharlal Nehru stated that ‘India attaches the greatest importance to the work of the WHO, more especially from the point of view of South-east Asia, which was very backward in health conditions’. Suggesting that in the past, ‘world organizations directed their activities more towards the problems of Europe or America’, Nehru drew on the fear of epidemic diseases in order to justify priority for Asia in the new organization’s work. He claimed that ‘It is well known today … that one cannot isolate any part of the world and make one part of it healthy and leave other parts unhealthy, because infection spreads. The world must be tackled as a whole, and in doing so backward areas must be tackled first.’42 Here Nehru returns to a familiar language of emergency, through the invocation of epidemic disease, to make the case for international assistance to India. It is a significantly different language, and line of reasoning, to the conceptions of health aired at the Asian Relations Conference on the eve of Partition. It was a call for action, delivered with the urgency of a statesman who felt he had more pressing concerns of his own. A regional imagination continued to shape Nehru’s view of international cooperation, but it was a region clearly divided by national boundaries. As Nehru remarked at another international meeting in 1948: ‘you represent the South-East Asia region. Now, India is curiously situated from the geographical point of view as well as from many other points of view. It belongs to South-East Asia, it belongs to South Asia, it also belongs to West Asia….’43 From the point of view of health

82 Decolonizing International Health

and welfare, it was the ‘South-East Asian’ identity which the Indian state privileged as primary. The notion persisted that ‘Southeast Asia’ had a certain unity, shaped by the tropical environment, by shared poverty, and by pathogenic conditions. But the new emphasis on state sovereignty, at the same time, undermined the notion that ‘Asia’ as a space of biopolitical intervention should transcend the sovereignties of nation-states. As the political commentator Werner Levi observed in 1952, India’s championing of ‘Southeast Asian’ interests within international bodies substituted for ‘an Asian organization’, and was ‘more acceptable to most Asian nations’ who had seen earlier, and now defunct, proposals of an Asian Union as a veiled form of Indian imperialism.44 Wrote Levi: The UN and other international agencies afford the best opportunity for the common interests of India and other Asian countries to find practical expression. The agencies are used for much consultations and the coordination of policy. A system of multilateral relations has developed there which is unspectacular but which has been politically more important than the widely advertised Asian conferences.45 The ‘multilateral’ as opposed to the transnational focus of public health interventions marked a significant shift away from the early aspirations for a new global health organization; but it was a shift that was always halting, and never complete. The first such ‘coordinated policy’ in the field of public health, treating the Asian arena as a whole, was dramatic indeed. It took the form of a mass vaccination campaign against tuberculosis, using BCG, launched in 1947; it became the largest vaccination campaign ever undertaken. The massive population movements and widespread social crises of the Second World War highlighted, and exacerbated, the extent of tuberculosis infection, particularly in the occupied territories of Central and Eastern Europe. The United Nations Relief and Rehabilitation Administration (UNRRA) brought this to light when it conducted surveys showing the incidence of tuberculosis wherever it mounted relief operations, often using newly available X-ray technology.46 In the immediate aftermath of the war, an emergency humanitarian mission by Danish Red Cross doctors to Poland found that amidst ‘frightful misery and illness’, local authorities ‘had no facilities for handling’ tuberculosis cases ‘and were able to do nothing.’47 An

The Political Culture of International Health 83

unprecedented decision was taken to launch mass BCG vaccination campaigns in Poland and Yugoslavia, drawing on the Danes’ extensive previous experience of this technique, as the only feasible way of stemming the spread of the disease.48 By the middle of 1948, Italy, Greece and Czechoslovakia had asked for the Danish Red Cross to assist with similar BCG campaigns, and assistance was given by the Swedish and Norwegian Red Cross societies, making it a jointly run Scandinavian programme.48 The Scandinavian Red Cross societies were able to turn for support to another temporary humanitarian relief agency of the UN, the International Children’s Emergency Fund, and through UNICEF to the WHO. The involvement of UNICEF in this so-called ‘Joint Enterprise’ saw its expansion beyond Europe, to North Africa, the Middle East, India and Pakistan, and Ecuador.50 Debates from the time show that the Red Cross societies felt ill-prepared for this expansion into the tropics.51 The image of an emergency global vaccination campaign gave an identity to the new UN organizations’ activities.52 Aircraft, medical technology, and dramatic speed came to characterize the public image of the WHO. Even before the advent of the international tuberculosis campaign, the WHO’s Interim Commission had been tested by the outbreak of a cholera epidemic in Egypt.53 Here, too, the focus was on rapid, military-style public health measures, on a trans-continental scale. The political scientist Charles Ascher saw the WHO’s intervention in Egypt as a harbinger of its later reliance on ‘impact’ programmes: ‘by transoceanic telephone WHO summoned US Army planes from Asia and Soviet planes from Moscow with life-saving serum’.54 In the field of malaria control, the WHO elevated the wartime experience of DDT campaigns into a model for the future. An expert committee of malariologists at the WHO declared in 1948 that ‘it is now possible to attain a degree of practical malaria control, and even of malaria eradication, impossible 15 years ago’.55

Public health and the Cold War The onset of the Cold War intensified the need for a new basis for public health – a basis not overtly political, and also one that moved away from an onerous specification of responsibilities of individual states. The Truman Doctrine of March 1947 committed the United States to the defence of ‘freedom’ everywhere, followed in 1948 by the institution of the Marshall Plan, a massive injection of funds to assist

84 Decolonizing International Health

western European recovery. The following year, Harry Truman announced the so-called ‘Point Four’ plan. In ‘Point Four’ of his inaugural address, on 20 January 1949, President Truman set forth a ‘bold new programme for making the benefits of our scientific advances and industrial progress available for the improvement and growth of underdeveloped areas’.56 A memorandum on the ‘objectives and nature of the Point IV Program’ stated clearly that ‘technical assistance is now raised to a major role among the instruments for the accomplishment of existing objectives’. These ‘objectives’ included ensuring a regular supply of raw materials from the ‘under-developed’ world;57 securing expanding world markets for US manufactured goods, and the desire for ‘good will’ in ‘areas of strategic economic or military importance’, and, of course, to ‘contain’ communist expansion.58 Others have considered in detail the effects of the Cold War on international public health, and readers are directed to those works for a fuller discussion.59 Socrates Litsios concludes, in his careful study, that The urgency to reconstruct war-torn countries was used covertly to keep the UN system on an ‘emergency’ status throughout the Cold War. The focus on ‘urgent’ problems and the need for relatively quick results naturally led to a fragmentation of global assistance … the Cold War undermined the possibility of addressing politically sensitive issues, such as rural indebtedness and iniquitous land tenure systems.60 That is to say that, combined with the immediate political and humanitarian crises confronting Asia’s new post-colonial states in the late 1940s, the pressures of the Cold War dampened the discussions about health in terms of broad-based social transformation that had characterized the Asian Relations Conference, or the ILO meeting of 1947. The global commitment to public health that had circulated so widely during and after the Second World War was mobilized, in the new context of the Cold War, to serve a range of different agendas; but in order for this to happen, health had first to assume much narrower definitions. Asian nations welcomed aid for public health, both because it appeared less politically sensitive in such fields, and because, as I have already suggested, most Asian states were unwilling to spend large amounts of their own resources on health. The Americans, too, realized that the increasingly depoliticized field of public health held great potential for garnering ‘good will’.61

The Political Culture of International Health 85

On both sides, the involvement of the UN in the administration of the new programmes helped to obscure the unequal relations underpinning the system of foreign aid. The UN agencies, for their part, viewed the US commitment to ‘technical assistance’ as a great boon, a source of funds at a time when funds were scarce. In the field of health, the withdrawal of the USSR from the WHO in 1949 (until 1957), along with many of its eastern European satellite states, left the field open for American initiatives. Ironically, given the pioneering role played by eastern European public health experts in the internationalization of health before 1939, their voices were almost wholly absent from international debates on health in the 1950s. The venerable Andrija Stampar, from Tito’s resolutely non-aligned Yugoslavia, was a rare exception.

The birth of technical assistance The practices and institutions of ‘technical assistance’ attempted to resolve some of the contradictions in the new politics of international public health. In the process, the arguments for health shifted decisively from the terrain of rights and entitlement to one dominated by the primacy of economic expertise. In early 1949, the United States’ delegation to the UN’s Economic and Social Council proposed a resolution calling for a ‘comprehensive plan for an expanded co-operative programme of technical assistance for economic development through the United Nations … paying due attention to questions of a social nature which directly condition economic development’.62 It was a proposal that received the ready support not only of Asian governments, but also of the UN’s specialized agencies, which saw in technical assistance a means for their own consolidation. The UN’s definitional statement on ‘Technical Assistance for Economic Development’, published in 1949, set out very clearly the fundamental characteristics of the new politics of technical assistance. Technical assistance would be based upon the exchange and implementation of technology. Its ultimate goal was to bring about ‘economic development’, which involved ‘in particular … an increase in productivity’.63 Such development could only be brought about through the ‘full use of the scientific and technical advances that have already so changed the economies of more highly-developed areas’. The key role of the UN, in this analysis, was to ‘assist under-developed countries to take advantage of modern techniques’.64 The underdeveloped countries were ‘likely to fall farther and farther behind’

86 Decolonizing International Health

unless ‘deliberate and effective measures’ were taken ‘to bring to them the benefits of modern science and technology’ – including, of course, the technology of disease control.65 Development would require ‘adjustments’ and ‘far-reaching changes’ in governance, in the ‘attitudes and habits of the people’; it would require ‘political courage’ and ‘administrative competence’ of governments to minimize the ‘stresses’ of industrialization.66 The new emphasis on technical assistance, and the subordination of most social goals to that of economic growth, found a sympathetic echo within the new post-colonial states of Asia. By the end of the 1940s, the immediate crises of the post-war era were giving way to a period of consolidation and state-building. Technical assistance represented the international expression of the vogue for national planning, widespread across post-colonial Asia and above all in India. Planning, as Partha Chatterjee has argued, pretended to the ‘technical evaluation of alternative policies and determination of choices on scientific grounds’ by experts detached from the political process.67 This serves well as a characterization of technical assistance. Across the region, there was a fundamental consensus on the primacy of what economists have called a ‘commodity-centred approach’ to development.68 Economic growth alone would paper over the conflicts and contradictions within the ‘modern’ sector of Asia’s new states: growth to fund militarization, growth to forestall communist advance, growth to reduce poverty, growth to cement national bonds, growth to win domestic capitalists over to the cause of state direction. Thus the political economist Francine Frankel wrote of India’s first five-year plan that ‘all programmes included in the plan were justified by reference to a single yardstick: the economic goal of increasing production’.69 On this view, health was important to the Indian Planning Commission largely because ‘in the calculation of the country’s resources for economic development the health of the people must be reckoned an important factor’.70 The Planning Commission declared explicitly that public health was but an instrument in the goal of development: ‘the large incidence of sickness among those engaged in productive work … determines the choice of the specific measures to be included in the health programme’.71 This was an instrumental argument for public health. At the same time, planning – and so technical assistance – would serve as a palliative, easing the ‘unnecessary costs’ of industrialization. The availability of international technical assistance funds to do undertake such tasks was particularly attractive because it fit within the depoliticized frame-

The Political Culture of International Health 87

work of planning. Thus malaria control projects using DDT, organized and funded by the new international bodies (and by American aid) could have a significant, even dramatic, impact on the problems of rural public health in agrarian Asia.72 But they did so in a way that avoided raising questions of a ‘political’ nature; questions to do with land ownership, economic inequality and the bases of social power. Technical assistance often presented itself as an exercise of global cooperative endeavour – translated in Burma as a route to the Buddhist-socialist utopia of Pyidawtha, a ‘pleasant and happy land’ of self-help or, in India, in Gandhian terms of ‘community development’. Yet technical assistance projects studiously avoided raising the question of corresponding changes in structures of ownership or decisionmaking.73 Technical assistance had an important role to play, then, at a time when in India as elsewhere in South and Southeast Asia, postcolonial states sought to ‘incorporate within the framework of [their] rule not a representative mechanism solely operated by individual agents in civil society, but entire structures of pre-capitalist community taken in their existent forms’.74

Rights and technologies of health Perhaps the most significant political effect of the absorption of public health into the framework of technical assistance was the decline of any conception of health in terms of rights. An early, if short-lived, possibility was that human rights would provide the over-arching framework for the UN’s social policy. A striking example of this potential path can be seen in Carol Anderson’s recent work, which shows the ways in which the international ‘right to health’ took on a very real meaning for African-American leaders for a brief period in the mid-1940s. Anderson argues that, unlike the more limited discourse of civil rights, human rights ‘especially as articulated by the United Nations … had the language and philosophical power to address not only the political and legal inequality that African-Americans endured, but also the education, health care, housing, and employment needs that haunted the black community’.75 Thus, when the National Negro Congress petitioned the United Nations in mid-1946, an important part of their argument was to highlight the systematic inequalities between the health of black and white Americans: the infant mortality rate in black communities was almost double that of white Southerners; ten times as many blacks as whites died of tuberculosis and malaria.76 A petition of this kind, submitted just at the time when

88 Decolonizing International Health

the WHO’s constitution was being finalized in New York, suggested the possibility of an explicitly political approach to international health. Had this kind of human rights activism had a longer life, it is conceivable that the WHO might have been a very different institution, with a more interventionist role in exposing inequalities in health, and holding governments to account. This would, certainly, have resonated with the views of a John Ryle, or an Andrija Stampar (Ryle had written in 1948 of the ‘duty of physicians everywhere … to assume leadership in the struggle for improvement of conditions’).77 The politics of the Cold War, however, quickly closed off this avenue of approach. Anderson argues that the anti-communist hysteria of the late 1940s and early 1950s ‘systematically eliminated human rights as a viable option for the mainstream African-American leadership’;78 the same could be said for the United Nations. The first blow came when, under strong pressure from the State Department, Eleanor Roosevelt – chair of the UN’s Commission on Human Rights – set herself firmly against allowing the Commission to consider petitions from individuals and organizations.79 One of the main points of contention was whether a category of ‘economic and social rights’ (including the right to health), ought to be included within the covenant and, if so, how they were to be enforced. It is in this context that technical assistance increasingly appeared as a substitute for rights. As part of its tortuous attempts to define the scope of economic and social rights, the UN’s Commission on Human Rights invited written submissions from the directors of the specialized agencies. The response of the WHO is particularly revealing, in that it shifted considerably within the space of a few months. Initially, the organization’s position on rights was ambiguous. The DirectorGeneral’s initial submission to the UN, in February 1951, seemed to question the need for a covenant to secure the right to health, since ‘it is clear that the whole programme approved by the World Health Assembly represents a concerted effort on the part of Member States to ensure the right to health’.80 On this view, the work of the WHO, whatever form it took, was sufficient. However, if there was indeed going to be an international covenant on social and economic rights, the WHO thought that ‘the enjoyment of the highest obtainable standard of health’ ought to be among those rights. The organization was specific in spelling out certain measures of governmental responsibility for the ‘right to health’. These measures were expansive. They included governmental responsibility ‘to improve nutrition, housing, sanitation, recreation, economic and working con-

The Political Culture of International Health 89

ditions and other aspects of environmental hygiene’.81 However, the WHO concurred with the Commission on Human Rights that petitions from ‘individuals and non-governmental organization’ should not be received. This was a vision of the ‘right to health’ being implemented through technical means, by experts. Even this stance, however, proved too much for the American member of the WHO’s Executive Board, Henry Van Zile Hyde. He wrote to Chisholm stressing that ‘guaranteeing economic and social rights in an enforceable covenant is considerably different from a declaration of objectives’. He suggested that ‘no matter how great the desire of governments to provide such rights, some are not, unfortunately, in a position to guarantee them’. Hyde hoped that the WHO would ‘call the attention of the Commission … to the problems inherent in attempting to draft enforceable rights for health services’.82 By the middle of 1951, the WHO’s Director-General had decided that it would be better if the article on the right to health in the draft covenant ‘omitted … detailed undertakings’, and ‘stated only the principle of the right to health’.83 This was, perhaps, a result of the subtle American pressure on the WHO not to go too far.84 However, the arguments used by Chisholm suggest, also, that the WHO began to worry that a covenant on human rights would undermine rather than strengthen its own authority. There is alarm in the Director-General’s statement to the Executive Board that, potentially, ‘the proposed Human Rights Committee’, rather than WHO, would have the authority ‘to mediate in a complaint by a government … regarding the provision of medical services’ in another member state. Having a very loosely worded ‘right to health’ provision, with no concrete specifications or means of implementation would thus ‘give less justification for detailed discussion of technical questions by these non-technical UN organs’.85 Technical questions were the province of the specialized agency, and the coordinating Technical Assistance Board, alone. ‘The introduction of non-technical elements into the decisions of [the Technical Assistance Board] would certainly appear undesirable’.86 This is one of the clearest indications in the historical record of the gradual process of depoliticization of development through technical assistance.87 The instrument of ‘technical assistance’ became the focus of attention; the ultimate ends (improved living standards, reduced suffering from illness) would take care of themselves; the means (technical assistance) would be the focus of the discussion.

90 Decolonizing International Health

By the early 1950s if not even earlier, the WHO saw its future as tied to the framework of technical assistance, in which it would provide the health ‘input’. However, the field of technical assistance entailed struggles of its own. Even in the midst of negotiations for a covenant on social and economic rights, the WHO found itself having to justify its role within the technical assistance administration. In effect, once it was accepted that public health was an instrument directed towards the ultimate goal of ‘development’ through capital accumulation – rather than stressing that health was an intrinsic right – health projects were open to the charge that they hindered rather than advanced that goal. Above all, public health had to defend its position against the neo-Malthusian assault of the theorists of population explosion.

The argument for public health During all these ups and downs in economic life which have thrown now a hundred thousand, now a hundred million into poverty, misery and disease, there exists one basic factor in society, one fundamental value on which in the end we have to build as the only basis of society. That factor is the human being – the working, creating, hoping and struggling human being. Therefore it seems to me that the Second World Health Assembly might profitably be, ‘Let not the economist make us forget the human being’. Karl Evang88 From the logic of technical assistance came a plethora of demands on the new international organizations for concrete action (for ‘projects’). These demands stretched their fragile infrastructures to the limit. Karl Evang, a Norwegian public health specialist who had been with WHO from the outset put it in these terms: We are public health people, not representatives of Treasury departments. We know that action is needed, and we know that we cannot convince anybody unless we take action. To take action you have to be an operating agency – to go out into the field and do the work; and we are being invited to do so by very eager and anxious regional offices throughout the world.89 Yet the WHO manifestly lacked the resources needed to undertake such action. The WHO was a chronically impoverished institution. Its emergency relief work, like the anti-tuberculosis vaccination campaign,

The Political Culture of International Health 91

had depended upon voluntary contributions. It was precisely the ‘sporadic charity’ that so many during the war had excoriated as outmoded and inefficient. The WHO’s regular budget – drawn from the compulsory contributions of member states, assessed according to their ‘ability to pay’ – was severely limited. In 1949, in its first full year as a functioning organization, the WHO received just $3.6 million from its member states. It thus came as a significant boost to the WHO when the UN’s Economic and Social Council and the General Assembly voted, in June 1950, to establish an Expanded Programme of Technical Assistance of US$20 million.90 Over the next decade, funds from the Expanded Programme of Technical Assistance contributed almost as much to the WHO as its regular budget, as illustrated by Table 3.1. The need for resources helps to explain why the debates surrounding the role of public health within the administration of technical assistance were so important to the survival of international health. Consequently, the process through which international public health tried to make a place for itself at the heart of the institutional (and intellectual) framework of technical assistance shaped the conditions of possibility for public health policy for a generation. Public health could draw on its own intellectual history in order to give primacy to the authority of economic criteria and economic knowledge. Chapter 1 argued that, from the time of the 1930s’ depression if not long before, debates about public health in Asia were inextricably linked to questions of economic development, particularly rural development. For many at the time, malnutrition, endemic and epidemic disease were the (unacceptable) price of unrestrained capitalist development in the Table 3.1

1949 1950 1951 1952 1953 1954 1955 1956 1957

WHO Income, 1949–1957

Contributions from member states

Technical assistance funds

Total income

3,693,604 4,164,925 5,516,096 6,943,486 7,566,598 7,580,165 7,889,113 8,524,767 11,517,988

– – 2,899,069 4,997,233 4,604,064 4,253,435 5,142,903 6,121,044 6,180,663

5,136,893 6,280,427 10,905,332 13,683,999 13,598,382 12,868,945 14,412,719 16,053,189 18,425,093

Source: Constructed from WHO, First Ten Years of the World Health Organization (Geneva, 1958), pp. 522–23.

92 Decolonizing International Health

countryside. Yet at the same time, there grew a resolutely modernist version of the narrative linking health and development: the Congress National Planning Committee in the 1930s, for example, worried about public health partly because it acted as a fetter on industrialization. Recall, too, that the Bhore Committee’s expert advisers, during the Second World War, had made the argument for the economic importance of public health. As Janet Vaughan had written in 1945: ‘it seemed to us that the education of the civil servant and the legislator in regard to health as a national and economic asset was even more urgently needed in India than elsewhere in the world’.91 The ultimate authority in the field of international public health lay, by the early 1950s, with economists, and economists had clear ideas about what kinds of public health intervention counted as ‘useful’. The fundamental question concerned the value of public health. We have seen that technical assistance defined its goal as ‘economic development’, and ‘in particular … an increase in productivity’.92 How would international public health interventions contribute to this end? The new generation of development economists, working within the UN, offered ambiguous answers to this question. One of the formative documents defining development was the UN’s report on Measures for the Economic Development of Under-Developed Countries, authored by a committee which included the likes of W. Arthur Lewis and T.W. Schultz, and D.R. Gadgil, the Indian director of the Gokhale Institute of Economics and Politics. Discussing the question of how to ‘increase productivity’, the authors of the report conclude: In our opinion, most under-developed countries are in the situation that investment in people is likely to prove as productive, in the purely material sense, as any investment in material resources … this is most obvious in two spheres, the sphere of public health, and the sphere of education.93 A focus on productivity and capital accumulation, then, did not necessarily shut out investment in public health, but its scope was to be very clearly defined: ‘Not all expenditure on public health increases productivity. What is most productive is expenditure which reduces the incidence of debilitating diseases, such as malaria, yaws, hookworm, sleeping sickness or bilharzias, and expenditure for the improvement of diets, which increases the capacity to work’.94 On this view, rapid, technical public health campaigns – campaigns of disease eradication – were a desirable form of ‘technical assistance

The Political Culture of International Health 93

for economic development’, but the economic orthodoxy of the 1950s had much less room for the prescriptions of social medicine, particularly in its 1930s’ incarnation of ‘rural hygiene’, based upon the values of rural reconstruction (see Chapter 1). The model of the ‘dual economy’, starkly divided between the ‘modern’ and ‘traditional’ sectors, was a commonplace of development thought and of the thinking of the United Nations, which found eloquent expression in the work of W.A. Lewis. Rural areas of Asia and Africa, Lewis believed, belonged to ‘another planet’ compared with the few ‘modern towns, with the finest architecture’; there was a gulf between the mass of the population and the few ‘trousered natives … speaking western languages and glorying in Beethoven, Mill, Marx or Einstein’.95 The cardinal aim of development, in Lewis’s view, would be to move people from the ‘economic darkness’ of the traditional sector towards the urban capitalist economy. Contrary to the rhetoric of reforming, rural public health for the ‘masses’, the UN’s group of economic experts suggested that: ‘large numbers of people who cannot keep up with progress have to have their expectations of a comfortable life frustrated’.96 To defend its work (and its funding) in the terms of the economists, the WHO deployed the arguments of Charles Edward-Amery Winslow, an eminent American public health pioneer and social medic. In a widely circulated pamphlet, The Cost of Sickness, the Price of Health, and in an important speech to the World Health Assembly in 1952, Winslow made the case for the ‘economic value of public health’. ‘In the case of mosquito-borne diseases’, Winslow argued, ‘the economic returns due to control measures are, of course, particularly striking.’97 Preventable disease was economic ‘waste’, inhibiting production and productivity. In countries such as China, Egypt and India, where the average expectation of life at birth is in the neighbourhood of 30 years, only 54 out of every 100 children born ever reach the age of 15 and enter the period of maximum economic productivity…. Reduction in the death rate in the under-developed areas will mean an increase in human resources available for production in proportion to the population.98 Extending this argument, Winslow invoked earlier attempts to explicitly quantify the economic benefits of health. He cited the work of Colonel J. Sinton, a veteran British colonial malariologist who had

94 Decolonizing International Health

calculated that ‘malaria in India involves an economic loss of £80,000,000 a year’.99 This is a clear case of older arguments being translated into the terms of technical assistance. Sinton’s original work had made an argument against rapid rural development;100 by the early 1950s, Winslow used these statistics to argue that public health would facilitate just such development. In his attempts to quantify the benefits of health, Winslow received cautious support from the pioneering Swedish development economist Gunnar Myrdal. Myrdal conceded that ‘the economic value of health and the price of health, have been given comparatively little thought’ in economics; ‘our very large literature on capital, depreciation, and interest has never taken … [the concept of “personal capital”] very seriously.’ But he warned that ‘the economic value of preventing premature death, to take the simplest case, depends entirely upon whether such an economic development is under way which ensures productive work for the greater number of people we thus keep alive.’101 By allusion, by implication, the defenders of public health battled against a counter-argument that gathered force in the early 1950s: the argument that by ‘keeping more people alive’, international public health was contributing to the looming ‘population explosion’. At its most lurid, the argument was that public health work was saving people from ‘dying from malaria so that they could die more slowly of starvation’. Indeed the neo-Malthusian publicist William Vogt went so far as to call malaria a ‘blessing in disguise’. 102 The racial anxieties underlying this argument were clear: the spectre of proliferating dark masses threatening the security and prosperity of the West. Yet the idea that the relationship between public health and development was double-edged received much intellectual support both within and outside Asia, not least from the young discipline of demography.103 If the economists focused on the use of productive investment to transform resources, demographers had another angle on the value of public health: their implicit, and then increasingly explicit, conclusion was that, by accelerating population growth, international health might pose a grave danger to development. A number of historians have suggested that the theory of ‘demographic transition’ underwent a significant shift in the 1940s, from the view that a reduction in fertility rates would be a long-term consequence of economic development, to a view which saw planned interventions to reduce fertility as a prerequisite for development, failing which all of the calculations of economists were idle. As early as 1944, Frank Notestein, head of the

The Political Culture of International Health 95

Office of Population Research at Princeton University, and pioneer of the post-war discipline of demography, suggested that population was the determinant (rather than dependant) variable; that without a reduction in population growth, ‘modernization’ would have perverse effects.104 The very conspicuous success of the new technologies of disease control pioneered during the war was at the root of the new population panic.105 Countless Indian observers shared these concerns, worrying about the impact of population growth on ‘national discipline’ and national development: Gyan Chand, the Patna University economist, and Radhakamal Mukherjee, amongst others. The modernizers within the Congress Party had been interested in, even obsessed by, the question of population growth from at least the 1930s.106 Indeed, the use of Asia’s commonality to justify a common health programme on the grounds of its shared epidemiological patterns was double-edged; for there already existed a rich vein of thought associating the ‘Orient’/’Far East’/’Asiatic lands’ with over-breeding, impoverished masses. The UN’s 1952 Report on the World Social Situation resurrected this idea of Asia as inherently over-populated. One point of commonality uniting the region, the report argued, was Asia’s ‘thick’ population. Asia, the report pointed out, ‘is the most densely populated continental area of the world, and South and Southeast Asia is still more densely populated than Asia as a whole’.107 The picture of ‘Southeast Asia’ given in the UN’s Preliminary Report draws on the colonial discourse of Asia as a ‘land of famine’, naturally poor.108 Asia was characterized, the UN report argued, by an ‘all-prevailing poverty of most of the people’. The report argued that ‘every other social deficiency is minor’ compared with Asia’s poverty. To ascribe this crushing poverty to ‘any one cause alone’ would be ‘to oversimplify the issue’, but the pressure of population clearly loomed large in this reckoning.109 The latent conflict between public health and population growth came to a head in the 1952 World Health Assembly, when a senior official of the UN’s FAO made the charge quite explicitly, not to say crudely. Opening the meeting as a guest speaker, Sir Herbert Broadley – Deputy-Director of the FAO – put the charge against the WHO quite starkly: ‘the more successful you are in reaching your goal’, he told WHO delegates, ‘the more difficult FAO’s task becomes … more mouths demand more food. Where birthrates continue to advance, as is the case in many countries …[and] where death rates and human mortality are halved … we cannot just sit back and let nature take its course. If we do, nature’s course will be a very desperate one.’110

96 Decolonizing International Health

This charge drew two main lines of response. The first came from the Indian government, with the support of other Asian states. They suggested that concerns about population growth attendant on successful public heath work provided the justification for the expansion of the realm of public health (and of the remit of the WHO) to include questions of population (and, quite explicitly, population control). The Indian government was strongly in support of the population problem being medicalized, and delegated to the WHO. The Indian health minister Rajkumari Amrit Kaur – a devout Christian, a close associate of Gandhi’s, and a member of one of India’s fading princely families – had written to Brock Chisholm in early 1952, stating that: The means that are now available for reducing sickness and mortality and for prolonging life make it all the more necessary for Governments, particularly in countries which are over-populated or in which the population is nearing saturation, to promote measures for family limitation so as to make some adjustment between the number of people and the resources that are available to them.111 In the Indian nationalist imagination, the need for population control complemented, rather than contradicted, the need for public health: poverty, they argued, ‘condemns [the Indian people] to poor nutrition and inadequate safeguards against … the ravages of disease’; overpopulation exacerbated, perhaps even caused, this poverty.112 In constant tension with an elite fear of India’s ‘teeming millions’ stood a romantic celebration of the masses.113 This troubled ambivalence within the nationalist vision of population and well-being left a contradictory legacy for the post-colonial state and its approach to health and population. The planners’ imagination had recognized, since the 1930s, that ‘over-population’ would be against the interests of ‘social economy and family happiness’, as they had put it; yet this had always to be reconciled with the promises made to India’s new citizens that the state would care for their health. There could be no question of denying the population the benefits of new medical technologies to which India was now rightly entitled, as a sovereign modern nation, particularly under a system of representative government. The post-colonial imagination of health and population was considerably more conflicted than that of some American demographers who, increasingly, posited a stark choice. Thus the Indian government persuaded the WHO to fund a ‘pilot project’ in population control, the first of its kind. Under the direction

The Political Culture of International Health 97

of Dr Abraham Stone, a small team of investigators began an experiment into the workings of the ‘rhythm method’ of contraception at two sites: the residential area of Lodi in Delhi, and the village of Ramnagaram in Karnataka (then still part of Madras State).114 The Indian authorities optimistically believed that the rhythm method would be in accordance with ‘Indian traditions of self-control and … Gandhian thought’. The project represented an unprecedented effort to penetrate the domestic sphere, in quite intimate ways. Stone devised a seemingly ingenious system to guide ‘uneducated’ couples in the mysteries of the rhythm method. Each couple received coloured beads to map the reproductive cycle: green beads signalled ‘safe’ days, black ones signalled days of abstinence. Inevitably, reports surfaced of women believing that the beads themselves possessed ‘magical’ contraceptive qualities. And then things began to fall apart: An elaborately planned and ambitious investigation, from which definite and substantial results were clearly expected, was slowly found to dwindle in scope and possibilities. As the inquiry progressed, increasing numbers of couples fell out or were dropped as unsuitable … by miscellaneous processes of erosion, a respectably sized mountain slowly shrank to the dimensions of a mound.115 The WHO, born in the circumstances of post-war crisis, poorly funded and fragile, was hardly in a position to undertake interventions that depended on deep social and cultural knowledge, not to mention power. This is a theme that the second half of the book will develop at length. For the moment, it will suffice to note that, apart from the practical difficulties faced by the Indian pilot project, an important reason why the WHO did not widen its remit to consider questions of population in the 1950s was due to fierce opposition from Catholic member states. The Belgian delegate to the 1952 World Health Assembly, for example, said that ‘the problem of over-population in several regions of the world was primarily of an economic and social character, and only secondarily a medical problem … from the purely medical standpoint, population problems do not require any particular action on the part of WHO at the present time’.116 The Irish delegate went further, threatening that ‘some governments may be forced into a position where they had to withdraw from WHO’.117 This is a salutary reminder that hold of secular developmentalism on the world (anything goes, as long as it maximizes growth and, hopefully, welfare) was far from complete. Perhaps ironically, the Catholic position at WHO supported a ‘human-rights’-derived position

98 Decolonizing International Health

in opposition to the instrumentalist view then taking hold, holding up the (Christian) argument for the ultimate sanctity of each human life.118 Faced with the threat of internal disintegration at the very time when its legitimacy was under attack from prophets of population explosion, the WHO retreated almost entirely from the population debate, not to intervene in the field again until the later 1960s. In a revealing letter, the Director-General, Brock Chisholm wrote to a colleague in the United States public health service that ‘after exploring every possibility I could think of finding ways to take active measures from this headquarters about population problems, it seems there is no probability of our being able to do anything about it in the near future.’119

Conclusion What the WHO could do was to concentrate on its dramatic campaigns of disease control, using cheap and effective technology. As Charles Winslow put it to the World Health Assembly in 1952: From the standpoint of community psychology, the World Health Organization has been wise in choosing for major emphasis during the past two years simple and efficient procedures, such as spraying with DDT, immunization with BCG, and treatment of syphilis and yaws with penicillin, which make it possible to obtain dramatic and immediate results at a minimum cost.120 Notwithstanding the institution’s expansive declaration that health was ‘not only the absence of infirmity or disease but also a state of physical fitness and mental and social well-being’, the WHO moved firmly towards treating public health as a series of campaigns against specific ‘causes of death’. In a situation where funding was scarce, the availability of cheap medical technology, particularly DDT, strengthened the hand of those within the WHO that adopted a narrow biomedical approach to public health, which advocated military-style campaigns using medical technology to eradicate major disease. The philosophical underpinning of this approach consisted of what Stephen Kunitz has called ‘causal necessity’: because a disease like malaria, or tuberculosis, could not occur in the absence of a specific cause (the tubercle bacillus, or the malaria parasite), international health work would focus on those causes, and on those causes alone.121 The following chapters will consider some of the complexities and contradictions of this approach in practice.

4 Building a New Utopia

On paper – and the plans filled reams of thin, now greying, cyclostyled sheets – technical assistance was a finely honed machine, its component parts functioning in close synchronization. The two chapters that follow suggest that the operation of technical assistance projects was, in fact, much messier and often far removed from the discussions in the chambers of the world’s parliament of health. The extent of commitment to public health on the part of post-colonial states and international institutions determined the bounds of the possible. It was in debates at an international and a transnational level that ‘technical assistance’ emerged as the dominant framework for public health policy. It was in the WHO’s expert committees that the decisions were taken to launch ‘campaigns’ against the ‘big four’ diseases. Yet technical assistance was implemented ‘in the field’, or ‘on the ground’. These metaphors recur in contemporary discussions, highlighting, perhaps, the gap between the plans for a world without disease and the ‘muddier’ social, economic and political conditions shaping the production of health and illness. It was shown, earlier, that South and Southeast Asia assumed a particular centrality in discussions and plans for the new international public health after the Second World War. It was from these contradictions, encountered at every turn, that the practices of ‘actually existing’ international health were formed. This chapter and the one that follows (Chapter 5) provide overlapping narratives of the same chronological period: the ‘long’ 1950s. Their sequence nevertheless indicates a shift. This chapter examines the vast aspirations for disease control and eradication unleashed by the early ‘technical assistance’ projects in south and Southeast Asia, focusing on how this vision of a world without disease emerged from, 99

100 Decolonizing International Health

whilst in turn shaping practice. The level of ambition grew once the initial projects were well-established in the early 1950s, with the expansion of ‘pilot projects’ into ever-larger, interlinked schemes. Between 1949 and 1955, the WHO established and supported pilot projects in malaria control across Asia. Over 60 countries around the world were conducting spraying campaigns with DDT by 1960. Other ‘campaigns’ were almost as extensive. Hundreds of thousands of people were treated for yaws with penicillin in Indonesia and Thailand. Between 1948 and 1960, teams directed by WHO vaccinated almost 100 million people in Asia with BCG, most of them under 20 years old. Despite the centrality of technology to the vision of a world without disease, the new utopia envisaged contained seeds of older ones. Despite the ostensible privileging of technical over moral or social solutions, the earlier aspirations for public health as a form of moral and bodily self-government remained in view. The year 1955 was, in many ways, the high point, the year in which the WHO launched a programme to eradicate malaria from the face of the earth. But the debates surrounding malaria eradication also indicate that beneath the apparent confidence (arrogance, in the view of some post-colonial scholars) underlying disease eradication were fears of many kinds. A closer look at the evidence suggests that the fears and uncertainties were present from the start. Utopian visions persisted well beyond 1955, indeed until the early 1960s it seemed that the malaria eradication programme might well succeed. However, the chapter after this one argues that the innumerable ‘problems’, ‘obstacles’ and ‘difficulties’ confronting the Asian campaigns of disease control and eradication were an inherent feature of the techno-politics of the post-war era, from its inception.

Projects and policies As was shown earlier, discussions of public health during and after the Second World War challenged the discourse of tropical medicine by suggesting that the health problems of colonial Asia (and Africa) were not insurmountable. The likes of John Ryle, and the early leaders of the WHO, suggested that the high incidence of illness in the tropical colonies, soon to be independent, was as much due to social, economic and political factors as to environmental ones. Belief in the primacy of economic transformation and faith in technology came together to undermine the pessimistic certainties of tropical medicine. As the pressures of state-building and the Cold War impeded these visions of

Building a New Utopia 101

wide-ranging hygienic reform, technology still offered the agents of the new international health a way to effect change, without the corresponding need to intervene in fraught questions of social and economic transformation. The WHO and Asian governments mobilized the new technologies in a series of ‘pilot projects’, which took the form of intensive experiments in carefully circumscribed areas. The WHO began its ‘field operations’ in 1949. Among its first initiatives were malaria demonstration projects in rural areas: initially, four in India, one in Thailand and one in Afghanistan. Adapting Timothy Mitchell’s formulation, we might say that the projects constituted a ‘concentration and reorganization of knowledge rather than an introduction of expertise where none had been in use before’.1 In fact the malaria control projects were built upon earlier experiments, universalizing them as ‘policy’. D.K. Viswanathan’s work in Kanara district in Bombay state, for example, along with the experiments with insect control in Sardinia and in Greece, was a crucial foundation on which malaria control using DDT was generalized, partly through the work of the WHO’s Expert Committee on Malaria.2 The Indian projects were located in the Himalayan Terai, the Jeypore Hills, in Malnad (in Mysore) and in Ernad (Malabar district) in the foothills of the Western Ghats. Initial results were dramatic. In the Terai, within a year of spraying, ‘examination of blood-smears of 3,000 infants has revealed a reduction in malaria endemicity from 60 per cent to nil in the sprayed villages’.3 This represented a striking transformation indeed, in a region which, David Arnold has shown, was once ‘almost defined by death. This tract was considered so deadly as to be impassable for Indians and Europeans alike through a large part of the year’.4 In Malnad, too, ‘complete disappearance of the vector has resulted in general improvement of local conditions’.5 In Thailand, a malaria control project began with WHO support in Chiang Mai province, and here the WHO was able to boast, again within a year, of ‘a striking improvement in general health conditions’.6 In each case, the WHO deemed the ‘extension’ of the work to be imminent: pilot projects would spread the new technical expertise far and wide. The early attempts to treat yaws showed similar success. India, again, was the first to receive a demonstration team, in this case in Simla. The ‘dramatic response’ of yaws to antibiotics (‘for the first time…available free of charge to the people of the area’) was ‘rapidly publicized’.7 Within a year, tens of thousands of injections had been delivered by pilot projects in Indonesia and Thailand.

102 Decolonizing International Health

Looking across Asia as a whole, the WHO’s activities in the 1950s resembled a network with a number of nodal points (‘pilot projects’, ‘demonstration sites’, ‘projects’), between which experts, supplies and fleets of vans moved, constantly. By the mid-1950s, on the eve of the malaria eradication campaign, the organization was responsible for eight projects in Afghanistan; ten in Burma; 11 in Ceylon; 15 in India; ten in Indonesia, and nine in Thailand. 8 The projects encompassed everything from malaria control and demonstration projects using DDT to pilot projects in nursing education and the establishment of statistical infrastructures.9 Numerous kinds of expertise came together within the framework of ‘technical assistance’, from drug and insecticide manufacture to nursing. Despite their very limited number and their localized nature, such projects succeeded in orienting ‘health policy’ in the region towards focusing on specific diseases, and specific ‘campaigns’ of treatment. There was a remarkable similarity in the health policies adopted by polities as different as those of India, Indonesia and Burma, each framed within a broader, ‘Southeast Asian’ approach to health. Each accepted the WHO’s definition of priorities, and its definition of ‘health’ in terms of clearly distinguishable causes of death. Thus, at a major national conference in 1952, the Burmese government spoke avidly of an ‘Anti-Big Four Campaign’, the ‘big four’ being the four diseases targeted by the WHO expert committees for international action: malaria, tuberculosis, venereal diseases and leprosy.10 Across South and Southeast Asia, each state had a malaria control organization; each undertook campaigns of mass vaccination with BCG, and each followed the lead of the WHO even though in none of the three political cultures was public health anything like a priority in government spending and public policy.11 The absolute amount spent by the WHO in South and Southeast Asia was very small, and insufficient to explain the extent of the WHO’s ability to shape the international agenda. One commentator, writing in 1952, estimated that it worked out to one-seventh of a cent per capita in Asia. ‘Expressed in these terms’, he said ‘the programme seems hopelessly inadequate – or might it be that this method of measuring the work of WHO is wrong?’12 In the case of India, Roger Jeffery has estimated that, in the period 1950–1959, external aid accounted for an average of 14 per cent of the total expenditure on health.13 Of this, the UN (WHO and UNICEF, the latter concentrating on providing material supplies) accounted for only 15 per cent, most of the remainder coming from US bilateral aid to India, channelled in particular

Building a New Utopia 103

through the Public Law 480 programme.14 Yet Jeffery’s careful calculations suggest that the US funds were largely used to purchase ‘material supplies’ like DDT, whilst the WHO provided ‘technical advisers’. He concludes, in an exhaustive study of the internal workings of India’s health bureaucracy that ‘WHO’s “non-political” status has meant that its advice has had more weight than that of other donors’.15

Health and nationalism In part, the WHO was able to wield influence over the bounds of discussion on health policy because its campaigns were readily absorbed into narratives of progressive national development. To mark ‘World Health Day’ on April 7 1953, one of India’s leading English-language daily newspapers, The Hindu, dedicated an editorial to the work of the WHO, arguing that ‘there cannot be any progress in the social and economic conditions unless there is a marked increase in the level of public health’. Focusing on the contribution of the WHO’s work to India’s, and Southeast Asia’s, development, The Hindu argued that In India anti-malarial campaigns, undertaken with WHO assistance, have been successful. There has been an increase in the population of the Terai region and the area under cultivation has gone up 40 thousand acres. Equally striking successes are claimed in the eradication of malaria in some of the most deadly hotbeds of the disease in Burma. In the battle against tuberculosis the WHO helps in the retraining of doctors, nurses, home visitors and X-ray technicians. … That highly infectious disease, yaws, is widespread in many Asian countries, like Indonesia and Siam, and, by a suitable use of penicillin and preventive measures, substantial gains have been recorded in the fight against the scourge. Plants for manufacturing penicillin and DDT, two of what one may call the fundamental drugs of the modern world, are being set up in India with WHO assistance.16 This was the language ‘battles’ and ‘campaigns’, with a clear focus on technology (and technicians). The editorial then draws a direct link between international health and ‘nation-building’. Far from imposing itself upon governments, the WHO’s ‘assistance is given only when asked for by governments concerned and its aim is to afford opportunities for such administrations to help themselves’. The newspaper succeeded in giving priority to public health as a form of technical assistance: ‘While there may be some argument regarding the usefulness

104 Decolonizing International Health

and efficacy of other types of technical assistance extended to underdeveloped countries’, the editors argued, ‘there cannot be two opinions about the humanitarian and nation-building activities of bodies like the WHO’. That the WHO’s work is considered ‘nation-building’ by India’s leading English-language nationalist newspaper, is striking. The editorial concludes with a ringing call to arms: ‘Health and prosperity are inseparable and in the battle against disease, there can be no neutrals’. Everywhere across the region, the images and narratives of nationalism played a central role in making ‘policy’ out of myriad isolated ‘pilot projects’ and ‘demonstrations’ which the WHO took to India, and elsewhere in Southeast Asia, as a first step in reorienting the discourse and practice of public health. The rapid spread of malaria control projects through India received dramatic affirmation, in ways that made it possible to imagine a singular ‘campaign’ against disease, linking the local, national and international planes. In 1954, India’s national malaria control programme was formally launched, funded and orchestrated by the WHO and the American Economic Cooperation Administration.17 Some manifestations of this modernist representation of public health projects tended towards dramatic display. Ritual performance linked international public health campaigns with the state, and with nation-building. Writing on the occasion of ‘World Health Day’ in 1955, celebrated on April 7th – an occasion commemorated around the world – a major Indian newspaper reported that ‘the Ahmedabad Corporation has undertaken mass DDT spraying on 7,000 tenements in the working class area in observance of the World Health Week’. In Shillong, in India’s northeast, ‘hundreds of students paraded the streets carrying posters exhorting people to observe the World Health Day’. Hyderabad, too, witnessed a ‘procession of medical men, women and nurses carrying placards, “Lead Healthy Lives and Keep Your Surroundings Clean” which went round the city marked the celebrations in Hyderabad’. Going yet further, ‘two planes of the Indian Air Force dropped leaflets on health on Hyderabad and Secunderabad’.18 In the latter case, the commemoration of international public health was wedded to a dramatic assertion of the state’s presence, through its Air Force planes, just seven years after Hyderabad was subject to forcible incorporation into independent India by ‘police action’. In the Republic of Indonesia, too, early pilot projects in malaria control (26 spraying programmes in all by 1955) were associated with the assertion of state power, and in particular with the state-sponsored scheme of transmigrasi – the transfer of population from Java to the

Building a New Utopia 105

outer islands.19 ‘Some thousands of families have been rehabilitated in the new transmigration areas in West Java and South Sumatra’, wrote the Indian malariologist Jaswant Singh, on assignment with the WHO, ‘this became possible only after malaria control had been achieved’. The Indonesian demonstrations of malaria control were concerned, too, with moulding hygienic citizens; the Indonesian government’s ‘policy’, Jaswant Singh declared, was to ‘create in [the people] a desire for living under hygienic conditions … a sense of responsibility and the will to carry out simple measures through their own efforts’.20 Yet the agglomeration of malaria control teams in India and Indonesia (as also in Burma, Thailand and Ceylon) were part of a much broader regional, even global, network of similar teams. The crucial point about the public health campaigns of the 1950s is that they were organized at once nationally and transnationally. WHO-sponsored projects were integral parts of ‘national’ policy, at the same time as all of the malaria control projects, and all of the BCG vaccination projects across Asia constituted unities of their own. The WHO was both an international and a transnational institution; it was both a professional body advising member governments and the site of networks of malariologists, DDT sprayers, insect-collectors and vaccinators. The supply of material goods for technical assistance illustrates, in itself, the intersection of national spaces and transnational networks. Amongst the earliest priorities of technical assistance was to equip the larger Asian countries with the supplies to construct DDT and penicillin factories of their own, producing these goods within protected national economies. Under an agreement between the Government of India, WHO and UNICEF, signed in July 1951, construction began on a penicillin factory at Pimpri, near Pune; the factory, Hindustan Antibiotics Limited, began production in 1955.21 Yet from the outset, supplies produced or procured by States were not enough to put the plans into action. The Indian pharmaceutical industry continued to be dominated by the private sector (both large Indian firms and foreign firms) in the 1950s.22 As late as 1956, Nehru felt the need to write to the Chief Ministers of India’s States, suggesting it was ‘not necessary … nor desirable’ for state governments to buy ‘foreign made penicillin’; ‘our production of penicillin is considerable and can meet all demands made of it’, he promised.23 Nehru’s pleas notwithstanding, technical assistance activated a ceaseless flow of things along the networks of foreign aid and international assistance: Fordson vans, DDT spray guns, vaccines, petrol and refrigerators.24 Yet in some Asian states, not even imported supplies for malaria eradication were exempt from customs duty.25

106 Decolonizing International Health

These supplies were often ‘gifts’ from the American Economic Cooperation Administration. Even in the era of the 1955 Afro-Asian Conference in Bandung – the high point of the attempt by some Asian leaders not to allow the Cold War to erode their sovereignty – American supplies remained at the heart of national-transnational public health campaigns, because they were directed towards an end higher than that of sovereignty: the welfare of the population.26

A post-colonial discourse? In their public celebration and commemoration in Asia, the new international health projects appeared as an inherently post-colonial enterprise. Access to the latest international expertise and the latest international technologies, denied to them under colonial rule, was a democratic right claimed by Asian nations. But the architects of technical assistance, too, envisaged their task in opposition to the epidemiological and epistemological legacies of colonial medicine. In one of the first comprehensive reports to emerge from a technical assistance mission, the WHO representatives on a UN mission to ‘plan Burma’s social services’ declared that ‘mass’ diseases ought to be treated with ‘population-wide measures and not individual ones’.27 The basic premise of the new international public health was to minimize contact with individual bodies by working, wherever possible, upon ‘the environment’. In a report that seems to have been written deliberately to create an effect of radicalism and novelty, the WHO consultants used an unusually blunt, even shocking, logic in discussing the most prevalent of health risks: those faced by mothers and infants. Since birth is a physiological act it is not per se dangerous. Major pathological risks to the child come after it is born, when it is faced with its new environment. In the control of this environment lies the main opportunity for reducing infantile mortality. The risk to the mother is not the natural act of birth but her state of health…. That is not primarily an obstetrical problem but rather one of the control of the prevalent disease; once again, the environment is implicated, and it is not too much to say that the control of malaria will do more to lessen maternal mortality than any other measure.28 With this statement, international health consultants speaking within the discourse of international public health sought to establish their authority in relation to the legacy of colonial medicine, and they

Building a New Utopia 107

sought particularly to displace ‘culture’ from the heart of colonial medical knowledge. In a quest for universality, the techniques of international public health attempted to abstract from the problems of ‘culture’ that had so concerned colonial medical officials, missionaries and social reformers.29 The discourse of international public health was a self-conscious exercise in homogenization, flattening the ‘rule of difference’ that governed the perception of colonial medicine. Moving onto another ostensibly ‘medical’ problem, the international consultants in Burma suggested that the authorities ought not to treat venereal disease through ‘the control of individual cases’. Such an approach was only possible, they argued, ‘where there is a high degree of administrative control of the population, where there is a moderate incidence, where the dangers of venereal disease are appreciated by the public, and where machinery exists for seeking out the contact and bringing him or her to a treatment centre’.30 The implication was that in the condition of an ‘under-developed’, once colonized country, the ‘high degree of administrative control’ simply did not exist. ‘Colonial’ categories of perception, however, persisted, in interesting ways. In order for the project of mass disease control to succeed, population groups had to be identified in a finely differentiated way – ostensibly according to their differential susceptibility to infection.31 Here, then, the categories of the colonial and then the post-colonial ‘ethnographic state’ came into play in governing the path of disease control projects, in shaping the perception of technical assistants as to ‘problem’ areas, likely hotbeds of resistance or recalcitrance.32 Thus one of the first WHO malaria control projects, in Malabar, could not but fall back on understanding its subject population in terms of ‘moreevolved castes’ and ‘very under-developed hill tribes … who should be considered pagans’; industrious Syrian Christian communities claiming nature’s bounty in Lockean fashion and ‘very primitive aboriginal tribes’.33 Yet in the discourse of technical assistance, the object was no longer to reform the primitive and discipline the savage; ‘ethnographic’ differences were of interest for purely ‘technical’ reasons. Each community, so defined, built their walls of different materials, replastered them at different times, and so posed different challenges to DDT spraying teams.34 Essentially, the notion of the irreconcilable ‘difference’ of colonial populations prevailed, but its significance shifted. In the colonial era there existed a clear distinction between the government of the welfare of advanced populations in liberal metropolitan societies, and the government of ‘primitive’ peoples, in whose case coercive measures and

108 Decolonizing International Health

administrative interventions were easily justified.35 In the immediate post-colonial era, the dichotomy remained (between the ‘West and the rest’), but it now had different implications. Third World societies were precisely those resistant to penetration by the medical apparatus, and therefore the arena where the discourse of international public health could claim authority. Medicine was for societies that could afford it; simple, effective technology was the panacea for those that could not. Thus, technical assistance challenged the autonomy of ‘medical’ expertise as the ultimate authority, in the specific conditions (themselves defined by political economy, demography and geography) of the Third World. By orienting the goals of public health towards the control, and then the eradication, of specific diseases, the architects of technical assistance privileged particular kinds of knowledge, types of expertise, whilst devaluing others. Although technical assistance was constructed upon myriad local experiments, it played down the importance of locality in the practice of public health. If, as Michel Foucault argued, the ‘status of the doctor is generally a rather special one … he is hardly ever an undifferentiated or interchangeable person’, the practice of technical assistance sought to challenge this unique claim to the ‘right to make medical statements, and to claim for them the power to overcome suffering and death’.36 The WHO criticized clinicians’ ‘great concern for retaining so-called professional standards’, suggesting that these ‘professional standards’ were meaningless in the conditions of the Third World, ‘preserved from contact with the problems of the population at large’.37

Journeys to health The (partially post-colonial) discourse of international health undoubtedly served as a link between ‘all the various activities, relations, subject positions, sites, forms of authorization’ that made up the ‘specific practice’ of technical assistance, dispersed across myriad pilot projects, documents, reports and missions of inquiry.38 Yet, perhaps above all of this, international health policy was built on imagination, even faith. If we ask what connected myriad disparate ‘pilot projects’, the answer lies often in the minds of individual public health officials; the WHO consultants whose personal journeys, crossing south and southeast Asia, linked myriad small projects into a larger whole. The venerable Indian malariologist, D.K. Viswanathan, was one such official. Over the course of 1956 and 1957, Viswanathan travelled

Building a New Utopia 109

extensively throughout the Southeast Asian region, inspecting projects, assessing their workings, speaking to health officials, compiling his impressions. The diaries of his journeys indicate the importance of what – borrowing from Benedict Anderson – we might call ‘administrative pilgrimages’ in making ‘health policy’ a tangible, transnational reality.39 From headquarters to ‘field’, from pilot project to pilot project and from country to country, the pilgrimages of a new corps of international health officials cemented the reality of ‘health policy’. The impression conveyed by Viswanathan’s itinerary is one of constant movement. He was conveyed by air, by truck and by boat, to inspect his domain. The following extract from his diary of a tour through Burma in February 1957 is worth quoting at length: 5.2.57 08.00 to 19.00 Myitkyina to Kya Gyi Kuin and back – 136 miles by road with Drs. Ohn Pe, Sambasivan and Lal. Saw a spray squad at work under a malaria inspector and a supervisor. Met a mid-wife in charge of a sub-unit (at Pin Paw) attached to Mogaung health unit which was also visited. Met Dr. Mukherjee, Medical Officer in charge of Mogaung hospital, lady health visitor and midwife of health unit. Saw two leprosy cases in two villages, Pamti and Pilan Kataung on the way, along with the leprosy inspector… 6.2.57 08.30 to 16.00 Myitkyina to Myothit and on to Bhamo by road – 108 miles. Met Dr. Das Gupta, a lady health visitor and four midwives at Myo Thit health unit. Met two malaria inspectors and malaria assistants of Bhamo on the way, and Dr. Basu, Dr. Mazumdar and Dr. Paul of the Civil Hospital in Bhamo. 7.2.57 07.00 to 19.00 Bhamo – Lashio by road – 200 miles with Dr. Ohn Pe, Dr. Gurubaksh Singh and Dr. Sambasivan. Met Dr. Tin Sein, malaria medical officer, Shan States at Namkhen on the way with a malaria inspector. Saw a squad at work under another malaria inspector and a supervisor at Nampheka40 These projects, scattered and localized, constituted the essence of international health policy in the 1950s. Viswanathan’s journey through Burma followed an earlier tour through Ceylon in October 1956 – travelling hundreds of miles, inspecting bridge construction, land clearance projects, leprosy colonies and DDT spray teams – and visits to Afghanistan, Nepal and sites across India.41 The journeys were, in

110 Decolonizing International Health

effect, a set of links connecting the nodes of international health policy. The number of Indian doctors and administrators Viswanathan encountered in Burma, and across the Southeast Asian region is itself striking. Here we see the intersection of the new international connections made possible by the United Nations, and older networks of colonial medicine: up to and beyond Burma’s administrative separation from India in 1936, a good number of Burma’s trained medical personnel were Indian, whether through the Indian Medical Service or in private practice. In the post-war era, Indian medical personnel continued to be recruited directly into service by the Burmese government, even as the Burmese denounced Indian neo-colonialism. Long after the exodus of the majority of Burma’s Indian population and the Burmese government’s attempts to minimize its dependence on its neighbour, Indian doctors, consultants and inspectors continued to play the central role in advising and establishing the country’s health services. A contemporary report suggested that ‘most Burmese government doctors have resigned to take up more remunerative private practice. Unable to fill these vacant posts locally, the Burmese government sent a mission to recruit doctors in India … 600 applied for the 280 positions advertised.’42 We can only speculate that better pay or conditions might have attracted Indians to Burma, despite powerful memories of the exodus of Indians from the country in 1942, and despite the fact that India itself faced serious shortages of trained medical personnel. At the same time, through the institutions of the British Commonwealth (the Colombo Plan), Burmese technicians went directly to India for training.43 And through the networks of the United Nations, Indian consultants toured Burma to advise on policy. Transnational connections in the service of biopolitics could, still, transcend the boundaries of national sovereignty. The connections forged by the new international organizations across Southeast Asia were personal as much as discursive, and as often haphazard as planned. Given the gulf between aspiration and the capacity to effect change (‘policy’), much was left to the discretion of the technical assistants themselves. At the furthest reaches of the ‘new’ Asia, where state power was weakest, the international advisers had the greatest discretion, and at times resembled the colonial district officials of old, the men on the spot who ‘knew their natives’. Here the international medical consultant could appear as swashbuckling conqueror of disease, as in the case of Dr Luigi Mara, an Italian WHO consultant who came to be known as ‘Dr Malaria’, chasing

Building a New Utopia 111

nomadic Kurdish populations through the borderlands of Iraq in order to spray their tents with DDT.44 In Cambodia – newly independent from France – public health was as romantic, if more leisurely, a pursuit. With only a handful of qualified Cambodian doctors at independence, international consultants had free reign. This is made abundantly clear in the diary accounts of Dr Arthur E. Brown, a British public health specialist who had trained at the London School of Hygiene and served with the UNRRA at the end of the war, and who served as the first WHO consultant to Cambodia. There was, Brown wrote in his diary, ‘a fairy tale quality about the whole situation which a glass or two of good French wine did nothing to dissipate’. Early on in his time in Cambodia, Arthur Brown convened a lunch of a ‘convivial group of UN experts’. They met at the Petit Tricotin, in the centre of Phnom Penh, ‘a pleasant place to eat out in the fresh air, in whatever section took one’s fancy. It was popular, too … frequented by “taxi girls”, but they were discreet and on the whole attractive’. The composition of the group, which gathered in these fine surroundings, evokes much better than any official report a tangible sense of ‘technical assistance’: M. Franz, a stocky Belgian, had just arrived to get a UNESCOassisted programme under way. His field was Community Development. Mr Andrew Gilmour, a lanky Scot who had spent many years in Malaya, and had been Financial Secretary in Singapore, was the new UN Financial Adviser to the government … Finally there was the WHO contingent: two Belgian lady doctors, and a Dutch nurse involved in the Maternal and Child Health and nursing training, and myself, whose task was to help the government with planning and running its health programmes. We all spoke French … more or less!45 On paper, technical assistance was a finely oiled machine with its component parts contributing to the end of ‘development’. In practice, the details were worked out on the ground, ‘over a good meal, a couple of bottles of Beaujolais’. Like a good colonial official, Arthur Brown wrote unselfconsciously that the ‘… smiling brown-skinned Cambodian lived his lazy happy life, getting the essentials of life with minimum effort. Even his women seem satisfied and good tempered …it takes reforming Europeans to spoil all this what with missionaries, commercial travellers, insurance agents, emancipators of women, and people like me’.46 Brown toured his domain, escorted by the Cambodian Minister of

112 Decolonizing International Health

Health, in a convoy of black government Citroens, ‘escorted by police motorcycles and wailing sirens’. On one occasion, the entourage mounted eight elephants, and ‘with his Excellency [the local governor] leading the way, we went in procession through the town, cheered on by the population’. It was, Brown declared proudly (ironically?) a ‘United Nations occasion’.47 Tales of international medical heroism, not unlike the ‘Jungle Doctor’ narratives of missionary medicine in Africa that Megan Vaughan has analysed, circulated widely in the 1950s, largely for a western audience.48 The dominant impression from these accounts, though, is how few international consultants there were. The whole project rested on the ability to train a new kind of personnel, the ‘new men’ of technical assistance. If, on the frontiers, ‘Dr Malaria’ could make things happen, in the heartlands of South and Southeast Asia, much depended on the small army of local vaccinators, nurses, truck drivers, and X-ray technicians that staffed the massive international campaigns of disease eradication. These technicians would be the ‘new men’ of international public health, imbued with an ethos of depoliticized, technically competent service. Technology was at the heart of the international health campaigns of the 1950s, and this technology needed to be embodied in an army of men (almost entirely men, they were) with the dispositions to operate the new technology.49 As we have seen, the architects of the international health campaigns held up technology as a way of transcending the constraints of ‘culture’ and society; it was down to the army of technicians to put that technology to work. In one of the earliest technical assistance reports from Burma, (cited earlier in this chapter), the Fordist logic underlying the new practices of public health emerged explicitly. The fundamental premise was this: ‘If any complex procedure, whether it be making a motor car or poisoning a germ or insect without poisoning the human being near it is examined, apparently skilled operations can be seen to be composed of a series of unskilled ones’.50 The logic of technical assistance was that ‘the greater the degree of job-breakdown, the more the skill is concentrated at the centre, and the more it is diluted at the periphery.’ This was the principle underlying the public health approach of the mass campaign: These principles are applied in preventive medicine in the current anti-malaria campaigns involving Asian populations numbering millions; they are applied in curative medicine in the same way in

Building a New Utopia 113

the current anti-syphilis and anti-yaws campaigns also involving millions. They can also be applied in Burma to the current health problems of the scattered rural peoples.51 The fundamental task of the new agents of international public health lay in the mastery of technology; developing the dexterity to read film slides rapidly, the movements of the hand needed to vaccinate rapidly and accurately.52 Thus, declared one report: One film reader can read 100 to 300 pictures per hour if assisted by a secretary. One radiographer can take 150 to 500 pictures per day of seven hours work. One trained laboratory technician can handle 50 specimens a day including culture. One home visitor on a bicycle can visit a maximum of 100 houses per month. One registry clerk can handle 200–300 persons per day if the work is well organized. One tuberculin-tester can test or read 500–1000 per day if the work is well organized.53 This new generation of medical technicians appear here as so many cogs in the well-oiled machine of technical assistance. The masculinity at the heart of technical assistance was marked. In the photographs, and in almost all of the field reports in the archives, the local characters are overwhelmingly male. Technical assistance was a deeply gendered approach to international policy. The technicians who carried it out were men, supervised by a sole white (often Scandinavian) female nurse, even as women and children were chief amongst the intended beneficiaries of their interventions. Although large amounts continued to be spent by international agencies on the education of local nurses, during the mass campaigns of disease control, male medical auxiliaries played the greater role.54 Technical assistance, after all, was part of what James Ferguson calls a ‘masculine version of modernity based on a hard, metallic, masculine industrialism’55 – this modernity was based, too, on hard, metallic cans of DDT, and physically fit men to carry them. Perhaps the quintessential ‘health technicians’ of the international health campaigns were the DDT sprayers in malaria demonstration teams. Dr Luigi Mara, the Italian malariologist who would later be

114 Decolonizing International Health

immortalized as ‘Dr Malaria’, conveys the daily routine of the spray-men: The field assistants (squad leaders) were responsible for: a) weighing the DDT for the day’s work; b) cleaning the pumps and keeping them in good conditions; c) preparing the suspensions from the concentrate in the field; d) measuring the area sprayed and recording in a book all the details about the number and nature of the structures, number of persons living in them, owners’ names, etc.; and e) submitting in the evening a report on the day’s work.56 The field assistants appear, here, as the main characters in the drama of public health sweeping across South and Southeast Asia: they served as the ‘eyes and ears’ of the campaigns. Throughout his journeys through south and Southeast Asia, D.K. Viswanathan, the eminent malariologist, highlighted the importance of the spraymen, the supervisors and the insect collectors. His reports are constantly calculating their capacity, constantly determining how far and how fast they can go. ‘Each sprayman can spray a minimum of six houses per day to begin with’, he suggested, ‘but after a couple of rounds of experience in spraying, he can easily do nine houses, or a total surface of 2250m2 per day and still later even 3000m2’.57 The expansion of the malaria control programme in Indonesia, as elsewhere in the region, was conceived graphically in terms of men and machines. Viswanathan’s report contains an elaborate table entitled ‘Projection of National Malaria Control in Indonesia in 1956–7’, detailing, for each province, the number of spraymen, insect collectors, supervisors and mantris required, together with the kilograms of DDT and the ‘trucks or other transport’: ‘3 station wagons, 11 trucks, 16 jeeps, 10 trailers, 825 bicycles’ for West Java.58 Viswanathan was particularly pleased to see ‘the insistence by the national and WHO malariologists on meticulous compliance with the drill of spraying procedures in every detail. While this might appear to stifle “initiative” on the part of the regional staff, strict compliance with the drill is necessary, lest incorrect spraying techniques masquerade as “initiative”.’59 The new generation of malaria technicians were to be the agents of transformation, but they were not to take too much ‘initiative’; their bodily reflexes were to be trained in such a way that initiative would not be necessary. Yet for all of the attempts to ensure that the health workers were technicians, and nothing more, older expectations of

Building a New Utopia 115

their social role persisted well into the era of international public health. In a set of instructions to trainee spraymen on Burma’s malaria eradication campaigns – the instructions themselves adapted from a Mexican manual for malaria workers – there remained the expectation that the technicians would also function as agents of modernity.60 They would function as rational, self-governing citizens whose example would serve as a beacon for the illiterate rural masses. Similarly, in an address to a newly trained cohort of community development workers – many of them would staff UN-sponsored technical assistance projects in public health and other fields – Jawaharlal Nehru asserted the specifically post-colonial, nationalist character of the endeavour, with reference to the freedom struggle. ‘Thirty years ago’, he declared, ‘it was possible for one man to bring out that “elemental force” from the Indian people … the question now is how to regenerate that “elemental force” and the urge to do things’, and how to harness it to the much more quotidian task of development.61 Somewhat uncharacteristically, for a firm believer in the ‘scientific temper’, Nehru pleaded with the new agents of development to ‘search your hearts to find out whether you are going back to your States with the feeling of a crusader or a missionary.’62 This harked back to an earlier aspiration of Nehru and his fellow modernists during the late 1930s. In their plans for the health services of post-independence India, the Congress Party’s National Planning Committee declared that India’s young health workers needed to project ‘missionary spirit’. ‘By example and persuasion’, the Congress report declared, ‘they will spread the gospel of healthy living, communal and personal, and thus take other villagers a step or two away from their age-long prejudices and superstition on the road to better living’.63 Nehru, in 1952, appealed to the administrators of ‘projects’ – in health, sanitation, agricultural development and housing – to ‘not … be afraid of using untrained people, wherever you can, provided you think they have some energy and enthusiasm’.64 It seemed that the physically fit, self-governing, dedicated individuals like the malaria sprayers would serve as agents of a new Indian/Asian modernity, the ‘new men’ of the new approach to health and development. The Prime Minister himself, however, had a prescient awareness of what was to happen: ‘with all the good [bureaucracies] do’, he noted, ‘they have a certain deadening influence on anything that is spontaneous or vital’.65 The new men of the international health campaign resemble, at times, the army of labourers in Kafka’s parable ‘The Great Wall of

116 Decolonizing International Health

China’: impelled by enthusiasm and commitment, driven from place to place, project to project, lest they realize how forbidding the task is before them. ‘One is forced to conclude’, Kafka’s narrator declares, ‘that the command deliberately chose the system of piecemeal construction’, partly ‘in order to encourage the men of lower rank, whose mental capacity far outstripped their seemingly petty task’. The arduous labour of construction for ‘months or even years’ in ‘some uninhabited mountain region hundreds of miles from their homes’ would be work ‘to which no end could be seen even in the longest lifetime’ – so, many felt, would the work of medical personnel permanently assigned to rural areas. However, the ‘piecemeal system’ – or the mass campaign – allowed for a rallying of forces, a periodic injection of enthusiasm. Sent away after the completion of ‘a section’, the foot soldiers’ journeys showed them visions of ‘completed sections of the wall towering up here and there’ and ‘the cheers of new armies of labour streaming up from the depths of the provinces’. And ‘on all the roads they met with cheering, flags, banners; never before had they seen how vast and rich and fair and lovely their country was.66

Seeds of doubt As one reads again various accounts of the long struggle against malaria, now flowing so dramatically in man’s favour, it appears that there has been no steady triumphal march. Rather, as suggested by Conant’s simile, the happenings resemble those of modern warfare: advance objectives wished for, reconnoitred, attacked, boldly seized, precariously held, and painstakingly consolidated.67 Paul F. Russell (1955) This chapter has suggested a close connection between the aspirations for a world free from infectious disease and a democratic modernism, channelled, in part, through the United Nations and its roving consultants. This modernism built upon belief in the universal effectiveness of new technology, and conviction that the technology would allow public health to expand to ‘the people’, beyond the confines placed on it by the exclusions of colonial medicine. The architects of the new international public health believed not only that technology could subdue nature – in the sense both of microbes, and the ‘natural’ poverty of much of Asia – but that the use of technology would mould a new generation of workers, technically competent and devoted to serving the cause of development with enthusiasm.

Building a New Utopia 117

The declaration of a global programme to eradicate malaria reflected, in many ways, the unease beneath the technological optimism that this chapter has tried to convey. On the one hand, malaria eradication was the natural, even inevitable, outcome of the logic of technical assistance: the logic of pilot projects expanding throughout the land, the confidence underpinning the mobilization of new technologies. On the other hand, the attempt to formalize and globalize, as ‘policy’, the interconnections between the proliferating local projects, was a response to the fact that all was not as it seemed. Beneath the surface of technological confidence were all manner of fears, and obstacles both human and ‘natural’. Paul Russell, perhaps the most optimistic of the malariologists, himself possessed by an unshakeable faith in eradication (which some have ascribed to his background; he was the son of a missionary), encapsulated this contradiction: ‘boldly seized, precariously held’. The WHO’s formal recognition that its ultimate aim was the complete eradication of malaria came during the World Health Assembly of 1955.68 Here we see encapsulated the technological confidence that this chapter has attempted to convey in its smallest manifestations. However, much of the urgency underlying the move towards formalizing the goal of international health in terms of eradication arose from the sense of panic experienced by malariologists at the prospect that mosquitoes might prove resistant to the assault by DDT.69 Malaria projects using DDT were at the heart of the WHO’s struggle for legitimacy and funding within the politics of technical assistance.70 Malaria eradication proved an objective that could easily be understood, something that proved important in the competition for funds and, as importantly, in projecting a particular image of international public health. A dramatic and seemingly effective public health intervention, malaria control (and then eradication) helped to strengthen the WHO in the competition for funds, and for a place within the set of interventions that made up ‘technical assistance’. Malaria control fit particularly well with the framework of technical assistance: it was based on the simple, mass application of technology towards an end that could be justified in terms of its tangible contribution to ‘economic development’. It is thus unsurprising that increasing evidence of insecticide and drug-resistant mosquitoes provoked a sense of alarm amongst policymakers within the WHO in general, and the Expert Committee on Malaria in particular. By 1952, studies began to show the fragility of one of the most publicized successes of DDT: the anti-malaria cam-

118 Decolonizing International Health

paign in Greece. A WHO report suggested that, despite massive spraying, first houseflies and eventually malarial mosquitoes showed resistance to DDT.71 The fear of developing resistance is clear from reports on malaria control in the Asian region. A 1953 report by WHO states, at first that ‘none of the governments reported that the anopheline mosquitoes in their countries had developed resistance to the insecticides’; this is immediately qualified, however, by the admission that ‘in Burma, Ceylon, Indonesia, and the Philippines, there were impressions (unconfirmed scientifically) that culicines have developed a certain amount of resistance to DDT’.72 ‘To heed the warning from Greece’, declared Emilio Pampana – the Venezuelan malariologist and member of the WHO’s Expert Committee on Malaria – in 1955, ‘means to plan the programme in such a way that house-spraying could be safely discontinued before insecticide resistance develops’.73 What was needed was a ‘new pattern of planning’, envisaged in terms of ‘huge areas, of total coverage, of great thoroughness of control … its implementation will require more funds, more trained personnel, greater efficiency of operations, and better systems of epidemiological surveillance than are necessary now.’74 Pampana’s was the opening article in a special issue of the WHO Bulletin, designed to make the case for an urgent acceleration of the worldwide malaria programme. Critical perspectives were not absent from the debates on malaria eradication. Within the WHO organization itself, many recognized that malaria eradication may not be a universally appropriate policy. A confidential memorandum prepared for the Director-General, Candau, before his tour of Southeast Asia in late 1954, raised questions about the effectiveness of the WHO’s strategy of malaria demonstration projects. In India, ‘control areas are widely scattered’, and in Thailand, ‘the campaign appears to be poorly carried out and inadequately supervised’. The authors of the memorandum raised serious doubts: it would be ‘most difficult’, they wrote, ‘to attain an end-point of transmission that might give the possibility of eventually discontinuing the spraying’. Yet, the report lamented that eradication was being pushed forward, influenced by a large influx of ‘aid, unassociated with high level malariological advice, and complicated by the urgency of spending available money’.75 Amongst the strongest dissenting voices at the 1955 World Health Assembly was that of the Liberian delegate, Dr Togba, the sole African represented in the discussions. ‘Much was said about DDT’, he agreed, but he ‘wondered whether enough research had really been done on

Building a New Utopia 119

the use of that insecticide … in his own country, it had been found that DDT decomposed very rapidly, and was therefore of little use as a residual insecticide’. Indeed, experience in Liberia had shown that an alternative insecticide, dieldrin, was far more effective, yet ‘it has also been found that for large-scale use it was prohibitively expensive’.76 This underscored the fact that cost played as much of a role as efficacy in the decision to intensify the worldwide use of DDT. Dr Togba was cautious about the possibility of mass anti-malarial campaigns. Largescale malaria control ‘may present no great difficulties in a relatively well-developed country like Venezuela, or an island like Ceylon’, he conceded, ‘but the magnitude of the task of spraying residual insecticides in every village of Liberia, in the face of bad communications and adverse weather conditions, could hardly be imagined unless it had been experienced’. He concluded, presciently, that ‘it would be illadvised to arouse the hopes of governments and run the risk of censure when results failed to come up to expectations’.77 These criticisms did little to dent the confident exhortations of Paul Russell, the pioneering American malariologist whose career with the Rockefeller Foundation had taken him from India in the 1920s to the WHO’s Expert Committee on malaria in the 1950s. Russell expressed ‘surprise’ at the criticisms of DDT, gently implying that such doubts were based on ingratitude, since ‘the finest insecticide discovered in the twentieth century was available … and, if used energetically, it would certainly eradicate malaria’.78 In pushing through his proposal, Russell evoked a sense of urgency, of unique opportunity: Already four or five of the fifty-odd major malaria-carrying anopheline species had developed different kinds of resistance to DDT in certain areas … Since there was not at present any satisfactory substitute method of attacking malaria, it was very important to eradicate the disease before the vector anophelines became resistant to the insecticide. It was not known exactly how many years the insects would remain sufficiently susceptible to DDT to allow of malaria eradication; the minimum appeared to be six or seven years and the maximum ten.79 For reasons analysed at length by others, the proponents of malaria eradication prevailed.80 The contribution of this chapter to an already extensive literature on the malaria eradication programme might lie in the suggestion that to understand malaria eradication we need to look well beyond the level of ‘policy’, and focus on the logic, planned and

120 Decolonizing International Health

un-planned, of techno-politics, which built eradication ‘from the ground up’. The malaria eradication campaign proceeded apace after 1955, with the multiplication of spraying teams, the cementing of networks both national and transnational. The campaign was well supported by American funds.81 Yet the fear of resistance always lurked in the shadows. A document submitted to the Third Asian Malaria Conference, held in Delhi in March 1959, was eloquent in its attestation to the logic of expansion. In sparse, note-like prose, the report reviewed, country by country, the progress of malaria eradication. In Burma, 2,468,000 houses had been sprayed by 1958, and in malariometric surveys of children, only 0.4 per cent tested positive for malaria parasites; in addition, 8.3 kilograms of chloroquine was employed to treat ‘fever cases’. At the bottom of the page, under the heading ‘field operations’, the report noted quietly that ‘increased tolerance to DDT’ was found in the A. sundaicus species, though it remained ‘susceptible’ to dieldrin. 82 The Indian anti-malaria campaign was ‘the world’s biggest’. In 1958, a total of 8,704 malaria squads were in operation – a dramatic indication of the expansion of malaria control from a few pilot projects – and 438 million houses had been sprayed. Again, ‘field operations’ showed that of the nine ‘recognized vector species’ in India, ‘resistance to DDT has appeared only in A. sephensi, and resistance to dieldrin in A. culicifacies.83 And thus, in the immaculate prose of technical assistance, the report continues, detailing numbers, targets, ‘obstacles’ and ‘problems’, never losing its optimism: ‘only’ a few species were resistant, a change of insecticide would suffice to do the job; an adjustment here, and adjustment there, and the plans would be realized. The next chapter will return to the beginning, so to speak, in order to examine these countless adjustments, and the apparent contradiction between techno-centric optimism and the proliferating obstacles in its way.

5 The Techno-politics of Public Health

Beneath the confident visions of technology freeing the world from infectious disease, many architects of the international campaigns were concerned that all was not well. Plans there were in abundance and, it seemed, they had achieved results to justify belief. However, this chapter will show that inherent in the process of techno-politics was a tendency for practical obstacles to proliferate in the face of expertise, provoking more plans, more projects and constant adjustments. Timothy Mitchell argues that it is characteristic of technical assistance, in health as in other fields, that ‘failures and adjustments’ were overlooked, because ‘techno-science had to conceal its extra-scientific origins’. He suggests, and this chapter confirms, that ‘fundamental difficulties were presented as minor issues of the improper implementation of the plans, unexpected complications’ or ‘bureaucratic delays’.1 The first part of this chapter examines the constant adjustments necessary for the mass campaigns of disease control to function: mosquitoes acquired resistance to DDT very early on, and pilot projects showed worrying results. The need to reconcile these experiences with the optimistic narrative of ceaseless expansion – from pilot project to global eradication – led to a great concern with acting as rapidly and as intensively as possible. Yet the problems multiplied: broken down trucks, monsoon rains and interrupted supplies of vaccine. Above all, there was the ‘problem’ of human agency. Auxiliary health workers, malaria sprayers and vaccinators were poorly paid and insecure in their jobs, leading to the need for more and more ‘supervision’, complaints about their ‘inefficiency’. The vision of health workers as disciplined technicians remained far from realization. Underlying these problems was the fact that the depoliticization of technical assistance was always incomplete. Despite its effects as an 121

122 Decolonizing International Health

‘anti-politics machine’, to use James Ferguson’s felicitous phrase, technical assistance was always threatened by the world of politics spilling over into its domain, and it was threatened by the most fundamental problem that it was, itself, designed to solve: poverty.2 Thus at the margins of the discourse of technical assistance, it was clear that inequality of land ownership, poor urban housing, and rapid population movements all contributed to an enduring experience of frequent illness for large numbers of people, despite the success of campaigns against specific diseases. The constant subversion of plans, by human and non-human forces, produced ill-defined and poorly articulated fears of ‘resistance’ among the architects of international public health. Planners believed that only dramatic and visible success would engender confidence among the public (or, perhaps, that only dramatic success would cause the public to share the planners’ own confidence). Yet I suggest that the mixed – though often enthusiastic – responses to the health interventions of the 1950s might be explained, rather, by what was unseen and unspoken by the technical assistants. The chapter ends with an account of an unusual episode: in 1955–56, the international campaign of BCG vaccination was openly challenged in the political arena by C. Rajagopalachari, a conservative South Indian politician and veteran of the nationalist movement. In this (exceptional) instance, he was able to exploit the silences in the discourse of international public health to mount a thorough, if short-lived, critique of its fundamental assumptions.

Human and non-human obstacles Today, we are simply doubling, blindly, the use of those same methods for killing mosquitoes which, for years, we’ve been told to use. We have very limited knowledge about the insects we want to destroy. … A good illustration of their cleverness and adaptability is the fact that within a given season, just one kind of mosquito can display fifteen different ways of attacking man. Sometimes they make a headlong dive …3 Phanishvarnath Renu, Maila Anchal Soon after the WHO had declared a global campaign to eradicate malaria, Jaswant Singh, an eminent Indian malariologist, toured Indonesia on behalf of the organization. His findings were not encouraging. Far from demonstrating the universal efficacy of DDT, the WHO’s pilot project in Tjilatjap, Java – from which the national eradi-

The Techno-politics of Public Health 123

cation campaign arose – showed results that were far from optimistic. Singh summarized them with concision: 1. DDT indoor residual spraying at a dose of 2 gm/m2 failed to produce the desired control. 2. Spleen rates in 1954 were higher than in 1952 in certain localities after a satisfactory fall in 1953. 3. A significant infant parasite rate and the sporozoite positive sundaicus were still found in the area.4 Moving, in his tour, from Tjilatjap to the town of Semarang, Singh encountered similar problems, which originated, partly, in the very success of DDT in supplanting earlier, sanitary attempts at malaria control.5 Drainage and clean weeding used to receive greater attention before 1950. DDT spraying programme was started in 1953 with satisfactory result for a period of two years. Since then increasing densities of A. sundaicus have been reported. At the same time, malaria morbidity, spleen and parasite rates have shown an increase. Singh cited numerous local studies that had shown that local mosquitoes had acquired resistance to DDT. Later the same afternoon, he was taken to visit ‘village type huts in the city of Semarang which had already been sprayed four times … occupants looked sickly and gave a history of repeated attacks of malaria. DDT had proved ineffective’.6 The following year a confidential report, circulated within the WHO, pointed to fundamental problems inherent in the use of DDT. ‘Malaria control today is essentially based on the interruption of transmission by residual insecticides’, the report declared, yet there was increasing evidence of the ‘inactivation’ of DDT due to ‘chemical degradation of DDT to DDE by dehydrochlorination owing to the presence in the soil of various mineral salts and particularly of iron oxides’. The problem was particularly acute given that ‘in many malaria stricken areas of the tropics the majority of houses have mud walls’. Yet in the discourse of technical assistance, this was simply an obstacle that could now be foreseen and circumvented: Inactivation of DDT is no longer an unknown factor: we know that it occurs by sorption and how to foresee it with reasonable accuracy … A major problem still remains to be solved: How to prevent sorption.7

124 Decolonizing International Health

The emphasis, in public statements and field reports alike, was on the need for speed.8 Jawaharlal Nehru, addressing an Asian malaria conference in Delhi, in 1959, put the challenge in more universal terms: ‘In this, as in other matters which affect us underdeveloped countries’, he declared, ‘the pace, the speed of advance, become all the more important. … If you don’t go fast enough, the others will’. ‘The others’ in this case referred to all manner of natural forces, from evolving anopheles mosquitoes to the ‘iron laws’ of human population growth. Yet Nehru himself suggested, at odds with the discourse of technical assistance, that non-human actors might shape the outcome of events: ‘In many of these regions of Asia, maybe elsewhere, malaria has been a more powerful determinant in the course of human history than people imagine’; the implication was that it might still prove to be so.9 If technical assistance turned the ‘natural’ obstacles to disease control into problems of logistics, the practice of techno-politics, too, proved troublesome. As one astute commentator put it, ‘the killing of mosquitoes or spiroschetes depends just as much in a mass campaign upon the provision of petrol, tyre-patches and drivers’ salaries as upon an exact judgement of the dose of DDT or penicillin’.10 Thus in Burma, ‘difficult terrain, poor communication, small villages and the long distances to be traversed’ made the spraying campaigns ‘somewhat difficult’. 11 Fearing the development of resistance to DDT, the WHO’s malaria experts conceded that ‘it has not been possible to obtain simultaneous coverage of all malarious areas, chiefly because of the inaccessibility of certain localities for local reasons’.12 By the end of the 1950s, after nearly a decade of spraying, the WHO concluded that ‘about two million people are still inhabiting endemic areas which, owing to their “inaccessibility”, have not so far been sprayed even once’.13 ‘Inaccessibility’ was a matrix of many things: terrain and transportation, the limits of human agency, and the politics of insurgency on Burma’s frontiers. Writing in similar terms of Indonesia, D.K. Viswanathan phrased it delicately, in terms of ‘gaps’ between ‘the Centre’s schemes and provincial implementation’: The number of squads is not always related to the quantum of work. Insect collectors are not employed in many provinces. Malaria mantris who are well trained are not utilized for supervising spraying operations in many provinces. In some provinces the full quota

The Techno-politics of Public Health 125

of transport has not yet been made available, and even insecticides are not always received in time.14 This provides a clear illustration of the profusion of obstacles in the way of the functioning of technical assistance: lack of staff, who in turn were insecure and of low status, ill-equipped with bicycles and vans (themselves prone to break down) and ‘even insecticides’, the very technology they were employed to mobilize. As a result of countless practical difficulties, Viswanathan concluded, on a tour of Indonesia, that the proportion of houses successfully sprayed was too low ‘to warrant hopes for successful control, let alone eradication’.15 The pan-Asian campaign of BCG vaccination, too, encountered ‘obstacles’ to its smooth functioning, at every turn.16 In the words of Kirsten Hansen, a ‘BCG nurse’ sent to oversee the fieldwork of the mass vaccination drive in Ceylon, ‘improvisation was the order of the day.’17 Conditions were difficult. The fleet of Fordson vans supplied by UNICEF were not all that reliable. ‘Torrential rains and subsequent floods during this period also caused material interference with the programmes’, her report continued. In particular, ‘the frequent breakdown of vans, due to adverse communications, and the great distances which usually had to be covered before repair facilities were available, whittled down the working periods of the teams.’18 In the Eastern Province of the Ceylon, ‘difficult terrain’ and the need for ‘long journeys on foot, sometimes through virgin forest’, meant that ‘however carefully the programmes were planned … [there was] a target shortfall of at least 40%’.19 Perhaps the greatest frustration, however, came from the disused cinema projector: ‘the expensive cinema equipment given by UNICEF has only been used on a few occasions when unofficial help was available to screen films. No cinema operator has been appointed in spite of repeated appeals made both personally and in writing.’ This was particularly trying, as ‘in Ceylon … cinema publicity is invariably followed by an increased attendance at work centres’. The WHO nurse was convinced that ‘had it been possible to use the cinema apparatus on a planned programme basis, productivity would undoubtedly have increased’, but the sad sight of the unused cinema projector ‘is a source of constant disappointment to all the staff’.20 If the mass campaigns can be seen as medical technology in motion, it becomes clear that there were obstacles in the path. Above all, it was the technical assistants that shaped the workings of technical assistance. The archival reports are full of references to problems of ‘personnel’. The ‘problem’ was essentially that the hundreds

126 Decolonizing International Health

and thousands of health workers, truck drivers, vaccinators and X-ray operators who staffed the most ambitious health interventions of the 1950s were neither faceless technicians in a Fordist production line of health, nor the self-subjecting agents of modernity that the more romantic observers of the drama of public health wanted them to be. Neither technology nor enthusiasm was enough, in the end, to make it work. Low rates of pay and job insecurity were problems that vaccinators and technicians faced, almost universally across South and Southeast Asia. A WHO nurse writing from Indonesia observed that Lay vaccinators are recruited locally at a very low pay. As long as they are working in their home towns and can live with their families, they can manage, but when the team moves onto the next place, the problem starts. They get no extra allowance and their pay hardly covers the cost of board and lodging.21 The positions of both the mantri and the lay worker were far from secure. WHO nurses observed that their poorly educated ‘lay’ counterparts ‘rarely dare approach a person in a higher official position than himself’;22 ‘with a strong minded doctor in charge, the mantri is handicapped’.23 The insecurity of the field staff, and the consequent difficulties of recruitment, featured heavily in the discussions of the Indian Government’s Central Committee on Health Policy in the mid-1950s. Health ministers from a number of States pointed out that the field staff on the BCG project were ‘not members of a permanent and pensionable service’. Furthermore, the vaccinators and field staff had ‘run into trouble because of active opposition from qualified practitioners’.24 The WHO officers working with the BCG teams in the field produced a similar assessment. ‘Sustaining the interest of the field staff’ in their ‘repetitive, and always arduous’ work was increasingly difficult, a WHO public health nurse wrote, as their ‘future possibilities…do not seem to have been even vaguely defined’.25 Another commentator put it in stronger terms, when he argued that ‘their work is monotonous and they live a hard life away from their families. Good work is seldom appreciated, nor is bad work punished, and although the campaign has been going for more than 10 years, they are still “temporary”, with little hope of promotion.’26 The constant practical difficulties faced by the programmes of disease eradication in the 1950s arose, then, from the impossibility of control-

The Techno-politics of Public Health 127

ling the complex human and environmental factors involved in shaping the conditions of public health – from the efficiency of spraymen to the weather. But the problems grew also out of the fact that technical assistance constantly confronted the messy ‘political’ issues it had attempted to submerge.

Poverty and politics The international health campaigns of the 1950s were founded on the assumption that poverty was amongst the ‘natural’ conditions that the new medical technologies of the age could circumvent. Questions of poverty, like questions of politics, were ‘parametric’, listed along with annual rainfall and topography at the beginning of each technical assistance report.27 Campaigns were organized on a territorial basis, each centred on a pilot project or a training centre – the most important of them staffed by international consultants. The boundaries of these regions were assumed fixed, usually according to geographical or epidemiological features (Burma’s hill zones, Ceylon’s ‘dry’, ‘intermediate’ and ‘wet’ zones), or, as in India, according to the lines of provincial boundaries.28 Yet the population of South and Southeast Asia in the 1950s was anything but stable. If the borders between nation-states were increasingly rigid, the boundaries of regions were constantly in flux.29 The 1950s saw a significant and continuing movement of population across the borders of India’s partition. Civil and political conflict spurred the frequent movement of population in Burma and Indonesia, to say nothing of the tens of thousands of Asian Muslims who made the pilgrimage to Mecca each year.30 Not only were the pathogenic targets of the international health campaigns constantly slipping out of control, so, too, were human victims, or ‘vectors’, of infection. The plans for disease eradication assumed populations to reside within static regions, densely or sparsely populated, hypo- or hyper-endemic with malaria. They assumed, furthermore, that the space of claimed sovereignty would also constitute the space of national disease control programmes. Yet as Agnese Lockwood, an American political scientist, observed in Burma at the time: The whole programme … is seriously jeopardized by the inaccessibility of insurgent-held regions. To be effective, a programme must cover the infested areas and their population 100 per cent. Not only

128 Decolonizing International Health

do mosquitoes fly from one place to another but, even more serious, they gradually develop resistance to insecticides. At the present time, a race is developing in Burma between the vector resistance and the government’s ability to make the entire country accessible to malaria spray teams.31 There was a constant ‘threat of infection across borders with India, Pakistan, China, Laos, and Thailand’.32 Although the malaria control programme was conceived as a transnational initiative, the WHO planners ultimately assumed a series of ‘homogeneous’ national spaces that did not exist. At the end of the 1950s, Edmund Leach concluded that the Burmese state’s ‘claims regarding territorial suzerainty were optimistic in the extreme’. Leach argued that ‘the authority exercised by the central government over the Independent Sovereign State of Burma over its outlying regions in the year 1959’ was in some senses ‘a fiction’. Nor did the sharp dichotomy between the densely populated Valleys of Burma and the ‘isolated’ Highland societies prove an adequate representation of Burmese society.33 Even anecdotal evidence from the time suggests that people, including sick people, were very mobile, presenting a picture of ‘population’ very different from the one established in the documents on malaria and tuberculosis control in Burma. Ludu U Hla, Burmese journalist and folklorist, collected, in the 1950s, a series of life histories, narratives of his fellow prisoners in Rangoon central jail – each was a story of movement, from the Karen lands to lower Burma, from Rangoon to the Tamil Nadu countryside and back again; and, almost universally, from the country to the city.34 The complex role of population movements, and the poverty underpinning them, in shaping patterns of disease emerged from a report by the senior WHO officer, Dr F. Loven, who had traversed Burma, from Palaung villages in the highlands to Rangoon and Mandalay. 35 The problem of tuberculosis, Loven wrote in his report to headquarters, ‘is to a great extent a social one’. He highlighted the ‘density of population and the nutritional status, occupations, accommodation, economic position, social life and habits of the people’. The ongoing insurrections in the country ‘create more poverty amongst the people and cause restlessness, migration and a mixture of the population; because of these insurrections, the townships, district-headquarters and cities in Burma are over-crowded with evacuees.’ 36 WHO surveys of tuberculosis infection rates were completely unable to reach this fluid population, bound as they

The Techno-politics of Public Health 129

were by administrative categories that emphasized the need for fixity. 37 Inflation was rife, ‘the calories taken in are derived mainly from cheap starch’, leading to ‘grave nutritional deficiencies amongst the Burmese people’. Indeed, a survey by an Indian WHO nutritional consultant Radhakrishna Rao showed that 72 per cent of those he examined were ‘undernourished’. 38 With urbanization and poverty came the dark, damp corners ideal for the transmission of tuberculosis: The houses in which the general mass of population live are very poor, ill ventilated and badly illuminated. Several families usually live together and one open case of tuberculosis amongst them is enough to transmit the infection. The common spoon used at the table, the common drinking cup, the common cheroot (cigar) and the spitting habit contribute towards the common end.39 Implicit in this discussion was the suggestion that BCG vaccination could achieve little in these conditions, where infection spread rapidly and where poverty and malnutrition weakened powers of bodily resistance. Loven’s report, typewritten and filed away, provides an example of the ways in which technical assistance could contain a critique of itself. Loven’s report highlighted the importance of population movements, themselves impelled by ongoing Karen and Communist insurgencies on the frontier, in producing the poverty and overcrowding at the root of the tuberculosis epidemic. Yet according to the rules governing the discourse of technical assistance, ‘political’ and ‘other’ factors were simply logistical conditions, like the state of the roads. It is striking how infrequently the prose of technical assistance makes any reference to political violence, to the revolutionary movements challenging the authority of the state not only in Burma, but also in Indonesia. ‘Unrest’, at most, was given as a reason why teams could not ‘reach’ their targets.40 Loven’s attempts to construct a compelling narrative of causation carried little authority within the ‘library, or documentary field’ of technical assistance. Anecdotal, and based on observation, it lacked the translatability of statistics. Here Loven had indeed, in Foucault’s terms, ‘gradually ceased to be himself the locus of the registering and interpretation of information … beside him, outside him, there have appeared masses of documentation, instruments of correlation, and techniques of analysis which … modify his position as an observing subject’.41

130 Decolonizing International Health

The return of community The discourse of technical assistance was similarly reticent on the subject of rural poverty. Indeed, I suggested earlier that the discourse and the practices of technical assistance arose, in part, out of the geopolitical and financial need to occlude questions of rural reform and land distribution; that, indeed, was one of its conditions of possibility.42 It is for this reason that descriptive accounts of health, (often, imaginative ones), produced from outside the discourse of technical assistance, expose the jarring silences within it. I have already, in this chapter, cited the words of Phanishvarnath ‘Renu’, a pioneer of modern Hindi literature, whose 1954 novel Maila Anchal provides an insightful commentary on questions of health, of life and death, in rural India at the time. The novel’s protagonist, a young and idealistic doctor, is in many ways the very opposite of a technical consultant; he longs for absorption into the village community, for an erasure of his status as an outsider and an expert. The doctor was a government official, an outsider. He wasn’t really part of the village … It was the doctor’s own fault. Right from the start he had kept aloof from the villagers. His relations had been only with the patients and their diseases. He had never made an effort to mingle in village life. But lately, he was starting to enjoy life in the village, and the people there. He loved the village. Why didn’t anybody throw dye at him? He wanted to be drenched in coloured dye and mud and cow dung!43 Yet the doctor nevertheless participated in the global flow of ideas and information about public health, by using DDT, and by publishing his work in medical journals circulating in India and beyond. The narrator situates the doctor’s aspirations within the utopian vision of a world without disease: ‘[The doctor] wanted to serve mankind, to find the causes of diseases that destroyed human life, to invent a new medicine that would wipe out bacteria, and leave all of mankind healthy and strong. … His name would be mentioned in medical colleges all over the world’.44 Ultimately, the fictional doctor finds his vision shattered by the realities of rural poverty. In a climactic passage of despair, the doctor finds himself confronted with failure: The doctor was awed by the poverty and helplessness of these folk. What great acceptance must sustain them! … What good did it do

The Techno-politics of Public Health 131

for those who felt pity for them to make up long lists of vitamins and distribute them? … People who came here trying to alert the villagers to the dangers of malaria by showing slides and writing preventive procedures on wall posters with pictures of mosquitoes might as well be from another planet! …It was considered a luxury to use even bitter-smelling oils to repel mosquitoes; getting people to use DDT or mosquito nets was out of the question. … It must be the life-giving black soil of the fields that keep the people alive. Moist and fertile, overflowing with crops … wasn’t this earth their mother? But soon, they might lose the right even to set foot on the soil! Before laws could even be enacted, men were busy devising ways to by-pass them. … A man with no land was no man at all; he was but a beast!45 On this view, the most advanced medical technologies would be unable to confront the deeply entrenched inequalities of the village community, and thus the fundamental conditions shaping the life chances (and life expectancies) of its inhabitants.46 Like Dr Loven’s recognition of political violence and forced migration as a factor in the spread of tuberculosis in Burma, the problem of rural poverty and landlessness did, at the margins, enter the discourse of international public health. At the World Health Assembly of 1954, Andrija Stampar once again raised the issue of rural public health. ‘I hope’, he declared, that ‘we may resume the studies [on rural public health] which were initiated and organized by the Health Organization of the League of Nations some twenty years ago, although a considerable period has elapsed since the problems of rural health were on the agenda’. Despite all the technological advances of the past few years, he suggested, ‘if the world is considered as a whole’, the question of rural public health ‘has lost nothing of its acuteness’.47 Yet, as Socrates Litsios has recently pointed out, Stampar’s report coincided almost exactly with the decision to launch the global malaria eradication campaign, to which questions of rural poverty and even rural health services were considered irrelevant.48 It would thus be a mistake to suggest too categorically that the discourse of technical assistance was closed to considerations of rural poverty. As I suggested earlier, the boundaries of ‘technical assistance’ were permeable, though it was nevertheless governed by a set of regularities (structured by the end of economic growth, liable to discount non-’technical’ solutions to the problems it generated). On one level, national and international networks of technical assistance retained an

132 Decolonizing International Health

interest in sponsoring (if not appropriating) much more local approaches to the problems of public health, rooted in the perspectives of the 1930s and informed by the enthusiasms of the rural reconstruction movement. The Government of India’s Community Development Programmes were the quintessential example of this attempt, in the 1950s, to re-activate the approaches to rural public health of the 1930s. Modelled, at least rhetorically, on Gandhi’s constructive programme, Community Development sought to foster development by relying on the agency of the self-governing village community, channelled through the institution of the panchayat. The Community Development Programme stressed the principles of cooperation and ‘self-help’, and at one level recognized the ‘social obstacles’ in the way of agricultural development: unequal land holdings, the unavailability of credit to poor families.49 The Community Development Project was initially financed by American assistance, and met with approval for its emphasis on class conciliation and for its gradualism. A UN mission to investigate community development in South and Southeast Asia appeared to encourage the incorporation of the broader social, even moral, emphasis of community development into the UN’s own ‘technical assistance’. Yet on this view, ‘culture’ is merely one more factor to be added to the list of constraints and conditions amenable to technical transformation: Religion, folklore, customs, patterns of human relations and all those factors affecting attitudes which we describe as culture, clearly have a bearing on the success of community programmes. We have already referred in passing to certain of them as causing resistance to change or obstacles to improvement. … 50 Nevertheless, the UN consultants (one of whom was John B. Grant, the Rockefeller official who had pioneered social medicine across Asia) praised the likes of the Firka Development Scheme in Madras, a selfconsciously Gandhian project in rural reconstruction. The health activities of the scheme were modelled on Gandhi’s enthusiasm for nutrition and sanitary reform: it ‘emphasized balanced diet, supply of clean drinking water, promotion of preventive measures as well as curative measures of ordinary ailments by “natural methods and simple remedies with suitable village herbs and drugs”’.51 To allow the final statement (on indigenous remedies) to pass without commenting on the need for medicine to proceed on ‘scientific’ lines was most unusual for the language of technical assistance. At many points

The Techno-politics of Public Health 133

during their inspection of community projects in India, Ceylon and the Philippines, the commission did acknowledge that ‘land reform is an imperative need in such countries and that community projects are well suited to implementing certain important requirements for land reform.’52 Needless to say, these remained but pious aspirations. If the community development approach to agrarian poverty (and rural public health) provided an alternative, in the 1950s, to the technocentric internationalist approach, it had many problems of its own. Francine Frankel, in her unsurpassed study of India’s development apparatus in the 1950s concluded, of the community development programmes, that: The dominant landed castes were successful in manipulating the majority of subsistence cultivators and landless workers fragmented by vertical factional structures to capture the village institutions. They increased their access to scarce development resources and strengthened their position as strategic intermediaries, linking local markets and power structures to the state and national economic and political systems.53 Confirmation of this position comes from a somewhat unlikely source, in the studies undertaken by the Visva Bharati society, the rural uplift organization founded by Rabindranath Tagore. Deeply committed to the establishment of health cooperatives in rural Bengal, the society might be the last to despair of the potential for such local solutions to the problems of health, but it nevertheless concluded that not much could be done by the local health cooperatives in the absence of the ‘general economic development of the country’. The entitlements of local farmers to the conditions for good health, ‘is largely determined by economic factors over which they have hardly any direct control’. The authors of the Visva Bharati report concluded that ‘the national interest would be served better by paying more attention to vulnerable groups’ – such as the ‘untouchable’ Bayen villagers whose landlessness was so acute as to preclude the opportunity to grow (and thus consume) the fresh vegetables so essential to health.54 Throughout South and Southeast Asia, contemporary sources point to the deeply entrenched inequalities in rural society, which continued to work against the effectiveness of locally based approaches to public health, while also inhibiting the smooth operation of mass campaigns of disease control.55 If local conditions shaped, constrained and diverted global intentions, so too did forces operating at the national

134 Decolonizing International Health

and international levels shape the conditions of possibility for local agency in the production of health and illness. Only in a few cases do we see evidence of an alternative approach to public health asserting itself in South Asia, an approach at odds with the depoliticization inherent in the international campaigns against infectious disease. Kerala presents a history quite different from that of much of South Asia; one in which the ‘universal’ campaigns of disease control and eradication were matched by a sustained, and deeply politicized, effort to build up local institutions.56 Health, in mid-twentieth century Kerala, was championed as a ‘people’s right’, in a way almost without parallel in the region.57 The declaration that health was a ‘fundamental right’, institutionalized with the foundation of the WHO after the Second World War, took on ethical force and political meaning in Kerala, where a political culture of social reform had taken root in the nineteenth century, particularly in the princely states of Travancore and Cochin.58 The mobilization of a well-organized communist movement, first within and later outside the Congress Party, led to a level of political competition unusual in post-colonial India. This led, particularly around the time of the (short-lived) Communist victory in the 1957 elections, to a heightened awareness among the poor that ‘health services were their right and not a boon conferred upon them’.59 In the words of one observer, ‘In Kerala, if a Primary Health Centre were unmanned for a few days, there would be a massive demonstration at the nearest collectorate led by local leftists, who would demand to be given what they knew they were entitled to’.60 Doctors working in primary health care centres in Kerala at the time recall numerous instances when the very poorest would make extensive use of dispensaries, demanding ‘soochi’ (injections) or ‘micchar’ (‘mixture’, or medicine), and expecting a medical presence at all deliveries.61 The specific configuration of political society in mid-twentieth century Kerala served to turn national and international promises of health and welfare into claims of entitlement. The contrast even with the (relatively progressive) neighbouring states of Tamil Nadu and Karnataka was stark.62 Local politics, including the politics of unequal social relations, had an impact on the mass campaigns of technical assistance; to the planners, they appeared as so many ‘obstacles’ in their way. The process of depoliticization, however, was never complete. Yet I have also tried to suggest here that it would be a mistake to juxtapose the techno-centric international campaigns of disease control against an idealized, even

The Techno-politics of Public Health 135

mythical notion of ‘local’ agency in public health. When they did succeed in surmounting the ‘obstacles’ in their path, the international health campaigns were often better able to reach the poorest and most disadvantaged than were haphazard, if fashionable, schemes of ‘community development’.

Rationality and resistance I have focused thus far in this chapter on the practical obstacles confronting technical assistance, and on the enduring role of poverty and social inequality in shaping the conditions of health, even in the age of technological ‘magic bullets’. However, there was also an underlying, epistemological problem: a problem of understanding. From the start, the mass campaigns tried to avoid contact with local populations to the greatest extent possible. This suggests that the proponents of disease eradication doubted their own abilities to make a convincing case for their work in terms that large numbers of people would understand. The proponents of international health took for granted many of the assumptions of modernization theory, as much as did economists, demographers and sociologists. Planners of health, too, held to a narrative that linked poverty and under-development with pre-rational, superstitious modes of thought – the transition to rationality would accompany the process of urbanization, industrialization and the diffusion of education.63 However, in order to persuade less-than-fully-rational people to accept vaccination or house sprayings in the first place, the results of health work had to be tangible. The proponents of technical assistance conceived of the problem in terms of a gap between faith and reason, and their challenge was to make their work as visible (and thus as able to stimulate belief) as possible. Everywhere, the language used to describe popular receptions of international health work was the language of faith and belief. ‘The Indonesians love injections’, wrote one WHO consultant, deliberately using the language of trusting emotion and suggesting childlike enthusiasm, ‘and are quite willing to file up for hours in order to get one’.64 The documentary archive of technical assistance makes repeated reference to the ‘miraculous’ transformations that result from the mass campaigns. Indeed, Charles Winslow expressed this view clearly even in 1952: ‘From the standpoint of community psychology’, he declared, it was important to focus on those interventions that ‘make it possible to obtain dramatic and immediate results’.65 The WHO planners were not very different, in

136 Decolonizing International Health

this sense, to the British colonial administrators who explained the widespread acceptance of anti-syphilis drugs in Nyasaland and Zambia with reference to Africans’ ‘belief in magic’.66 The problem came when the results were neither dramatic nor immediate, as was the case with BCG vaccination against tuberculosis. In the case of yaws, ‘when the skin ulcers … disappear after on injection of penicillin, people are easily persuaded’. However it was ‘more difficult to convince superstitious and illiterate people that a small injection in a child’s arm will prevent its suffering from tuberculosis later in life’.67 Paradoxically, the perceived problem here is that the ‘superstitious and illiterate’ people do not believe enough; their blind faith fails them at the crucial moment, the moment of vaccination. As long as they simply used the practices of biomedicine without ‘believing’ in it, there was the prospect that they might not accept something, unseen, which might benefit them in later life.68 For all of the pretensions to confine technical assistance to technical questions, the concern with belief, with converting large numbers of people to new and modern ways of seeing, was never eclipsed. The debate over faith and rationality could, of course, afford a different interpretation. For Pramoedya Ananta Toer, pioneer of modern Indonesian literature, the advance of mass campaigns for the treatment of yaws into the Javanese countryside in the late-colonial and early post-independence era was a form of liberation from a childhood ‘enslavement by fear, ignorance and illness’. Writing to his daughter many years later, Pramoedya used the yaws campaign as a demonstration that ‘knowledge and science, which depended not on mantra or intrigue, but on proven fact, could not be held back forever, and gradually came to be accepted by the public body.’69 On this view, the ‘public body’ embraced the yaws eradication campaigns because penicillin worked. The WHO was less willing, perhaps less able, to consider the possibility that different reactions to different kinds of interventions lay not in the degree to which they could overcome superstition, but to the very different experiences their ‘targets’ might have of them: yaws virtually disappeared after the 1950s, tuberculosis most certainly did not. The problem, perhaps, lay less in any disjunction between superstition and rationality than in the problem of translating the WHO’s notion of ‘health’. The problem, Rene Dubos suggested a few years later, was that ‘health’ as the WHO conceived of it, ‘is a disembodied concept’. Unlike disease and illness, talk of health ‘stimulates no emotional response and inspires only dull official speeches and allegorical

The Techno-politics of Public Health 137

paintings, which do not touch the heart because they are only an inhuman and fleshless abstraction’.70 The language of international health was not a quotidian language that appealed to ‘common sense’ ideas about health.71 Indeed, pain was almost wholly absent from the conceptual world of technical assistance. There was no room, in the language of ‘output’, ‘targets’ for these uncertainties of the body. The ‘closed’ language of technical assistance was unable to accommodate pain or suffering, and it was particularly unsuited to recognizing that the technical assistance itself could be a source of pain and suffering: ‘adverse reactions’ from vaccinations, ‘side effects’ from drug treatments, were hardly recorded, let alone acknowledged.72 Yet these silences in the documentary archive of technical assistance were dependent on international health workers’ own conceptions (or misconceptions) of local attitudes to pain. Thus one doctor explained the lack of overt resistance to BCG despite ‘complications’ following vaccination by arguing that ‘people in Indonesia do not go to the doctor easily and … they obviously felt that the little we had produced in the way of ulcers or abscesses were not worth mentioning’.73 When opposition to BCG vaccination became a political issue in India in 1955–56 (as will be discussed), the socialist Hari Vishnu Kamath stood up in the Indian parliament and complained that the mass vaccination campaign was ‘absolutely callous. There was no disinfection, or sterilization, there was no precaution taken against contamination’.74 People continued to suffer pain, even as mobile teams moved through the land with spray cans of DDT, and vials of freeze-dried vaccine.75 To believe that medical technology would prevail over the diseases of poverty, the ‘tropical’ diseases, required a good deal of faith, as international health planners themselves admitted in unguarded moments. The use of BCG vaccination against tuberculosis was particularly controversial, with many doctors in Britain continuing to dispute its efficacy into the 1950s. ‘BCG vaccination’, wrote Karen Hansen from Ceylon, ‘has been taken on faith’. She then repeated this, for emphasis and effect: ‘it has been taken on faith’.76

‘A form of quackery’ It was by combining an intimately familiar language of pain with the language of technical assistance that C. Rajagopalachari, the veteran south Indian nationalist, mounted one of the most public critiques of an international health campaign. In a widely circulated pamphlet entitled BCG Vaccination: Why I Oppose It, Rajagopalachari attacked the international

138 Decolonizing International Health

BCG campaign: ‘this … mass campaign lacks true scientific basis and is no more than a form of quackery’.77 Rajagopalachari’s pamphlet contain extracts from letters which he had been sent from across Madras State, and beyond, detailing episodes in which BCG vaccination had apparently proved harmful.78 These are stories of pain and loss. Six year old Vasantha, from Coimbatore, ‘lost her eyesight’, her father wrote, when ‘without my consent the authorities vaccinated my child in the school’. The children of a C.J. Sundararajan ‘developed boils all over the body three days after the BCG vaccination’, he wrote, ‘for three months they suffered terribly’. The young daughter of a M.S. Fakir, a beedi worker in Majid Mark Factory, Coimbatore had her ‘eyesight affected’ by BCG and was in deteriorating health. To take just one more example, of several, a Michael Anthony, of Poona, wrote Rajagopalachari a ‘doleful angry letter … about the foreign “World Health Experts” in whose presence he was vaccinated’, after which he developed a serious illness which cost him his job.79 These accounts of illness and suffering are a long way from the ‘disembodied’ stories which, Warwick Anderson has rightly pointed out, characterizes most histories of international health.80 Exploiting the silence within the discourse of technical assistance on the question of pain, Rajagopalachari was able to challenge its claims to truth. In so doing, Rajagopalachari used the language of the body alongside an explicitly ‘scientific’ critique of the international health campaign, a critique that used the language of technical assistance itself.81 This was tied to a more general critique of the post-colonial state in India, its intrusiveness and its reliance on ‘big’ science.82 He objected particularly strongly to the ‘propaganda’ employed by the WHO-led international campaign in India. In the eyes of international health workers, propaganda was necessary to dispel the fears of the native population; in Rajagopalachari’s view, it was the propaganda itself that was at the root of fear: One of the worst incidents of a mass campaign is the ceaseless effort by men whose words carry weight, to rouse a dread of the disease in the vast majority of people. Fear considerably reduces the power of resistance among those who have hitherto coped with dormant infection. Another general consequence of the campaign is the neglect of other measures such as would go-far [sic.] towards real control of tuberculosis.83 This was to suggest, then, that the language of fear and emergency employed by the international agencies not only made the inconclusive benefits of BCG appear unquestionable, it also closed off other,

The Techno-politics of Public Health 139

longer-term, policy alternatives. Countless posters and publications by the international agencies showed that ‘so many lakhs of children have been immunized this year against Tuberculosis [etc.]’, when ‘any one who remembers the nature of the very limited claims put forward on behalf of BCG vaccination can discover that the public propaganda in this respect is misleading’. The international health campaigns made extensive use of statistics to show the benefits of their work; Rajagopalachari claimed that these were ‘not real statistics but only inferentially deduced conclusions’. Indeed, Rajagopalachari went yet further, and claimed that the international campaigns were removed from the principles of modern science. Scientists and experts were bound to disagree, Rajagopalachari suggested, but policy decisions ought not to be in their hands alone ‘when on the basis of a theory, men’s persons are touched for good or evil’.84 Here Rajagopalachari mobilized a much older discourse of anti-vaccination, with a long history in India and in Europe alike. By claiming that public health interventions like BCG vaccination were simply a form of ‘technical assistance’, the architects of the international health campaigns tried to exclude the questions that had long surrounded vaccination qua vaccination. Rajagopalachari brought back the fundamental concern about ‘touching the person’ that lay at the root of a very different discourse of health and healing.85 International public health had staked out for itself a field of authority distinct from that of clinical medicine; though the claims of biomedicine to authoritative knowledge were essential to the legitimacy of the international health agencies, they were, at the same time, sceptical of the applicability of ‘advanced’ medicine in ‘under-developed’ countries.86 Rajagopalachari, however, drew on medical authority to challenge the planners of the international BCG campaign.87 Citing evidence from diverse medical literature questioning the efficacy of BCG, Rajagopalachari decried the fact that ‘Indian children are being offered for mass experimentation on the same plan as was put in operation among the people in the war-ravaged areas and uncivilized dependent communities’. This striking turn of phrase immediately draws a distinction between what is suitable for citizens of sovereign states and subjects in ‘dependent communities’. The logic of planning and technical assistance suggested that medicine was unaffordable to the poor of the formerly colonized parts of the world, and that a cheap set of public health technologies would bring a greater amount of welfare to a greater number. Rajagopalachari, by contrast, draws a direct link between political self-government and citizens’ sovereignty over their bodies (their right, so to speak, not to

140 Decolonizing International Health

be ‘experimented’ upon). Rajagopalachari’s argument is not, however, that all medicine is colonial with respect to the body, or that biomedicine is colonial by virtue of its ‘western’ provenance. The heart of Rajagopalachari’s critique is that India’s former position of subordination under British rule had established a double standard in the postcolonial period: wealthy nations would have advanced medicine, the ‘underdeveloped’ would have cost-effective magic bullets. At the same time, Rajagopalachari addressed his critique of technical to a different constituency than that usually addressed by planning documents and pamphlets: Rajagopalachari’s ‘Asia’ was not the Asia of bureaucrats and development planners constructed by the new international organizations, but a Tamil-speaking Asia, stretching from southern India to Ceylon and beyond. For a time, Rajagopalachari’s critique caused some concern to the authorities. In Madras State, the numbers of people accepting vaccination dropped suddenly. The impact of Rajagopalachari’s statements emerges quietly in the official record, in a short paragraph in the Madras state government’s annual report for 1955. The state ministry of health noted that: When the mass campaign was started in November 1954, the response was excellent and the scheme was a great success. Unfortunately in May 1955, anti-propadanda started in this State seriously and affected the smooth working of the campaign from June 1955. Vigorous efforts have, however, been taken by Government for countering the propaganda and the set back created is being slowly overcome and the position is gradually improving. It is hoped that the fears created in the minds of the public will soon die out and that the campaign will go on in full swing.88 The most that is said is that Rajagopalachari’s ‘anti-propaganda’ interfered with the ‘smooth running’ of the campaign. With both Rajagopalachari and the Madras Government/WHO talking the language of ‘fears’, it is likely that many people would have thought it advisable to steer clear of BCG vaccination stations. Perhaps the clearest sense we have of this ‘resistance’ to an international health campaign lies in a reconstruction of the course of the campaign in 1955. By any standards, June 1955 marks a dramatic falling off of the vaccination campaign: within a few days, the campaign went from testing between 40 and 90 per cent of each population to less than 5 per cent (see Table 5.1).89 The total numbers of vaccinations delivered in each

The Techno-politics of Public Health 141 Table 5.1 WHO/Indian Government BCG Vaccination Campaign in Madras State, 1954–55 Place

Period

Population Total tested

Coimbatore (urban)

15 to 20 Nov, 1954

197,755 210,814

Coimbatore (rural)

29 Nov to 25 Dec, 1954

Kozhikode (urban)

Percentage of population tested

Percentage positive

Total vaccinated

107

60

73,215

300,000 230,077

76

50

95,328

3 to 15 Jan 1955

158,724 107,214

67

73

25,556

Kozhikode (rural)

24 to 29 Jan 1955

118,820

54,583

45

56

22,195

Mangalore (urban)

7 to 12 Feb 1955

117,083

95,781

82

69

26,757

Mangalore (rural)

14 to 19 Feb 1955

49,000

36,499

74

58

13,238

Udipi (urban)

15 to 19 Feb 1955

21,254

21,474

101

58

8,191

Udipi (rural)

21 to 25 Feb 1955

42,500

31,089

73

53

12,883

Kalikavu, South Malabar

22 to 27 Feb 1955

50,000

38,989

78

55

15,046

Salem (urban)

28 Feb to 5 Mar 1955

202,335 179,463

89

60

60,751

Salem (rural)

14 to 26 Mar 1955

50

26,869

Cochin (urban)

28 Mar to 2 Apr 1955

67,395 29,881

20,011

67

76

4,215

Ootacamund 4 to 9 Apr (urban) 1955

41,370

37,428

90

45

17,958

Coonoor (urban)

18 to 22 Apr 1955

23,902

22,346

93

46

10,021

Nilgiris (rural)

Do.

51

29,378

Tiruchirappalli (urban)

18 to 30 Apr 1955

218,921 108,304

47

70

28,130

Tiruchirapalli (rural)

16 to 26 May 1955

150,000

57,246

38

61

17,488

Tanjore (urban)

28 May to 3 Jun 1955

100,000

31,507

32

64

6,087

69,062

142 Decolonizing International Health Table 5.1 WHO/Indian Government BCG Vaccination Campaign in Madras State, 1954–55 – continued Place

Period

Population Total tested

Tanjore (rural)

7 to 12 Jun 1955

75,000

5,885

Madurai (urban)

27 Jun to 15 Jul 1955

361,781

35,784

Madurai (rural)

18 to 22 Jul ‘55

Tirunelveli (urban)

8 to 22 Aug 1955

73,470

417

Palayamkottai (urban)

Do.

40,010

Melapalayam (urban)

–

Tirunelveli (rural)

16 to 26 Aug 1955

Vinudhunagar (urban)

Percentage of population tested

Percentage positive

Total vaccinated

8

53

1,796

10

66

7,783

60

1,575

<1

73

80

786

2

70

113

37,653

194

2

71

33

702

23

533

5 to 10 Sep 1955

46,309

4,161

9

65

839

Vellore (urban)

12 to 17 Sep 1955

106,024

2,123

2

63

522

Vellore (rural)

20 to 23 Sep 1955

744

64

140

Cuddalore (urban)

12 to 22 Sep 1955

69,084

4,244

6

57

1,093

Cuddalore (rural)

20 Sep to 29 Oct 1955

42

61

8

South Kanara (rural)

17 to 29 Oct 1955

25,126

56

8,760

Mangalore, Kasargod, Karkal

31 Oct to 26 Nov 1955

28,387

53

10,295

6,188

Source: Reconstructed from Report on the Health Conditions in Madras State 1955 [Tamil Nadu State Archives Library, Chennai]

locality plummeted from tens of thousands to a few hundred, or fewer. Yet, this ‘resistance’ seemed to fade with a whimper. There are virtually no press reports about any resistance to vaccination. By the following year, the ministry of health reports no ‘obstacles’ or complications in

The Techno-politics of Public Health 143

the running of the campaign;90 neither do WHO sources contain any references to organized resistance. Oral history bore no further fruits. The many people I spoke with, who had lived in various parts of Madras State in the 1950s had no recollection of any widespread ‘resistance’ to BCG vaccination, although many remembered being vaccinated. There does, however, appear to be increased anxiousness about ‘propaganda’, when the Government’s report for 1959 declares that: Four hundred and eight cinema shows were exhibited, 143 meetings held and 898 talks delivered. 142,662 leaflets were also freely distributed to the public. The BCG team participated in the exhibition conducted by the Salem Municipality and was awarded ‘Gold Medal’ for having demonstrated valuable exhibits on BCG Vaccination campaign.91 The overall impression is that the powerful support of the State and WHO for BCG vaccination gradually re-established a level of public confidence, and a dissipation of anxiety. However, the response to Rajagopalachari’s denunciations was not confined to India. If anything, they had a greater impact amongst the Tamil-speaking population of Ceylon. In Ceylon at this time, the Tamilspeaking population was a minority in an increasingly precarious political position, given the rising political strength of Solomon Bandaranaike on a Sinhalese nationalist platform. The impact of an eminent, Tamilspeaking Indian politician speaking out against BCG was more immediate. There was also a further way in which political critique in India, and ‘resistance’ to vaccination in Ceylon, were connected. The international organizations imagined ‘Asia’ as a whole, an Asia that together celebrated ‘World Health Day’ on April 7th each year. But this could also mean that a critique, by an Indian, of the international campaign would have immediate resonance beyond India’s shores. The awareness of the global reach of public health in the 1950s could equally work against the progress of the international campaigns. Rajagopalachari’s criticisms of the international BCG vaccination campaign began to be published in 1955, in both the English and the Tamil language press in India. This happened to coincide with the beginnings of the WHO’s ‘attack’ on the Tamil-speaking Eastern Province of Ceylon, which the WHO had already envisaged as a ‘problem’ area due to its ‘inaccessibility’ (the minority population of the area, as much as its topography, lay behind this perception).92 The Director of Ceylon’s health services, Dr D. Kahawita, referred, tersely, to the impact of Rajagopalachari’s critique in his annual report for

144 Decolonizing International Health

1955: there were ‘severe repercussions’, he wrote, as a result of ‘propaganda in India, fortunately not from medical authoritative sources, decrying [BCG] as dangerous and valueless’.93 A slightly clearer sense of the impact of Rajagopalachari’s ‘propaganda’ can be discerned from the report of the WHO’s nurse in Ceylon, Kirsten Hansen. She describes it thus, in her account of the BCG campaign: For the first time in the mass BCG campaign, and – unfortunately – in this of all areas, there was a blast of counter-propaganda originating from C.R. Rajagopalachari’s attacks on BCG published in the Tamil periodical Kalki, published in India. The Eastern Province population is almost entirely Tamil-speaking, and this particular magazine has a very wide circulation in the province. The counterpropaganda, especially as it originated from a person of C.R. Rajagopalachari’s eminence and international stature, had a considerable effect on the population, and materially hindered the progress of the campaign in the province.94 It is striking that Hansen makes particular reference to ‘this of all areas’, suggesting the trepidation with which the international health agencies viewed their potential power in areas with ethnic or cultural minorities. Through transnational networks of publishing and communication, the views of Rajagopalachari reached Ceylon; it was not only Rajagopalachari’s ‘eminence and international stature’ but the fact that he was a Tamil leader that gave such resonance to his criticisms in the Eastern Province of Ceylon. How are we to interpret the ‘resistance’ of which Kirsten Hansen speaks? One indication, which she herself used, was to compare the ‘response rate’ for vaccinations in the Eastern Province with those for other parts of Ceylon.95 The ‘productivity per team’ in the Eastern Province was significantly lower than the others. Yet, what a curiously disembodied picture of ‘resistance’ this conjures up. ‘Resistance’, here, is a machine that fails to function as it should, not a set of individual responses made up of fear, suspicion, resentment and uncertainty. The only indication in Ceylon’s English-language press that I was able to access, of what this ‘resistance’ might have meant comes in a small item on the front page of the newspaper on July 30 1955, which stated, simply, that The BCG Team at Palyagala was today obstructed in a school by some members of the public. The incident occurred when some girls fainted while inoculations were being given. Police were called in.96

The Techno-politics of Public Health 145

It is important not to overstate, or to romanticize, the significance of the ‘resistance’ informed by Rajagopalachari’s statements on BCG. It can, in part, be ascribed to the specific uncertainties surrounding BCG rather than a reaction to the broader culture of techno-centric public health. Indeed, concerns about BCG’s effectiveness proved to be wellfounded.97 Rajagopalachari’s argument was not anti-vaccination tout court, but against BCG vaccination in particular. ‘I am not against modern “western” therapy or modern science’, he declared emphatically. BCG, in his view, did not fulfil the requirements of proof that the ‘modern’ scientific tradition itself insisted upon.98 Furthermore, responses to Rajagopalachari’s interventions were largely confined to Tamil-speaking Madras State (and Tamil-speaking Ceylon), where there was an earlier history of resistance to BCG vaccination, during the Scandinavian Red Cross campaign of 1948;99 and where a particularly assertive regional nationalism was ascendant, giving credence to his broader critique of the post-colonial Indian state.100 Indeed, in other circumstances at the same time, the story of vaccination in South and Southeast Asia continued to be told as one of progress. In the midst of Renu’s Maila Anchal, published just the year before Rajagopalachari’s statements on BCG, and despite the novel’s scepticism over the promise of a new dawn of health and hygiene, there is a scene that presents vaccination as the quintessential triumph of science over superstition. Kalicharan the newly converted socialist cadre helps the doctor force vaccination upon a reluctant village. Kalicharan’s men surrounded the bazaar. The doctor was ready and waiting under the mango tree, with all his equipment spread out on a table. Kalicharan caught hold of the people, one by one, and brought them over. The lady teacher rubbed a spot on each one’s arm with cotton soaked in alcohol, and the doctor gave each an injection. The tahsildar wrote down their names. The marketplace was like a madhouse! Even if you got away, where could you run? There were So-so-list Party sepoys on all four sides!101 The result, in the narrative, is for the good of all: The doctor was not a man – he was a god! In all the Tatma, Poliya, Kurma Chatri and Raidas quarters, only five people passed away. In one house or another, one or two might be sick. But the doctor was like a god! Day and night, he never stopped to rest for even a moment. The lady teacher was like a goddess, and Kalicharan was a hero, too!102

146 Decolonizing International Health

The line between science and superstition, gods, heroes and villains, was a fluid one throughout the international campaigns to eradicate infectious disease in the 1950s. Throughout the 1950s, international public health was greeted by a sense of ambivalence, provoking a spectrum of responses that did not fit easily within the simple categories of disease eradication campaigns – ‘acceptance’ and ‘resistance’. Nor is it enough to posit a dichotomy between national/international campaigns and ‘local responses’, as it appears in some recent histories of medicine. International health campaigns, I have argued here, were dependent, from the start, on local agents, both human and ‘natural’ – vaccinators and spraymen, monsoon rains and political insurgents.

Conclusion: the ambiguities of success Insofar as we have what Rajagopalachari might call ‘real statistics’ on the mass campaigns of the 1950s, the picture that emerges is one of overwhelming success. Ceylon, one of the first countries to receive WHO support for malaria control, presents a particularly dramatic picture. As a result of an anti-malarial DDT campaign with fewer than 1,000 workers, the general mortality rate on the island fell by more than a third in less than five years.103 Ceylon was, in many ways, an exceptional case: a relatively small island, and one with a more developed health infrastructure than most of its neighbours. Yet in India, too, the statistics – however unreliable – tell an astonishing story. The number of recorded cases of malaria fell from 75 million in 1951 to just 50,000 in 1961, a massive and unprecedented diminution. Going beyond the malaria campaign, the WHO campaign against yaws, in which Indonesia and Thailand saw particularly large-scale intervention, was dramatically successful. It was estimated that there were over 20 million cases of yaws world wide in c. 1950, over half of which were in Asia: by 1955, the WHO was giving 100,000 injections a month in Indonesia, and had treated over a million cases in Thailand. Given that a single injection of penicillin would cure the disease, making painful lesions disappear, this was a particularly ‘popular’ intervention.104 The case of tuberculosis was more ambiguous: by the early 1960s, the WHO had vaccinated almost 100 million people in Asia with BCG, most of them under 20 years old. Whilst it was generally accepted that BCG protected young children from particularly virulent strains of infection, the long-term protective effects were in doubt.105

The Techno-politics of Public Health 147

The techno-centric international campaigns of the 1950s, though they neglected questions of distribution and inequality, were potentially more ‘democratic’ than more locally based projects in being able to offer ‘health’ to the very poorest. Fred Soper, the pioneer of disease eradication, could make a case for the eradication approach based on the values of equity and democracy. In disease control programmes, he argued, ‘one may disregard the rights of the minority, of those living in sparsely settled areas of difficult access’. Eradication, however ‘cannot sacrifice the minority’, it ‘cannot be made available to part of the people; protection of all the population becomes the only acceptable … standard’.106 Despite this evident and quite remarkable success, however, the disease control campaigns of the 1950s felt fragile, as has been shown throughout this chapter. The aggregate statistics, like the confident images of unchallenged technological mastery, papered over the many cracks that had begun to appear within the campaigns. The power of the campaigns, I have suggested in the last two chapters, was very limited: it was based on genuinely effective technology, and on the hope that this technology could work regardless of social, economic, and institutional circumstances.107 As a result of the many improvisations and adaptations of health workers, the technologies had a significant impact on levels of illness across South and Southeast Asia. This was a long way, however, from the image of a planned, infallible campaign. As has been suggested in this chapter, the WHO’s basis of knowledge about the diseases it was ‘attacking’ was limited, based, in its own words, on ‘near mythology’. Workers in the field and experts in Geneva did not know exactly how DDT was having its effects, so scanty was the basis of their knowledge. This is perhaps one reason why the early, isolated, reports of insecticide resistance caused such panic, setting in motion the urgent push towards eradication. The fact was that international health workers did not know if widespread drug resistance was around the corner, if their Fordson vans would last through the month, if their plans could survive the Monsoons. The practice of international health in the 1950s, in which malaria played a particularly prominent role, appears to stem from what James C. Scott has called the ‘ideology of high modernism’; a ‘strong … muscle-bound, version of the self-confidence about scientific and technical progress’. Scott contrasts this ‘ideology’ of science with ‘real’ science; the former was ‘uncritical, un-sceptical, and thus unscientifically optimistic’, and expressed itself in ‘remarkably visual aesthetic terms’.108 By looking at malaria control alongside a range of other international

148 Decolonizing International Health

health interventions across Asia in the 1950s and, in particular, by looking at the thoughts and sentiments of some of those involved in carrying out the health campaigns, I would suggest that we need to think about ‘smaller’ histories of international health and technical assistance. This chapter has suggested that when looked at too closely, the modernist image fragments into so many broken-down vans, fears of ‘resistance’, recalcitrant mosquitoes, and plans gone wrong. To discuss the international health campaigns of the 1950s in terms of ‘hegemony’ is to reflect their self-projection more than their reality.109 By the early 1960s, moreover, it became evident that the indisputable successes of the mass campaigns of disease control might not last.

6 The Limits of Disease Control

This chapter explores the crisis and eventual decline of interconnected public health initiatives in the Asian arena, spanning the period between the late 1950s and the mid-1960s. Many of the difficulties of the mass campaigns of the 1950s arose from the uncertainties, of prevention, both practical and epistemological. The gaps between the seen and the unseen – the ‘small injection’ and ‘disease later in life’; the disappearance and reappearance of anopheles mosquitoes – caused problems for planners, health workers and patients alike. This led to a renewed attempt to put into practice yet newer and better technologies that might bring about the finality of cure. The first part of this chapter examines a shift in the approach to the problem of tuberculosis control in Asia from the late 1950s, when technological innovation seemed, once again, to provide a solution to intractable and expensive problems. Given the uncertainties surrounding BCG vaccination, the prospect of being able to cure hundreds of thousands of tuberculosis patients in the Third World was attractive to national and international health officials. The WHO instituted the use of new anti-tuberculosis drugs in Asia as (yet another) pilot project, this time in Madras. However, unlike in previous pilot projects, the experiment with anti-tuberculosis drugs took the form of a full clinical trial, and the importance of proper ‘medical’ expertise was thus greater than in many other health campaigns. Where mass vaccination campaigns were consciously designed to minimize contact between health workers and their ‘targets’, long-term chemotherapy required intimate and intensive contact with patients in their homes. Changing technologies, I suggest, presented new fields of social life requiring medical surveillance and intervention. This only served to expose the limits of the 149

150 Decolonizing International Health

planners’, and the doctors’ power over domestic and social space, and their power over nature. In the second part of the chapter, I show that it seemed to many, by the 1960s, that ‘nature’ might have the last word after all. A resurgent environmentalist discourse of the filthy, implacable tropical environment cast doubt on optimistic techno-utopias. The international public health community acknowledged that the ‘causes of death’ in the Third World were more complex than the campaigns against particular diseases had once assumed. The importance of nutrition in shaping patterns of illness gained renewed recognition. Perhaps most significant, malaria eradication, at the very heart of the new utopia, fragmented and then collapsed in the face of all the problems outlined in the previous chapter: natural resistance to insecticides (and anti-malarial drugs), difficulties with staff and with equipment, and because of a lack of medical infrastructure. By the mid-1960s, the position of international public health relative to the newly vocal enthusiasts for population control was distinctly fragile. This was, at least in part, because the arguments for a new international public health, outlined in previous chapters, had failed to convince. The enduring irony is that, in terms of reducing the burden of illness and death in the Third World, they had, despite all the problems, been tremendously successful.

Curing tuberculosis in Madras and Bangalore In the late 1950s, and for a decade afterwards, urban South India served as a global laboratory of sorts for medical and social research on the treatment of tuberculosis. The need for a new approach to tuberculosis control seemed clear in South and Southeast Asia. In India alone there were an estimated 2.5 million active cases of tuberculosis and 500,000 deaths every year, while there were only 23,000 hospital and sanatorium beds available for the clinical treatment of the disease. As we have seen, prevention through BCG had provoked not only political opposition, but also great medical uncertainty.1 Antibiotics discovered in the 1940s and early 1950s, including streptomycin and isoniazid, had proved effective against tuberculosis, and were used widely in the West by the 1950s. Policymakers at the WHO hoped that the introduction of these drugs to the Third World would pave the way for a ‘cheap and effective chemotherapy that could be applied on a mass scale … under domiciliary conditions’; that is, in patients’ homes.2

The Limits of Disease Control 151

Between 1956 and 1959, the WHO and the Indian government jointly established two projects to investigate the impact of anti-tuberculosis chemotherapy on poor patients in southern India. The first project, in Madras, was a trial of newly available anti-tuberculosis drugs in circumstances of urban poverty, in the form of a controlled medical experiment. The British Medical Research Council collaborated in the project, and provided its first director, Wallace Fox.3 The second project, based at the National Tuberculosis Institute (NTI) in Bangalore, approached the problem of introducing new medical technology from another angle. Using detailed social surveys and interview-based research, investigators at the NTI aimed to construct a sociological picture of the urban tuberculosis problem, and the potential social constraints to the implementation of mass chemotherapy. The events in question lie at the intersection of the history of biomedicine, and international history. On the one hand, the Madras study was designed according to a logic internal to clinical medicine, it was, indeed, one of the first clinical trials in the Third World; the ‘stakes’, in a sense, were defined by the medical field, and were designed to contribute to increasingly vigorous debates about chemotherapy in Europe and the United States.4 Yet the Madras and Bangalore studies of tuberculosis chemotherapy were also founded upon a series of assumptions and associations shaped by the discourse of international development and the practices of technical assistance. The ultimate end of the Indian studies was to transform global policy. To initiate the project, the Madras Tuberculosis Chemotherapy Centre asked a major state-run clinic to refer its tuberculosis patients to the centre to determine whether they were suitable subjects for the trial. Each patient who registered with the centre was randomly allocated to either 12 months sanatorium treatment, or treatment at home. The patients in the study all lived within a few kilometres of the chemotherapy centre, which was located in the Egmore neighbourhood of Madras, along the banks of the Cooum River. One contemporary census report complained that the river banks were a ‘fertile ground’ for the growth of slums, noting that ‘it is rather disquieting to note that slum dwellers who constitute a little above a fifth of the city’s population should be confronted with the problems of promiscuity, susceptibility and high fatality to diseases and woefully poor health conditions’.5 The patients in the study were from some of the poorest districts in Madras. The Madras Centre carried out a detailed investigation of the social and economic circumstances of the tuberculosis patients selected for

152 Decolonizing International Health

the study, gathering data on a range of factors which had long been crucial in determining the outcome of tuberculosis cases: nutritional status, living and working conditions, and economic circumstances. The aim of the investigation was to reconsider these ‘environmental’ factors ‘when an effective combination of anti-microbial drugs is being administered’.6 At the same time, the patients assigned to sanatorium treatment (while receiving an identical regimen of medication) found themselves in an environment reflecting all of the traditional remedies for tuberculosis prior to the antibiotic era: ‘airy, well-ventilated wards … in the country’, balanced diets according to the recommendations of nutritional experts, and complete rest from physical activity.7 Unsurprisingly, the investigation of patients’ diets at home revealed that the vast majority were poorly nourished. The report described the ‘usual diet’ of patients as consisting of ‘a very light breakfast (often the water in which the rice is cooked) and two fuller meals (sometimes only one) … [which] consist of cooked rice’. ‘A small amount of green vegetables and pulses; on some occasions, very small quantities of flesh foods, predominantly fish, fats, and fruits are also eaten.’8 Patients treated in the sanatorium, on the other hand, were fed on a diet meeting all minimum nutrition requirements, and gained significantly more weight over the course of treatment than did those treated at home.9 The nutritional deficiencies in the diets of home-based tuberculosis patients were exacerbated by their early return to work. One report noted, in particular, that: ‘Many housewives, because of their family responsibilities, were unable to restrict their activity for very long, if at all.’10 Thus, the work of the Madras Tuberculosis Centre illustrated starkly the additional strains that poverty placed on tuberculosis patients. However, the striking conclusion reached by the Madras study was that these circumstances had little or no adverse impact on the outcome of drug treatment. ‘Whereas the patients admitted to sanatorium were treated under favourable conditions … the povertystricken patients treated at home remained in their overcrowded conditions and had much less rest [and] a poor diet.’ Yet, the results of the study had shown that diet and overcrowding played ‘little, if any, part’ in preventing the ‘attainment of bacteriological quiescence at the end of the year in patients receiving standard combined chemotherapy’. The investigators suggested that ‘successful treatment of patients in their homes in developing countries need not await an increase in the standard of living’ [emphasis added]; ‘Treatment of patients on a mass scale can begin as soon as adequate supplies of

The Limits of Disease Control 153

medicaments are available, and as soon as the necessary supervision of patients can be organized.’11 The finding that domiciliary chemotherapy could be a viable option even in unpropitious circumstances had a significant impact upon the way in which tuberculosis was conceived as a public health problem. The ability to treat each individual case with drugs transformed tuberculosis into a problem of individual patients, rather than the preventive vaccination of whole populations. The studies published by the Madras chemotherapy centre, and disseminated internationally through the widely circulated Bulletin of the WHO, brought a number of issues to the forefront of the international debate on tuberculosis: questions about the ‘acceptability’ of the new drug regimen to patients, and the likely ‘compliance’ of patients with long-term drug therapy. The NTI in Bangalore, established in 1959 by the Indian Ministry of Health and WHO, played a defining role in investigating the issue of ‘compliance’, and did so using innovative methods. The NTI was (and still is) housed in the palace of ‘Avalon’, a rambling property set within several acres of gardens adjacent to the royal palace in Bangalore, and was formally inaugurated by Nehru in 1960. Notably, the NTI contained a sociological section, which was ‘one of the first institutionalized experiments in the collaboration of these two branches [social and medical] of science in under-developed countries’.12 Stig Andersen, a Danish sociologist sent by WHO, led this section along with Debabar Banerji, a young Indian doctor who had ‘train[ed] himself as a sociologist’.13 Like Dr Ramakrishnan in Madras, D. Banerji was not attracted to clinical medicine or laboratory research, and found his vocation in public health whilst working as a government physician in Western Tibet and the Himalayas in the mid-1950s.14 In the midst of his spell at the NTI, Banerji spent time at Cornell University gaining a Masters in cultural anthropology, which reinforced his inclination to take a social approach to public health.15 In its first years, the NTI pioneered the use of a very different approach to the collection of information about the tuberculosis problem in India, based on personal interviews with patients, and based upon patients’ experiences and perceptions of illness. ‘In justifiable enthusiasm over mastering the more precise measurements of the epidemiological surveys’, an early NTI report argued, implicitly criticizing the basis of knowledge generated by the mass campaigns of the 1950s, ‘tuberculosis research workers have sometimes lost sight of the true problem of tuberculosis’. The real problem, they suggested, lay in the ‘suffering, discomfort, or economic dislocation brought about by

154 Decolonizing International Health

the tubercle bacillus destroying human lung tissue’.16 The report conceded that ‘a sociological approach to a public health problem is a relatively new field of investigations’, and that ‘when symptom questioning [of individual patients] has been used in the past, it has more often than not been considered a less desirable alternative to investigations using more precise diagnostic means’. In tuberculosis control, in particular, ‘the relatively objective tuberculin test, X-ray examination and bacteriological examinations have completely dominated the field’.17 The NTI’s decision to pay greater heed to the subjective experience of illness seemed to be vindicated by the first major research findings of the sociological unit. The study suggested that the majority of those with active tuberculosis were not only aware of the problem, but sought assistance from government health centres, dispensaries and hospitals.18 The sociologist Stig Andersen argued that the main implication of these discoveries was that: ‘The first obligation of a tuberculosis programme [is] to take care of those cases which are now standing at the very door-step of health services, seeking assistance.’ Andersen suggested that ‘once this part of the patient population has been taken reasonably adequate care of, a substantial proportion of the remaining patients will be attracted by the improved services’.19 The significance of domiciliary chemotherapy went beyond its potential to cure tuberculosis. Chemotherapy had the potential to increase individuals’ sense of security by giving ‘people who now feel ill’ the confidence that ‘they will be taken care of as well as medical technology can currently manage’, and ‘people who fear that they or their dear ones might become ill’ the sense that ‘should catastrophe strike’, that it could, and would, be cured.20 Stig Andersen argued that the security offered by chemotherapy played a far greater role than narrow health education in securing patients’ support for the new directions being taken by tuberculosis policies. ‘The Indian villager’, Andersen wrote pointedly in a report to Geneva, ‘does not need to be told in words about the tuberculosis problem, but needs a service to deal with a problem which … is only far too well known to him’.21 The greatest contemporary interest in the work of the sociological section undoubtedly lay in its findings on the subject of whether or not patients could be trusted to take their anti-tuberculosis drugs over the course of 12 months, and what the reasons were for cases of patient ‘default’. A report from NTI ruefully remarked that there seemed to be great disappointment that it had not devised ‘some magic formula through which a majority of patients could be induced to take

The Limits of Disease Control 155

drugs regularly for the required period of time’.22 Contrary to expectations, the NTI’s detailed investigation of ‘defaulting’ patients based, again, on in-depth interviews with the patients and their families, portrayed ‘non-compliance’ as far more complex than a question of ‘ignorant’ or unreliable patients refusing to cooperate with their own treatment. The institution’s researchers found that: ‘Taking drugs for a long time depends on the patient’s motivation to do so, in the midst of conflicting motivations and in a life of other worries, which in many or most cases appear far more important to the patient than worry over his disease.’ Yet the NTI also concluded that the ‘slippery slope of sloppy treatment organization rather than the ignorant patient’ was responsible for a significant part of the problem of ‘default’.23 A number of the ‘defaulters’ in the Bangalore study that failed to complete 12 months of treatment had ‘pretended to live in the city and gave the addresses of relatives’. ‘These relatives collected pills for them and had the pills sent to the patients, and this arrangement had failed before the end of the 12 months.’ Other reasons given for not completing treatment included: ‘Lost card, thought I could not then get pills’ ‘Health visitor behaved very rudely’ ‘Was advised special diet I could not afford, therefore thought it was no use taking pills’.24 The study thus concluded that ‘organizational and administrative measures’ could have averted a number of the ‘defaults’. It was emphatically declared that, contrary to a widespread belief, ‘it is not true that relief of symptoms usually, or even often, leads to default.’ ‘That patients discontinue treatment as soon as they feel better has been reported so often that it is now widely believed always to be true.’ Finally, the studies of the NTI found (again, contrary to expectation) that ‘irregularity in drug taking does not seem correlated with the economic, social, educational or other status of the patient and his family. The composition of the defaulter group is virtually the same as that of the regular group, not only in age and sex, but also in respect of status in family, religion, [and] caste.’25 The direct implication of these findings was that the effectiveness of anti-tuberculosis drugs was dependent on a sophisticated treatment organization, with the ability to respond to the myriad individuals’ circumstances. This was a finding with uncomfortable implications for

156 Decolonizing International Health

the administration of international public health, which had, for a generation, moved in precisely the opposite direction: towards simplification and homogenization. In contrast with the clinical trials in Madras, the conclusions reached by the NTI suggested that, far from being a ‘magic bullet’ for tuberculosis, the success of chemotherapy was dependent on the improvement of socio-economic conditions, and the expansion of health services to provide even coverage across the region, and country. It was noted that all too often, ‘defaulting’ patients had in fact moved to another district, which was not supplied with drugs, and lacked a tuberculosis programme.26

Problems of policy Interpreting the results of the research conducted in Madras and Bangalore was a matter of great practical importance. The NTI, responsible for the social research in Bangalore, was at the centre of India’s nascent ‘national tuberculosis programme’. Based on the recommendations of the NTI, the Indian Ministry of Health issued guidelines in 1963 to all state governments outlining the basis for District Tuberculosis Programmes for each of India’s 380 districts, beginning with a ‘pilot’ programme in ten districts with an overall population of 12 million. The Indian Government recognized from the start that the two fundamental issues would be the adequate ‘provision for a constant supply of drugs by the health services’, and ‘regular intake of drugs by patients’ (the failure of which would ‘render the best drug combination ineffective’).27 The implications of the south Indian research, as we have seen, went beyond India. The research was conceived, carried out, and interpreted within the broader context of the internationalization of responsibility for health after the Second World War. At issue was nothing less than the future of global tuberculosis policy. The insertion of the Madras and Bangalore studies into international policy debates was underpinned by an underlying tension between the potential universality of the Indian (social) scientific research, and the particular circumstances of its production: that is, the carefully controlled environment of a medical trial, and the specific social and economic conditions of Bangalore. The generalization of the results of the south Indian research depended on the imagination of a singular ‘Third World’, united in its epidemiological and social characteristics. It was dependent, too, on the existence of an international health organization of the size and scope of the WHO. By the end of the 1950s, the WHO had initiated parallel projects in ‘crowded

The Limits of Disease Control 157

slums’ in Tunis and Nairobi, modelled on Madras.28 The WHO’s key role, then, was in ‘universalizing’ the particular research from Madras.29 In the process of universalization, its significance was transformed. The fundamental problem emerging from the Madras chemotherapy study lay in the relationship between the methodology of the scientific trial, and social and economic conditions. In the words of one British journalist’s account of the Madras study, it was an open question whether ‘ … in the conditions which exist in an Indian city, with its crowded and often unstable population and its low level of literacy, an experiment in social medicine could really be carried out with sufficient exactness to ensure the validity of the results’.30 ‘Validity’ entailed replicability. Could the results of the Madras project be translated into standardized policy interventions across the Third World? This question was of the foremost importance for the WHO. In a number of ways, the Madras study was very far from ‘realistic’, in terms of being representative of the conditions that would confront the implementation of a large-scale public health intervention using chemotherapy against tuberculosis. For a start, the patients who took part in the Madras study were very carefully selected. Only those families deemed to be ‘cooperative’ after detailed preliminary interviews, were accepted into the programme. 31 Given this measure of pre-selection, the most troubling issue, of patient compliance, was largely circumvented in the Madras trial. Furthermore, ample resources allowed the Madras Centre to exercise a particularly high level of social control over the daily lives of the patients in the study, to the point of being highly intrusive. All manner of methods were employed to determine the regularity with which patients being treated at home consumed their medication, and this despite the patients having been carefully selected for being ‘cooperative’. Urine tests were carried out routinely, on ‘completely unexpected visits’ to the patients’ homes.32 Dr C.V. Ramakrishnan recalls how patients in the study were ‘educated, advised, and I would say, in this particular study, even indoctrinated, to some extent, that if they miss a treatment, they will pay dearly for it’. Dr Ramakrishnan tells the story of spending most of his holiday in the town of Coimbatore trying to locate a ‘wastrel and drunkard’ who had dropped out of the treatment study, and bringing him back to Madras.33 This tension between scientific research carried out by highly committed researchers like Dr Ramakrishnan, and the practicalities of public policy, was present from the early stages of the research in Madras. The

158 Decolonizing International Health

conflict focused on the balance between the necessary complexity of such a trial, and the need for results that could be put into practice as policy. The tensions are brought out particularly starkly in a letter to Wallace Fox, the British director of the Madras project, from Johannes Holm, the WHO’s chief adviser on tuberculosis in Geneva, written in 1957. Holm claimed that ‘I am more and more convinced that our views on these problems differ a great deal; in fact we seem to have basically different views on the objectives of the Madras projects’. Holm was of the impression that Wallace Fox and his team wanted to … do everything possible for each one of your patients, including those who have deteriorated after the treatment in the trial to which they have been allocated; that is those patients who, for the purposes of the trial, can be described as failures and thereafter can be of little or no scientific interest. I realize that this is from humanitarian or, if you prefer it, clinical considerations and feelings.34 For Holm, however: The objectives of the project as I see them – and I think WHO in general – are somewhat different. They are to study the effect, in terms of rendering infectious patients non-infectious and keeping them so, of treatment that is inexpensive and which consists of selfadministration of drugs with no close clinical supervision by experts and with no complicated laboratory tests.35 From the point of view of wanting treatment to be as cheap and rapid as possible, Holm suggested that he did not understand Wallace Fox’s ‘scientific reasons for insisting on such low doses of INH [isoniazid], which are considered insufficient by most people today’. ‘I would not be too afraid of complications if the treatment was highly effective.’36 Yet, the results of the Madras trial stated unequivocally that multiple drug combinations were far more effective than a single-drug regimen.37 This disagreement over the question of whether to rely heavily on high doses of isoniazid (the cheapest of the available drugs), would come back to haunt the WHO in later years. Holm concluded his letter to Fox with the warning that: ‘I fully realise that in a scientific trial you sometimes have to use complicated methods and examinations … [but] I am afraid, I have already told you personally, that by making the trial too complicated the purpose of the study will be defeated.’38

The Limits of Disease Control 159

The exchange between Wallace Fox and Johannes Holm shows, tangibly, the clash between biomedicine and technical assistance in terms of their priorities, and the professional dispositions that underpinned them. They illustrate the potential disjunction between the commitment of the physician to cure each patient, and the demands on international public health officials to cure the greatest number at the lowest cost. Because the chemotherapy trials had been conceived with international policy implications in mind, the main question concerned the relationship between scientific research and practical intervention. For some participants in the debate, the results of the Indian research served to underscore the complex rage of interventions needed to address the problem of tuberculosis in poor countries. In the midst of an important WHO policy debate in 1962, one Dr Abu Shamma suggested that: He was much interested in the trend to encourage ambulatory treatment on a house-to-house basis since in most of the developing countries hospital beds were in scarce supply … [but a policy of drug treatment] needed some strengthening through accompanying social measures. He had in mind that UNICEF might help by supplying dried milk and vitamins or additional feeding of some kind to patients under domiciliary treatment, in order to raise their resistance to the disease…. Secondly, UNICEF and WHO might join in urging governments to improve housing conditions for such cases so that the patient might have his own room and thus lessen the danger of infection to others, and to subsidise the family to some extent whilst the breadwinner was unable to work.39 Dr Abu Shamma’s views suggest the range of factors that needed to be considered in formulating a sustainable tuberculosis policy, in the light of the information gathered in India: questions of cost (the limited ‘budget assigned to national health services’); nutritional status (‘in order to raise resistance to the disease’); social security, and living conditions all needed to be considered. However, this broad ‘ecological’ view of health, and health policy, was eclipsed over the course of a number of policy debates and official publications issued between 1962 and 1965, in favour of the more familiar view of ‘causal necessity’.40 That is to say, in favour of using ‘specific means…to attack the ubiquitous tubercle bacilli directly – through highly potent drugs’; means which rendered the ‘natural evolution of the disease,

160 Decolonizing International Health

and … such environmental factors as nutrition, housing, sanitation and social security’ irrelevant.41 A series of articles in the WHO Chronicle declared that the ‘astounding’ findings from India transformed the WHO’s tuberculosis strategy into one based on chemotherapy: ‘The Tuberculosis Chemotherapy Centre in Madras [has] shown that, given the drugs and time, nothing else was really necessary for the treatment of advanced tuberculosis.’42 Notably, it was decided that drug treatment could be implemented ‘without the need’ for ‘accompanying social measures’;43 and in ‘practically any epidemiological or socio-economic conditions’.44 In 1964, a report of the WHO’s Expert Committee on Tuberculosis set out clearly the main thrust of international strategy thenceforth: national programmes based on simplified technology would be implemented through existing health infrastructures.45 The WHO experts employed a synthesis of the Madras and Bangalore studies, whatever their mutual contradictions, to justify the dismantling of mobile X-ray centres, and the transformation of tuberculosis hospitals into multipurpose health centres and general hospitals. The Expert Committee directive from 1964 also recommended the simplification of the informational base for tuberculosis control: active ‘case-finding’ was given far less emphasis, and this is reflected in the significant decline in the number of countries reporting any kind of tuberculosis statistics to the WHO by the end of the decade, and into the 1970s.46 The strategy of limiting international tuberculosis policy to the question of drugs, with less attention (even on a rhetorical level) to the social nature of the disease, arose from the interaction of the exigencies of cost-effectiveness with the shift to the individual level in analysing and understanding tuberculosis (that is to say, the belief that each case could be treated). Yet, as a disease linked inextricably with social practice, the ‘control’ of tuberculosis called for a degree of medical control and surveillance which neither the Indian health infrastructure nor the WHO, was able to provide. Undoubtedly implicit in the work of the NTI in Bangalore and the clinical trials in Madras, was an effort to reform the attitudes, the subjectivities of poor tuberculosis patients, and to create rational, compliant patients. This required a level of social control that could only, if at all, be achieved within the ‘unrealistic’ conditions of a scientific experiment. In the end, the focus shifted towards achieving a basic minimum ‘target’ for the number of patients treated, and even these targets were allowed to lapse. The strategy, from the mid-1960s, was that, since the treatment for tuberculosis had

The Limits of Disease Control 161

been ‘simplified and standardized’, it could be delivered through existing health services, however rudimentary they might be. The overall impact, in a recent review by two contemporary WHO tuberculosis specialists, was that ‘dismantling of specialized services and delegation to general services was not accompanied by any extra resources’. Indeed, they suggest that ‘no significant impact on tuberculosis indicators could be achieved in the less-developed countries’.47

Dangerous journeys From the outset, it was amply clear that drugs themselves were far from enough to ensure that tuberculosis chemotherapy would succeed as a strategy. The artificiality of the medical experiment which had given rise to those conclusions became clear in the course of efforts to implement anti-tuberculosis chemotherapy in other parts of India, beyond the purview of the WHO and the Indian and British Medical Research Councils. ‘Paradoxical though it may appear’ said Miss K. Das, a nurse at a Delhi Tuberculosis Centre, ‘the success of antibiotics in the treatment of tuberculosis has increased and complicated the connected socioeconomic problems’.48 Das pointed out what the Madras study had itself uncovered, even whilst dismissing it as irrelevant to the success of treatment: a poor tuberculosis patient, she said, ‘usually has the burden of a big family, is ill clad, ill fed and almost at the verge of starvation’. For those not fortunate enough to be covered by the fully-funded chemotherapy trials in Madras, or the WHO-supported social research programme in Bangalore, affording the drugs was almost impossible. Das found that 84 per cent of patients under treatment ‘are unable to afford antibiotics for themselves’. Only very few were ‘provided with antibiotics by [a] contributory health scheme, [the] Employees’ State Insurance Corporation, and other schemes’.49 Nutritional supplementation from ‘outside agencies’ was indeed welcome, but the ‘flow of such help is not steady, and after a time, the need of patients remains unmet, due to lack of continuous programme and funds’.50 Despite the efforts of the NTI social research to uncover some of the social and psychological consequences of domiciliary treatment of tuberculosis, it was left to ‘social workers’ to point out the depths of pain and suffering that chemotherapy entailed. Many patients ‘who feel exhausted due to the disease’, and are under advice to ‘take rest’, ‘cannot get it in a crowded home’. The situation was particularly bad for ‘a daughter-in-law in the family’: ‘the patient may feel embarrassed to have any extra care for herself … at times the heartless and frustrated

162 Decolonizing International Health

in-laws go on nagging the female TB patient for bringing in the ailment and ruining the life of her husband’.51 Women who were given food ‘by an outside agency’ said they felt particular ‘shame’: ‘I am nothing short of a demon or demoness’, one woman told the psychiatrist, ‘when I take milk, butter and eggs, and my children subsist on chapattis and salt’.52 The conclusion that chemotherapy could be universally effective was founded, in essence, on the assumption that, firstly, most patients would make the rational choice to seek and complete courses of chemotherapy.53 Secondly, and crucially, it assumed that the requisite level of ‘medical supervision’, however minimal, was in place, with deep social reach. The ‘problem’ of ensuring that tuberculosis patients took their drugs was, in fact, largely a question of how deeply the medical apparatus of surveillance and supervision was able to penetrate the urban environment. Stig Andersen and D. Banerji concluded that a programme of drug therapy against tuberculosis could … only be properly dealt with through an all-embracing national programme in which all infectious cases diagnosed are registered in geographically organized case indexes and transferred from one to another as the need arises …[if] a patient is diagnosed in one area and then treated in another or moves during the treatment period.54 Furthermore, as Andersen and Banerji pointed out: … in the search for the basic reasons for patients’ not taking drugs, common sense should not be forgotten. Except under very special circumstances of mass hysteria, it has never been demonstrated that a large group of people can be persuaded, without force, to adopt a new habit from which they never deviate.55 The inevitable frustrations of the task did, in some circumstances, lead health workers to place the responsibility for treatment failures on the ‘ignorance’ or obstruction of the patients themselves. A WHO nurse in India wrote in 1963 that ‘perhaps even as many as a third of patients were resistant to all forms of persuasion, and should be identified as soon as possible’. This ‘wilful non-co-operation’ was only treatable through institutional ‘supervision and discipline’.56 Yet, it is precisely this level of social control, and ‘discipline’ that was lacking. The NTI found that the very chaos of the urban landscape and the fluidity of population rendered any hope of tight control over

The Limits of Disease Control 163

patients taking drugs at home very difficult. Writing of the patients who were lost to the study because their ‘houses could not be found’, the investigators at the NTI pointed out that: in many cities in India, and presumably in several other countries, an address is not necessarily adequately described in terms of a street and a number. One needs description in terms of landmarks, distances and directions from these, perhaps in terms of names of inhabitants of neighbouring houses, for example, those of shop owners.57 While there seemed to be scope for ‘improvement in address-taking’, the NTI researchers concluded that ‘it would seem unlikely that this problem can be solved until the whole street-naming and housenumbering system has been improved’.58 That is to say, a degree of control over tuberculosis patients taking chemotherapy could not be achieved until the map of south India’s cities had been rendered more ‘legible’ to bureaucrats and medical policymakers.59 These problems were, in a sense, a symptom of the social change and massive urban influx of the 1950s and 1960s.60 The Indian anthropologist M.N. Srinivas, in an essay on Bangalore, speaks of the post-independence transformation of the city’s cantonment area, with ‘wide roads…big trees and flowering shrubs’ giving way to ‘long narrow lanes in which houses cling to each other, the neighbourhood being palpable, noisy and conflict ridden’. The influx of migrants from neighbouring states led to ‘slums on the outskirts of the cantonment … [and] parts which look like they have been transplanted from a small Tamil town’.61 The lanes through which the WHO had to pursue recalcitrant patients were difficult to navigate, if they were marked on the map at all. As one of the early social surveys of Bangalore made clear: … the area lying to the south of Nagarthapet up to Narasimharaja Road, from Avenue Road up to the United Mission High School compound is the most congested one … In the cantonment the area between Timmaiah Road and Broadway Road … the area between Commercial Street and Russel Market are mostly congested. In the above areas, there are no sufficient open places between houses. The streets with the houses on both the sides are very narrow. Dust and dirt surround these houses. Sanitation is very poor in these localities.62 This was not a problem confined to South India. As the strategy of using anti-tuberculosis chemotherapy was extended, gradually,

164 Decolonizing International Health

beyond its testing ground in South India, and incorporated into technical assistance programmes, the problems of Bangalore multiplied.63 Michel Foucault observed, in the case of eighteenth century Europe, that for a process of outpatient treatment (the shift towards a ‘domestic form of hospitalization’) to work, there needed to be a ‘medical corps dispersed throughout the social body, and able to offer treatment for free or as cheaply as possible’. 64 As a WHO technical assistance mission to Rangoon quickly realized in 1964, however, it was precisely this level of dispersion of medical care within society that was missing.65 The old problem of inadequate health services came, once again, to hinder efforts at disease control. Paradoxically, this was the very problem that the WHO and its partners had attempted to circumvent through mass campaigns of disease control that were independent of local health services. Efforts were made to map out the landscape of Rangoon in terms of the distribution of health services, depicting, in stark visual form, the limits of control. For, in the case of long-term drug therapy, surveillance and ‘control’, as the Bangalore studies showed, was at a premium. In this and many other more detailed maps, Mr Thorup, the WHO consultant in Burma pondered the impenetrability of areas of Rangoon, where the reach of the ‘medical gaze’ did not reach, where the streets – if they were there at all – had no names. He made a detailed ‘Survey of Ethnic Composition, Economic Status, Type of Residence and Accessibility of Rangoon Area’.66 The survey found that the townships of Htaukkyant, Saik-kyi and Dalla, their residents ‘Burmese only’, ‘poor’ in economic status, were filled with ‘primitive housing/congested’, and were of ‘very poor’ accessibility to the medical apparatus, both national and international, charged with curing tuberculosis with drugs.67 At the very moment when medical technology offered the promise of circumventing the environment, the power of the environment to shape patterns of health, illness and treatment came sharply into view. Journeys, in Bangalore and Rangoon alike, were deeply hazardous ones from the epidemiological point of view. Indeed, the revolution in chemotherapy did little to weaken the hold of earlier conceptions of disease and contagion, which, if anything, were stronger by the early 1960s – a generation after the announcement of international aspirations to vanquish disease – than in the 1940s. Several commentators, both administrative and medical, continued to hold to an almost miasmic theory of disease; contagion comes from

The Limits of Disease Control 165

the filth of the environment, which is the ultimate ‘menace to public health’. In the words of a 1961 census report on Madras City: One has to go round Kotwal market in George Town and its surrounding areas to see how much the locality is in need of sanitation … the sewage and sullage tend to settle down, causing a perpetual stench that pervades the entire neighbourhood, pollutes nearby wells in houses and constitutes a menace to public health and the aesthetic susceptibilities of the people.68 This description dates from the early 1960s, exactly the time when the Madras chemotherapy studies appeared to show that environment was irrelevant to the successful treatment of tuberculosis. The implication here is that even the treatment of every tuberculosis case, would not dent the underlying epidemiological picture. One of the striking features of the official report on Madras, from which the statement above is drawn, is its timeless nature. The descriptions of pathogenic urban squalor move rapidly across time and space: contemporary accounts from the early 1960s are juxtaposed with extracts from colonial reports of the early twentieth century, suggesting that nothing much had changed.69 As was suggested in an earlier chapter, ‘Asia’ was treated as a single category for the administration of public health policies. Observers in the international organizations, and many of their counterparts in national governments, saw Asia in terms of a set of shared problems and shared conditions, all of them amenable to technological intervention. However, an older discourse on ‘Asia’, focusing on the almost insurmountable problems of ‘filth’ and the tropical environment, had not disappeared.70 This focus upon the pathogenic dangers of the urban environment spanned from India to Burma and Indonesia. Colonial and post-colonial, national and international medical discourses were amalgamated in a way that challenged, unwittingly, the optimistic narrative of progress in international public health.

The end of eradication Nowhere did the ‘return of nature’ seem more devastating than in the field of malaria control. The ‘attack’ phase of the global malaria eradication campaign reached its zenith in 1960–61, at which point no fewer than 66 countries were part of the programme. In India, site of the largest national malaria eradication programme, 150,000 people

166 Decolonizing International Health

were employed in malaria eradication work by 1961. By that year, malaria cases accounted for less than one per cent of all hospital admissions, an astonishing diminution in the burden of malaria.71 By 1963, the WHO claimed that of the 147 territories that it initially declared to be ‘malarious’, 45 had ‘wholly or partially eradicated malaria’.72 Yet an increasing number of reports, first anecdotal and then formal, made reference to ‘problem areas’, where all was not going according to plan. In February 1962, at a conference of the Royal Society of Tropical Medicine and Hygiene, a number of malariologists expressed their unease with the problems encountered by the malaria eradication campaign. M.J. Colbourne, a British malariologist working for the WHO in Southeast Asia, suggested that ‘not a few campaigns have stated with a good prospect of successful malaria eradication, but have come near to disaster, usually due to failures of organization’.73 He went on to suggest that ‘it appears that resistance is seriously interfering with progress in several countries’, while in other places, ‘there are vectors whose period in contact with a sprayed surface is so short that it is doubtful whether it is possible for a lethal dose to be picked up’.74 Colbourne pointed out that, across the region, it was only in Taiwan that malaria had been almost eradicated, and that Taiwan presented a very specific set of conditions: The case-finding mechanism most suitable for Taiwan was developed from local experience. The campaign has the advantage of a well-developed rural health services which served as a framework for operations, a well-developed national administrative service, and a well-trained and enthusiastic staff in adequate numbers. It must be admitted that the vector, A. minimus minimus, is very susceptible to attack with residual insecticides.75 This hardly suggested a campaign easily replicable elsewhere. Colbourne’s observations found support among the audience at the Royal Society. Sir Gordon Covell, a veteran malariologist with experience in South Asia, highlighted the ‘magnitude of the problem of malaria on the Indian sub-continent’, and reminded the audience that Pakistan’s failure to commence large-scale DDT spraying put India at risk of ‘re-infection’ on its frontiers.76 Others like John McArthur, a health official in British Malaya, suggested that his experience showed that ‘malaria eradication is a local problem, depending on the conditions, and on the habits of the local vector’. Blanketing the world with DDT,

The Limits of Disease Control 167

he argued, ‘seemed to me an unscientific approach, to reject the findings of research and to apply instead a measure found to be effective in some other parts of the world’.77 He looked back, that is to say, to the approaches to malaria control that characterized myriad local experiments in South and Southeast Asia in the 1930s. The sceptics were still, in the early 1960s, ‘heretics’ of a kind.78 However the turning of the tide became fully clear in Sri Lanka, long a ‘model’ for malaria control. So successful was the initial campaign of DDT spraying in Ceylon that spraying had virtually ceased by the mid1950s. Following a brief resurgence of malaria in 1956, the government called in international assistance to resume large-scale spraying operations.79 The success was fragile. The Sri Lankan medical infrastructure was better developed than many of its neighbours’, and health workers continued to collect samples of blood regularly, to test for malaria infection. Yet it emerged that the majority of samples had come from regions of relatively low risk for malaria infection; in the regions where malaria had been hyper-endemic, the basis for medical surveillance was far less secure.80 F.R.S. Kellett, a WHO official wrote that he feared the ‘situation had been smouldering for a longer time than originally realised’.81 A full-scale epidemic finally broke out in 1968 and was devastating, because earlier successes in preventing malaria transmission had led to a loss of immunity among the population. In a short space of time, the number of malaria cases in Sri Lanka jumped from perhaps a few hundred to half a million. Perhaps more important than natural resistance to DDT were problems of a very similar nature to those confronting the WHO’s tuberculosis control efforts: a lack of medical infrastructure, and the virtual impossibility of medical surveillance. In India, as elsewhere in South and Southeast Asia, medical power was very widely dispersed, medical police almost non-existent. Yet an active programme of ‘case-finding’ constituted a crucial stage in malaria eradication. After the initial campaign of intensive spraying, to eliminate the anopheles vector, malaria control teams needed to find all infected persons in an area and treat them with anti-malarial drugs so that the human reservoir of plasmodia would be eliminated before the mosquitoes could return.82 As with the detection of tuberculosis, malaria surveillance could be ‘active’ or ‘passive’, the former involving regular house visits by malaria workers, the latter ‘requires all people suffering from fever to report to various individuals, voluntary and paid, who have been given instruction on how to take blood films and administer anti-malarial drugs’.83

168 Decolonizing International Health

The ‘active case finding’ in India was the responsibility of surveillance officers, each paid three rupees a day, equivalent to a wage for unskilled or semi-skilled labour. The work was ‘even more tedious and repetitive than the job of the sprayman’, and there was evidence that teams routinely avoided villages far from the main roads, and ‘concealed their delinquency by taking an excess of blood samples from families more easily reached’.84 Passive case finding by hospitals was no more promising. Gordon Harrison observed a public health system inadequate to the task, with tales of hospitals forgetting to order microscope slides, and doctors ignoring the ‘routine’ tasks of surveillance: ‘what struck the visitors as probably symptomatic of similar failures elsewhere was not so much the technician’s forgetfulness as the doctors’ unconcern’. Such was the state of rural health services that ‘by the time a reasonably prompt report came that a particular individual was infected, he might have left his village or because of a false or ambiguous identification at the local clinic have become untraceable’.85 We see here exactly the same powerlessness on the part of the medical administration as also characterized the attempts to treat tuberculosis. In 1961, there were fewer than 100,000 cases of malaria in India. Between 1961 and 1965, the number of cases jumped to 150,000, and then doubled again within a few years. The Indian government itself concluded, in an investigation into the resurgence of malaria in the country, that: We can see that in those States where the rural health services are well developed, such as Mysore and Kerala, reversions have not occurred, and the maintenance is kept under good control even in areas previously hyperendemic. In other words, the map of reverted areas can be super-imposed on those with delays or imperfections in the development of the rural health sector.86 Yet the complexity of the problem emerges from the fact that careful investigations in the 1980s suggested that the resurgence of malaria in India was due less to the ineffectiveness of DDT than to shortages of it. V.P. Sharma and K.N. Mehrotra argued, in 1986, that the cessation of free supplies of DDT from the US government in 1963 (in the aftermath of Rachel Carson’s Silent Spring); shortages of foreign exchange, and inefficiencies in domestic production left several States with shortfalls of DDT at crucial moments in the ‘attack’ on malaria. ‘Although insecticide resistance did pose a problem’, they argued, the ‘resurgence of

The Limits of Disease Control 169

malaria could not be contained … mainly because of want of insecticides rather than their failure’.87 This reminds us, once again, that the technologies of disease control were genuinely effective; that there was always debate, as there still is, over whether the ‘obstacles’ and ‘setbacks’ of techno-politics could and should be met with the ever-more intensive use of technology. The mounting frustrations of international public health by the early 1960s provoked some within the WHO to question the very basis on which the organization had intervened in Asia and beyond from the late-1940s. Karl Evang, one of the first presidents of the World Health Assembly, a veteran Norwegian public health specialist, and amongst the most reflexive practitioners of international public health, was particularly eloquent in his analysis during the 1963 World Health Assembly. He argued that malaria eradication had, for a time, ‘captured the imagination not only of the hundreds of millions suffering from the disease but also of the economists and politicians’. For as long as malaria eradication was funded by voluntary donations, an ‘advertising method’ was needed – with all the hyperbole and drama this entailed. With the removal of large-scale American support, however, ‘such methods were no longer possible’. Evang declared that it might be necessary ‘at a later stage’ to ‘drop’ the notion of eradication altogether; at the very least it needed re-definition.88 The problem confronting the WHO, however, was of a much more fundamental nature, and that was to do with the ‘relationship between the specialist organs of the malaria eradication machinery and the rural health services of the countries concerned’. Evang suggested, reflecting on the mixed experiences of international public health in the 1950s and early 1960s, that there were clear limits to how far a ‘mass campaign’ approach could go. His analysis is worth quoting at length, so much does it touch on issues that have been at the core of this book: With the first group [of diseases], which included malaria, smallpox, cholera, plague and yaws, very good primary and secondary results could be obtained without involving the local population: all that was asked of them was cooperation with vaccination and spraying teams. The second group, however, which included tuberculosis, leprosy, diseases of mothers and children … could only be fought if the local population was completely involved from the outset. The most

170 Decolonizing International Health

difficult thing of all was asked of them: to change their daily habits concerning food, irrigation and other matters.89 The ‘second’ group of diseases, Evang argued, could not be tackled ‘unless rural health services were developed’. Despite the conspicuous success against the ‘first’ group of diseases, ‘diseases in the second group had spread’. Evang suggested that this threatened to become a ‘terrifying situation for the local population’, and, worse, ‘one that would undermine their trust in the health services’. Evang suggested that the time might have come to reverse, completely, the WHO’s order of priorities: ‘no programme for the eradication of any disease should be introduced in any country until the integrated basic health service existed’.90 Few within the WHO were as openly critical as Evang of the state of affairs that prevailed by the mid-1960s.91 Yet Evang’s criticisms reflected, without necessarily being influenced by, a more general trend within public health thinking about the complexity of the ‘epidemiological transition’.

Eradication and evolution In the practice of public health there remained great uncertainty about the potential for further progress in using technology to transform the relationship between pathogens and humanity. While practitioners debated the future of disease control, the failures and frustrations of the mass campaigns of disease control provoked an ecological critique of the entire philosophy of disease eradication, a critique as uncompromizing as earlier celebrations of the concept. When the biologist Rachel Carson published her findings on DDT’s capacity to cause lasting ecological damage, she captured the imagination of a generation in the United States and Western Europe. She recognized that technology itself posed grave dangers to human health in the short and the long-term. Hers was but the most prominent of a number of ecologically informed critiques of the techno-centric approach to development, which the malaria eradication programme seemed to encapsulate. Perhaps the most thoroughgoing critique of the whole philosophy of disease eradication came from the microbiologist Rene Dubos, of the Rockefeller University. In his opus Man Adapting, of 1965, Dubos pointed to the ‘rapid occurrence of mutations endowing the parasites with resistance to any kind of drug that is widely used … we are

The Limits of Disease Control 171

engaged in an endless cycle of synthesizing at an ever-increasing cost more and more insecticides to which vectors become progressively more resistant’.92 There was a fundamental error, he suggested, in the idea that ‘malaria’ could be eradicated, since Malaria is not a single disease, but a huge congeries of diseases, occupying a large number of ecological provinces each with its particular conditions. The multiplicity of problems comprised under the single word malaria makes it therefore hazardous to conclude that a given procedure that has been effective in a particular area will necessarily prove effective in another.93 Dubos went on to argue that ‘the biological truth is that elimination of one particular agent makes the ground available for another or even usually for several other kinds of pathogens’, a fact illustrated by the fact that ‘non-specific’ infections caused by malnutrition ‘dominates the pathogenic picture in a large part of the underprivileged world today’.94 Epidemiological research began to confirm Dubos’s suggestion that the prevention of mortality from certain widespread diseases would not necessarily lead to lessened morbidity. By the 1960s, then, public health specialists increasingly accepted that the leading cause of morbidity and mortality in the Third World was not the ‘named’ diseases which had shaped the vast campaigns of disease control after 1945, as the ‘pneumonia-diarrhoea complex’, which could be caused by a number of pathogens, and which depended on the nutritional status of the individual.95

The triumph of population control If one line of argument criticized disease control for not being successful enough, another suggested that it had been too successful. The ecological critique of disease eradication pointed to the wily resilience of pathogens in overcoming insecticides and chemotherapy alike. This accorded with the experience of health workers and administrators who confronted the challenges of the ‘tropical’ environment. Yet others had, from the 1940s, seen in the perceived success of disease control campaigns a profound threat, in its facilitation of rapid population growth. I argued (in Chapter 3, above) that international public health had, from the start, to defend itself against the charge that it would herald a population explosion. The decision to adopt mass

172 Decolonizing International Health

campaigns like that of malaria eradication was, in large part, shaped by their promise to deliver dramatic success at low cost, and thus to support the argument that they facilitated rather than hindered economic development, to an extent that outweighed the economic drain of a fast-growing population. So long as the ‘romance’ of disease eradication remained strong, the WHO managed to maintain support and funding for its massive programmes. When their façade began to fragment, when frustrations and obstacles mounted, the champions of population control were waiting in the wings, now armed with new technologies of their own. The history of international efforts to control population has produced a vast literature spanning history, demography and anthropology.96 Throughout the 1950s, coincident with the apogee of faith in disease eradication, American private foundations and a number of other non-governmental groups assembled a vast infrastructure of research and training in population studies. Like international public health, population control grew out of myriad pilot projects, local experiments and technological changes; population control developed as a ‘powerful submerged programme waiting to burst into action’. Yet the ‘insidious, diffuse and incontestable atmosphere of public opprobrium’ surrounding birth control in the United States meant that, unlike public health, the infrastructure of population control was built up on the margins of official ‘policy’.97 For a number of reasons, the ground was prepared by the early 1960s for the official adoption of population control: Ansley Coale and Edgar Hoover gave the argument for population control the seemingly incontestable authority of economic science in their influential 1958 publication Population Growth and Economic Development. Furthermore, in late 1961, the new Kennedy administration showed itself more open than its predecessor to the prospect of intervening directly to limit population growth in the Third World. Above all, it seemed now that fertility, as much as mortality could be transformed through technology: new tools were available, as cheap and almost as easy to distribute as antibiotics or DDT: the Intra-Uterine Contraceptive Device (IUCD) and then the contraceptive pill. Thus, as Paul Demeny has argued, ‘the beginnings of large-scale family planning programmes in the developing world are a story of the 1960s’. In 1965, Lyndon Johnson, convinced by his economic advisers and by the growing acceptability of contraceptive technology, declared before the United Nations that less than $5 invested in population control was worth more than $100 invested in economic develop-

The Limits of Disease Control 173

ment.98 By the mid-1960s, population policy became a ‘sector’; by the late 1960s, the UN had established a separate Fund for Population Activities (UNFPA), and the World Bank began to intervene in the field. Most importantly, from the perspective of the history of public health, funding for population control was often diverted straight from funding for public health.99 The new technology, and the new funding catalysed interest in population control across Asia, where there had long been a constituency of administrators and activists interested in birth control and who perceived population growth as a threat to national welfare (and, on some views, to women’s health).100 Mohan Rao has shown with great clarity how the agenda of population control in India came to ‘dominate concerns in the field of health and contoured the directions of health policy’. A major shift came, Rao argues, when a UN advisory mission convinced the Indian government, in 1964, that the IUCD could be used on a massive scale, thus overcoming the problems faced thus far in the proven unpopularity of the ‘rhythm’ method, and the dangers attendant on surgical methods. The central government undertook to fund population control activities in the states (even as they refused to cover the costs of their public health apparatuses), and from 1966, family planning was created as a separate ministerial responsibility, granted almost as much in funding as the entire public health service of India.101 Matt Connelly, using recently opened archives, has explained this shift with reference to the power struggles within the Indian administration, with enthusiasts for family planning within the Planning Commission prevailing over the beleaguered Ministry of Health.102 But part of the reason why population control was able to sweep aside the demands of international public health so comprehensively in the 1960s lies in the very language in which international public health justified itself. I have argued (in Chapter 3) that by claiming the language of economic development and the quantification of the value of human life, the WHO and its supporters temporarily succeeded in attracting support for public health. Yet, as Gordon Harrison – himself a participant in the global drama of public health – noted poignantly, reflecting on the failure of malaria eradication, this recourse to the language of economic rationality was double-edged: If the model predicts that fighting disease pays, then the exercise can seem as harmless as it ought to seem superfluous. But suppose the fight is found not to pay. As the whole point of running a

174 Decolonizing International Health

cost-benefit model is to sway governments presumed to be responsive to that kind of argument, would they not be under as strong pressure to forgo malaria control when the model lights turn red as to proceed when they are green?103 The underlying implications, he suggested, went to the heart of the debate about valuing human life that motivated the foundation of the WHO in 1946. ‘It used to be argued’, Harrison lamented, ‘that development was a good thing because it benefited people; now we seem to be on the point of agreeing that people are a good thing so far as they benefit development’.104 The shift from public health to population control, a shift latent in the 1950s and manifest in the 1960s, was at least in part a product of this emphasis on the instruments over the fundamental values of development.105 The logic that underpinned arguments for population control rested upon a negative, rather than a positive, valuation of human life – a birth averted is money saved.106 By the late 1960s, the WHO’s smallpox eradication programme emerged as the sole ‘showpiece’ for international health, partly because the USSR had adopted it as a project to champion after re-entering the WHO in 1957 after almost a decade’s absence. The programme intensified in 1967, when the US government decided to support it as a gesture, at a time when the vast majority of their foreign aid funds for ‘health’ were being channelled to population control.107 The smallpox eradication programme, it is well known, became the WHO’s one great ‘success story’, and it is the campaign with which the organization remains most closely associated. Smallpox, however, had a number of unique features that made it amenable to eradication whilst avoiding the frustrations that had beset malaria or tuberculosis policies. First, in stark contrast to malaria, the disease had no animal reservoir, and no long-term human carriers; the characteristic rash made it easy to identify infectious people, quite unlike the ‘silent’ tuberculosis. Finally, the vaccine, unlike BCG, was proven to be highly effective, and heatstable. It was, in short, ‘unique in relation to human infections’.108 In other ways, too, the smallpox eradication campaign of the late 1960s and 1970s was a very different entity to the campaigns against malaria, tuberculosis and yaws considered in this book. Harish Naraindas has argued that in the early 1970s, smallpox was ‘recast from a deity into a demon’, a force of evil to be vanquished by the needle, an ‘instrument of God (science/technology) in the battle against the demon’. The language of good and evil was of a fundamentally different order to the language of development underpinning the

The Limits of Disease Control 175

campaigns of the 1950s, suggesting implicitly that this language, this method of reasoning, had failed. Smallpox eradication provided a way to recapture an element of drama, of legitimacy and purpose, when the frustrations of the techno-politics of the 1950s threatened to undermine the very mission of international public health. Few, if any, international health workers spoke of the new utopia of a world without disease. They focused, instead, on the more realizable goal of a world without the demon smallpox. Writes Naraindas: Its seemingly inherent legitimacy (marked by the visibility of the disease and the ‘fear’ of leaving one marked for ever?) makes persuasion, ruse and excess both legitimate and ‘understandable’ tools. …In the bargain the state, and super-states like the WHO, not only legitimate and renew their contract but consecrate themselves.109 If we were to extend – too far, perhaps – Naraindas’s metaphor of smallpox eradication as a ‘grand act of ritual purging’, it appears that by focusing that intently on the goal of eradicating the demon smallpox, by using all means (including force), the WHO expurgated the sense of failure that hung over its entire mission after the mid-1960s.

Conclusion: dispersion and ‘medical pluralism’ Speaking to a WHO conference in Brazzaville in 1968, the WHO tuberculosis specialist and future Director-General, Halfdan Mahler, suggested that tuberculosis control policies in the future needed to recognize that ‘the technology for controlling tuberculosis’ had been ‘standardized and simplified to such an extent’ that the problem lay merely ‘in setting up an effective … sales organization with standardized consumer goods’.110 Reflecting, briefly, on the legacies of the myriad interventions that this book has attempted to examine, it seems that Mahler’s statement touches upon an important element of truth. Mass campaigns of disease control did not work as they were meant to, but they had a number of unintended consequences that continue to shape experiences of illness and therapeutics today. I have argued, throughout the book, that repeated attempts to reform or to shape the behaviours of populations, first their sanitary and nutritional habits, and later their responses to the offer of medical technology, were incompletely successful. To ensure that tuberculosis patients visited health clinics weekly to consume drugs; that primary health workers reported ‘fever’

176 Decolonizing International Health

cases and tested them for malaria; that ‘voluntary’ vaccinations were accepted, was a fraught and ultimately frustrating process. Yet new technologies, nevertheless, were appropriated, adopted, and internalized by very large numbers of people. Recent anthropological research has shown, clearly, that ‘self-care with modern pharmaceuticals’ is the dominant form of therapy in large parts of Asia and Africa today. Research in many different settings, including in South and Southeast Asia, suggests that belief in the power of pharmaceuticals, and particularly injections, plays an important part in shaping people’s therapeutic practices. Susan Reynolds Whyte and colleagues write of a ‘popular belief that health can be obtained and maintained through the consumption of commodities, medicines’.111 Though the introduction of western medicine long pre-dates the international campaigns of disease control, the mass campaigns of the 1950s did, as we have argued, reach a far greater proportion of the populations of South and Southeast Asia than anything that had gone before. To that extent, the appropriation of modern medical technologies in daily life may well be a consequence of the experience of the mass campaigns of the 1950s. In an article exploring the ‘popularity of injections in the Third World’, H.V. Wyatt suggested that this was indeed the case. He argues that the WHO’s (and, in Africa, colonial governments’) yaws eradication campaigns, with their ‘massive use of injections’, served to ‘establish the injection as the pre-eminent therapy in places as widespread as Ghana, Brazil and Ceylon’.112 Their attraction was due to the dramatic and immediate effects of these specific therapies in relieving symptoms. A similar argument might be made about certain kinds of chemotherapy against malaria, which large numbers of people were exposed to in the later phases of the malaria eradication programme. Thus Whyte et al suggest that ‘efficacy provides evidence that changes the culture of health’. In the process, the use of medical technology was routinized, internalized as a standard, even ritual, response to feelings of illness.113 This was an outcome that might be explained, at least in part, by the very process this book has tried to describe. Planners and administrators of national and international health programmes experienced a gradual loss of control: control over patients, over practitioners, over health workers, over the environment, and over the very technologies that gave them power. The last two chapters, in particular, have suggested that each of these elements of international public health circulated in an increasingly ungoverned fashion over the course of the

The Limits of Disease Control 177

1950s and early 1960s. The control of vaccinations, of treatments and prophylactics was initially designed to remain carefully within the control of a hierarchy of experts, reaching from the WHO headquarters in Geneva to the village malaria surveillance team or tuberculosis clinic. These medical technologies ‘were not supposed to become common commodities’, but the effort to control them was ‘doomed to failure’. For As the value and power of injections became established within the growing biomedical health care system, health workers themselves began to sell them in order to supplement their salaries. Lay specialists (and needlemen) carried forward the process of commodification.114 The very weakness of local health infrastructures meant that pharmaceutical technologies have circulated in an unregulated way.115 ‘Malaria doctors’ dispensed not only anti-malarials, but also all manner of other drugs.116 Powerful anti-tuberculosis agents became available from private providers, from grocery shops and ‘medical stores’ to private clinics and ayurvedic practitioners.117 Rarely if ever were patients able to afford to complete their courses of treatment, leading, inevitably, to the spread of drug-resistant pathogens. The production and marketing of pharmaceuticals, throughout the Third World, became an increasingly lucrative commercial enterprise, and this is a process we will understand only dimly.118 The restraints organizations like WHO and national governments exercised upon the global pharmaceutical industry began to fragment in the late 1960s.119 It was not least as a result of the powerlessness of the organization to secure the supplies needed to implement its policies that the DirectorGeneral, Halfdan Mahler, embraced a more strident rhetoric in the 1970s, arguing that ‘a huge medical industry has grown up with powerful vested interests of its own. Like the sorcerer’s apprentice, we have lost control, social control over health technology’.120 The WHO’s radical attempts to ensure that poor countries had access to generic versions of ‘essential drugs’ did not, ultimately, prove effective in the face of the pharmaceutical industry’s power.121 On one view, voluntary self-medication with drugs provides people with a degree of control over their own health. Certainly, thinking of people as ‘consumers’ of, say, anti-tuberculosis drugs rather than ‘patients’ (or, worse, ‘targets’) gives them considerably more agency.122 In the view of medical anthropologists who have studied the effects of

178 Decolonizing International Health

the commoditization of medicines in recent decades, it remains the case that ‘money, however little, can be a crucial mode of empowerment in the struggle for health. It allows people to make an exchange, to choose a commodity without being dependent on an inconvenient, patronizing and demeaning formal health care system’.123 Yet the dominant picture is a bleak one. As mutant pathogens necessitate the use of increasingly powerful, and expensive, pharmaceutical agents, so more and more people have been killed by a lack of access to increasingly expensive drugs, or by the consumption of incomplete courses of (sometimes suspect) medicines.124 Yet the belief in drugs prevails. As Mark Nichter put it in his study of medical practices in South India and Sri Lanka: The false consciousness generated by health commodification serves to undermine the impetus to participate in ecological-environmental based popular health movements in a context where they are of crucial and immediate importance.125 It may be going only slightly too far to see this as one of the longerterm legacies of the WHO’s choice – a choice I have tried, in this book, to explain – to see health primarily in terms of things.

Conclusion

The period under consideration in this book, the 1930s to the mid-1960s, saw rapid declines in overall levels of mortality around the world, and particularly in the Third World. On this there is general consensus amongst demographers. The most dramatic reductions in mortality were seen in the 15 years between 1945 and 1960. A sample of 18 ‘under-developed’ countries showed that whereas the period from 1935–39 had brought a 6.3 per cent decline in mortality rates compared with the previous five-year period; the percentage declines in mortality over subsequent five-year periods, respectively, were 15.2 per cent for 1945–49, and 20.1 per cent for 1950–54.1 In the case of India, official estimates of infant mortality show that the rate fell from 182 per 1,000 in the period 1941–50, to 146 per 1,000 in the following decade.2 In sub-Saharan Africa, too, 1950 has been identified as the starting point for a rapid growth of population founded, above all, on the intensification of mortality decline.3 The most rapid rates of mortality decline began in the aftermath of the Second World War, coinciding with the most intensive phase of the international campaigns against infectious diseases in Asia and Latin America, and the growth of colonial public health efforts in subSaharan Africa. Commentators at the time saw a direct causal connection between the two phenomena, not least commentators within the UN itself. Soon after the commencement of a worldwide programme of ‘technical assistance for economic development’, the UN’s Preliminary Report on the World Social Situation spelled out the implications of the early experiments in international health after the Second World War: Against disease the general advance has been substantial in recent years, and, in some of the less developed areas, it has been dramatic, 179

180 Decolonizing International Health

with death rates dropping as much as 50 per cent in a few years’ time. The extension of modern methods of mass-disease control, which can eliminate such scourges at relatively little cost, accounts in good part for these successes.4 This reflected a widespread perception in the 1950s that international health campaigns were universally effective; that they could work regardless of local conditions. The unprecedented power of relatively cheap medical technology convinced many observers that health could be greatly improved without waiting for economic development. The demographer George Stolnitz described the increasing dissociation of health from economic development in an influential 1955 paper in the journal Population Studies, where he argued that ‘the primary role of international rather than national health agencies, the use of antibiotics, the development of cheap yet effective methods for combating malaria’. Each of these developments was ‘a mid-century innovation’, and each challenged the ‘emphasis on overall socio-economic conditions as determinants of survival levels.’5 The new vaccines and chemotherapeutic drugs, an early WHO report declared, ‘gave doctors the means of attacking, selectively, the specific causes of disease.’6 Kingsley Davis, one of the most eminent population theorists after the Second World War, painted an even more unequivocal picture.7 It was commonly believed, Davis wrote in the American Economic Review in 1956, that ‘the fundamental cause of declining death rates was considered to be economic development’. If employed as ‘an interpretation of Western history’, Davis suggested, such a view ‘seems essentially correct’. However, ‘when it is applied to contemporary under-developed areas, it is wrong; for the truth is that these areas do not need to become economically developed to reduce their death rates drastically’.8 The case of Ceylon provided perhaps the most dramatic illustration of this point. In just five years, between 1945 and 1950, the mortality rate in Ceylon had fallen by 24 per cent. This outcome Davis attributed in large part to the WHO-sponsored DDT-spraying campaign across the island, which began in 1946. Based on this and other examples, Davis argued that ‘the great reduction of mortality in underdeveloped areas since 1940 has been brought about mainly by the discovery of new methods of disease treatment’, and by the ‘diffusion’ of these technologies ‘through international organizations’. This mortality decline ‘did not depend on general economic development or

Conclusion 181 Figure C.1

Estimates of World Population, 1920–60 (’000,000s)

2600 2100 World 1600

Africa

1100

Americas Asia

600 100 1920

1930

1939

1950

1954

1960

Source: compiled from UN, Demographic Yearbook, various years, 1948–62

Table C.1

Infant Mortality Rates, 1945–65 (rate per 1,000) 1945–49 1950

Burma1 Ceylon India2 Indonesia3 Philippines Singapore Thailand Vietnam

303.9 110.5 132.7 – 114.7 98.7 82.2 –

1952 1953 1954

1955 1956

1957 1958 1959 1960

240.3 239.2 230.6 198.6 177.6 166.8 164.3 147.6 130.3 148.6 77.0 78.4 71.2 72.0 71.5 66.5 67.5 64.5 57.5 56.8 118.9 115.9 117.8 109.4 99.9 102.2 99.4 100.2 87.0 86.5 95.2 82.5 89.4 107.4 100.4 99.6 99.6 83.5 84.1 – 101.5 101.6 105.3 94.2 84.3 83.9 93.0 80.0 72.4 73.1 69.4 70.0 67.1 56.0 49.6 42.5 41.1 43.4 35.8 34.8 63.8 62.8 64.9 63.5 56.1 55.2 62.2 54.1 47.1 48.7 48.8 – – 48.8 42.3 46.6 33.4 35.4 32.2 36.3

Notes: 1 Burmese Figures include urban areas only. 2 Data for a changing group of states and territories over the period. 3 Data for a changing group of regencies over the period. UN report declares that for Indonesia, these are ‘estimated rates’: ‘source unknown’. Source: UN, Demographic Yearbook, various years, 1948–62.

social modernization’, nor did it depend on ‘training local medical personnel’ (although, if the argument of this book is correct, it depended a great deal on the training of local medical auxiliaries and technicians). Ultimately, and despite ‘lip service paid to the necessity of general economic improvement and community welfare’ in public health textbooks, ‘the truth is that many scourges can be stamped out with none of this’; Davis added, for effect, that this could be achieved ‘just like diseases in cattle can be eliminated’.9 The conclusion of Davis’s argument, in keeping with his widely disseminated views on

182 Decolonizing International Health

over-population, was that international disease control was producing an unsustainable level of population growth, something that was likely to end in Malthusian disaster. The champions of international health, we have seen, turned the argument around, and suggested that improvements in health – using cheap and universally applicable technology – were a necessary prerequisite for economic development. But what appeared as an indisputable ‘secular’ trend to Kingsley Davis seemed very different indeed in the eyes of the young Pramoedya Ananta Toer, the great novelist of modern Indonesia. In a short story, ‘My Kampung’, published in 1952 – as the mass vaccination programmes and malaria spraying teams were underway in Indonesia – Pramoedya painted a picture not of progress but of an ever-present threat of illness and death. His words mock the promises of governments and international organizations; they question what it really meant to speak of a ‘right to health’. The story appears in a collection of tales and sketches set in the Djakarta of the late 1940s and early 1950s, its characters are Djakarta’s labouring poor. The subtitle to the collection, ‘Caricatures of Circumstances and Their Human Beings’ is strongly suggestive of the tone of the stories, with their atmosphere of futility and despair.10 ‘My Kampung’ begins with a caricatured image of filth and pestilence, so characteristic of the colonial discourse on the tropical environment. Pramoedya evokes the grotesque and the corporeal, even as his tone alternates between resignation and sarcasm. The story begins: ‘Friend, you’ve heard the name of my Kampung, haven’t you? Kebun Djahe Kober, five hundred metres in a straight line from the palace. And you also know, don’t you? Its gutters are covered in shit of the kampung residents’ (p. 77). Distancing himself, immediately, from the presumed revulsion of the reader at the opening description of the kampung, the narrator declares: ‘This is not a situation that ought to be admired or condemned’ (p. 77). The narrator declares that not even a ‘small guerrilla squad’ – writing, here, in the aftermath of Indonesia’s bloody war of independence – would suffer the mortality of this kampung, ‘with its stink and condition’, where ‘people die one after another’ (p. 78). There follows a sordid catalogue of the many residents of the narrator’s alley, one of seven in the kampung, who had suffered ‘cheap’ deaths. There is the case of the man who dies from ‘chronic venereal disease’; the mother who kills her favourite child with an overdose of worm medicine; the print setter who dies of lead poisoning, and the Chinese shop owner who flees on a ship to ‘die in [his] own

Conclusion 183

country’, leaving his wife to die in the Kampung. And then there are the countless victims of tuberculosis: ‘T.B. did not surprise anyone in my kampung anymore; it was something routine’ (p. 83). In keeping with the tone of tragedy, bordering on farce, the narrator makes no attempt to pass judgement on the situation. Instead, he implicitly mocks the discourse of hygiene and public health: ‘If killing with weapons is punished by the government, killing because of ignorance and poverty is not prohibited in my kampung, even if the killing is of one’s own child. It is a routine situation and perhaps quite understandable’ (p. 82). If this portrait of the kampung Kebun Djahe Kober appears to mock the promises of a new era of health and hygiene, the effect was entirely intentional. It is the conclusion of ‘My Kampung’ that makes it such an explicit, and interesting, commentary on the global discourse of public health. ‘You too, friend, can come to my kampung sometime’, the narrator says, ‘finding it is not hard at all’ (p. 84). The kampung, after all, is a stone’s throw from the Palace: ‘five hundred metres in a straight line towards the southwest, there my kampung stands in all its glory, defying the doctors and the technical professionals’ (p. 84). And then this striking point is repeated once more: ‘the kampung’s located so near the palace where everyone’s health, and every little detail is guaranteed’ (p. 84). Thus, even after a generation of disease control and eradication programmes, when the trends that Davis and others identified were clear, Frantz Fanon could write, in 1965, that The colonized person, who in this respect is like the men in underdeveloped countries or the disinherited in all parts of the world, perceives life not as a flowering or a development of an essential productiveness, but as a permanent struggle against an omnipresent death. This ever-menacing death is experienced as endemic famine, unemployment, a high death rate, and inferiority complex and the absence of any hope for the future.11 Here, in the juxtaposition of the plunging mortality statistics and the continuing experience, of so many, of illness and (technically) ‘preventable’ death lies the most fundamental paradox that has informed this book. New technologies, channelled to governments through international organizations committed to providing the ‘right to health’ saved hundreds of thousands of lives, yet poverty continued, quite literally, to kill.

184 Decolonizing International Health

The explanation for this gulf lies, partly, in the nature of the changes brought about by the mass campaigns of disease control. The demographer Samuel Preston estimated that at most 30 per cent of the overall reduction in mortality in the Third World between the 1930s and the 1960s was due to ‘measurable aspects of social and economic development, such as income, literacy and nutrition’. The remaining 70 per cent he ascribed to ‘exogenous…factors such as anti-malarial programmes, immunization and other vertical governmental and international programmes’.12 Essentially, the international campaigns of public health, built on so many local experiments, had a massive impact on the incidence of certain kinds of diseases, but not others. By the mid-1960s, there was a significant slowing in the rate of mortality decline. Explanations for this deceleration of mortality decline, while absolute levels of mortality were still relatively high, have focused both on the dramatic success of the campaigns of the 1950s, and on their supposed failings. Samuel Preston illustrates the case for the success of the disease-specific ‘mass campaigns’ of the 1950s by suggesting that, given the dissociation between life expectancy and economic level due to the internationalization of disease control programmes, ‘one would expect to observe certain differences in the structure of mortality by cause of death…. In particular, diseases most closely associated with standards of living, and the least amenable to attack by specific medical and public health measures, ought to be relatively more prominent in the later population’. This situation, Preston argues, did indeed prevail in developing countries in the mid-1960s.13 Even as the dramatic successes of the campaigns against ‘named’ diseases were being celebrated, public health specialists were pointing out that ‘non-specific’ diarrhoeal diseases were in fact the biggest killers in Asia and Africa.14 These ‘non-specific’ infections proved much less amenable to control with technological ‘magic bullets’. This was part of the explanation for the apparent paradox that, even as international health campaigns appeared to be successful, the huge toll of ill health on Third World countries remained clear for all to see, as indeed it does to this day. A second explanation for the slowing in mortality decline after the early 1960s, however, has to do with changes in the international campaigns themselves. It has been argued that, at the very point when efforts to eradicate malaria, for example, should have been intensified, international and governmental support for the initiative flagged. As was shown in Chapter 6, evidence of increasing drug resistance, and numerous practical difficulties faced by malaria eradication teams were

Conclusion 185

increasingly reported by the mid-1960s. By the late 1960s, malaria had begun to re-appear in a major way. In the case of tuberculosis control, too, potentially valuable technological breakthroughs – the advent of home-based chemotherapy to cure the disease – led to official apathy and a reduction in funding, based on the mistaken belief that with effective technology at hand, the problem of tuberculosis was effectively solved.15 The fact that such international health programmes operated with ‘sharply reduced intensity’ from the mid- to late-1960s, Preston argues, is the major explanation for the ‘sluggish’ mortality decline after 1965.16 Others have argued, however, that the very success of the mass campaigns of the 1950s contained the explanation for the eventual reverses; the attempt to use technology to subdue nature was, on this view, unsustainable, and bound, ultimately, to fail. Thus, the massive use of DDT during the malaria eradication programme produced drug resistant mosquitoes; the unsupervised distribution of anti-tuberculosis drugs led to the development of resistant strains.17

The effects of health policy For a demographer like Samuel Preston, explaining the conditions of possibility for the dramatic mortality decline of the mid-twentieth century, it is sufficient to say that ‘universal values assured that health breakthroughs in any country would spread rapidly to all others’.18 This book, however, has tried to show that this process of ‘universalization’ was a complex and contingent historical phenomenon. The transformations that demographers identify are related, in myriad ways, to the changing ideas of international officials (colonial administrators, theorists of social medicine, nurses, and UN policymakers), to their changing perception of diseases and environments, and the ways of acting upon those diseases and environments. To the extent that the decline in mortality was a direct consequence of the ‘health policy’ of the 1950s, its explanation must be found, in part, in the debates which universalized public health, making the health of a villager in India or Indonesia an ‘international problem’, to be discussed in Geneva and New York as much as in Delhi or Djakarta. The history of the mortality revolution of the 1950s is also the history of frustrated Scandinavian nurses waiting for supplies of vaccine; of the enthusiasms of Indian malariologists and ‘DDT fiends’; of the difficulties faced by poor tuberculous men and women in getting to the local health clinic, every week, to consume antibiotics.

186 Decolonizing International Health

From the 1930s, an international movement grew up around questions of rural public health, concerned with taking modern techniques of public health, and health education, to the masses of Asia and Africa. The League of Nations Health Organization internationalized this concern, allowing for a discussion, across imperial frontiers, of ‘health policies’ that were being formulated, piecemeal, in different locations. The rise of nationalist concern with public health gave these debates a sharper edge, and the international forum of the League allowed them a voice. The (almost) ‘universal’ values of this period were the values of ‘rural reconstruction’, and, increasingly, of equity, between city and country and between different regions of the world. Rural romanticism was combined, here, with a heightened understanding of the bodily effects of crushing poverty. The Second World War was the source of the medical technologies which allowed for the fight against infectious diseases to be intensified. Just as importantly, however, the war gave rise to the institutions which would shape ‘health policy’ after 1945, and shaped the dispositions of a generation of public health workers around the world who believed in the possibility of a world free from disease. Above all, and building on the experience of the 1930s, the war made it possible to see the ‘world’ as the main unit of analysis in public health. The focus of this book has been on the way these debates were manifested in the Asian arena, within which India was at the centre of international policy debates, and interventions in health. As I have argued throughout this book, international health, late-colonial welfarism, and the institution of post-colonial developmental states committed to the ‘right to health’, were all products of the same set of ideas and historical processes, with their immediate origins in the aftermath of the 1930s Depression. The particular political conjuncture of Asia in the 1950s – post-colonial states at the height of their confidence, working with and via international organizations at the height of their prestige and influence – was central to the formation of the increasingly global political culture of health. One of the recurrent themes in our discussion of the internationalization of public health has been the relationship between knowledge and intervention; and between description and prescription. From the outset, participants in the world of international public health discussed the consequences of what they were doing: Was public health, in the new technological era, independent of standards of living? Were health technologies a major cause of population growth? Or did health, by contrast, provide the key to economic development? Was

Conclusion 187

medical technology universal, thus making ‘culture’ and ‘society’ unimportant? In tension with the technological approach to public health was an approach that attempted to change minds, and bodily practices. Paradoxically, the more effective the medical technology became, the more it was dependent on particular behaviours, such as the regular, long-term consumption of anti-tuberculosis drugs. Part of the problem for international health, by the end of the 1950s and into the 1960s, was the weak and fragile way in which it could exercise governmental power. What has emerged throughout this study is the lack of control and power which international health policies were able to exercise over people (who would not take their drugs), over nature (not all diseases were susceptible to technology, and some grew resistant), and over post-colonial states (not as easily moulded to the plans of technical assistants as they had hoped). The narrow power which international organizations, and their national counterparts, were able to exercise was a power based on spectacle, image, and enthusiasm. It was unsustainable in the long-term.

Faith and doubt The high point of the symbolic power of international health was reached with the launching of the global malaria eradication programme in 1955. It seemed that a new utopia was on the horizon. As one Indian report enthused in the mid-1950s, internationally-supported public health campaigns had brought the ‘relief of human illness and suffering [that] has changed the face of the country … a new era of health and happiness is dawning for the people living in erstwhile malarial tracts’.19 Yet, it has been suggested here that even at the height of this apparent confidence, international health was beset by numerous fears, and its progress was always fragile. By the early 1960s, these fears were articulated increasingly widely. Few commentators were more scathing in their criticisms of the technological approach to international health, and the idea of disease eradication, than the American biologist Rene Dubos. Even at the height of confidence in the ‘magic bullet’ of post-war biomedicine, Dubos adhered to a strongly environmentalist view of health, arguing that ‘while drugs and other specific therapeutic procedures are important in restraining microbial agents, they rarely bring about lasting control of a chronic infectious process. This demands in most cases a reform of the conditions which have made the individual or the societal body prey to the disease’.20 By the time Dubos wrote his opus,

188 Decolonizing International Health

Man Adapting, in the 1960s, his scepticism about the potential of international campaigns of disease control to bring about lasting results was more widely shared. At a time when Rachel Carson’s seminal work, Silent Spring drew attention, in the West at least, to the destructive ecological effects of DDT, and when ‘environmental’ diseases were becoming increasingly prominent in both the West and the Third World, it might have begun to seem that techno-centric disease eradication was a misguided folly.21 To the extent that Dubos did credit them with success in bringing about a reduction in mortality in the 1950s, he saw the ultimate consequences of the international health campaigns as profoundly threatening. Echoing a line of argument familiar amongst population theorists, Dubos argued that the current rate of population growth in the world could not long continue. The question, he suggested, was: ‘… will the break come from the operation of natural growth-limiting factors … from a biological catastrophe … from a technological accident, such as nuclear warfare or wholesale poisoning by environmental pollution?’22 The only cause of optimism, in Dubos’s view, was that ‘several programs are presently under way in many parts of the world to bring the population avalanche under some form of rational control’, suggesting that these, rather than programmes of disease control, were what was needed to bring ‘man’ into a more harmonious relationship with nature. Dubos was no crude Malthusian, however, and did accept the possibility that better health might, in itself, ‘change ways of life’, and encourage people to ‘raise their sights beyond the dismal present’ – that is to say, to limit the sizes of their families.23 But the fundamental problem, Dubos suggested, was the new ‘utopianism’ which had infiltrated characterized public health in the 1940s; the utopianism of the Andrija Stampars and John Ryles of that era, the drafters of the WHO Constitution. The Beveridge Report of 1942, and all of its global counterparts, from India to South Africa, reflected ‘the utopian views of universal health through the eradication of disease that were then and are still widely held all over the world’. The technological breakthroughs of the Second World War gave this new utopianism a particular slant. Unlike the idyll of Hygiea, and other Victorian visions of public health and hygiene, ‘the medical utopias of our times … assume that the achievement and maintenance of health depend not upon living in accordance with the laws of nature, but upon medical care based on scientific bio-technology’. This was, ultimately, a ‘dangerous mirage’ for Dubos. The time might not be far off, Dubos suggested, when there might arise an ‘anti-utopian movement directed

Conclusion 189

against scientific medicine’; a medical equivalent of H.G. Wells’ portrait of the Mind at the End of its Tether.24 From an historical perspective this is, of course, a familiar debate. Gareth Stedman Jones has recently written about the faith, of the late eighteenth century, that scientific and economic progress could ‘abolish poverty’. In the aftermath of the French Revolution, this conception was assailed by a ‘conservative and anti-utopian transformation of political economy’, with Malthus’ population theory at its heart. Malthus’ ideas, Stedman Jones suggests, ‘provided the main bulwark against further attempts to enlarge the framework of collective welfare provision for around a century’.25 The 1940s provided a historical moment when, once again, visions of scientific and economic progress leading to an end to poverty were widely shared; for the first time, these visions were extended beyond the Western world. I have argued, here, that visions of a world free from disease provided an important part of this international imagination of the future. For a brief period, a language of political and scientific possibility did supplant a language of ‘natural forces’ when talking about health and development. Against this conception was ranged the persistently strong Malthusian tradition, which ‘subordinated all history, law and culture to an instinctual non-social and ahistorical force’.26 In the Asian arena of the 1960s, it was decidedly this latter tendency that prevailed. By focusing on the positive value of individual lives, the discourse of international public health, and the ‘right to health’ did, for a brief period, offer an alternative to the instrumental approach to health, population and development that prevailed. For a time, discussions of public health on a transnational scale focused on ‘the human being – the working, creating, hoping and struggling human being’.27 The social medicine of the 1930s and 1940s had been concerned with discussion and persuasion; with mental as well as physical health; with political rights and the end of imperial rule. Speaking to the WHO’s Regional Committee for Southeast Asia in 1954, Jawaharlal Nehru captured the spirit of idealism behind the expansion of international health and welfare policies. Nehru suggested, optimistically, that the WHO might do something about the ‘mental conflicts, the political events’ that ‘disturbed’ humanity. ‘If the mind of the individual or of the group is disturbed’, he suggested, ‘it becomes difficult for the body to find equilibrium or any proper balance’. Turning to the question of health and population policies, their relative balance, Nehru declared that: ‘it amazes me how often

190 Decolonizing International Health

we forget the human being in our statistical conferences. We think in terms of blocks and curves or other such figures, forgetting that all these things represent individual men, women and children’. People, he declared pointedly, ‘are not blocks, they are not some mechanical gadgets that you can play about with and order about’. The makers of international health policy should ‘treat people as individual human beings who must be convinced, who must be made to understand and must be won over to any cause we seek to further’.28 This language of citizenship and rights was overtaken – in India, at the United Nations, and in most of the Third World – by a conception of development whereby legitimacy stemmed not from the participation of citizens in social transformation, but from the ability of the state and international organizations to provide for the well-being of carefully defined ‘targets’ of policy.29 By this logic (‘providing more well-being to more people at less cost’) it soon appeared that population control might prove a much more efficient intervention than public health.

Enduring utopias This book has been concerned with describing and explaining an episode in the international history of public health. To a large extent the period from the 1930s to the 1960s is a bounded one; bounded by assumptions and relationships that no longer exist. Yet, Charles Rosenberg reminds us, current policy is, inevitably, shaped by previous struggles for authority, definition and resources. Policy, in Rosenberg’s terms, is ‘structured contingency’.30 Given the history we have recounted here, it would be unrealistic to expect that, in the present, the WHO could be other than a narrow technical organization seeking technical solutions to social problems. Yet within its own genesis, in its constitutional commitment to the ‘right to health’, the Organization continues to hold out claims of entitlement. Writes Pierre Bourdieu: ‘As soon as principles of universal validity … are stated and officially professed there is no longer any social situation in which they cannot serve at least as symbolic weapons in the struggles of interest or as instruments of critique’.31 The ‘right to health’ is still available for use as a weapon in the contingent and transient mobilization of population groups in the Third World on the terrain that Partha Chatterjee calls ‘political society’, groups for whom the ‘right to health’ is further than ever from realization.32 Doubtless the order of international public health has often served to

Conclusion 191

silence issues of inequality, distribution and class. Yet, organizations like the WHO are still in a position where they are, returning to Bourdieu’s words, Capable of acting as a kind of umpire … ultimately less unfavourable to the interests of the dominated, and to what can be called justice, than what is exalted, under the false colours of liberty and liberalism, by the advocates of ‘laissez-faire’, in other words the brutal and tyrannical exercise of economic force.33 In the increasingly acute struggle between the right to health of hundreds of millions of people and the imperious demands of the global pharmaceutical industry, the WHO might still have an important, political, role to play.

Notes Introduction 1 League of Nations Archives, Geneva (hereafter LNA), Box 6095, 8A, 26762 8855, Note Prepared by Dr Haynes [typescript], [n.d.? 1936]. 2 K. Davis, ‘The Amazing Decline of Mortality in Underdeveloped Areas’, American Economic Review, 46, 2 (1956), 305–18. 3 A. Iriye, Global Community: The Role of International Organizations in the Making of the Contemporary World (Berkeley: University of California Press, 2002). 4 A. Iriye, Cultural Internationalism and World Order (Baltimore and London: The Johns Hopkins University Press, 1997). 5 Examples of recent work which I have found particularly illuminating include: M. Connelly, A Diplomatic Revolution: Algeria’s Fight for Independence, and the Origins of the Post-Cold War Era (New York: Oxford University Press, 2002); M. Connelly, ‘Population Control is History: New Perspectives on the International Campaign to Limit Population Growth’, Comparative Studies in Society and History, 45 (2003), 122–47; D.C. Engerman, ‘The Romance of Economic Development and New Histories of the Cold War’, Diplomatic History, 28, 1 (2004), 23–54, and C. Anderson, Eyes Off the Prize: The United Nations and the African American Struggle for Human Rights, 1944–1955 (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2003). 6 C.A. Bayly, The Birth of the Modern World, 1780–1914 (Oxford: Blackwell, 2004), esp. pp. 320–22. Informal processes of medical exchange, of course, can be traced back over millennia. 7 M. Foucault, The Birth of the Clinic: An Archaeology of Medical Perception, trans. A. Sheridan (London: Tavistock, 1976), pp. 23–6. On the nature of these transitions, see also C. Rosenberg, Explaining Epidemics and Other Studies in the History of Medicine (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1992), and James C. Riley, The Eighteenth-Century Campaign to Avoid Disease (New York: St. Martin’s Press, 1987). 8 C. Rosenberg, Explaining Epidemics, pp. 293–304. 9 For a detailed history of the sanitary conferences, see N.M. Goodman, International Health Organizations and Their Work (London, 1952). 10 Goodman, International Health, pp. 60–1. 11 Goodman, International Health, pp. 49–79. 12 J. Hutchinson, Champions of Charity: War and the Rise of the Red Cross (Boulder, CO.: Westview Press, 1996), p. 347. 13 J.M. Cooper, Breaking the Heart of the World: Woodrow Wilson and the Fight for the League of Nations (New York: Cambridge University Press, 2001). 14 Susan Pedersen ‘Settler Power: What Difference did the League of Nations Make?’ Paper presented at conference on ‘Settler Colonialisms in the Twentieth Century’, Harvard University, October 2002, p. 1. I am grateful to Dr Pedersen for showing me the manuscript of her talk. See also 192

Notes 193

15

16

17

18

19 20 21

22 23 24 25

26

M.D. Callahan, Mandates and Empire: The League of Nations in Africa, 1914–1931 (Brighton: Sussex Academic Press, 1999). M. Dubin, ‘The League of Nations Health Organization’, in P. Weindling (ed.), International Health Organizations and Movements, 1919–1939 (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1995), pp. 56–80. M.A. Balinska, For The Good of Humanity: Ludwik Rajchman Medical Statesman, trans. R. Howell (Budapest: Central European University Press, 1998). P. Weindling, ‘Social Medicine at the League of Nations Health Organization and the International Labour Office Compared’, in P. Weindling (ed.), International Health Organizations, pp. 134–53, p. 142. For more on the Rockefeller Foundation, see Chapter 1 below. For a detailed but rather narrow history see, J. Farley, To Cast Out Disease: A History of the International Health Division of the Rockefeller Foundation (1913–1951) (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2004). Farley J., To Cast Out Disease. H. Bell, Frontiers of Medicine in the Anglo-Egyptian Sudan, 1899–1940 (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1999), chapter six. See, in particular, L. Murard and P. Zylberman, ‘L’Autre Guerre (1914–1918). La Santé Publique En France Sous L’Oeil de l’Amérique’, Revue Historique 276 (1986), 367–98; L. Murard and P. Zylberman, ‘French Social Medicine on the International Public Health Map in the 1930s’, in E. Rodriguez-Ocan ˜a (ed.), The Politics of the Healthy Life: An International Perspective (Sheffield: European Association for the History of Medicine and Health Publications, 2002), pp. 197–218. The latest research emerging from work on the Rockefeller Archives is available in the Rockefeller Research Reports, at http:// www.archive.rockefeller.edu/publications/resrep/rronlinemain.php [accessed 20 December 2005]. For a more conventionally ‘instrumentalist’ view, see S. Hewa, Colonialism, Tropical Disease and Imperial Medicine: Rockefeller Philanthropy in Sri Lanka (Lanham, MD: University Press of America, 1995). See Chapter 2 for a fuller discussion and references. M. Vaughan, Curing Their Ills: Colonial Power and African Illness (Cambridge: Polity Press, 1991), p. 5. P. Curtin, Death by Migration: Europe’s Encounter with the Tropical World in the Nineteenth Century (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1989). On the concern of early colonial medicine with the bodies of slaves, see Megan Vaughan, Creating the Creole Island: Slavery in Eighteenth-Century Mauritius (Durham, N.C.: Duke University Press, 2005), chapter five; Megan Vaughan, ‘Smallpox, Slavery and Revolution: 1792 on Ile de France’, Social History of Medicine, 13 (2000), 411–28. Key works in the field include: D. Arnold, Colonizing the Body: State Medicine and Epidemic Disease in Nineteenth-Century India (Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press, 1993); G. Prakash, Another Reason: Science and the Imagination of Modern India (Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1999); W. Anderson, ‘Excremental Colonialism: Public Health and the Poetics of Pollution’, Critical Inquiry 21 (Spring 1995), 640–69; M. Vaughan, Curing Their Ills. Two historiographical reviews: S. Marks, ‘What is Colonial About Colonial Medicine? And What has Happened to Imperialism and Health?’ Social History of Medicine, 10, 2 (1997) 205–9; W. Anderson, ‘Where is

194 Notes

27 28 29 30 31 32

33

34

35

36 37 38

39

40

the Postcolonial History of Medicine?’ Bulletin of the History of Medicine, 79, 3 (1998), 522–30. Arnold, Colonizing the Body. Arnold, Colonizing the Body, pp. 139–40; see also Prakash, Another Reason, chapter 5. Vaughan, Curing Their Ills, p. 8. Cf. Anderson, ‘Excremental Colonialism’. Vaughan, Curing Their Ills, esp. pp. 10–14. W. Anderson, ‘The Third World Body’ in R. Cooter and J. Picktone (eds), Medicine in the Twentieth Century (Amsterdam: Rodopi, 2000), pp. 235–45; Vaughan, Curing Their Ills, p. 23. Michel Foucault, ‘Governmentality’, in G. Burchill and C. Gordon (eds), The Foucault Effect: Studies in Governmentality (London: Harvester Wheatsheaf, 1991). Foucault argues that ‘population has its own regularities, its own rates of deaths and diseases, its cycles of scarcity … the domain of population involves a range of intrinsic aggregate effects, phenomena that are irreducible to those of the family, such as epidemics, endemic levels of mortality, ascending spirals of labour and wealth’. ‘Governmentality’, p. 100. See, for example, D. Scott, ‘Colonial Governmentality’, Social Text, 43 (1995), 191–220; Prakash, Another Reason; Ann Laura Stoler, Race and the Education of Desire: Foucault’s History of Sexuality and the Colonial Order of Things (Durham: Duke University Press, 1995); Sarah Hodges, ‘Governmentality, Population and the Reproductive Family in Modern India’, Economic and Political Weekly, 13 March 2004 Anderson, ‘The Third World Body’. This is the argument of Prakash, Another Reason, chapter five. Cf. Carey Watt, Serving the Nation: Cultures of Service, Association and Citizenship (New Delhi: Oxford University Press, 2005). See Benjamin Zachariah, Developing India: An Intellectual and Social History (Delhi: Oxford University Press, 2005), pp. 110–32, on the discourse of community development and cooperation in late-colonial India. On this process in general, see Partha Chatterjee, The Politics of the Governed: Reflections on Popular Politics in Most of the World (New York: Columbia University Press). See also, Sudipta Kaviraj, ‘On State Society and Discourse in India’, in J. Manor (ed.), Rethinking Third World Politics (London/ New York: Longman, 1991), pp. 72–99; Sudipta Kaviraj, ‘In Search of Civil Society’ in Kaviraj and S. Khilnani (eds), Civil Society: History and Possibilities (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2001), pp. 287–323. For different views on this tendency, see Partha Chatterjee, Nationalist Thought and the Colonial World: A Derivative Discourse? (London: Zed Books, 1986); Sugata Bose, ‘Instruments and Idioms of Colonial and National Development: The Indian Experience in Comparative Perspective’, in F. Cooper and R. Packard (eds), International Development and the Social Sciences: Essays in the History and Politics of Knowledge (Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press, 1997), pp. 45–63. Bose suggests, contra Chatterjee, that centralization was not an inevitable but a contingent outcome. See also K. Sivaramakrishnan and Arun Agrawal (eds), Regional Modernities: The Cultural Politics of Development in India (Delhi: Oxford

Notes 195

41

42 43

44

45 46 47 48 49 50

51

52

53 54

55 56

University Press, 2003). For a sensitive consideration of the state-centred political culture of Indonesia, see Henk Schulte Nordholt, ‘A Genealogy of Violence’, in F. Colombijn and Th. Lindblad (eds), Roots of Violence in Indonesia (Leiden: KITLV Press, 1002), pp. 33–61; see also Benedict Anderson, Spectre of Comparisons: Nationalism, Southeast Asia and the World (London: Verso, 1998). Partha Chatterjee, ‘Development Planning and the Indian State’, in P. Chatterjee (ed.), State and Politics in India (Delhi: Oxford University Press, 1997), pp. 271–97. Manual of the International Statistical Classification of Diseases, Injuries and Causes of Death, 6th revision (Geneva: WHO, 1948). Randall Packard, ‘Postcolonial Medicine’, in R. Cooter and J. Pickstone (eds), Medicine in the Twentieth Century; and R. Packard, ‘Malaria Dreams: Postwar Visions of Health and Development in the Third World’, Medical Anthropology, 17 (1997), 279–96. S. Bose and A. Jalal, Modern South Asia: History, Culture, Political Economy (London/New York, 1998), p. 110. See also the indictment in M. Davis, Late Victorian Holocausts: El Niño Famines and the Making of the Third World (London: Verso, 1999). F. Cooper, Decolonization and African Society: The Labor Question in British and French Africa (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1996), pp. 376–7. Cooper, Decolonization, p. 382. J.W. Meyer, J. Boli, G.M. Thomasa and F. Ramirez, ‘World Society and the Nation State’, The American Journal of Sociology, 103, 1 (1997), 144–81. See Chapter 2, below. Kaviraj, ‘State, Society and Discourse’, p. 89. On China, see H. Van de Ven, ‘War in the Making of Modern China’, Modern Asian Studies, 30, 4 (1996), 737–56; J. Banister, China’s Changing Population (Stanford: Stanford University Press, 1987); for a contemporary account, see J.S. Horn, Away With All Pests: An English Surgeon in People’s China, 1954–69 (New York: Monthly Review Press, 1969). On Vietnam, see Andrew Hardy, ‘One Hundred Years of Malaria Control in Vietnam: A Regional Retrospective’, Part 2, Mekong Malaria Forum, 6 (April 2000). For the comparison, see Ayesha Jalal, Democracy and Authoritarianism in South Asia: A Comparative and Historical Perspective (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1995), esp. chapter 1. David Arnold, Science, Technology and Medicine in Colonial India, New Cambridge History of India, 3, 5 (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2000), chapter three. Benedict Anderson, Imagined Communities: Reflections on the Origin and Spread of Nationalism (London: Verso, 2nd ed., 1991). See Benedict Anderson, Spectre of Comparisons, pp. 299–317; A. Vickers, A History of Modern Indonesia (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2003), pp. 169–98. R.H. Taylor (ed.), Burma: Political Economy Under Military Rule (London: Palgrave, 2001). F. Frankel, India’s Political Economy: The Gradual Revolution, 1947–1977: The Gradual Revolution (Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1978), chapters five and six.

196 Notes 57 There is an extensive critical literature on the political culture of development, and particularly on the role of science and technology within it. The most important works include: J.C. Scott, Seeing Like a State: Why Certain Schemes to Improve the Human Condition Have Failed (New Haven: Yale University Press, 1998); A. Nandy, ‘Science as a Reason of State’ in A. Nandy (ed.), Science, Hegemony and Violence: A Requiem for Modernity (Delhi: Oxford University Press, 1988), pp. 1–26; J. Ferguson, The Anti-Politics Machine: ‘Development’, Depoliticization and Bureaucratic Power in Lesotho (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1990); A. Escobar, Enountering Development: The Making and Unmaking of the Third World (Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1995); A. Gupta, Postcolonial Developments: Agriculture in the Making of Modern India (Durham NC & London: Duke University Press, 1998). 58 Ranajit Guha, Dominance Without Hegemony: History and Power in Colonial India (Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 1998). 59 Pierre Bourdieu, Pascalian Meditations (Richard Nice, trans. Cambridge: Polity, 2000), p. 140. 60 On the tension between public health and clinical medicine in the British context, see Dorothy Porter, ‘Enemies of the Race: Biologism, Environmentalism and Public Health in Edwardian England’, Victorian Studies, 34, 2 (1991), 159–78. 61 D. Porter and R. Porter, ‘What Was Social Medicine? An Historiographical Essay’, Journal of Historical Sociology, 1, 1 (1988), 90–106. 62 P. Zylberman, ‘Fewer Parallels than Antitheses: Rene Sand and Andrija Stampar on Social Medicine, 1919–1955’, Social History of Medicine, 17, 1 (2004) 77–93, p. 89. 63 A. Brandt, No Magic Bullet: A Social History of Venereal Disease in the United States Since 1880 (New York: Oxford University Press, 1987); F. Soper, ‘Problems to be Solved if the Eradication of Tuberculosis is to be Realized’, American Journal of Public Health, 52, 5 (1961), 734–48. 64 My experiences of trying to locate post-colonial archival materials in India shared many of the frustrations Vivek Chibber sets out in detail in his Locked in Place: State-Building and Late Industrialization in India (Princeton: Princeton University Press, 2003). I was able to access very few files on public health at the National Archives of India, in Delhi. Most of the files I requested ‘could not be located’; a few other folders were delivered to me, complete with file numbers and titles, but were empty inside. Even in the catalogue of holdings on the Ministry of Health, which is supposed to span 1946–1960, the latest file listed is from 1948. I am grateful to the archivist at the NAI who endeavoured to find out what happened to the files, sadly without success. Inquiries at the Directorate General of Health Services produced no further results. Nevertheless, I feel a reasonably complete picture of internal debates within the Indian administration has been gained from the unpublished proceedings of the Central Council on Health Policy, which I found mimeographed (though not in a complete series) at the National Medical Library, and the library of the All India Institute of Medical Sciences. Other countries in the region refused to even grant me a research visa; the jealousies of national sovereignty, and a pathological post-colonial concern with official secrets, continue to stand in the way of research in transnational history.

Notes 197 65 Kaviraj, ‘State, Society and Discourse’. 66 Rudolf Mrázek, Engineers of Happy Land: Technology and Nationalism in a Colony (Princeton: Princeton University Press, 2002), p. xvi.

Chapter 1 Depression and the Internationalization of Public Health 1 Cf. Vaughan, ‘Health and Hegemony’. 2 H. Tinker, The Foundations of Local Self-Government in India, Pakistan and Burma (London: Pall Mall Press, 1954), p. 287. 3 Tinker, Foundations, p. 290. 4 Tinker, Foundations, p. 294. 5 K.S. Ray (ed.), The Problems of the Medical Profession in India (Calcutta: All-India Medical Association, 1929), p. 5; parts of the same passage are cited in Jeffery, The Politics of Health in India, p. 177. 6 See Arnold, Science, Technology and Medicine, pp. 182–3. 7 Nair declared that the Madras health department officials ‘do not understand nor have they the capacity to understand how to deal with the defects and yet you turn around and say that the people are dirty. The Health department are inefficient and have no sanitary knowledge, and it is the inefficiency of the Sanitary department that stands in the way of improvement’. Cited in Arnold, Colonizing the Body, p. 279. 8 I. Klein, ‘Population growth and mortality in British India, Part II: The demographic revolution’, The Indian Economic and Social History Review, 27, 1 (1990), 33–63. 9 S. Guha, Health and Population in South Asia: From the Earliest Times to the Present (London: Hurst & Co., 2001), p. 86. 10 Cf. J. & J. Comaroff, Of Revelation and Revolution, 2 volumes (Chicago, 1991, 1997). 11 M. Lal, ‘The Ignorance of Women is the House of Illness’: Gender, Nationalism and Health Reform in Colonial North India’, in M. Sutphen and B. Andrews (eds), Medicine and Colonial Identity (London/New York: Routledge, 2003), pp. 14–40. 12 R. Shlomowitz and L. Brennan, ‘Mortality and Indian labour in Malaya, 1877–1933’, IESHR, 29 (1992), 57–75. 13 See Weindling (ed.), International Health, especially the chapter by AnneMarie Moulin. 14 Andrew Hardy, ‘One Hundred Years of Malaria Control in Vietnam: a regional retrospective’, Parts 1 & 2, Mekong Malaria Forum, 5 (Jan 2000), and 6 (April 2000). 15 On the history of the Rockefeller Foundation’s International Health Division, see J. Farley, To Cast Out Disease: A History of the International Health Division of the Rockefeller Foundation (1913–1951) (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2004). 16 L. Murard and P. Zylberman, ‘L’Autre Guerre’. 17 J. Farley, ‘The International Health Division of the Rockefeller Foundation: the Russell Years’, in P. Weindling (ed.), International Health, pp. 203–21. 18 Farley, To Cast Out Disease.

198 Notes 19 Murard and Zylberman, ‘French Social Medicine’. 20 M. Grmek, ‘Life and Achievements of Andrija Stampar, Fighter for the Promotion of Public Health’, in Grmek (ed.), Serving the Cause of Public Health: Selected Papers of Andrija Stampar (Zagreb: Andrija Stampar School of Public Health, 1966), pp. 13–51; Zylberman, ‘Fewer Parallels than Antitheses’. 21 Murard and Zylberman, ‘French Social Medicine’; Zylberman, ‘Fewer Parallels than Antitheses’. 22 A. Stampar, ‘Health and Social Conditions in China’, Quarterly Bulletin of the Health Organization of the League of Nations, 5 (1936), 1090–126. 23 Stampar, ‘Health and Social Conditions in China’, p. 1123. 24 Stampar, ‘Health and Social Conditions in China’, p. 1124. 25 M. Grmek, ‘The Life and Achievements of Andrija Stampar, Fighter for the Promotion of Public Health’, in Serving the Cause of Public Health, pp. 13–51, p. 39. 26 Weindling, ‘Social Medicine’. 27 ‘The Most Suitable Methods of Detecting Malnutrition Due to Economic Depression’, Quarterly Bulletin of the Health Organization, 2, 1 (September 1932). 28 League of Nations, Report of the Health Organization for the Period, October 1932 to December 1933 (Geneva, 1934); E. Burnet, ‘General Principles Governing the Prevention of Tuberculosis’, Quarterly Bulletin of the Health Organization, 1 (1932), pp. 489–663. 29 J. Boyd Orr, and J.L. Gilks, Studies in Nutrition: The Physique and Health of Two African Tribes (London, 1931). 30 Wellcome Contemporary Medical Archive Centre [CMAC], London, papers of R. McCarrison, GC 205; R. McCarrison, Nutrition and Health being THE CANTOR LECTURES delivered before the Royal Society of Arts, 1936 (London: The McCarrison Society, n.d.). 31 David Arnold, ‘The “Discovery” of Malnutrition and Diet in Colonial India’, The Indian Economic and Social History Review, 31, 1 (1994), 1–27. 32 M. Ricklefs, A History of Modern Indonesia Since c. 1200 (Basingstake: Palgrave, 2001), p. 227. 33 P. Boomgaard, ‘The Welfare Services in Indonesia, 1900–1942’, Itinerario, (1986), 57–82; Boomgaard, citing this evidence, reached a rather more optimistic conclusion about the expanse of colonial health services. See also D.A. Low, ‘Counterpart Experiences: Indian and Indonesian Nationalisms, 1920s–1950s’, Itinerario, 1 (1986), 117–44. 34 Triennial Report on the working of the Civil Hospitals and Dispensaries in the Madras Presidency, 1929–1931; British Library, London, Asia, Pacific & Africa Collection, India Office Records [hereafter IOR], V/24/679. 35 Annual Report of the Civil Hospitals and Dispensaries of the United Provinces for the Year 1933 (Allahabad, 1934), IOR, V/24/716. 36 Cf. M. Foucault, Society Must Be Defended: Lectures at the College de France, 1975–76 (trans. David Macey, Penguin, 2003), lecture of 17 March 1976. 37 M. Ricklefs, History of Modern Indonesia Since c. 1200 (Basingstoke: Palgrave, 2001), chapter 16. 38 For a helpful exegesis on this concept, see Nikolas Rose, Powers of Freedom: Reframing Political Thought (Cambridge, 1999), especially pp. 1–14. 39 J.L. Hydrick, Intensive Rural Hygiene Work and Public Health Education of the Public Health Service of Netherlands India (Batavia-Centrum, Java, January 1937), pp. i–ii.

Notes 199 40 41 42 43

44 45 46

47 48 49

50 51

52 53

54 55 56 57 58 59

60 61 62 63

64

Hydrick, Intensive Rural Hygiene, p. 8. Hydrick, Intensive Rural Hygiene, pp. 45–7. Hydrick, Intensive Rural Hygiene, p. 48. M.K. Gandhi, ‘A Talk to Village Workers’, extract from a talk given on 22 October 1935, in M.K. Gandhi, Diet and Diet Reform (Navajivan Publishing House, Ahmedabad, 1949), pp. 31–3. Gandhi, ‘National Food’, Harijan, 5/1/1934, in Diet and Diet Reform, pp. 29–30. Gandhi, ‘Waste into Wealth’, Harijan, 12/10/1935, in Diet and Diet Reform, p. 51. See, inter alia, ‘Dietetic Changes’, Harijan, 27/7/1935, in Diet and Diet Reform, pp. 86–7; ‘Minimum Diet’, Harijan, 31/8/1935, in Diet and Diet Reform, p. 30; ‘Polished v. Unpolished’, Harijan, 26/10/1934, in Diet and Diet Reform, pp. 44–6. The work to which Gandhi referred appears to be E.V. McCollum, The Newer Knowledge of Nutrition: The Use of Food for the Preservation of Vitality and Health (New York: Macmillan, 1922). Gandhi, ‘Unfired Foods’, Young India, 15/8/1929, in Diet and Diet Reform, pp. 26–7. Gandhi, ‘For Four Rupees A Month’, Harijan, 12/10/1935, in Diet and Diet Reform, p. 31. ‘Findings of the International Commission of Experts appointed by the Health Committee of the League of Nations’, Harijan, 25 April 1936, reproduced in Diet and Diet Reform, p. 101. The original report was: League of Nations, Report on the Physiological Bases of Nutrition, League of Nations Document A.12 (a), 1936. Gandhi, ‘Polished v. Unpolished’, in Diet and Diet Reform, pp. 44–6. M.K. Gandhi, ‘Implications of Constructive Programme’ [1940], Collected Works of Mahatma Gandhi, 72 (Delhi: Government of India, Publications Division, 1958–78) p. 380. See, for example, W. Anderson, ‘Introduction: Postcolonial Technoscience’, Social Studies of Science 32, 5–6 (2002), 643–57. W.R. Aykroyd, B.G. Krishnan, R. Passmore and A.R. Sundararajan (Coonoor Nutrition Research Laboratory), Indian Medical Research Memoirs, No. 32, The Rice Problem in India (January 1940), IOR, V/25/850/92, p. 64. Aykroyd et al., Rice Problem, p. 64. Aykroyd et al., Rice Problem, p. 64. Aykroyd et al., Rice Problem, p. 64. Aykroyd et al., Rice Problem, pp. 64–8. Pattabhi Sitaramayya, in Aykroyd et al., Rice Problem, pp. 64–8. C.J. Baker, ‘Economic Reorganization and the Slump in South and Southeast Asia’, Comparative Studies in Society and History, 23, 3 (1981), 325–39. Baker, ‘Economic Reorganization’. Aykroyd et al., Rice Problem, p. 68. Arnold, Science, Technology and Medicine, p. 201. League of Nations, Intergovernmental Conference of Far-Eastern Countries on Rural Hygiene: Report by the Preparatory Committee (Geneva, 1937) [III. Health. 1937.III.3]. League of Nations Archives, Geneva [LNA], Box 6093, 8A, 15110, 8855, Rural Hygiene: Conference in the Far East: Preparatory Measures.

200 Notes 65 66 67

68 69 70 71 72

73 74 75 76

77

78

79

80 81 82

83

84 85 86

LNA, Box 6093, 8A, 25509, 8855, Haynes to Private Secretary, Viceroy of India, 22 August 1936. League of Nations, Intergovernmental Conference on Rural Hygiene, pp. 16–20. J. Mackie, Bandung 1955: Non-Alignment and Afro-Asian Solidarity (Singapore: Editions Didier Millet, 2005), pp. 24–5; on Indies modernism, see Mrázek, Engineers. League of Nations, Report by the Preparatory Committee, p. 13. League of Nations, Report by the Preparatory Committee, p. 13. League of Nations, Report by the Preparatory Committee, p. 13. League of Nations, Intergovernmental Conference, p. 68. See, for example, League of Nations, Malaria Commission: Report on its Tour of Investigation in Certain European Countries in 1924 (Geneva, 1925), C.H. 273. League of Nations, Intergovernmental Conference, p. 93. League of Nations, Intergovernmental Conference, p. 78. League of Nations, Intergovernmental Conference, p. 79. Cf. LNA, Organization d’Hygiene, vol. 358, C.H./Conf.Hyg.Rural.Orient/ 4, Note received by the Secretariat of the Conference from Dr Leonard Shishlien Hsu, ‘Rural Reconstruction and Social Planning’. E. Blunt (ed.), Social Service in India: An Introduction to Some Social and Economic Problems of the Indian People (London: HMSO, 1939), pp. 382–3; Central Co-operative Anti-Malaria Society, Annual Reports (Calcutta, 1927–43). See League of Nations, Intergovernmental Conference of Far-Eastern Countries on Rural Hygiene, Preparatory Papers: National Reports: Report of the Netherlands Indies (Geneva, 1937), [III.Health.1937.III.15]; and A.P. den Hartog, ‘Towards Improving Public Nutrition: Nutritional Policy in Indonesia Before Independence’, in G.M. van Heteren, A. de Knechtvan Eekelen, M.J.D. Poulissen (eds), Dutch Medicine in the Malay Archipelago, 1816–1942 (Amsterdam: Rodopi, 1989), pp. 105–18. M. Jones, ‘Infant and Maternal Health Services in Ceylon, 1900–1948: Imperialism or Welfare?’ Social History of Medicine, 15, 2 (2002), 263–89. For a critique of Jones’ overly sanguine assumptions about the beneficence of colonial public health, see Maarten Bode’s review in Wellcome History, 30 (2005), p. 20. Cited in John Farley, Bilharzia: A History of Imperial Tropical Medicine (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1991), p. 176. Arnold, Science, Technology and Medicine, p. 203. Government of Burma, Public Health Department, G Circular No. 14 of 1936, Rangoon 29 June 1936. IOR, M/3/180: ‘Quinine: Question of Production Within the Empire’. Economic Advisory Council, Committee on Scientific Research, 5th Report: ‘Consumption and Supply of Cinchona Alkaloids in the Empire’, January 1938, EAC (SC) 31 (Confidential), IOR, M/3/180: ‘Quinine: Question of Production Within the Empire’. IOR, M/3/180: ‘Quinine’. IOR, M/3/180: ‘Quinine’. IOR, M/3/180: ‘Quinine’.

Notes 201 87

88 89

90 91 92

93 94 95 96 97 98 99

100

Quinine Policy for the Empire: Proposed Enquiry by the Economic Advisory Council: Views of the Government of Burma, 19 December 1938, IOR, M/3/180: ‘Quinine: Question of Production Within the Empire’. Baker, An Indian Rural Economy: The Tamilnad Countryside, 1880–1955 (Oxford: Clarendon, 1984), p. 519. D.A. Washbrook, ‘The Rhetoric of Democracy and Development in Late Colonial India’, in S. Bose and A. Jalal (eds), Nationalism, Democracy and Development: State and Politics in India (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1997), pp. 36–49. See also Zachariah, Developing India, chapter five. Mrázek, Engineers of Happy Land. National Planning Committee, Population: Report of the Sub-Committee (Chair: Dr Radhakamal Mukherjee) K.T. Shah ed., Vohra & Co., 1947, p. 8. Although the proceedings of the NPC were published in edited form after the war, the discussions took place between 1938 and 1940. NPC, Population, p. 127. NPC, Population, p. 6. NPC, Population, p. 129. See Sarah Hodges, Contraception’s Voluntary Empire (forthcoming, Ashgate). James C. Scott, Seeing Like a State: Why Certain Schemes to Improve the Human Condition Have Failed (Yale: Yale University Press, 1998). Bruce Cumings, Korea’s Place in the Sun: A Modern History (New York: W.W. Norton, 1997), p. 148. Prasenjit Duara, Sovereignty and Authenticity: Manchukuo and the East Asian Modern (Lanham: Rowman & Littlefield, 2003); Ming-Cheng M. Lo, Doctors Within Borders: Profession, Ethnicity and Modernity in Colonial Taiwan (Berkeley & LA, UC Press, 2002). Following, here, James Vernon, ‘The Ethics of Hunger and the Assembly of Society: The Techno-politics of the School Meal in Britain’, American Historical Review, 110, 3 (2005), 693–725.

Chapter 2 1 2

3 4 5

6

War and the Rise of Disease Control

Chatterjee, The Politics of the Governed. See Edmund Russell, War and Nature: Fighting Humans and Insects with Chemicals from World War I to Silent Spring (New York: Cambridge University Press, 2001). Farley, To Cast Out Disease, part II. F.L. Soper, Ventures in World Health: The Memoirs of Fred Lowe Soper (Washington, DC: Pan American Health Organization, 1977). See R. Packard and P. Gadelha, ‘A Land Filled with Mosquitoes: Fred L. Soper, the Rockefeller Foundation, and the Anopheles Gambiae Invasion of Brazil’ Medical Anthropology, 17 (1997), 215–38. See the excellent account of the Egyptian malaria epidemic in N.E. Gallagher, Egypt’s Other Wars: Epidemics and the Politics of Public Health (New York: Syracuse University Press, 1990).

202 Notes 7 8

9 10 11

12 13 14

15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39

Mitchell ‘Can the Mosquito Speak?’ p. 46; see also Gallagher, Egypt’s Other Wars, p. 198. National Archives of the UK [TNA]: Public Record Office [henceforth PRO]. AVIA 22/2056, Dichloro-diphenyl-trichloroethane (DDT): Production, 1943–44. Frank Snowden, The Conquest of Malaria: Italy, 1900–1962 (New Haven: Yale University Press, 2006), p. 199. F.A.E. Crew, The Army Medical Services: Campaigns Volume III: Sicily, Italy, Greece (London: HMSO, 1959), pp. 587–93. B.L. Raina (ed.), Official History of the Indian Armed Forces in the Second World War, 1939–45, Vol. I: Medical Services: Preventive Medicine (Nutrition, Malaria Control and Prevention of Diseases), (Combined Inter-Services Historical Section, India & Pakistan, 1961). Raina (ed.), Indian Armed Forces, p. 324. Raina (ed.), Indian Armed Forces, p. 296. TNA, PRO. War Office (WO) 222/2152, Director of Hygiene Tour of Far East, 1944–1945: December 1944 to January, 1945. Maj Gen T. Richardson. [Emphasis in original]. TNA, PRO. WO 222/2152. Raina (ed.), Indian Armed Forces, p. 325. Raina (ed.), Indian Armed Forces, p. 325. TNA, PRO. WO 222/2152 Director of Hygiene Tour of Far East, 1944–1945, December 1944 to January, 1945: Maj Gen T. Richardson. Harrison, Medicine and Victory, p. 145. Raina (ed.), Indian Armed Forces, p. 310. TNA, PRO. WO 203/3359. Interim Report: Mobile Malaria and Hygiene Unit No. 4, May to July 1945, Rangoon. Raina (ed.), Indian Armed Forces, pp. 332–33. National Archives of Singapore, Oral History Collection, Mr. Wilfred T. Chellapah, interviewed on 7 November 1983 by Daniel Chew. Accession number: 000353. All quotations are from my transcription of the interview tapes, reels 9–10. Raina (ed.), Indian Armed Forces, p. 297. D.K. Viswanathan, The Conquest of Malaria in India: An Indo-American Co-operative Effort (Bombay, 1958), p. 26. Viswanathan, Malaria, pp. 28–9. Viswanathan, Malaria, pp. 31–2. Viswanathan, Malaria, p. 34. Viswanathan, Malaria, p. 34. Viswanathan, Malaria, p. 35. Viswanathan, Malaria, p. 35. Viswanathan, Malaria, p. 35. See Chapter 1, above. Mitchell, ‘Can the Mosquito Speak?’ p. 47. Mitchell, ‘Can the Mosquito Speak?’ p. 46. Snowden, The Conquest of Malaria, p. 202. Snowden, The Conquest of Malaria, pp. 206–7. Snowden, The Conquest of Malaria, p. 212. M. Harrison, Medicine and Victory: British Military Medicine in the Second World War (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2004).

Notes 203 40

41 42

43 44 45

46

47 48 49

50 51 52

53

54

UNRRA Papers, British Library of Political and Economic Science (LSE), Committee for Coordination in the Far East (44), 11, 28 September 1944 ‘Relief Requirements for Certain Areas in the Far East’, quoting a report by the British War Cabinet’s Official Committee on Supply Questions in Liberated and Conquered Areas SLAO/ER (44) 16. All subsequent references to this collection are abbreviated as ‘UNRRA’. On the Dietary Scales for the Far East see UNRRA, CCFE (44), 11, 29 September 1944: Appendix A. UNRRA. TAG/ FE (45) 16, Australia 16, 24 April 1945. UNRRA, Subcommittee on Agriculture in the Far East, ‘Some Recommended Substitute and Other Food Policies in the Far East’, F.W. South (UK), Chairman. J. Gillespie, ‘International Organizations and the Problem of Child Health, 1945–1960’, Dynamis, 23 (2003), 115–42, p. 126. UNRRA, Far East Committee: Documents. CCFE (45)/18, 18 July 1945 [RESTRICTED]. UNRRA: History of the United Nations Relief and Rehabilitation Administration, under the direction of G. Woodbridge, 3 vols. (New York: Columbia University Press, 1950), Vol. 1, pp. 434–37. B. Abel-Smith, ‘The Beveridge Report: Its Origins and Outcomes’. In John Hills et al. (eds), Beveridge and Social Security (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1994), pp. 10–22; J. Hills, J. Ditch and H. Glennester (eds) Beveridge and Social Security: An International Retrospective (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1994). Report on Social Insurance and Allies Services, Report by Sir William Beveridge (London: HMSO, 1942) [CMND 6404], p. 170. C. Webster, National Health Service: A Political History (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1998). T.S. Smiley, Welfare and Planning in the West Indies (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1946); W. Arthur Lewis, ‘On Planning in Backward Countries’, in The Principles of Economic Planning: A Study Prepared for the Fabian Society (London: Dennis Dobson, and Allen & Unwin, 1949). G. Pandey (ed.), The Indian Nation in 1942 (Calcutta: Centre for Studies in Social Sciences, 1988). Zachariah, Developing India, pp. 30–43. See, for example, Sir Purshotamdas Thakurdas, J.R.D. Tata, G.D. Birla, et al., A plan of economic development for India (Bombay: S. Ramu, 1944–45), and the rival plan put forward by the Labour movement: B.N. Banerjee, G.D. Parikh, V.M. Tarkunde, members of the Post-War Reconstruction Committee of the Indian Federation of Labour, People’s Plan for Economic Development of India (Delhi, 1944). On the Bombay Plan, see Chibber, Locked in Place, pp. 88–110. Raja found Mudaliar’s affectations particularly wearing: Amongst other things, Mudaliar ‘categorically refused to attend meetings after the middle of May on the ground that it will be too hot to travel.’ Rockefeller Archive Centre, Pocantico Hills, New York [Henceforth, RAC], records of the Rockefeller Foundation [RF], Record Group [RG] 2: General Correspondence – 1945, 464. Box 306, Folder 2075: K.C.K.E. Raja to J.B. Grant, 24 December 1944. RAC, RF, RG 2, 1945, Series 464. Box 306, Folder 2076.

204 Notes 55

56

57 58 59 60 61 62

63 64 65

66 67

68 69 70 71

72 73 74 75 76

John Ryle, Changing Disciplines: Lectures on the History, Method, and Motives of Social Pathology (London: Oxford University Press, 1948), p. 85. On Ryle, see Dorothy Porter’s work: Dorothy Porter, ‘Social Medicine and the New Society: Medicine and Scientific Humanism in mid-Twentieth Century Britain’, Journal of Historical Sociology, 9, 2 (June 1996), pp. 168–87; D. Porter, ‘John Ryle: Doctor of Revolution?’ in D. Porter and R. Porter (eds), Doctors, Politics and Society: Historical Essays (Amsterdam: Rodopi, 1993), pp. 229–47. See also D. Porter, ‘Enemies of the Race: Biologism, Environmentalism, and Public Health in Edwardian England’, Victorian Studies, 34, 2 (1991), 159–78, on late-Victorian debates on preventive medicine, from which Ryle emerged. Sterling Memorial Library, Yale University. Henry E. Sigerist Papers (No. 788), Box 5, folder 176: ‘Kamala Ghosh 1941–43’. Ghosh to Sigerist, March 23, 1941. ‘Indian Woman Doctor’s Courage’, London 13 January 1943. Typescript of Broadcast, Sigerist Papers, Box 5, Folder 176: Kamala Ghosh. Ghosh to Sigerist, March 23, 1941, Sigerist Papers, Box 5, folder 176. ‘Indian Woman Doctor’s Courage’, 13 January 1943, Sigerist Papers, Box 5, folder 176. Sigerist Papers, Box 5, Folder 176: Ghosh to Sigerist, October 19, 1942. Sigerist Papers, Box 5, Folder 176: Sigerist to Charlotte Silverman, US Department of Labor, June 15 1943. Diary entries for 16 August 1944, and October 7, 1944, in Henry E. Sigerist, Autobiographical Writings, [selected and translated by Nora Sigerist Beeson], (Montreal: McGill University Press, 1966), p. 188, p. 190. Diary entry, 16 August 1944, in Sigerist, Autobiographical Writings, p. 188. J.B. Grant ‘Public Health as a Social Service’, Science and Culture, 6, 5 (1940), 296–300. Vellore Christian Medical College (North American Board), Luncheon Meeting, December 11 1945, New York City: John B. Grant’s address. RAC, RF, RG 2 – 1945, 464, Box 307, Folder 2083. Sigerist, Socialized Medicine in the Soviet Union (New York, 1937). Government of India, Report of the Health Survey and Development Committee, 4 vols (New Delhi, 1946) [henceforth Bhore Report], Vol. 1, p. 17. On the enthusiasm of various ICS officers for rural reconstruction, see Zachariah, Developing India, pp. 110–55. Bhore Report, Vol. 2, p. 32. RAC, RF, RG 2 – 1945, 464, Box 306, Folder 1078, ‘Bhore Committee Reports, 3’, pp. 14–16. Wellcome Contemporary Medical Archive Centre, London [Henceforth CMAC], Janet Vaughan Papers, GC 186/6. Memorandum by the British delegation [typescript], 20/1/1945. H. Sigerist, Socialised Medicine in the Soviet Union (New York, 1937). Bhore Report, Vol. 1, p. 21. Bhore Report, Vol. 2, chapter 3. Memorandum by British delegation, 20/1/45, CMAC, GC 186/6. CMAC, GC 186/6, underlined in original.

Notes 205 77 78

79

80

81

82

83

84 85 86 87 88 89

90

91 92

93 94

CMAC, GC 186/6. National Planning Committee, National Health: Report of the SubCommittee, Chair: S.S. Sokhey, K.T. Shah (ed.) (Bombay: Vohra & Co., 1947). RAC, RF, RG 2 – 1945, 464. Box 306, Folder 2076, ‘India – Bhore Committee Reports, 1’, p. 3; see also RAC, RF, RG 12 – John B. Grant Diaries, 1944–45 (Vol. 1). July 1944, Grand Hotel, Simla. See, for example, Gyan Chand, Problem of Population (Oxford Pamphlets on Indian Affairs, number 19: Oxford University Press, 1944); Oriental and India Office Collection, British Library, London (OIOC), T. 43122; S. Sze, China’s Health Problems (1st ed. Washington D.C.: China Medical Association, 1943). Nagpur Municipal Voters Association to Dalrymple-Champneys, 26 November 1944. CMAC, GC/139/H.2, Papers of Sir Weldon Dalrymple-Champneys. L. Manderson, ‘Wireless Wars in the Eastern Arena: Surveillance, Disease Prevention and the Work of the Eastern Bureau of the League of Nations Health Organization, 1925–1942’, in P. Weindling (ed.), International Health Organizations and Movements, 1918–1939 (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1995), pp. 109–33. J. Gillespie, ‘Social Medicine, Social Security and International Health, 1940–60’, in E. Rodriguez-Ocana (ed.), The Politics of the Healthy Life, pp. 219–39. ILO, Social Security: Principles and Problems Arising Out of the War (Montreal: 1944). J. Gillespie, ‘Social Security and International Health’, p. 221. TNA, PRO. FO 93/1/251, ‘Final Act: United Nations Conference on Food and Agriculture’, June 3, 1943. J. Gillespie, ‘International Organizations and the Problem of Child Health, 1945–1960’, Dynamis, 23, 115–42, p. 130. Final Act of the United Nations Conference on Food and Agriculture, Resolution 3, ‘Improvement of National Diets’, 1943. IOR. V/25/840/72. Memorandum on the United Nations Conference on Food and Agriculture, May 18 to June 3, 1943, with reference to its findings on the subject of Food and Health by Dr W.R. Aykroyd, Director, Nutrition Research, Indian Research Fund Association, Coonoor. This information comes from M.A. Balinska, For the Good of Humanity: Ludwik Rajchman Medical Statesman, trans. R. Howell (Budapest: Central University Press, 1998). TNA, PRO. FO 370/804. This and subsequent quotations are from: L. Rajchman, ‘Why Not An United Nations Public Health Service?’ Typescript enclosure in: TNA, PRO. CO 859/66/14. Medical: Proposed International Health Organization. Gillespie, ‘Social Security and International Health’, focuses on this aspect of Rajchman’s plans. TNA, PRO. FO 370/804. Marginal notes attached to typescript of Rajchman’s draft. The reference is to D. Mitrany, A Working Peace System:

206 Notes

95 96 97 98

99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111

An Argument for the Functional Development of International Organization (London: RIIA, 1943). TNA, PRO. FO 370/804. P. Noel-Baker to R. Law, 6 August 1943. TNA, PRO. FO 370/804. TNA, PRO. CO 859/66/14. ‘International Health Organization: Note on the First Meeting of the Informal Medical Committee’, 19 October 1943. TNA, PRO. CO 859/66/14. M. MacKenzie, ‘Critical Review of the Work of the Office, and the Health Organization of the League of Nations’. Confidential Note, 21 September 1943. All quotations are from this document. TNA, PRO. CO 859 66/14. MacKenzie, ‘Critical Review’ TNA, PRO. CO 859 66/14. MacKenzie, ‘Critical Review’. TNA, PRO. CO 859 66/14. The distinction drawn from discussion in M. Foucault, Society Must Be Defended. TNA, PRO. FO 371/40575. India Office to E.L. Hall-Patch, FO, 1 May 1944. TNA, PRO. FO 371/40575. Draft Telegram, Secretary of State to Governor General [no date]. TNA, PRO. FO 371/40575. ‘Notes for Supplementary Questions’ [typescript: no author, no date]. TNA, PRO. FO 371/40575. India Office to E.L. Hall-Patch, FO, 1 May 1944. J. Nehru, Discovery of India (Delhi: Jawaharlal Nehru Memorial Fund/Oxford University Press, [1946] 2003), p. 17. Nehru, Discovery of India, pp. 546–47. Nehru, Discovery of India, p. 546. Famine Inquiry Commission, Report on Bengal (Government of India, 1945), p. 116. Report on Bengal, pp. 132–3.

Chapter 3 1 2 3 4

5 6

7

The Political Culture of International Health

Cf. B. Latour, The Pasteurization of France, trans. A. Sheridan and J. Law, (Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1988), p. 137. E. Rothschild, ‘What is Security?’ Daedalus, 124 (1995), 53–98. United Nations Official Records, Economic & Social Council, Session 1–2 (1946). The best institutional and political history of the WHO is J. Siddiqi, World Health and World Politics: The WHO and the UN System (London: Hurst, 1995). See Chapter 2, above. League of Nations Archives (LNA), Geneva Box 6150, Group 8A, 41755/ 41755: Post-War (1939–1945) Problems. H. Cumming to R. Gautier, June 1 1945; S. Sze, The Origins of the World Health Organization: A Personal Memoir, 1945–1948 (Boca Raton, Florida, 1983), p. 1. League of Nations Archives [LNA], Geneva. Box 6150, Group 8A, 41755/41755, Cumming to Gautier, June 1 1945.

Notes 207 8 9

10 11 12 13

14

15

16 17

18

19

20

21

22 23

24

25

Documents on the United Nations Conference on International Organization, San Francisco, 1945, Vol. III, p. 632. Official Records of the World Health Organization, No. 1 [OR, 1], ‘Minutes of the Technical Preparatory Committee for the International Health Conference’, Paris, 18 March to 5 April, 1946 [hereafter, ‘Preparatory Committee, Minutes’], p. 11. Preparatory Committee, Minutes, Annex 7, p. 46. Preparatory Committee, Minutes, Annex 10, p. 61. Universal Declaration of Human Rights, UN General Assembly Resolution 217A (III) of 10 December, 1948. Official Records of the World Health Organization, 2: Proceedings and Final Acts of the International Health Conference (New York, June 19 to July 22, 1946). Goodman, International Health, p. 155; Brock Chisholm, ‘International Health’, American Journal of Public Health, 41, 12, December 1951, 1460–63. K. Lee, Historical Dictionary of the World Health Organization (Lanham, MD.: Scarecrow Press, 1998) pp. 5–7; TNA, PRO. FO 371/59613, ‘Arrangements for the World Health Conference, 1946’. Goodman, International Health, p. 164. The regional offices were: South-east Asia (SEARO); Western Pacific (WPRO); Africa (AFRO); Europe (EURO); the Americas (PASO), and the Eastern Mediterranean (EMRO). National Archives of India. Ministry of Health files. F. 9-4/47–PH (II), Part I. Report by C. Mani, IMS, India’s Representative to the Interim Commission of the WHO, November 1946. On the controversies surrounding the boundaries of the WHO’s administrative regions, see Siddiqi, World Health, pp. 60–76. Here, too, the politics of decolonization played a role: Pakistan opted not to join the ‘Southeast Asian’ region, the obvious choice, but the predominantly Muslim ‘Eastern Mediterranean’ region, to avoid its health administration being influenced by India. World Health Organization Archives, Geneva. First Generation Files [hereafter WHO.1]: 452-1-5. ‘Delimitation of Regional Health Areas on an Epidemiological Basis’, Third Session of the Interim Commission of the WHO, 31 March 1947. Asian Relations: Report of the Proceedings and Documentation of the First Asian Relations Conference, New Delhi, March–April 1947 (New Delhi: Asian Relations Organization, 1948). ‘Report on Social Services’, in Asian Relations, pp. 183–5. K.C.K.E. Raja, Health Problems of India, Pamphlet from the Asian Relations Conference (Indian Council of World Affairs, 1947) [Nehru Memorial Library collection]. On British colonial views on post-war development in their African territories, see F. Cooper, Decolonization and African Society; J. Lewis, Empire State Building: War and Welfare in Kenya, 1925–52 (Oxford: James Currey, 2000); T.N. Harper, The End of Empire and the Making of Malaya (Cambridge: CUP, 1999). ILO, Problems of Social Security, p. 74. My emphases.

208 Notes 26 27 28 29 30

31

32

33 34 35 36 37

38 39 40 41 42

43 44 45 46

47

48

ILO Archives, Geneva. ‘Preparatory Asiatic Regional Conference’: RC 1581-100; RC 158-1-13; RC 158-1-7. ILO, Problems of Social Security, p. 78. ILO, Problems of Social Security, p. 111. Ryle, Changing Disciplines, p. 9. Only in recent years have the human consequences of Partition begun to attract the attention of historians. See Joya Chatterji, ‘Rights or Charity? Government and Refugees: The Debate over Relief and Rehabilitation in West Bengal, 1947–1950’, in S. Kaul (ed.), Partition of Memory (Delhi: Permanent Black Press, 2001); Urvashi Butalia, Other Side of Silence: Voices from the Partition of India (Durham, N.C.: Duke University Press, 2000). The UN children’s agency, UNICEF, for example, was designed as a temporary, emergency operation. It was not until 1950 that, with the support of the US government, it was made permanent, and the word ‘Emergency’ dropped from its title. Rockefeller Archive Centre, Tarrytown, New York [RAC], Rockefeller Foundation Archives [RF], Record Group 2 – 1947, Series 464 (Administrative), Box 384, folder 2590. Janet D. Corwin to G.K. Strode, 18 September 1947. G. Borkar, Health in Independent India: A Decade of Progress (Delhi: Government of India, 1961), pp. 11–12. See the discussion at the end of Chapter 2, above. The Statesman, 17 May 1948. The Statesman, 17 May 1948. On Burma, see H. Tinker, Union of Burma: A Study of the First Years of Independence (London: Oxford University Press, 1957), on Indonesia, see G. Kahin, Nationalism and Revolution in Indonesia (Ithaca: Cornell University Press, 1952). See, for example, Constituent Assembly of India, Debates [henceforth CAD], Vol. 8, Part 2b, 17 May 1949; Vol. 8, Part 5a, 20 May 1949. R. Ray (West Bengal), CAD, Vol. 7, Part 5a, 9 November 1948. K. Santhanam (Madras), CAD, Vol. 5, Part 3a, 20 August 1947. See Chaterjee, ‘Development Planning’; Kaviraj, ‘State, Society and Discourse’, and Engerman, ‘Romance of Development’. TNA, PRO, DO 35/3764: World Health Organization – Regional Organization. Enclosure: ‘Pandit Nehru Inaugurates WHO Regional committee session’, 7 October 1948. Speech to the International Civil Aviation Organization, cited in W. Levi, Free India in Asia (Minnesota, 1952), p. 53. Levi, Free India, p. 42. Levi, Free India, p. 61. UNRRA: The History of the United Nations Relief and Rehabilitation Administration, Volume II (prepared by staff under the direction of George Woodbridge, Chief Historian of UNRRA). New York, 1950, p. 24. International Tuberculosis Campaign, Final Report of the International Tuberculosis Campaign: July 1, 1948–June 30, 1951. Copenhagen, 1951, p. 13. BCG, or Bacille Calmette-Guérin, is the vaccine against tuberculosis, first isolated by French scientists from a strain of bovine tuberculosis,

Notes 209

49 50 51

52

53

54 55 56 57

58

59

60 61

62 63

64 65 66

cultured on potatoes. It was first used on humans in 1921, and grew in popularity during the inter-war years, particularly in France, Spain, Russia and – more than anywhere else – in the Scandinavian countries. See J.B. MacDougall, Tuberculosis: A Global Study in Social Pathology (WHO, Section of Tuberculosis). Edinburgh, 1949, pp. 390–5. International Tuberculosis Campaign, p. 14. International Tuberculosis Campaign, pp. 14–15. WHO/UNICEF, ‘Joint Committee on Health Policy. Second Session, Provisional Minutes.’ JC2/UNICEF/WHO/Min, p. 5 [WHO Print Archives, Geneva]; WHO. JC2/UNICEF/WHO/Min, p. 3. See, for example, UN, World War on Tuberculosis: What the United Nations is Doing (New York: UN Department of Public Affairs, 1948) [British Library of Political and Economic Science, London School of Economics library, Pamphlets Collection]. A. Tawfiq Shousha, ‘Cholera Epidemic in Egypt (1947): A Preliminary Report’, Bulletin of the World Health Organization, 1, 2 (1948), 368–9. For an excellent historical analysis, see N.E. Gallagher, Egypt’s Other Wars: Epidemics and the Politics of Public Health (New York: Syracuse University Press, 1990), chapter seven. C.E. Ascher, ‘Current Problems’, p. 29. WHO, Report of the Expert Committee on Malaria: Second Session (Geneva, 1948), p. 216. Cited in UN, Technical Assistance for Economic Development (New York, 1949), p. 9. George C. Marshall, opening address at the Fourth International Congress of Tropical Diseases and Malaria. PRO. FO 370/1535, Fourth International Congress of Tropical Medicine and Malaria, Washington, May 1948. On this point, see Packard, ‘Malaria Dreams’. ‘Objectives and Nature of the Point IV Program’, March 19 1949, Foreign Relations of the United States [FRUS], 1949, Volume I, ‘National Security Affairs, Foreign Economic Policy’ (Washington D.C.: US Government Printing Office, 1976), p. 783. S. Litsios, ‘Malaria Control, Rural Development and the Post-War Re-ordering of International Organizations’, Medical Anthropology, 14 (1997) 255–78; R. Packard, ‘Malaria Dreams’; J. Siddiqi, World Health; H. Cleaver, ‘Malaria and the Political Economy of Public Health’, International Journal of Health Services, 7, 4 (1977), 557–79. Litsios, ‘Malaria Control’, p. 271. Draft National Security Council Staff Study, ‘Proposed Transfer of the Point IV Program from the Department of State to the Economic Cooperation Administration’, July 18 1951. RESTRICTED. FRUS, 1951, I, pp. 1653–56. UN, Technical Assistance for Economic Development, p. 10. My emphases. UN, Technical Assistance for Economic Development: Plan for an Expanded Co-operative Programme Through the United Nations and the Specialized Agencies (New York, 1949), p. 3. UN, Technical Assistance, p. 3. UN, Technical Assistance, p. 5. UN, Technical Assistance, p. 15.

210 Notes 67 68 69 70 71 72 73

74 75 76 77 78 79

80

81

82 83 84

85 86 87

88 89

Chatterjee, ‘Development Planning’, p. 5. S. Chakravarty, Development Planning: The Indian Experience (Delhi: Oxford University Press, 1987), p. 7. F. Frankel, India’s Political Economy, 1947–77: The Gradual Revolution (Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1977), p. 85. Government of India, Planning Commission, The First Five Year Plan: A Draft Outline (New Delhi, 1951), p. 194. First Five Year Plan, Draft Outline, p. 197. My emphasis. For more on this, see Chapter 4, below. Government of Burma, Pyidawtha: The New Burma: A Report from the Government to the People of the Union of Burma on our Long-term Programme for Economic and Social Development (Rangoon, Economic and Social Board, 1954); Government of India, Jawaharlal Nehru on Community Development (New Delhi, 1957). Chatterjee, ‘Development Planning’, pp. 16–17. Anderson, Eyes Off the Prize, p. 2. Anderson, Eyes Off the Prize, p. 67, p. 80. See Chapter 1, above. Anderson, Eyes Off the Prize, p. 5. See A.W.B. Simpson, Human Rights and the End of Empire: Britain and the Genesis of the European Convention (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2001), pp. 480–86. WHO.2, annotated copy of: WHO, Executive Board, ‘Co-operation With the United Nations Commission on Human Rights’, EB8/49, 2 June 1951, p. 4. The other five measures proposed were as follows: it was the responsibility of contracting governments to reduce infant mortality and provide for the healthy development of the child; to control epidemic, endemic and other diseases; to improve the standard of medical teaching and training in the health, medical and related professions; to enlighten public opinion on problems of health; to foster activities in the field of mental health, especially those affecting the harmony of human relations. WHO.2, ‘Human Rights’, p. 6. WHO.2 CC4-6/Human Rights, H. van Zile Hyde to B. Chisholm, 28 March 1951. WHO.2, ‘Human Rights’, p. 16. The WHO’s archives are haphazard and incomplete, making it difficult to reach firm conclusions about certain internal debates. Most of the organization’s materials were destroyed in the mid-1950s, and what survives from the early period is preserved on microfilm. WHO.2, ‘Human Rights’, pp. 15–16. WHO.2, ‘Human Rights’, p. 16, my emphases. See J. Ferguson, The Anti-Politics Machine: ‘Development’, Depoliticization and Bureaucratic Power in Lesotho (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1990). Dr K. Evang, Chronicle of the World Health Organization, 3, 6 (June 1949), p. 217. Dr K. Evang, Chronicle of the World Health Organization, 2, 8–9 (Aug.–Sept. 1948), p. 200.

Notes 211 90 91 92 93 94

95 96 97 98 99 100

101 102 103

104

105

UN, Economic and Social Council, Resolution 222A (IX), para. 8; UNGA Resolution 304 (IV). See Chapter 2. UN, Technical Assistance, p. 3. UN, Measures for the Economic Development of Under-Developed Countries (New York, 1951), p. 52. UN, Economic Development. This line of thought was formalized in the theory of ‘human capital’ which T.W. Schultz was amongst the first to use: T.W. Schultz, ‘Investment in Human Capital’, American Economic Review, 51, 1 (1961), 1–17. W.A. Lewis, ‘Economic Development with Unlimited Supplies of Labour’, The Manchester School, 139–91, at pp. 147–8. UN, Economic Development, p. 15, p. 93. C.-E. A. Winslow, ‘The Economic Values of Preventive Medicine’, Chronicle of the WHO, 1952, pp. 191–202, p. 192. C.-E. A. Winslow, Cost of Sickness and the Price of Health (Geneva: WHO, 1952), p. 12. Winslow, Cost of Sickness, p. 15. J.A. Sinton, ‘What Malaria Costs India, Nationally, Socially and Economically’, Records of the Malaria Survey of India, 5 (1935), pp. 223–64, 413–89; J.A. Sinton and Raja Ram, ‘Man-Made Malaria in India’, Indian Medical Research Memoirs (1936), IOR, V/25/850/94. Gunnar Myrdal, ‘Economic Aspects of Health’, Chronicle of the WHO, 1952, p. 203, p. 211. Cited in S. Litsios, ‘Malaria Control’, p. 264. On the intellectual history of demography, see D. Hodgson, ‘Demography as Social Science and Policy Science’, Population and Development Review, 9 (1983), 1–34; S. Szreter, ‘The Idea of Demographic Transition and the Study of Fertility: A Critical Intellectual History’, Population and Development Review, 19 (1993), 659–701; S. Greenhalgh, ‘The Social Construction of Population Science: An Intellectual, Institutional and Political History of Twentieth-Century Demography’, Comparative Studies in Society and History, 31, 1 (1996), 26–66, and M. Connelly, ‘Population Control is History: New Perspectives on the International Campaign to Limit Population Growth’, Comparative Studies in Society and History, 45 (2003), 122–47. F. Notestein, ‘Problems of Policy in Relation to Areas of Heavy Population Pressure,’ in Demographic Studies of Selected Areas of Rapid Growth: Proceedings of the Round Table on Population Problems. TwentySecond Annual Conference of the Milbank Memorial Fund, April 12–13, 1944 (New York: Milbank Memorial Fund, 1944), pp. 155–58. Rockefeller Archive Centre, Tarrytown, New York [Hereafter, RAC], Record Group [RG] 1.1, Series 600, Box 2, Folder 9, ‘Public Health and Demography in the Far East, 1949’: M.C. Balfour, ‘Preliminary Note on the Rockefeller Foundation Population Reconnaissance in the Far East’, January 1949; F. Notestein, ‘Preliminary Reconnaissance on Public Health and Demography in the Far East’, March 19, 1949. The impressions were published in F.W. Notestein, I.B. Taeuber and M.C. Balfour, Public Health and Demography in the Far East (1949). As early as 1944, an

212 Notes

106

107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115

116 117 118 119 120 121

ILO report on ‘Social Policy in Dependent Territories’ declared that ‘health policies in the tropics, even when successful in saving lives, replaced one problem by a new one … the poverty of under-populated areas was replaced by poverty resulting from overpopulation’. ILO, Social Policy in Dependent Territories (Montreal: ILO, 1944), p. 10. Gyan Chand, India’s Teeming Millions: A Contribution to the Study of the Indian Population Problem (London: Allen & Unwin, 1939); Gyan Chand, The Problem of Population (Oxford Pamphlets on Indian Affairs, Number 19: Oxford University Press, 1944) OIOC, T. 43122. See Chapter 1, above. UN, Preliminary Report on the World Social Situation (New York, 1952), p. 166. Cf. M. Davis, Victorian Holocausts on the Victorian precedents for this way of (de)valuing the lives of the Asian poor. UN, Preliminary Report, p. 168. Sir Herbert Broadley, Official Records of the World Health Organization [OR]. No. 42. Fifth World Health Assembly, Geneva, 5–22 May 1952, pp. 61–2. WHO Archives, Second Generation files (WHO.2), GH/12, Rajkumari Amrit Kaur to Brock Chisholm, 25 January 1952. National Planning Committee, Population, p. 3. D. Chakrabarty, ‘In the Name of Politics: Sovereignty, Democracy and the Multitude in India’, Economic and Political Weekly, 23 July 2005. WHO, Final Report on Pilot Studies in Family Planning (Geneva, 1954). C.P. Blacker, ‘The Rhythm Method: Two Indian Experiments’ [unpublished]: Wellcome Contemporary Medical Archives Centre [CMAC], London. C.P. Blacker Papers, PP/CPB/H.1. OR, no. 42, p. 232. OR, no. 42, pp. 234–5. I owe this point to Simon Szreter (pers. comm.). WHO.1, GH/12, Brock Chisholm to Paul S. Henshaw, 21 January 1952. Winslow, ‘Economic Values’, p. 193. S. Kunitz, ‘Explanations and Ideologies’, p. 379.

Chapter 4

Building A New Utopia

1 Mitchell, ‘Can the Mosquito Speak?’ p. 41. 2 See Chapter 2, above; D.K. Viswanathan and T. Ramachandra Rao, ‘Control of Rural Malaria with DDT Indoor Residual Spraying in Kanara and Dharwar Districts, Bombay province: First Year’s Results’, Indian Journal of Malariology, 1 (1947), pp. 503–42; ‘Second Year’s Results’, Indian Journal of Malariology, 2 (1948), pp. 157–210. 3 Chronicle of the WHO, 5,2 (February 1951), p. 44. 4 David Arnold, The Tropics and the Traveling Gaze: India, Landscape, and Science 1800–1856 (Delhi: Permanent Black, 2005), p. 49. 5 Chronicle of the WHO, 5,2 (February 1951), p. 44. 6 Chronicle of the WHO, 5,2 (February 1951), p. 45. 7 Chronicle of the WHO, 5,2 (February 1951), p. 45. 8 Official Records of the World Health Organization, No. 44 [OR, 44], ‘Proposed Programme and Budget Estimates for the Financial Year 1954’, pp. 259–73.

Notes 213 9 10 11 12 13 14

15 16 17

18 19

20 21

22

23

24

25

26

OR, 44. Government of Burma, Pyidawtha, p. 109. Cf. Meyer et al., ‘World Society’. F.W. Clements, ‘The WHO in Southeast Asia and the Western Pacific’, Pacific Affairs, 25, 4 (1952) p. 342. Jeffery, The Politics of Health in India, p. 201. Jeffery, The Politics of Health in India, p. 195. For broader considerations of US economic aid to India in the 1950s, J. Merrill, Bread and the Ballot: The United States and India’s Economic Development, 1947–1963 (Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 1990). Jeffery, The Politics of Health in India, p. 197. ‘Campaign Against Disease: Tribute to the Work of WHO’, The Hindu, April 9, 1955. On the intensified National Malaria Control Programme in India, see Viswanathan, Conquest of Malaria in India; Government of India, Directorate-General of Health Services, Annual Reports, various years. ‘Campaign Against Disease: Tribute to the Work of WHO’, The Hindu, April 9, 1955. The programme of transmigration began in the colonial period, with small-scale resettlement to the outer islands beginning in 1905. See J.M. Hardjono, Transmigration in Indonesia (Kuala Lumpur: Oxford University Press, 1977). Jaswant Singh ‘Malaria in Indonesia: Report on a Four Weeks’ Visit’, July–August 1955. WHO. SEA/Mal/3, 31 Dec 1955 [Restricted]. Selected Works of Jawaharlal Nehru (Second Series), Vol. 33 (Delhi: Nehru Memorial Fund, 2004), p. 213. Timothy Mitchell has suggested that perhaps the ‘first international act’ of the new Egyptian government after Nasser’s coup of August 1952 was to sign an agreement with WHO and UNICEF to build a DDT factory at Kafr Zayat ‘that would produce two hundred tons a year of finished DDT’. Mitchell, ‘Can the Mosquito Speak?’ p. 50. P.L. Narayana, The Indian Pharmaceuticals Industry (Delhi: NCAER, 1984), p. 38. In 1952, the public sector accounted for approximately 3 per cent of pharmaceutical sales in India, with ‘foreign’ firms and ‘large Indian’ firms accounting for over 30 per cent each, and ‘small’ Indian firms almost 20 per cent. Nehru, Letter to the Chief Ministers, 7 June 1956, Selected Works of Jawaharlal Nehru (Second Series), Vol. 33 (Delhi: Nehru Memorial Fund, 2004), p. 213. On the flow of imported commodities in the programmes, see, for example, D.K. Viswanathan, ‘Report on Malaria in Indonesia’, WHO Print Archives, WHO Library Geneva (WHO), Regional Office for South East Asia (SEA); WHO. SEA/Mal/5, 17 October 1956 [Restricted], pp. 18–19; on the supplies for the BCG campaign, an example is K. Hansen, ‘Report on Ceylon BCG Campaign. May 1954–March 1956’, 30 April 1956 [Restricted]. SEA/TB/3. Within the Southeast Asian region of WHO, Burma and Indonesia refused to exempt malaria supplies from customs duty: Third Asian Malaria Conference New Delhi, 16–21 March 1959, WHO. SEA/Mal/Conf.3, part 2. On the (sometimes) countervailing demands of sovereignty and biopolitics, see Michel Foucault, Society Must Be Defended: Lectures at the College de

214 Notes

27

28 29

30 31 32

33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40

41

France, 1975–76 (David Macey, trans., London: Penguin, 2003), esp. pp. 242–50. UN, Technical Assistance Programme, ‘Social Services in Burma’, File No. TAA 173/85/04, Report No. TAA/BUR/9, 1955 [British Library of Political and Economic Science, UN Collection]. UN, ‘Burma’, TAA/BUR/9 (1955). See Vaughan, Curing Their Ills. The consultants from Burma wrote that ‘the extra-marital habits of the Kachins, while of great ethnographic interest, is by no means the core of the problem’ of venereal disease. UN, ‘Burma’, TAA/BUR/9 (1955). UN, ‘Burma’, TAA/BUR/9 (1955). Cf. Chatterjee, Politics of the Governed, p. 37. The phrase ‘ethnographic state’ is from Nicholas Dirks, Castes of Mind: Colonialism and the Making of Modern India (Princeton: Princeton University Press, 2001), part 3. L. Mara, ‘Malaria Control in South Malabar, Madras State’, Bulletin of the World Health Organization, 11 (1954), 679–723. L. Mara (1954) ‘Malaria Control’. Cf. Stoler, Education of Desire, p. 39. M. Foucault, The Archaeology of Knowledge (trans. A. Sheridan Smith [1972]; London: Routledge, 2003 ed.), p. 56. UN, ‘Burma’, TAA/BUR/9 (1955), p. 153. The words, here, of Robert Young: R.J.C. Young, ‘Foucault in Tunisia’, in Postcolonialism, An Historical Introduction (Oxford: Blackwell, 2001), p. 433. B. Anderson, Imagined Communities: Reflections on the Origin and Spread of Nationalism (London: Verso, 2nd ed. 1991). D.K. Viswanathan (WHO Regional Adviser on Malaria) ‘Report on a Visit to Burma in Connection with the Malaria Eradication Project in Burma’, 2– 19 February 1957. SEA/Mal/7 [Restricted], Annex. D.K. Viswanathan, ‘Report on National Malaria Control Programme in Afghanistan’, 23 June–7 July, 1956, WHO. SEA/Mal/4, 23 July 1956 [Restricted]; Viswanathan, ‘Report on Malaria in Indonesia’, 18 August– 7 September, 1956; WHO. SEA/Mal/5, 17 October 1956 [Restricted]; Viswanathan, ‘Report on Anti-Malaria Work in Ceylon’, 26 October– 4 November, 1956, WHO. SEA/Mal/6, 19 November 1956 [Restricted]; Viswanathan, ‘A Visit to the Malaria Control Project in Rapti Valley, Nepal’, 20–26 April, 1957, WHO. SEA/Mal/8, 27 May 1957 [Restricted]. Viswanathan’s journeys might be seen as a culmination of a process which Warwick Anderson dates to the early twentieth century: a gradual decline in the power of the ‘tropics’ to captivate the medical imagination. Writes Anderson: ‘Scientific tropical narratives in this period seem to mute the late nineteenth-century rhetoric of sublime nature, and to substitute for it a rhetoric of the techno-scientific sublime … It is the irresistible technical force of modern colonialism … that stuns the new generation of scientists, exciting wonder and trepidation’. Anderson, ‘The Natures of Culture: Environment and Race in the Colonial Tropics’, in P. Greenough and A. Lowenhaupt-Tsing (eds), Nature in the Global South: Environmental Projects in South and Southeast Asia (Durham, N.C.: Duke University Press, 2003), p. 42.

Notes 215 42 V. Thompson and R. Adloff, Minority Problems in Southeast Asia (Stanford: Stanford University Press, 1955), p. 77. 43 Thompson and Adloff, Minority Problems, p. 77. 44 J. Manevy, ‘Le Dr Malaria’, UNESCO Le Courrier, May 1958, Vol. 11, No. 5, pp. 15–17. 45 United Nations Career Records Project (UNCRP), Modern Political Papers collection, Bodleian Library, Oxford. Papers of A.E. Brown, MS Eng c 4664, File 2, fol. 104, February 21, 1954. 46 Brown Papers, MS Eng c 4664, File 2, fol. 139, February 21, 1954. 47 Brown Papers, MS Eng c 4664, File 2, fol. 105–7. 48 See Vaughan, Curing Their Ills, chapter seven, on the ‘jungle doctor’ memoirs. International variants on that theme can be seen in R. Calder, West Meets East (London: News Chronicle, 1952); J. Manevy, La Guerre Contre La Maladie a Travers le Monde (Paris: Hachette, 1964). 49 Cf. Pierre Bourdieu, Logic of Practice (R. Nice, trans., Cambridge: Polity, 1990). 50 UN, ‘Burma’, TAA/BUR/9 (1955), p. 152. 51 UN, ‘Burma’, TAA/BUR/9 (1955), p. 152. 52 See Chapter 1, above, on the origins of the mantris and the very different roles defined for them in the 1930s. 53 K. Osterkov Jensen, ‘Assignment Report on Tuberculosis Control in Indonesia’, WHO. SEA/TB/5 (April, 1958), [Restricted], p. 29. 54 On early post-war efforts in nursing education in India and Southeast Asia, supported by the Rockefeller Foundation: RAC, RF, RG 12.1, Box 10: Janet D. Corwin Diaries, 1944–1948. The most comprehensive history of India’s health services concurs that no great efforts were made in the field of nursing in the 1950s: R. Jeffery, Politics of Health. 55 J. Ferguson, Expectations of Modernity: Myths and Meanings of Urban Life on the Zambian Copperbelt (Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press, 1999), p. 36. 56 L. Mara, ‘Malaria Control’, (1955), p. 694. 57 WHO. SEA/Mal/5 (1956), p. 9. 58 WHO. SEA/Mal/5 (1956), p. 3. 59 WHO. SEA/Mal/7, (1957), p. 6. 60 G. Sambasivan, Guide for Training Spraymen (Rangoon: Government Press, 1957). 61 Government of India, Jawaharlal Nehru on Community Development (New Delhi, 1957), pp. 17–18. On the changed context for mass action after independence, see D. Chakrabarty, ‘In the Name of Politics: Sovereignty, Democracy and the Multitude in India’, Economic and Political Weekly, 23 July 2005. 62 Nehru on Community Development, p. 17, from a speech delivered in August 1952 to the first group of Community Development Project Officers. On the language of mission, cf. P. Van der Veer (ed.), Conversion to Modernities: The Globalization of Christianity (London/New York: Routledge, 1996). 63 National Planning Committee, Report of the National Health Sub-Committee, Chair: S.S. Sokhey, K. Shad (ed.) (Bombay: Vohra & Co., 1947), pp. 43–4. Although published after the Second World War, the report was the result of discussions in 1938–39.

216 Notes 64 Nehru on Community Development, p. 50. 65 Nehru on Community Development, p. 13. 66 Frankz Kafka, The Great Wall of China (London: Penguin, 2005 [trans. M. Pasley, 1973]). Not all international health officials were convinced that such enthusiasm could be sustained indefinitely. A WHO sanitary officer, V. Venkat Rao wrote that in Burma, ‘Spraying will hereafter be carried out by voluntary spraymen, recruited mainly through the newly formed National Solidarity Councils. This is a bold experiment, but, in the very nature of things, it is not practicable to expect people from rural areas to go about from village to village and carry out spraying for prolonged periods without any remuneration’. V. Venkat Rao, ‘Assignment Report on Malaria Eradication Project’, 1955–59, 11 January 1960 [Restricted], WHO. SEA/Mal/17, p. 13. 67 Paul F. Russell, Man’s Mastery of Malaria (London: Oxford University Press, 1955), p. 1. 68 The case was summarized in WHO, Malaria Eradication: A Plea for Health (Geneva, 1958). 69 On the longer history of mosquito resistance to insecticides, see A. Spielman and M. D’Antonio, Mosquito: A Natural History of Our Most Persistent and Deadly Foe (New York: Faber & Faber, 2002). 70 See Chapter 3, above. 71 G.A. Livadas and G. Georgopoulos, ‘Development of Resistance to DDT By Anopheles Sacharovi in Greece’ Bulletin of the World Health Organization, 8 (1953), pp. 497–511. 72 F.J. Dy, ‘Present Status of Malaria Control in Asia’, Bulletin of the World Health Organization, 11 (1954), 725–63, p. 741. 73 E.J. Pampana, ‘Changing Strategy in Malaria Control’, Bulletin of the World Health Organization, 11 (1954), 513–520, at p. 518. 74 Pampana, ‘Changing Strategy’, p. 518. 75 WHO Archives, Geneva, Second Generation Files (WHO.2) From Director, Division of Communicable Disease Services to Director-General, Re: Briefing for Visit to Southeast Asia Region, 27 October 1954. [On microfiche; no file number given] 76 Official Records of the World Health Organization, No. 63, Eighth World Health Assembly, Mexico, 10–27 May 1955. Committee on Programme and Budget: Sixth Meeting, p. 200. 77 WHO, Committee on Programme and Budget, Sixth Session, 1955, OR, 63, pp. 200–1. 78 WHO, Committee on Programme and Budget, Sixth Session, 1955, OR, 63, p. 205. 79 WHO, Committee on Programme and Budget, Sixth Session, 1955, OR, 63, p. 198. 80 See Randall Packard, ‘No Other Logical Choice’: Global Malaria Eradication and the Politics of International Health’, Parassitologia, 40 (June 1998), pp. 217–30. 81 On this, see H. Cleaver, ‘Malaria and the Political Economy of Public Health’, International Journal of Health Services, 7, 4 (1977), pp. 557–79, p. 571. Harry Cleaver shows the process by which a number of American public health officials, committed to WHO, were able to persuade the US

Notes 217 government that supporting the malaria eradication campaign ‘could be a tool of American foreign policy’, and ‘would do much to counteract the anti-United States sentiments which have been aroused by subversive methods’. Thus, Cleaver shows that the malaria eradication campaign did not come about as a result of US manipulation of the WHO, but rather that, by offering public health as an instrument of foreign policy, the WHO’s American supporters were able to restore public health to a position of importance in international government; a position which they feared it was losing. 82 ‘Information on the Status of Malaria Eradication in South-East Asia: Burma’, Third Asian Malaria Conference New Delhi, 16–21 March 1959, WHO. SEA/Mal/Conf.3, part 2. 83 ‘Information on the Status of Malaria Eradication in South-East Asia: India’. WHO. SEA/Mal/Conf.3, part 2.

Chapter 5 1

2

3

4 5 6

7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

The Techno-politics of Public Health

Mitchell, ‘Can the Mosquito Speak?’ pp. 41–2. My use of the term ‘techno-politics’ in this chapter has been influenced by the illuminating work of James Vernon: ‘The Ethics of Hunger’. James Ferguson, The Anti-Politics Machine: ‘Development’, Depoliticization and Bureaucratic Power in Lesotho (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1990). Extract from a letter from the Doctor, protagonist of Phanishvarnath Renu’s 1954 novel, Maila Anchal (Delhi, Rajakamal Prakashan, 1954); here and elsewhere in this chapter, I have used Indira Junghare’s idiomatic translation: The Soiled Border (Delhi: Chanakya Publications, 1991), p. 162. Jaswant Singh, ‘Malaria in Indonesia: Report on a Four Weeks’ Visit’, July–Aug 1955. WHO. SEA/Mal/3, 31 December 1955 [Restricted]. See Chapter 2, above. Jaswant Singh, ‘Malaria in Indonesia: Report on a Four Weeks’ Visit’, July–Aug 1955. WHO. SEA/Mal/3, 31 December 1955 [Restricted] Appendix 8. My emphases. P. Bertagna, ‘Sorption of Insecticides on Mud Walls’, May 1956 [Restricted], WHO. MH/AS/111.56. WHO, Division of Malaria Eradication, Monthly letters, 1957–1959, WHO Library, Geneva, D64.1931. Report on the Third Asian Malaria Conference, Delhi, 19–21 March 1959, WHO. SEA/Mal/16, Annex 3, Opening Address by Jawaharlal Nehru. UN, ‘Burma’, TAA/BUR/9 (1955), p. 167. V. Venkat Rao, ‘Assignment Report on Malaria Eradication Project: Burma, 1955–59’, WHO. SEA/Mal/17, 11 January 1960 [Restricted]. WHO. SEA/Mal/17 (1960). WHO. SEA/Mal/17 (1960). D.K. Viswanathan, ‘Report on Malaria in Indonesia’, WHO. SEA/Mal/5, 17 October 1956 [Restricted]. WHO. SEA/Mal/5 (1956).

218 Notes 16 17 18 19 20 21

22 23 24

25

26 27

28 29

30

31

32 33 34 35

36 37

For an overview of the campaign, see WHO, International Work in Tuberculosis Control (Geneva, 1965). WHO. SEA/TB/3 (1956). WHO. SEA/TB/3 (1956). WHO. SEA/TB/3 (1956). WHO. SEA/TB/3 (1956). Dr C.F. Borchgrevink (Senior WHO Officer) and Dr Nio Kok Hien (National director, Indonesian BCG Campaign) ‘Report on BCG Campaign in Indonesia’, February 1957, [Restricted], WHO. SEA/TB/4, Annex 1. WHO. SEA/TB/4 (1957), Annex 1. L. Grasmo (WHO BCG Nurse), ‘Report on BCG Campaign in Indonesia’, WHO. SEA/TB/4, February 1957 [Restricted] Annex 2. Government of India, Central Council of Health, ‘Minutes of the Central Council of Health: Third Meeting, Trivandrum, 1955’ [mimeographed, National Medical Library, New Delhi]; RAC. RG 12. Richmond K. Anderson Diaries, 1955. 23–25 January, 1955. J. McLary, WHO Public Health Nurse, ‘Assignment report on National Tuberculosis Programme, India’ (Restricted), February 1961, WHO. SEA/TB/30. Dr E. Kjolbye, ‘Assignment Report on BCG Vaccination in India’, (Restricted), August 1962, WHO. SEA/TB/40 Rev.1. See, for example, WHO. SEA/Mal/3 (1955), which begins with a consideration of the ‘context’: population, terrain, distribution of malaria and questions of government. WHO. SEA/Mal/5 (1956); WHO. SEA/Mal.7 (1957); WHO. SEA/Mal/6 (1956). See the essays in P. Kratoska, R. Raben and H. Schulte Nordholt (eds), Locating Southeast Asia: Geographies of Knowledge and Politics of Space (Singapore: Singapore University Press, 2005). A report on the implications of the Haj for malaria eradication exposed another challenge posed by population movement, this time of an interregional kind: M.A. Farid, ‘The Pilgrimage and its Implications in a Regional Malaria Eradication Programme’, 9 April 1956, WHO/Mal/168. Agnese Lockwood, The Burma Road to Pyidawtha, Carnegie Endowment for International Peace, International Conciliation, No. 518, May 1958, p. 433. Lockwood, Pyidawtha, p. 433. Edmund Leach, ‘The Frontiers of “Burma”’, Comparative Studies in Society and History, 3, 1 (1960), 49–86, p. 61. Ludu U Hla, The Caged Ones ([1958] trans. Sein Tu, Bangkok: Tamarind Press, 1986). Dr F. Loven (Senior WHO Officer), ‘Final Report on Tuberculosis Control and Training Centre, Mandalay’, WHO. SEA/TB/13, (Restricted), February 1958, p. 11; on tuberculosis and migration see J.B. MacDougall, Tuberculosis: A Global Study in Social Pathology (Edinburgh, 1949, pp. 4–5). WHO. SEA/TB/13 (1958). A WHO sampling and registration manual states that: ‘Every member of the households comprising the sample group must be included in the reg-

Notes 219

38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46

47 48

49

50

51

52 53

istration, and all intruders must be excluded. In many instances the correct status of an individual may be difficult to establish…should doubt remain, the doubt is recorded on the card.’ WHO/TUB/Techn.Guide/1, p. 6. WHO. SEA/TB/13 (1958). WHO. SEA/TB/13 (1958). See, for example, WHO. SEA/Mal 7 (1957); WHO. SEA/Mal/18 (1960), and WHO. SEA/TB/5 (1957). M. Foucault, The Archaeology of Knowledge, p. 37. See Chapter 3, above. Renu, Soiled Border, p. 132. Renu, Soiled Border, p. 148. Renu, Soiled Border, pp. 188–9. Indeed, numerous studies from the time suggest that the majority of India’s rural cultivators did, indeed, face an acute shortage of land. The Indian national sample survey of rural holdings, conducted in 1954–55, showed that more than one-fifth (22 per cent) of households surveyed owned no land at all. Altogether, approximately 61 per cent of households owned either no land, or fragmented and uneconomical plots of less than one hectare. By contrast, the upper 13 per cent of households owned 64 per cent of all land. National Sample Survey, Eighth Round, Number 10, First Report on Land Holdings, Rural Sector; analysed in detail in F. Frankel, India’s Political Economy, 1947–1977: The Gradual Revolution (Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1977), pp. 98–100. WHO, Seventh World Health Assembly, May 1954, Third Plenary Meeting, Dr A. Stampar, OR 55, p. 80. Socrates Litsios, ‘Selskar Gunn and China: The Rockefeller Foundation’s “Other” Approach to Public Health’, Bulletin of the History of Medicine, 79, 2 (2005), pp. 295–318. Government of India, Community Projects: A Draft Outline (Delhi, 1952); Government of India, Community Projects: A Draft Handbook (Delhi, 1952); Government of India, Jawaharlal Nehru on Community Development (Delhi, 1957). UN, Report of the Mission on Community Organization and Development in South and Southeast Asia, Horace Belshaw and J.B. Grant, ST/SOA/Ser.0/10, p. 24. Emphases mine. UN, Community Organization, pp. 124–5. Ultimately, even the Firka scheme could only translate into the language of technical assistance in terms of numbers: ‘During the first five years of operation 1,076 wells were constructed or were under construction and 732 were repaired or improved, as well as hundreds of miles of road, 228 schools, 73 reading rooms, 3,061 latrines, 1,154 cesspits, 22 miles of village drains, 11 ponds, and 14 dams. Nearly 200 minor irrigation tanks, lakes and ponds were repaired. Over a million trees were planted and 6.230 acres of waste land were brought under cultivation’. See also Administration Report of the Director of Rural Development for the Year 1951 (Government of Madras, 1952). UN, Community Organization, p. 3, p. 25. Frankel, India’s Political Economy, p. 198. See also Partha Chatterjee, ‘Development Planning and the Indian State’.

220 Notes 54 55

56

57

58

59 60

61 62 63

64

65 66 67

Health Cooperatives (Visvabharati Bulletin, No. 25, 1953), p. 17, p. 19. On Indonesia, see Wolf Ladejinsky, ‘Land Reform in Indonesia’ (1963), in L.J. Walinsky (ed.). Agrarian Reform as Unfinished Business: The Selected Papers of Wolf Ladejinsky (Washington DC, World Bank, 1977). On Burma, J. Silverstein, ‘Burma’, in G. Kahin (ed.), Governments and Politics of Southeast Asia (Ithaca: Cornell Southeast Asia Program, 1959), pp. 75–154. For a more recent perspective on the failures of land reform, particularly comparing India and Indonesia, see D.A. Low, The Egalitarian Moment: Asia and Africa, 1950–1980 (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1995). For arguments about Kerala’s ‘exceptionalism’, see R. Jeffrey, Politics, Women and Well-Being: How Kerala Became a Model (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1992). I am grateful for Dr J. Devika (pers. comm.) for her comments on Kerala’s challenge to my broader arguments about technical assistance and depoliticization. For a recent view of Kerala’s modernity, see J. Devika, ‘Domesticating Malayalees: Family Planning, the Nation and Home-Centred Anxieties in Mid-20th Century Keralam’, Centre for Development Studies, Working Paper 340, (Thiruvananthapuram, 2002). J.C. Caldwell, ‘Routes to Low Mortality in Poor Countries’, Population and Development Review, 12, 2 (June 1986), pp. 171–220, p. 198. J. Mencher, ‘The Lessons and Non-Lessons of Kerala: Agricultural Labourers and Poverty’, Economic and Political Weekly, 15, special number (October), pp. 1781–1802. J. Devika, personal communication, 30 September 2005. Caldwell, ‘Low Mortality’. To take one example of the spread of ideas about modernization, an early proposal for the syllabus for the BSc. Programme in nursing at the Delhi School of Nursing included a significant component of sociology: Books: Park and Burgess, Introduction to the Science of Sociology; McIver, Society, Its Structure and Change; Hobhouse, Social Development; C.H. Cooley, Human Nature and the Social Order; Ginsberg, The Psychology of Society; North, Social Differentiation; Rivers, Social Organization; Encyclopaedia of Social Science, article on culture … Rockefeller Archive Centre, Rockefeller Foundation Files, Record Group 2 – 1945, Series 464, Box 307, folder 2083: ‘Syllabus for B.Sc. (Nursing). See also, Margaret Mead, Culture and Technological Change, and the early issues of the journal Economic Development and Cultural Change. WHO. C.F. Borchgrevink (WHO Senior Officer) and Nio Kok Hien (Indonesian National BCG Director), ‘Report on BCG Campaign in Indonesia. WHO Project: Indonesia–8D’ [Restricted], 5 February, 1957. SEA/TB/4. Winslow, ‘Economic Values’, p. 193. Vaughan, Curing Their Ills, p. 147. F.W. Clements, ‘The WHO in Southeast Asia and the Western Pacific’, Pacific Affairs, 25, 4 (1952), p. 344. On the view of H.V. Wyatt, the unusual effectiveness of yaws treatment played a major role in making injections a popular form of therapy across large parts of Asia and Africa.

Notes 221

68

69

70 71

72

73 74 75 76 77

78

79

80 81

82

83 84

H.V. Wyatt, ‘The popularity of injections in the Third World: Origins and Consequences for Poliomyelitis’, Social Science and Medicine, 19 (1984), pp. 911–15. Megan Vaughan has written of this problem in the context of latecolonial Africa: ‘What evidence could be brought to bear to show that African patients actually believed in the theories of biomedicine, rather than merely utilizing its practices? I would argue that it would not be possible to “prove” that the theory of biomedicine had been adopted and internalized’. Vaughan, ‘Health and Hegemony’, p. 199. Pramoedya Ananta Toer, ‘Science, Religion and Health Care’, in The Mute’s Soliloquy: A Memoir, trans. W. Samuels (New York: Penguin, 1999), pp. 237–48. R. Dubos, Man Adapting (New Haven: Yale University Press, 1965), p. 364. G. Canguilhem, The Normal and the Pathological (trans. C.R. Fawcett, New York: Zone Books, 1989 [1943]). A rare contemporary study of attitudes to pain and disease in 1950s India is K.A. Hasan, Cultural Frontier of Health in Village India: Case Study of a North Indian Village (Bombay: Manaktalas, 1967). Only after a contaminated batch of vaccine caused hundreds of injuries, for example, did the WHO begin to record ‘adverse reactions’ to vaccination in the international BCG campaign. WHO. SEA/TB/4 (1957). WHO. SEA/TB/4 (1957), my emphases. Hari Vishnu Kamath, Lok Sabha Debates [LSD], 4 April 1956, p. 4289. This point will be developed in the book’s conclusion, below. WHO. SEA/TB/3 (1956). C. Rajagopalachari, BCG Vaccination: Why I Oppose It (Madras: Indian Express Press, 1956). The pagination in my copy of the document is illegible: all quotations from the document are from the first five pages. I am not, here, making any claims as to whether or not these injuries and maladies were in fact caused by BCG vaccination; the point is, rather, to highlight that the association was made by a number of people, and came to light in Rajagopalachari’s criticisms. All of the letters cited are published in Rajagopalachari, BCG: Why I Oppose It (Madras, Indian Express Press, 1956), after the main body of Rajagopalachari’s text. W. Anderson, ‘The Third World Body’, in R. Cooter and J. Pickstone (eds), Medicine in the Twentieth Century (Amsterdam: Rodopi, 2000), pp. 235–45. As Michel Foucault noted, ‘We must make allowance for the complex and unstable process whereby discourse can be both an instrument and an effect of power, but also a hindrance, a stumbling block and a point of resistance and a starting point for an opposing strategy …’. A History of Sexuality, Vol. 1: The Will to Knowledge, trans. W. Hurley (London: Penguin, 1990), p. 101. See Monica Felton, I Meet Rajaji (London, 1962); Ramachandra Guha, ‘The wisest man in India: aspects of C. Rajagopalachari’, in The Last Liberal and Other Essays (Delhi: Permanent Black, 2004). Rajagopalachari, BCG. From across the political spectrum from Rajagopalachari, Hari Vishnu Kamath, a radical socialist, put the issue much more forcefully in a

222 Notes

85

86 87

88 89

90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97

98 99

parliamentary debate in 1956: ‘The Government’s, rather the Minister’s attitude to BCG is itself BCG; it is brazen, it is cussed, and it is grotesque … the mass scale BCG, in the manner in which it is done, is simply mass bacteriological warfare, and nothing else’. H.V. Kamath, LSD, 4 April 1956, pp. 4289–90. On vaccination and anti-vaccination, see Alison Bashford, ‘Foreign Bodies: Vaccination, Contagion and Colonialism in the 19th Century’, in A. Bashford and C. Hooker (eds), Contagion: Historical and Cultural Studies (London/New York: Routledge, 2001), pp. 39–60; also, N. Durbach, Bodily Matters: The Anti-Vaccination Movement in England, 1853–1907 (Durham, N.C.: Duke University Press, 2005). For a critical review, see Susan Pedersen, ‘Anti-Condescensionism’, London Review of Books, 27, 17, 1 Sept 2005, pp. 7–8. For an Indian study, see Arnold, Colonizing the Body, chapter five. See Chapter 4, above. Rajagopalachari’s pamphlet is full of citations from the British Medical Journal, the American Journal of Public Health, from memoranda by the British Ministry of Health and medical textbooks like Topley and Wilson’s Principles of Bacteriology and Immunity, Volume II (third edition by G.S. Wilson and A.A. Miles). Report on the Health Conditions in Madras State 1955 [Tamil Nadu State Archives Library, Chennai]. Reconstructed from Report on the Health Conditions in Madras State 1955 [Tamil Nadu State Archives Library, Chennai]. Unfortunately, I could not locate statistics at this level of detail for subsequent years, making it difficult to quantify the ‘recovery’ of the vaccination campaign. Report on the Health Conditions in Madras State, 1956 [Tamil Nadu State Archives Library]. Report on the Health Conditions in Madras State, 1957 [Tamil Nadu State Archives Library]. WHO. SEA/TB/3 (1956). Government of Ceylon, Administration Report of the Director of Health Services for 1955 (Dr D.L.J. Kahawita), (Colombo, 1956), para. 54. WHO. SEA/TB/3 (1956). WHO. SEA/TB/3 (1956). ‘BCG Team Obstructed’, Ceylon Observer, July 30, 1955. It was another Madras study, carried out by the Indian Council of Medical Research, that showed the relative ineffectiveness of the BCG vaccine: Anonymous, ‘Trial of BCG vaccines in South India for tuberculosis prevention: first report: Tuberculosis Prevention Trial’ Bulletin of the World Health Organization, 57, 1979, 819–27. Rajagopalachari, BCG. The Final Report of the International Tuberculosis Campaign (Copenhagen, 1951) wrote that: ‘By and large there was no substantial opposition to BCG vaccination, except in Madras where an active counter-propaganda was waged by certain groups’. The causes of this earlier resistance remain obscure, but my informal interviews with a number of older people in Madras suggested that it was a result of some cases of ‘adverse reaction’ to vaccination.

Notes 223 100

101 102 103

104

105 106 107

108 109

Rajagopalachari’s critiques simply ‘would not have made sense’ in the political culture of neighbouring Kerala: J. Devika, pers. comm. (30 September, 2005). Renu, Soiled Border, p. 151. Renu, Soiled Border, p. 152. M.C. Balfour, ‘Problems in Health Promotion in the Far East’, in Modernization Programs in Relation to Human Resources and Population Problems (New York: Millbank Memorial Fund, 1950); H. Cullumbine, ‘An Analysis of the Vital Statistics of Malaria in Ceylon’, Ceylon Journal of Medical Science (D), 6 (1950), parts 3 & 4; S. Rajendran and S.H. Jayewickreme, ‘Malaria in Ceylon’, Indian Journal of Malariology, 5 (1951), 1–124; R.H. Gray, ‘The Decline of Mortality in Ceylon and the Demographic Effects of Malaria Control’, Population Studies, 28, 2 (1974), 205–29. WHO Expert Committee on Venereal Infections, Report on the Third Session, WHO Technical Reports Series, 13 (1950); S.L. Walker and R.J. Hay, ‘Yaws – A Review of the Last 50 Years’, International Journal of Dermatology, 39, 4 (2000), 258. WHO. SEA/TB/3 (1956). Soper, ‘Problems to be Solved’, p. 736. Cf. Peter Baldwin, Contagion and the State in Europe, 1830–1930 (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1999). Baldwin argued, for nineteenth century Europe, that mass vaccination (like quarantine) was a technique employed by relatively weak states, which lacked the capacity to implement less intrusive (but more demanding) systems of surveillance. It seems to me that a similar argument could be applied to the WHO in the 1950s. J.C. Scott, Seeing Like a State: Why Certain Schemes to Improve the Human Condition Have Failed (New Haven: Yale University Press, 1998), p. 4. Cf. Packard, ‘Malaria Dreams’.

Chapter 6 1

2

3 4 5 6

The Limits of Disease Control

See Chapter 5, above. Tuberculosis Chemotherapy Centre, ‘A Concurrent Comparison of Home and Sanatorium Treatment of Pulmonary Tuberculosis in South India’, Bulletin of the WHO, 21 (1959), 51–144. WHO. SEA/TB/28, Dr J.H. Angel (WHO Medical officer), ‘Assignment Report on Tuberculosis Chemotherapy Centre, Madras’ (Restricted, November 1960). TNA. PRO, FD 7/1020, W. Fox (TCC, Madras) to P. D’Arcy Hart (MRC, London), 27 December 1958. Interview with Sir John Crofton, Edinburgh, October 2002. Government of India, Census of India, 1961, Volume 9, Part 11 C, ‘Slums of Madras City’ (1965), p. 26. C.V. Ramakrishnan et al., ‘The Role of Diet in the Treatment of Pulmonary Tuberculosis: An Evaluation in a Controlled Chemotherapy Study in Home and Sanatorium Patients in South India’, Bulletin of the WHO, 25 (1961), 339–59, p. 339; emphases in the original.

224 Notes 7

8 9 10 11 12

13 14 15

16

17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24

25 26

27

28

29

Chemotherapy Centre, ‘Concurrent Comparison’, p. 109. On the sanatoria of Victorian Britain, see Linda Bryder, Below the Magic Mountain: A Social History of Tuberculosis in Twentieth Century Britain (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1988). For another perspective on changing treatments of tuberculosis over time, see Alison Bashford, ‘Tuberculosis and Immigration in Australia, 1901–2001: The Great White Plague Turns Alien’, in M. Worboys and F. Condrau (eds), The History of Tuberculosis in International Perspective (London/New York: Routledge, 2006, forthcoming). I thank Dr Bashford for showing me the typescript. Ramakrishnan et al., ‘Role of Diet’, p. 340. Ramakrishnan et al., ‘Role of Diet’, pp. 351–54. Chemotherapy Centre, ‘Concurrent Comparison’, p. 107. Ramakrishnan et al., ‘Role of Diet’, pp. 357–8. Stig Andersen (WHO sociologist), ‘Assignment Report on National Tuberculosis Institute, Bangalore, India’. WHO. SEA/TB/49 (November 1963) [Restricted], p. 20. National Tuberculosis Institute, Bangalore, Annals of the NTI: 40 Years of Accomplishment (Bangalore: NTI, 2000), p. 24. Interview with Dr D. Banerji, Delhi, 5 September 2003. D. Banerji, ‘Society, Health Problems, Modern Medicine and Social Medicine: An Analysis of Their Inter-relationship in a Cross-Cultural Context’, Cornell University dissertation, 1963. [Cornell University, Kocher Library, rare books and manuscripts, Thesis 1963 B.215]. D. Banerji and S. Andersen, ‘A Sociological Study of Awareness of Symptoms among Persons with Pulmonary Tuberculosis’, Bulletin of the WHO, 29 (1963), 665–83, p. 665. Banerji and Andersen, ‘Study of Awareness’, p. 666. Banerji and Andersen, ‘Study of Awareness’, pp. 677–81. Andersen, ‘Assignment Report’. WHO. SEA/TB/49 (1963). Andersen, ‘Assignment Report’. WHO. SEA/TB/49 (1963). Andersen, ‘Assignment Report’. WHO. SEA/TB/49 (1963). Andersen, ‘Assignment Report’. WHO. SEA/TB/ 49 (1963). Andersen, ‘Assignment Report’. WHO. SEA/TB/49 (1963). S. Andersen and D. Banerji, ‘A Sociological Enquiry into an Urban Tuberculosis Control Programme in India’, Bulletin of WHO, 29 (1963), 685–700, p. 691. Andersen and Banerji, ‘Sociological Enquiry’, p. 691. My emphases. Dr D. Savic, WHO Medical Officer, ‘Assignment Report on the National Tuberculosis Programme, India’. WHO. SEA/TB/91 (October 1968) [Restricted], pp. 21–2. Government of India, Ministry of Health ‘Recommendations for a District Tuberculosis Programme in India’, Annex to ‘Mass Campaigns and General Health Services’ (Preliminary notes), Working Paper for the WHO Secretariat Committee on Mass Campaigns and Public Health, April 1964. WHO, PHA/Mass Camp/1 (1964). WHO/UNICEF Joint Committee on Health Policy, Thirteenth Session, Minutes of the First Meeting, WHO, JC13/UNICEF-WHO/Min/1 (January 1962) [Restricted]. Interview with Dr C.V. Ramakrishnan, Chennai, 1 February 2003.

Notes 225 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48

49

50 51

52 53

54 55 56

Monica Felton, ‘Letter from India: Tackling Tuberculosis in India’, New Society, 52 (26 September 1963). Chemotherapy Centre, ‘Concurrent Comparison’, p. 55. Chemotherapy Centre, ‘Concurrent Comparison’, p. 105. Interview with Dr C.V. Ramakrishnan, Chennai, 1 February 2003. TNA. PRO, FD7/1022, Dr Johs. Holm (head of TB, WHO) to Wallace Fox, 25 April 1957. TNA. PRO, FD7/1022, Holm to Fox, 25 April 1957. TNA. PRO, FD7/1022, Holm to Fox, 25 April 1957. Felton, ‘Letter from India’. PRO, FD7/1022, Holm to Fox, 25 April 1957. WHO, JC13/UNICEF-WHO/Min/1, p. 15. Cf. S. Kunitz, ‘Explanations and Ideologies’, p. 379. WHO, JC13/UNICEF-WHO/2 (1962), p. 2. WHO, International Work in Tuberculosis, 1949–1964 (Geneva, 1965), p. 15. WHO, JC13/UNICEF-WHO/2 (1962), p. 19. WHO, Expert Committee on Tuberculosis, Eighth Report, Technical Reports Series, 290 (Geneva, 1964), pp. 3–4. WHO, Expert Committee on Tuberculosis, Eighth Report, Technical Reports Series, No. 290 (Geneva, 1964). See my ‘Plague of Poverty?’ p. 64. M.C. Raviglione, A. Pio, ‘Evolution of WHO policies for tuberculosis control, 1948–2001’, The Lancet, 359 (2002), pp. 775–80. Miss K. Das, ‘Problems of Relief for Poor Tuberculosis Patients’, Proceedings of the 14th Tuberculosis Workers’ Conference, Madras, January 1958 (TB Association of India) [National Tuberculosis Institute Library, Bangalore], pp. 150–5. My emphases. The Employees’ State Insurance Corporation, launched in 1956, was a scheme of contributory insurance for state employees, and included a network of dispensaries. Das, ‘Problems of Relief’, p. 154. G.R. Banerjee (Head, Department of Medical and Psychiatric Social Work, Tata Institute for Social Sciences, Bombay), The Tuberculosis Patient (Tata Institute of Social Sciences, c. 1965) [NTI Library, Bangalore], p. 50. Banerjee, The Tuberculosis Patient, p. 50. Yet as Pierre Bourdieu has shown, the ‘rational’ disposition itself had particular preconditions for is existence. ‘Rational economic choice’ presupposes a certain level of economic security, provided by stable employment and a regular income, failing which ‘agents cannot perform actions which presuppose an effort to “take a grip on the future”: management of resources over time, whether financial or fertility’. Pascalian Meditations (Richard Nice, trans. Cambridge: Polity, 2000), p. 70. The original research is presented in Bourdieu, Algerie 60: Structures Economiques et Structures Temporelles (Paris: Les Editions de Minuit, 1977). S. Andersen and D. Banerji, ‘Urban Tuberculosis Control, p. 690. S. Andersen and D. Banerji, ‘Urban Tuberculosis Control’, p. 690. C.M. Lomasney, WHO Nurse, ‘Assignment Report on the Nursing Aspects of the Tuberculosis Chemotherapy Centre, Madras’. WHO. SEA/TB/44 (July 1963) [Restircted], p. 16.

226 Notes 57 58

59

60

61

62 63

64 65 66 67 68

69 70 71 72 73

74 75 76 77 78

Andersen and Banerji, ‘Urban Tuberculosis Control’, p. 689. Andersen and Banerji, ‘Urban Tuberculosis Control’, p. 689. The 1961 census of Madras, too, talks of ‘a number of dwellings … [which] offer no surface on which a number could be painted, not even a substantial door post or indeed a door at all’: Government of India, Census of India, 1961, Volume 9, Part 11 C, ‘Slums of Madras City’ (1965), p. 96. This is James C. Scott’s term. J.C. Scott, Seeing Like A State: How Certain Schemes to Improve the Human Condition Have Failed (New Haven and London, 1998). A social survey of Bangalore noted that: ‘The rapid growth of industries and trade attracted many outsiders to settle and work in some factory or other in the city … Government service, domestic services, general labour, factory labour, cart driving, brick laying and mason work, trade and money lending businesses have attracted outsiders’. K. Venkatarayappa, Bangalore: A Socio-Ecological Study (Bombay: University of Bombay, 1957), p. 32. M.N. Srinivas, Indian Society Through Personal Writings (New Delhi, 1998), pp. 53–5. On the broader struggles over urban space in Bangalore in this period, see J. Nair, ‘Battles for Bangalore: Reterritorializing the City’, available at www.sephis.org/pdf/nairpap.pdf. See also, S. Kaviraj, ‘Filth and the Public Sphere: Concepts and Practices about Space in Calcutta’, Public Culture 10, 1 (1997), pp. 83–113. Venkatarayappa, Bangalore, p. 41. See, for example, WHO Tuberculosis Chemotherapy Centre, Nairobi, ‘Drug Acceptability in Domiciliary Tuberculosis Control Programmes’, Bulletin of the WHO, 1963, 29, 627–39. Foucault, ‘The Politics of Health’, p. 285. I.B. Throup, ‘Assignment Report on Tuberculosis Control Programme in Burma’, Appendix 23, WHO. SEA/TB/67 (1967) [Restricted]. Throup, ‘Assignment Report’, SEA/TB/67 (1967). Throup, ‘Assignment Report’, SEA/TB/67 (1967). Government of India, Census of India, 1961, Vol. XI: Madras. Part I–A (i): General Report, P.K. Nambiar, Superintendent of Census Operations (Madras, 1966), pp. 225–6. The report, for example, quotes from the 1908 Imperial Gazeteer of Madras: Census of India 1961, Vol. XI: Madras, p. 44. This argument is also made by Warwick Anderson in his ‘Third World Body’. Spielman and D’Antonio, Mosquito, p. 159. J. Siddiqi, World Health and World Politics: The World Health Organization and the UN System (London: Hurst, 1995), p. 154. M.J. Colbourne, ‘Prospects for Malaria Eradication with Special Reference to the Western Pacific’, Transactions of the Royal Society of Tropical Medicine and Hygiene, 56 (1962), pp. 179–201, p. 179. Colbourne, ‘Prospects for Malaria Eradication’, p. 183. Colbourne, ‘Prospects for Malaria Eradication’, pp. 186–7. G. Covell, Discussion of Colbourne, ‘Prospects’, Transactions, p. 195. J. McArthur, Discussion of Colbourne, ‘Prospects’, Transactions, pp. 196–7. J.F.B. Edeson, Discussion of Colbourne, ‘Prospects’, Transactions, p. 198.

Notes 227 79 80 81

82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91

92 93 94 95

96 97 98 99 100 101

Government of Ceylon, Administration Report of the Director of Health Services for 1956, Dr D.L.J. Kahawita (Colombo, 1957), pp. 15–16. G. Harrison, Mosquitoes, Malaria and Man: A History of the Hostilities Since 1880 (London: John Murray, 1978), p. 254. F.R.S. Kellett, ‘Field visit report on malaria eradication programme, Ceylon’, WHO. SEA/Mal/51, 14 May 1965 [Restricted]. See also A. Gabaldon, ‘Assignment report on malaria eradication, Ceylon’, WHO. SEA/Mal/59, 12 July 1966 [Restricted]. Yet by 1961, reports were coming back of widespread resistance to the chemotherapeutic agents, too, and not just DDT. Colbourne, ‘Prospects’, p. 181. G. Harrison, Mosquitoes, Malaria and Man, pp. 250–51. G. Harrison, Mosquitoes, Malaria and Man, p. 252. Cited in V.P. Sharma and K.N. Mehrotra, ‘Malaria Resurgence in India: A Critical Study’, Social Science and Medicine, 22, 8 (1986), 835–45, p. 839. Sharma and Mehrotra, ‘Malaria Resurgence’, pp. 840–1. Karl Evang, Sixteenth World Health Assembly, 7–23 May, 1963, OR 123, pp. 176–7. Evang, OR 123, pp. 176–7. Evang, OR 123, pp. 176–7. See the debates at the 1963 World Health Assembly, OR 123; E.J. Pampana, ‘Problem Areas’, WHO Print Archives, WHO Library, Geneva [WHO]; Mal/Exp.Comm.14/67.10, 27 June 1967. Only in 1969 did the WHO formally recognize the ‘failure’ of malaria eradication: ‘Reexamination of the Global Strategy of Malaria Eradication’, WHO, Official Records 176 (1969) Annex 13, 106–26. R. Dubos, Man Adapting (New Haven: Yale University Press, 1965), pp. 374–5. Dubos, Man Adapting, p. 377. Dubos, Man Adapting, p. 382. N.S. Scrimshaw, C.E. Taylor, J.E. Gordon, Interactions of Nutrition and Infection (Geneva: Who Monograph Series 57, 1968); W. McDermott, ‘Modern Medicine and the Demographic-Disease Pattern of Overly Traditional Societies: A Technological Misfit’. Journal of Medical Education, 41, 9 September 1966, pp. 137–62; Kunitz, ‘Explanations and Ideologies’; W.H. Mosely and L.C. Chen, ‘An Analytical Framework for the Study of Child Survival in Developing Countries’, in Mosely and Chen (eds), Child Survival: Strategies for Research, Population and Development Review, 10 (1984), supplement. Connelly, ‘Population Control is History’. Szreter, ‘Demographic Transition’, p. 680. P. Demeny, ‘Social Science and Population Policy’, Population and Development Review, 14, 3 (1988), 451–79, p. 458. See Cleaver, ‘Malaria’. See Chapter 3, above, for a discussion of early experiments in population control funded by the WHO in India. Mohan Rao, ‘The Structural Adjustment Programme and the World Development Report 1993: Implications for Family Planning in India’. Rao’s is a historical perspective on contemporary policies in the 1990s,

228 Notes

102

103 104 105 106 107

108 109

110

111 112

113 114 115 116 117

118

119 120

121 122

and he argued that family planning in India ‘has not only failed … but has also damaged the growth of health services in the country’. Matthew Connelly, ‘The Cutting Edge of Population Control: The Origins of Coercive Family Planning in India’, (forthcoming, 2006). I thank the author for sharing a draft with me. Harrison, Malaria, p. 259. Harrison, Malaria, p. 260. Cf. S. Bose, ‘Instruments and Idioms’. Cf. Connelly, ‘Cutting Edge’. D. Fenner, D.A. Henderson et al., Smallpox and its Eradication (Geneva: WHO, 1978), full text of over 1,000 pages available at http://www.who.int/ emc/diseases/smallpox/Smallpoxeradication.html. Fenner, et al., Smallpox. Harish Naraindas, ‘Crisis, Charisma and Triage: Extirpating the Pox’, Indian Economic and Social History Review, XL, 4 (2003), 425–58, p. 456. See also P. Greenough, ‘Intimidation, Coercion and Resistance in the Final Stages of the Smallpox Eradication Campaign, 1973–75’, Social Science and Medicine, 41, 5 (1995), 633–45. Dr H. Mahler, ‘Priority Considerations for the Formulation of an Effective National Tuberculosis Programme in Africa’, Seminar on Integrated Tuberculosis Control, Brazzaville, 1969, p. 5. WHO, AFR 192/03-04. S.R. Whyte, S. van der Geest and A. Hardon, Social Lives of Medicines (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2002), p. 24, pp. 88–9. H.V. Wyatt, ‘The popularity of injections in the Third World: Origins and Consequences for Poliomyelitis’, Social Science and Medicine, 19 (1984), 911–15. Whyte, et al., Medicines, pp. 112–13. Whyte et al., Medicines, p. 113. See Jean Drèze and Amartya Sen, India: Development and Participation (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2002), esp. chapter six. Anant Phadke, Drug Supply and Use: Towards a Rational Policy in India (New Delhi: Sage, 1998). Whyte et al. suggest that ayurvedic practitioners in India began dispensing allopathic drugs in large quantities from the 1960s. This was part of a broader tendency. On ‘plural medicine’ more generally, see W. Ernst (ed.), Plural Medicine: Tradition and Modernity, 1800–2000 (London: Routledge, 2002). On the consolidation of the global pharmaceutical industry, see J. Goodman, ‘Pharmaceutical Industry’ in Cooter and Pickstone (eds), Medicine in the Twentieth Century (Amsterdam: Harwood, 2000). Phadke, Drug Supply and Use. Cited in Whyte, Medicines, et al., p. 148. The WHO’s short-lived embrace of ‘primary health care’ in the 1970s has yet to find its historian, though it appears that the moment was a short one: For a preliminary consideration, see Kunitz, ‘Explanations’, and Packard, ‘Postcolonial Health’. Whyte, et al., Medicines; see also D. Melrose, Bitter Pills: Medicines and the Third World Poor (Oxford: Oxfam, 1982). Whyte, et al., Medicines.

Notes 229 123 124

125

Whyte et al., Medicines, p. 90. See the moving ethnographic study by Sheila Zurbrigg, Rakku’s Story: Structures of Ill Health and the Source of Change (Bangalore: Centre for Social Action, 1984). M. Nichter, Anthropology and International Health: South Asian Case Studies (Amsterdam: Kluwer, 1989), p. 235. This is a view echoed by health activist Anant Phadke (in Drug Supply and Use), and in many interviews I conducted with health workers in India, too numerous to name: I thank them for sharing their insights and experiences, and hope to incorporate these more fully in future work.

Conclusion 1 K. Davis, ‘The Amazing Decline of Mortality in Underdeveloped Areas’, American Economic Review, 46, 2 (1956), 305–18. 2 R. Jeffery, The Politics of Health in India (Berkeley: University of California Press, 1988), p. 121. 3 J.C. Caldwell, ‘The Social Repercussions of Colonial Rule: Demographic Aspects’, in UNESCO, General History of Africa: VII: Africa Under Colonial Domination, 1880–1935, A. Adu Boahen (ed.) (Paris: UNESCO, 1993), pp. 458–86; J. Iliffe, Africans: The History of a Continent (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1995), pp. 243–5. 4 UN, Preliminary Report on the World Social Situation (New York: UN, 1952), p. 3. 5 G. Stolnitz, ‘A Century of International Mortality Trends, I’, Population Studies, 9 (1955), 24–55. 6 United Nations, ‘Preliminary Report on the World Social Situation’, E/CN.5/267/Rev.1, p. 32. 7 On Davis’ influence, see Hodges, ‘Governmentality, Population and the Reproductive Family’. 8 Davis, ‘The Amazing Decline of Mortality’, p. 305. 9 Davis, ‘The Amazing Decline of Mortality’, p. 314. 10 Pramoedya Ananta Toer, ‘My Kampung’ [1952], in Tales From Djakarta: Caricatures of Circumstances and Their Human Beings (translated from the Indonesian language by Sumit Mandal), pp. 75–86 (Jakarta and Singapore: Equinox Publishing, [1963], 2000). 11 Frantz Fanon, ‘Medicine and Colonialism’, in Studies in a Dying Colonialism, trans. H. Chevalier (New York: Monthly Review Press, 1965), pp. 121–46, p. 128. Georges Canguilhem’s view of ‘life expectancy’ is apposite here: ‘The techniques of collective hygiene which tend to prolong human life, or the habits of negligence which result in shortening it, depending on the value attached to life in a given society, are in the end a value judgement expressed in the abstract number which is the average human life span’, Normal and the Pathological, p. 161. 12 S. Preston, ‘The Changing Relation Between Mortality and Level of Economic Development’, Population Studies, 29, 2 (1975), pp. 231–48; S. Preston, ‘Mortality and Development Revisited’, Population Bulletin of the United Nations, 18 (1985), 34–40.

230 Notes 13 Preston, ‘Changing Relation’, p. 237; S. Preston and V. Nelson, ‘Structure and Change in Causes of Death: an International Summary’, Population Studies, 28 (1), (1974), pp. 19–51. 14 W. McDermott, ‘Modern Medicine and the Demographic-Disease Pattern of Overly Traditional Societies: A Technological Misfit’. Journal of Medical Education, 41, 9 September 1966, pp. 137–62. 15 S. Amrith, ‘In Search of a “Magic Bullet” for Tuberculosis: South India and Beyond, c. 1955–1965’, Social History of Medicine, 17, 1 (2004), pp. 113–30. 16 Preston, ‘Mortality and Development’, p. 34. 17 On drug-resistant tuberculosis: J. Crofton, ‘Propter Koch, Post Koch: A Global Review’, [typescript courtesy of Sir John Crofton]. 18 Preston, ‘Changing Relation’, p. 243. 19 Report on the Health Conditions in Madras State, 1954 [Tamil Nadu State Archives Library], p. 24. 20 Rockefeller Archive Centre, Tarrytown, New York (hereafter, RAC), Rockefeller University Archives, Rene J. Dubos Papers, Record Group 450, D 851, Box 26, folder 2: ‘Longevity, Health and Infection’ [typescript, 1955]. 21 R. Carson, Silent Spring (London: Hamilton, 1963). For a recent discussion of Carson’s impact, see: R. Guha, Environmentalism: A Global History (New York: Harlow, Longman, 2000). 22 R. Dubos, Man Adapting (New Haven: Yale University Press, 1965), pp. 280–81. 23 Dubos, Man Adapting, pp. 316–7. 24 Dubos, Man Adapting, pp. 362–3. H.G. Wells, Mind at the End of its Tether (London: Heinemann, 1945); if such an ‘anti-utopian’ strain of writing can indeed be identified, it would be associated with the work of Ivan Illich, whose Limits to Medicine (London: Marion Boyars, 1976) was very influential in the ‘radical’ critique of medicine. 25 G. Stedman Jones, An End to Poverty? A Historical Debate (London: Profile Books, 2004), pp. 1–5. 26 Stedman Jones, An End to Poverty?, p. 5. 27 Karl Evang, Chronicle of the WHO, 3, 6 (June 1949), p. 217. 28 WHO Print Archives, WHO Library, Geneva; Regional Committee for Southeast Asia; SEA/RC7/Min.1, Annex 1, Inaugural Address by Prime Minister Nehru to the Seventh Session of the WHO Regional Committee, New Delhi, September 21, 1954. 29 P. Chatterjee, ‘Populations and Political Society’, in The Politics of the Governed: Reflections on Population Politics in Most of the World (New York: Columbia University Press, 2004), pp. 27–52. 30 Charles Rosenberg, ‘Anticipated Consequences: Historians, History and Health Policy’, in R. Stevens, C. Rosenberg and L. Burns (eds), Putting the Past Back In: History and Health Policy in the United States (Rutgers University Press, forthcoming). 31 Pierre Bourdieu, Pascalian Meditations, Richard Nice, trans. (Cambridge: Polity, 2000), p. 127. 32 Chatterjee, ‘Populations and Political Society’; Veena Das and colleagues have shown that political rights to health have been exercised in India in a sporadic fashion, and often around the question of epidemics: V. Das, R.K. Das and L. Coutinho, ‘Disease Control and Immunization: A Sociological Inquiry’, Economic and Political Weekly (19–26 February, 2000), pp. 625–32. 33 Bourdieu, Pascalian Meditations, p. 127.

Bibliography Primary Sources A. B. C. D.

Archives and Special Collections Official Publications, Pamphlets & Medical Literature Memoirs, Political Writings & Fiction Newspapers and Periodicals

A. Archives and Special Collections Archives of the World Health Organization (WHO), Geneva a) Print Archives: WHO Library DC/TB WHO/TBC JC (1-21) WHO/MAL WHO/PHA WHO/VD SEA/ SEA/TB SEA/MAL SEA/Epid. SEA/PHA SEA/RC WPR/ AFR/

Division of Disease Control: TB Tuberculosis control – minutes, papers, unpublished reports WHO-UNICEF Joint Committee on Health Policy, records and minutes Malaria control – minutes, papers, unpublished reports Public Health Administration: minutes, papers, unpublished reports Venereal Disease control – minutes, papers, unpublished reports. Regional Office for Southeast Asia Southeast Asia regional office: tuberculosis Southeast Asia regional office: malaria Southeast Asia: Epidemiology Southeast Asia: Public Health Administration Southeast Asia Regional Committee: minutes, unpublished papers. Western Pacific Regional Office Regional Office for Africa

b) Record Archives on microfilm Correspondence and unpublished reports: WHO WHO WHO

First Generation Files (WHO.1) Second Generation Files (WHO.2) Third Generation Files (WHO.3)

Archives of the League of Nations, Geneva 8A 50 C.H./

Health: General General & Miscellaneous Comite D’Hygiène 231

1945–1950 1950–1955 1955–1960

232 Bibliography

Archives of the International Labour Organization, Geneva RC-158-1-100WHO 12-0-1001 WHO-32 WHO-29 WHO 3-3

Preparatory Regional Asiatic Conference, New Delhi, 1947, various correspondence Conference on Morbidity Statistics Correspondence with WHO: ‘Economic Value of Preventive Medicine’ Correspondence with WHO: Malaria Cooperation with WHO in the Field of Social Security

Rockefeller Archive Centre, Tarrytown, New York Archives of the Rockefeller Foundation Record Group 1

Projects and Grants Series: 464: India 600: Asia and the Pacific

Record Group 2

General Correspondence Series 464: India 600: Asia and the Pacific

Record Group 12: Officers’ Diaries: Richmond K. Anderson Marshall C. Balfour Janet D. Corwin John B. Grant Anna Mary Noll Rockefeller University Archives: Papers of Rene J. Dubos

Sterling Memorial Library, Yale University Library Papers of Charles Winslow Papers of Henry E. Sigerist

National Archives of India, New Delhi Ministry of Health files.

Nehru Memorial Library and Archives, New Delhi Rajkumari Amrit Kaur Papers P.C. Mahalanobis Papers Jawaharlal Nehru Papers

Tamil Nadu State Archives and Library, Chennai Government of Madras, Department of Health, Annual Reports

National Tuberculosis Institute, Bangalore Collection of annual reports unpublished reports, rare textbooks, newspaper cuttings, and photographs.

Bibliography 233

National Archives of Singapore BMA MH/630

British Military Administration Files, Secretary of Chinese Affairs Ministry of Health Subject Files

Oral History Collection Wilfred Chellapah Benjamin Chew N.C. Sen Gupta

National University of Singapore: Medical Library Malaysia/Singapore Collection: Miscellaneous published and unpublished reports and pamphlets, Diploma of Public Health Theses on Microfilm.

Institute of Medical Research, Kuala Lumpur Annual Reports of the Institute of Medical Research; off-prints of research publications from the 1950s.

The National Archives of the UK, Kew, London: Public Record Office AVIA FO 371 CO 859 DO 35 FD 7 WO 222

Ministry of Aviation records Foreign Office, political correspondence Colonial Office, Social Services Department Dominions Office, general correspondence Records of the Medical Research Council War Office Records, reports submitted to Medical Historian

Asia, Pacific & Africa Collection, British Library, London India Office Records L/E L/MED M/ V/

India Office: Economic Department Records India Office: Medical Board Records Burma Office Records (mainly M/4, Economic Department) India Office Official Publications Series

United Nations Career Records Project, Bodleian Library, Oxford Arthur Brown Papers A.N. Gillett Papers Mary O. Abbott Papers

British Library of Political and Economic Science (LSE): UN Collection UNRRA, Far East Committee: Documents. UN, Technical Assistance Programme, ‘Social Services in Burma’, File No. TAA 173/85/04, Report No. TAA/BUR/9, 1955 [British Library of Political and Economic Science, UN Collection].

Cambridge University Library United Nations Papers on Microfilm: Draft resolutions, unpublished reports and miscellaneous items.

234 Bibliography

Wellcome Trust Contemporary Medical Archive Centre, London Janet Vaughan Papers Robert McCarrison Papers Weldon Dalrymple-Champneys Papers

B. Official Publications, Pamphlets, Medical Literature Andersen, Stig and D. Banerji, ‘A Sociological Enquiry into an Urban Tuberculosis Control Programme in India’, Bulletin of WHO, 29 (1963), 685–700 Anonymous, ‘Trial of BCG Vaccines in South India for Tuberculosis Prevention: First Report: Tuberculosis Prevention Trial’ Bulletin of the World Health Organization, 57 (1979), 819–27 Ascher, C.E. ‘Current Problems in the World Health Organization’s Program’, International Organization, 6, 1 (1952), 27–50 Asian Relations: Report of the Proceedings and Documentation of the First Asian Relations Conference, New Delhi, March–April 1947 (New Delhi: Asian Relations Organization, 1948) Aykroyd, W.R., ‘Nutrition and Public Health’, Quarterly Bulletin of the Health Organisation of the League of Nations, IV, June 1935, 1–140 Aykroyd, W.R., B.G. Krishnan, R. Passmore and A.R. Sundararajan (Coonoor Nutrition Research Laboratory), Indian Medical Research Memoirs, No. 32, The Rice Problem in India (1940) Balfour, M.C., R.F. Evans, F.W. Notestein and I.B. Taeuber, Public Health and Demography in the Far East (Rockefeller Foundation, 1950) Balfour, M.C., ‘Problems in Health Promotion in the Far East’, in Modernization Programs in Relation to Human Resources and Population Problems (New York: Millbank Memorial Fund, 1950) Banerjee, B.N., G.D. Parikh, V.M. Tarkunde, members of the Post-War Reconstruction Committee of the Indian Federation of Labour, People’s Plan for Economic Development of India (Delhi, 1944) Banerjee, G.R. (Head, Department of Medical and Psychiatric Social Work, Tata Institute for Social Sciences, Bombay), The Tuberculosis Patient (Tata Institute of Social Sciences, c. 1965) [NTI Library, Bangalore] Banerji, D., ‘Society, Health Problems, Modern Medicine and Social Medicine: An Analysis of Their Inter-relationship in a Cross-Cultural Context’, Cornell University dissertation, 1963. [Cornell University, Kocher Library, rare books and manuscripts, Thesis 1963 B.215] Banerji, D. and Stig Andersen, ‘A Sociological Study of Awareness of Symptoms among Persons with Pulmonary Tuberculosis’, Bulletin of the WHO, 29 (1963), 665–83 Borkar, G., Health in Independent India: A Decade of Progress (Delhi: Government of India, 1961) Boyd Orr, J. and J.L. Gilks, Studies in Nutrition: The Physique and Health of Two African Tribes (London, 1931) Boyd-Orr, J., Food, Health and Income (London, 1936) Calder, Ritchie, West Meets East (London: News Chronicle, 1952) Chand, Gyan, India’s Teeming Millions: A Contribution to the Study of the Indian Population Problem (London: Allen & Unwin, 1939)

Bibliography 235 Chand, Gyan, The Problem of Population (Oxford Pamphlets on Indian Affairs, number 19: Oxford University Press, 1944) Chisholm, Brock, ‘International Health’, American Journal of Public Health, 41, 12 (December 1951), 1460–63 Clements, F.W., ‘The WHO in Southeast Asia and the Western Pacific’, Pacific Affairs, 25, 4 (1952), 334–48 Colbourne, M.J., ‘Prospects for Malaria Eradication with Special Reference to the Western Pacific’, Transactions of the Royal Society of Tropical Medicine and hygiene, 56 (1962), pp. 179–201, p. 179. Constituent Assembly of India, Debates (1946 – 1950) Crew, F.A.E., The Army Medical Services: Campaigns Volume III: Sicily, Italy, Greece (London: HMSO, 1959) Cullumbine, H., ‘An Analysis of the Vital Statistics of Malaria in Ceylon’, Ceylon Journal of Medical Science (D), 6 (1950), parts 3 & 4 Das, K., ‘Problems of Relief for Poor Tuberculosis Patients’, Proceedings of the 14th Tuberculosis Workers’ Conference, Madras, January 1958 (TB Association of India) [National Tuberculosis Institute Library, Bangalore], pp. 150–5 Davis, Kingsley, ‘The Amazing Decline of Mortality in Underdeveloped Areas’, American Economic Review, 46, 2 (1956), 305–18 Dubos, R., Man Adapting (New Haven: Yale University Press, 1965) Dy, F.J., ‘Present Status of Malaria Control in Asia’, Bulletin of the World Health Organization, 11 (1954), 725–63 Famine Inquiry Commission, Report on Bengal (Government of India, 1945) Farnsworth Anderson, T., ‘The Diet of the African Soldier’, Journal of Tropical Medicine and Hygiene (October–November 1943), 59–62 Faust, E.C., ‘World Health Problems’, Science, 108 (1948), 593 Felton, Monica, ‘Letter from India: Tackling Tuberculosis in India’, New Society, 52 (26 September 1963), 20 Foreign Relations of the United States (Washington, D.C., various years). Goodman, Neville M., International Health Organizations and Their Work (London, 1952) Government of Burma, Pyidawtha: The New Burma: A Report from the Government to the People of the Union of Burma on our Long-term Programme for Economic and Social Development (Rangoon, Economic and Social Board, 1954) Government of Ceylon, Administration Report of the Director of Health Services (Colombo: various years). Government of India, Central Council of Health, ‘Minutes’ (Delhi, various years). Government of India, Lok Sabha Debates (various years) Government of India, Directorate-General of Health Services, Annual Reports, various years, 1949 – 1958 Government of India, Census of India, 1961 (New Delhi, 1961–65) Government of India, Jawaharlal Nehru on Community Development (New Delhi, 1957) Government of India, Planning Commission, Second Five Year Plan (Delhi, 1956) Government of India, Ministry of Health, Report of the Environmental Hygiene Committee [October 1949] (New Delhi, 1956) Government of India, Community Projects: A Draft Outline (Delhi, 1952) Government of India, Planning Commission, The First Five Year Plan: A Draft Outline (New Delhi, 1951)

236 Bibliography Government of India, Report of the Health Survey and Development Committee, 4 vols (New Delhi, 1946) Government of Madras, Administration Report of the Director of Rural Development for the Year 1951 (Government of Madras, 1952) Grant, J.B., ‘Public Health as a Social Service’, Science and Culture, 6, 5 (1940), 296–300 Grant, John B., The Health of India (Oxford Pamphlets on India, number 12: Oxford University Press, 1943) Hasmah Binte M. Ali, S., ‘Effect on a Basic Attitude HEALTH’, Intisari: The Research Quarterly of Malaya, 1, 4 (1962–3), 28–36 Health Cooperatives (Visvabharati Bulletin, No. 25, 1953) Hogben, L., M. Johnstone, D. Mullings, ‘The Medical Ethnography of the Second World War’, British Journal of Social Medicine, 1 (1947), 251–75 Hydrick, John L., Intensive Rural Hygiene Work and Public Health Education of the Public Health Service of Netherlands India (Batavia-Centrum, Java, January 1937) ILO, Preparatory Asiatic Regional Conference of the ILO, Problems of Social Security (Delhi: ILO, 1947) ILO, Social Security: Principles and Problems Arising Out of the War (Montreal: 1944) ILO, Approaches to Social Security, Studies and Reports, Series M, No. 18 (Montreal, 1942) International Labour Conference, 26th Session, Philadelphia, 1944; Report IV(1), Social Security: Principles (Montreal: ILO, 1944) International Tuberculosis Campaign, Final Report of the International Tuberculosis Campaign: July 1, 1948–June 30, 1951. Copenhagen, 1951 League of Nations, Intergovernmental Conference of Far-Eastern Countries on Rural Hygiene, Preparatory Papers Relating to British India (1937), [III.Health.1937.III.6] League of Nations Report of the Intergovernmental Conference of Far-Eastern Countries on Rural Hygiene. Held at Bandoeng (Java), August 3 to 13, 1937 League of Nations, Final Report of the Mixed Committee of the League of Nations on The Relation of Nutrition to Health, Agriculture and Economic Policy [A.13.1937.II.A, 1937] League of Nations, Intergovernmental Conference of Far-Eastern Countries on Rural Hygiene: Report by the Preparatory Committee (Geneva, 1937) [III.Health. 1937.III.3] League of Nations, Intergovernmental Conference of Far-Eastern Countries on Rural Hygiene, Preparatory Papers: National Reports: Report of the Netherlands Indies (Geneva, 1937) [III.Health.1937.III.15] League of Nations, Report of the Health Organization for the Period, October 1932 to December 1933 (Geneva, 1934) League of Nations, Report on the Physiological Bases of Nutrition, League of Nations Doc. No. A. 12 (a) (Geneva, 1936) League of Nations, The Problem of World Nutrition, I (Geneva, 1936) Leimena, J., The Upbuilding of Public Health in Indonesia (Jakarta: Ministry of Information, 1949) Lewis, W. Arthur, The Theory of Economic Growth (London: George Allen & Unwin, 1955) Lewis, W. Arthur, ‘Economic Development with Unlimited Supplies of Labour’, The Manchester School (1954), 139–191

Bibliography 237 Lewis, W. Arthur, ‘On Planning in Backward Countries’, in The Principles of Economic Planning: A Study Prepared for the Fabian Society (London: Dennis Dobson, and Allen & Unwin, 1949) Livadas, G.A. and G. Georgopoulos, ‘Development of Resistance to DDT By Anopheles Sacharovi in Greece’ Bulletin of the World Health Organization, 8 (1953), 497–511 Lockwood, A., The Burma Road to Pyidawtha, Carnegie Endowment for International Peace, International Conciliation, No. 518, May 1958 MacDougall, J.B., Tuberculosis: A Global Study in Social Pathology, Edinburgh, 1949) Manevy, Jean, La Guerre Contre La Maladie a Travers le Monde (Paris: Hachette, 1964) Manevy, Jean, ‘Le Dr Malaria’, UNESCO Le Courrier, 11, 5 (1958), 15–17 McCarrison, R., Nutrition and Health being THE CANTOR LECTURES delivered before the Royal Society of Arts, 1936 (London: The McCarrison Society, n.d.) McDermott, W., ‘Modern Medicine and the Demographic-Disease Pattern of Overly Traditional Societies: A Technological Misfit’. Journal of Medical Education, 41, 9 (1966), 137–62 Mosely, W.H. and L.C. Chen, ‘An Analytical Framework for the Study of Child Survival in Developing Countries’, in Mosely and Chen (eds), Child Survival: Strategies for Research, Population and Development Review, 10 (1984), supplement Myrdal, Gunnar, ‘Economic Aspects of Health’, Chronicle of the WHO (1952), 203–18 National Planning Committee, Population: Report of the Sub-Committee, Chair: Dr Radhakamal Mukherjee, K.T. Shah (ed.) (Bombay: Vohra & Co., 1947) National Planning Committee, Report of the National Health Sub-Committee, Chair: S.S. Sokhey, K. Shad (ed.) (Bombay: Vohra & Co., 1947) National Tuberculosis Institute, Bangalore, Annals of the NTI: 40 Years of Accomplishment (NTI, 2000) Newsholme, A. and J. Kingsbury, Red Medicine: Socialized Health in Soviet Russia (London, 1934) Notestein, Frank, ‘Problems of Policy in Relation to Areas of Heavy Population Pressure,’ in Demographic Studies of Selected Areas of Rapid Growth: Proceedings of the Round Table on Population Problems. Twenty-Second Annual Conference of the Milbank Memorial Fund, April 12–13, 1944 (New York: Milbank Memorial Fund, 1944), 155–8 Nutrition in the Colonial Empire, Report of the Economic Advisory Council (1938–39) [Cmd. 6051] Pampana, E.J., ‘Changing Strategy in Malaria Control’, Bulletin of the World Health Organization, 11 (1954), 513–20 Raina, B.L. (ed.), Official History of the Indian Armed Forces in the Second World War, 1939–45 I: Medical Services: Preventive Medicine (Nutrition, Malaria Control and Prevention of Diseases) (Combined Inter-Services Historical Section, India & Pakistan, 1961) Raja, K.C.K.E., Health Problems of India (Delhi: Indian Council of World Affairs, 1947) [Nehru Memorial Library collection] Rajagopalachari, C., BCG Vaccination: Why I Oppose It (Madras: Indian Express Press, 1956) [Nehru Memorial Library collection]

238 Bibliography Rajendran, S. and S.H. Jayewickreme, ‘Malaria in Ceylon’, Indian Journal of Malariology, 5 (1951), 1–124 Ramakrishnan, C.V., et al., ‘The Role of Diet in the Treatment of Pulmonary Tuberculosis: An Evaluation in a Controlled Chemotherapy Study in Home and Sanatorium Patients in South India’, Bulletin of the WHO, 25 (1961), 339–59 Ray, K.S. (ed.), The Problems of the Medical Profession in India (Calcutta: All-India Medical Association, 1929) ‘Report on an International Conference of Representatives of Health Services of African Territories and British India’, Quarterly Bulletin of the Health Organization of the League of Nations, 2 (1933) Report on Social Insurance and Allied Services, Report by Sir William Beveridge (London: HMSO, 1942) [CMND 6404] Richards, Audrey, Land, Labour and Diet in Northern Rhodesia: An Economic Study of the Bemba Tribe (London: Oxford University Press, 1939) Russell, Paul F., Man’s Mastery of Malaria (London: Oxford University Press, 1955) Ryle, John, Changing Disciplines: Lectures on the History, Method, and Motives of Social Pathology (London: Oxford University Press, 1948) Sand, Rene, The Advance of Social Medicine [1948] (London: Staples Press, 1952) Schultz, T.W., ‘Investment in Human Capital’, American Economic Review, 51, 1 (1961), 1–17 Scrimshaw, N.S., C.E. Taylor, J.E. Gordon, Interaction of Nutrition and Infection (Geneva: WHO, 1968) Shousha, A. Tawfiq, ‘Cholera Epidemic in Egypt (1947): A Preliminary Report’, Bulletin of the World Health Organization, 1, 2 (1948), 368–9 Sigerist, Henry E., Socialized Medicine in the Soviet Union (New York, 1937) Sinton, J.A., ‘What Malaria Costs India, Nationally, Socially and Economically’, Records of the Malaria Survey of India, 5 (1935), 223–64, 413–89 Sinton, J.A., and Raja Ram, ‘Man-Made Malaria in India’, Indian Medical Research Memoirs (1936) Smiley, T.S., Welfare and Planning in the West Indies (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1946) Soper, F.L., ‘Problems to be Solved if the Eradication of Tuberculosis is to be Realized’, American Journal of Public Health, 52, 5 (1961), 734–48 Stampar, Andrija, ‘Health and Social Conditions in China’, Quarterly Bulletin of the Health Organization of the League of Nations, 5 (1936), 1090–1126 Stolnitz, G., ‘A Century of International Mortality Trends, I’, Population Studies, 9 (1955), 24–55 Sze, S., China’s Health Problems (1st ed. Washington D.C.: China Medical Association, 1943) Thakurdas, Sir Purshotamdas, J.R.D. Tata, G.D. Birla, et al., A Plan of Economic Development for India (Bombay: S. Ramu, 1944–45) ‘The Most Suitable Methods of Detecting Malnutrition Due to Economic Depression’, Quarterly Bulletin of the Health Organization, 2, 1 (September 1932) Thompson, V. and R. Adloff, Minority Problems in Southeast Asia (Stanford: Stanford University Press, 1955)

Bibliography 239 Tuberculosis Chemotherapy Centre, ‘A Concurrent Comparison of Home and Sanatorium Treatment of Pulmonary Tuberculosis in South India’, Bulletin of the WHO, 21 (1959), 51–144 UN, Report of the Mission on Community Organization and Development in South and Southeast Asia, Horace Belshaw and J.B. Grant, ST/SOA/Ser.0/10 UN, Preliminary Report on the World Social Situation (New York: UN, 1952) UN, Measures for the Economic Development of Under-Developed Countries, Report by a Group of Experts appointed by the Secretary-General of the United Nations (New York, 1951) UN, Technical Assistance for Economic Development: Plan for an Expanded Cooperative Programme Through the United Nations and the Specialized Agencies (New York, 1949) UN, World War on Tuberculosis: What the United Nations is Doing (New York: UN Department of Public Affairs, 1948) [British Library of Political and Economic Science, London School of Economics: Pamphlets Collection] UN, Official Records (various years) UNRRA: The History of the United Nations Relief and Rehabilitation Administration, under the direction of G. Woodbridge, 3 vols. (New York: Columbia University Press, 1950) Venkatarayappa, K., Bangalore: A Socio-Ecological Study (Bombay: University of Bombay, 1957) Viswanathan, D.K. and T. Ramachandra Rao, ‘Control of Rural Malaria with DDT Indoor Residual Spraying in Kanara and Dharwar Districts, Bombay province: First Year’s Results’, Indian Journal of Malariology, 1 (1947), 503–42 Viswanathan, D.K. and T. Ramachandra Rao, ‘Second Year’s Results’, Indian Journal of Malariology, 2 (1948), 157–210 Vingt-Cinq Ans D’Activité de l’Office International D’Hygiène Publique (Paris: OIHP, 1933) West, T.F. and G.A. Campbell, DDT and Newer Persistent Insecticides (London: Chapman & Hall, 1950) WHO, Official Records (various years) WHO, Technical Reports Series (various years) WHO, Manual of the International Statistical Classification of Diseases, Injuries and Causes of Death, 6th revision (Geneva: WHO, 1948) WHO, ‘Reexamination of the Global Strategy of Malaria Eradication’, WHO, Official Records 176 (1969) Annex 13, pp. 106–26 WHO, Expert Committee on Tuberculosis, Eighth Report, Technical Reports Series, 290 (Geneva, 1964) WHO, First Ten Years of the World Health Organization (Geneva, 1958) WHO, Health Education Pilot Project in Three Villages in Egypt (Cairo: WHO, 1952) WHO Expert Committee on Venereal Infections, Report on the Third Session, WHO Technical Reports Series, 13 (1950) WHO, International Work in Tuberculosis, 1949–1964 (Geneva: WHO, 1965) Winslow, C.-E. A., ‘The Economic Values of Preventive Medicine’, Chronicle of the WHO, 1952, 191–202 Winslow, C.-E. A., Cost of Sickness and the Price of Health (Geneva: WHO, 1952) Winslow, C.-E. A., International Organization for Health (New York: Commission to Study the Organization of Peace, 1944) Winslow, C.-E. A., The Conquest of Epidemic Disease: A Chapter in the History of Ideas (Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1943)

240 Bibliography

C. Memoirs, Political Writings & Fiction Chatterjee, Santimay (ed.), Collected Works of Meghnad Saha, 2 vols. (Calcutta: Saha Institute of Nuclear Physics, 1982, 1987) Fanon, Frantz, ‘Medicine and Colonialism’, in Studies in a Dying Colonialism, trans. H. Chevalier (New York: Monthly Review Press, 1965), pp. 121–46 Gandhi, M.K., ‘Implications of Constructive Programme’ [1940], Collected Works of Mahatma Gandhi, 72 (Delhi: Government of India, Publications Division 1958–78), p. 380 Gandhi, M.K., Diet and Diet Reform (Ahmedabad: Navajivan Publishing House, 1949) Gramsci, Antonio, Selections from the Prison Notebooks, ed. and trans. Q. Hoare and G. Nowell Smith (London, 1971) Grmek, M. (ed.), Serving the Cause of Public Health: Selected Papers of Andrija Stampar (Zagreb: Andrija Stampar School of Public Health, 1966) Horn, J.S., Away With All Pests: An English Surgeon in People’s China, 1954–69 (New York: Monthly Review Press, 1969) Kafka, Franz, The Great Wall of China (London: Penguin, 2005 [trans. M. Pasley, 1973]) Ludu U Hla, The Caged Ones ([1958] trans. Sein Tu, Bangkok: Tamarind Press, 1986) Nehru, Jawaharlal, The Discovery of India (Delhi: Jawaharlal Nehru Memorial Fund/Oxford University Press [1946], 2003) Nehru, Jawaharlal, Selected Works of Jawaharlal Nehru, Second Series, Vols. 1–33 (Delhi: Nehru Memorial Fund, various years–2004) Renu, Phanishvarnath, Maila Anchal (Delhi, Rajakamal Prakashan, 1954) Renu, Phanishvarnath, The Soiled Border, Indira Junghare, trans. (Delhi: Chanakya Publications, 1991) Sigerist, Henry E., Autobiographical Writings [selected and translated by Nora Sigerist Beeson] (Montreal: McGill University Press, 1966) Singh, B. (ed.), Jawaharlal Nehru on Science and Society: A Collection of His Writings and Speeches (Delhi: Nehru Memorial Museum and Library, 1988) Soper, Fred L., Ventures in World Health: The Memoirs of Fred Lowe Soper (Washington, DC: Pan American Health Organization, 1977) Toer, Pramoedya Ananta, ‘My Kampung’ [1952], in Tales From Djakarta: Caricatures of Circumstances and Their Human Beings (translated from the Indonesian language by Sumit Mandal), pp. 75–86 (Jakarta and Singapore: Equinox Publishing [1963], 2000) Toer, Pramoedya Ananta, ‘Science, Religion and Health Care’, in The Mute’s Soliloquy: A Memoir, trans. W. Samuels (New York: Penguin, 1999), pp. 237–48 U Nu, Burma Looks Ahead (Rangoon: Government Printing and Stationery, 1952) Viswanathan, D.K., The Conquest of Malaria in India: An Indo-American Cooperative Effort (Bombay, 1958) Wells, H.G., Mind at the End of its Tether (London: Heinemann, 1945)

D. Newspapers and Periodicals Amrita Bazar Patrika Bangkok Post

Bibliography 241 Ceylon Observer Chronicle of the World Health Organization Deccan Herald Hindu Hindustan Times Indian Express Kalki [Tamil] Kumudam [Tamil] Malay Mail The Nation (Rangoon) New Times of Burma New York Times People’s Health (Madras) Singapore, Department of Information Services, Weekly Digest of Non-English Press (1954–59) Statesman Swarajya Times of India Times of Indonesia UNESCO Courier

Secondary Sources: Books and Articles Abel-Smith, Brian, ‘The Beveridge Report: Its Origins and Outcomes’, in John Hills et al. (eds), Beveridge and Social Security (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1994), pp. 10–22 Adas, Michael, Machines as the Measure of Men: Science, Technology and Ideologies of Western Dominance (Ithaca, N.Y.: Cornell University Press, 1989) Alter, J., ‘Gandhi’s Body, Gandhi’s Truth: Nonviolence and the Biomoral Imperative of Public Health’, Journal of Asian Studies, 55, 2 (1996), 301–22 Amrith, Sunil, ‘In Search of a “Magic Bullet” for Tuberculosis: South India and Beyond, c. 1955–1965’, Social History of Medicine, 17, 1 (2004), 113–30 Anderson, Benedict, Spectre of Comparisons: Nationalism, Southeast Asia and the World (London: Verso, 1998) Anderson, Benedict, Imagined Communities: Reflections on the Origin and Spread of Nationalism (London: Verso, 2nd ed., 1991) Anderson, Carol, Eyes Off the Prize: The United Nations and the African American Struggle for Human Rights, 1944–1955 (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2003) Anderson, Warwick, ‘The Natures of Culture: Environment and Race in the Colonial Tropics’, in P. Greenough and A. Lowenhaupt-Tsing (eds), Nature in the Global South: Environmental Projects in South and Southeast Asia (Durham, N.C.: Duke University Press, 2003), pp. 29–46 Anderson, Warwick, ‘Introduction: Postcolonial Technoscience’, Social Studies of Science 32, 5–6 (2002), 643–57 Anderson, Warwick, ‘The Third World Body’, in R. Cooter and J. Picktone (eds), Medicine in the Twentieth Century (Amsterdam: Rodopi, 2000), pp. 235–45 Anderson, Warwick, ‘Where is the Postcolonial History of Medicine?’ Bulletin of the History of Medicine, 79, 3 (1998), 522–30

242 Bibliography Anderson, Warwick, ‘Excremental Colonialism: Public Health and the Poetics of Pollution’, Critical Inquiry 21 (Spring 1995), 640–69 Arnold, David, The Tropics and the Traveling Gaze: India, Landscape, and Science 1800–1856 (Delhi: Permanent Black, 2005) Arnold, David, Science, Technology and Medicine in Colonial India, New Cambridge History of India, 3, 5 (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2000) Arnold, David, ‘The “Discovery” of Malnutrition and Diet in Colonial India’, The Indian Economic and Social History Review, 31, 1 (1994), 1–27 Arnold, David, ‘Public Health and Public Power: Medicine and Hegemony in Colonial India’, in D. Engels and S. Marks (eds), Contesting Colonial Hegemony: State and Society in Africa and India (London: British Academic Press, 1994), pp. 131–51 Arnold, David, Colonizing the Body State Medicine and Epidemic Disease in Nineteenth-Century India (Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press, 1993) Baker, C.J., An Indian Rural Economy: The Tamilnad Countryside, 1880–1955 (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1984) Baker, C.J., ‘Economic Reorganization and the Slump in South and Southeast Asia’, Comparative Studies in Society and History, 23, 3 (1981), 325–39 Baldwin, Peter, Contagion and the State in Europe, 1830–1930 (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1999) Balinska, M.A., For The Good of Humanity: Ludwik Rajchman Medical Statesman, trans. R. Howell (Budapest: Central European University Press, 1998) Banerji, D., ‘Reflections of an Indian Scholar’, International Journal of Health Services, 33 (2001), 163–9 Banister, Judith, China’s Changing Population (Stanford: Stanford University Press, 1987) Barnes, David, ‘Historical Perspectives on the Etiology of Tuberculosis’, Microbes and Infection (2000), 431–40 Barrett, F., Disease & Geography: The History of an Idea (Toronto: York University Press, 2000) Bashford, Alison, ‘Tuberculosis and Immigration in Australia, 1901–2001: The Great White Plague Turns Alien’, in M. Worboys and F. Condrau (eds), The History of Tuberculosis in International Perspective (London/New York: Routledge, 2006, forthcoming) Bashford, Alison, ‘Foreign Bodies: Vaccination, Contagion and Colonialism in the 19th Century’, in A. Bashford and C. Hooker (eds), Contagion: Historical and Cultural Studies (London/New York: Routledge, 2001), pp. 39–60 Bayart, Jean-François, Le Gouvernement du Monde: Une Critique Politique de la Globalisation (Paris: Fayard, 2004) Bayly, C.A., The Birth of the Modern World, 1780–1914 (Oxford: Blackwell, 2004) Beigbeder, Y. et al., World Health Organization (The Hague: M. Nijhoff, 1998) Bell, Heather, Frontiers of Medicine in the Anglo-Egyptian Sudan, 1899 – 1940 (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1999) Black, M., Children First: The Story of UNICEF, Past and Present (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1996) Bode, Maarten, ‘Review of Margaret Jones, Health Policy in Britain’s Model Colony: Ceylon, 1900–48’, Wellcome History, 30 (2005), 20 Boomgaard, P. ‘The Welfare Services in Indonesia, 1900–1942’, Itinerario, 1 (1986), 57–82

Bibliography 243 Bose, Sugata and Ayesha Jalal, Modern South Asia: History, Culture, Political Economy (London/New York, 1998) Bose, Sugata and Ayesha Jalal (eds), Nationalism, Democracy and Development: State and Politics in India (Delhi: Oxford University Press, 1997) Bose, Sugata, ‘Instruments and Idioms of Colonial and National Development: the Indian Experience in Comparative Perspective’, in F. Cooper and R. Packard (eds), International Development and the Social Sciences: Essays in the History and Politics of Knowledge (Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press, 1997), pp. 45–63 Bose, Sugata, ‘Starvation Amidst Plenty: The Making of Famine in Bengal, Honan and Tonkin, 1942–45’, Modern Asian Studies, 24, 4 (1990), 699–727 Bourdieu, Pierre, Pascalian Meditations, Richard Nice, trans. (Cambridge: Polity, 2000) Bourdieu, Pierre, Logic of Practice (R. Nice, trans., Cambridge: Polity, 1990) Bourdieu, Pierre, Algerie 60: Structures Economiques et Structures Temporelles (Paris: Les Editions de Minuit, 1977) Brandt, A., No Magic Bullet: A Social History of Venereal Disease in the United States Since 1880 (New York: Oxford University Press, 1987) Briger, G. ‘The Historiography of Medicine’, in W.F. Bynum and R. Porter (eds), Companion Encyclopaedia of the History of Medicine, Vol. 1 (London/New York: Routledge, 1993), pp. 24–44 Bryder, Linda, Below the Magic Mountain: A Social History of Tuberculosis in Twentieth Century Britain (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1988) Butalia, Urvashi, The Other Side of Silence: Voices from India’s Partition (Durham, N.C.: Duke University Press, 2000) Caldwell, J.C., ‘The Social Repercussions of Colonial Rule: Demographic Aspects’, in UNESCO, General History of Africa: VII: Africa Under Colonial Domination, 1880–1935, A. Adu Boahen (ed.) (Paris: UNESCO, 1993), pp. 458–86 Caldwell, J.C., ‘Routes to Low Mortality in Poor Countries’, Population and Development Review, 12, 2 (June 1986), 171–220 Callahan, M.D., Mandates and Empire: The League of Nations in Africa, 1914–1931 (Brighton: Sussex Academic Press, 1999) Canguilhem, Georges, The Normal and the Pathological, tr. Carolyn R. Fawcett (New York: Zone Books, 1989) Carson, Rachel, Silent Spring (London: Hamilton, 1963) Cassen, Robert, India: Population, Economy, Society (London: Macmillan, 1978) Chakrabarty, Dipesh, ‘In the Name of Politics: Sovereignty, Democracy and the Multitude in India’, Economic and Political Weekly, 23 July 2005 Chakrabarty, Dipesh, ‘The Difference/Deferral of (A) Colonial Modernity: Public Debates on Domesticity in British Bengal’, History Workshop, 36 (1993), 1–34 Chakrabarty, Dipesh, ‘Open Space/Public Place: Garbage, Modernity and India’, South Asia, 14, 1 (1991), 15–31 Chakravarty, S., Development Planning: The Indian Experience (Delhi: Oxford University Press, 1987) Chatterjee, Partha, The Politics of the Governed: Reflections on Popular Politics in Most of the World (New York: Columbia University Press, 2004) Chatterjee, Partha, ‘Development Planning and the Indian State’, P. Chatterjee, in P. Chatterjee (ed.) State and Politics in India (New Delhi: Oxford University Press, 1997), pp. 271–97

244 Bibliography Chatterjee, Partha, Nationalist Thought and the Colonial World: A Derivative Discourse? (London: Zed Books, 1986) Chatterji, Joya, ‘Rights or Charity? Government and Refugees: The Debate over Relief and Rehabilitation in West Bengal, 1947–1950’, in S. Kaul (ed.), Partition of Memory (Delhi: Permanent Black Press, 2001) Chibber, Vivek, Locked in Place: State-Building and Late Industrialization in India (Princeton: Princeton University Press, 2003) Cleaver, H., ‘Malaria and the Political Economy of Public Health’, International Journal of Health Services, 7, 4 (1977), 557–79 Comaroff, J. & J., Of Revelation and Revolution, 2 volumes (Chicago: University of Chicago Press, 1991, 1997) Connelly, Matthew, ‘Population Control is History: New Perspectives on the International Campaign to Limit Population Growth’, Comparative Studies in Society and History, 45 (2003), 122–47 Connelly, Matthew, A Diplomatic Revolution: Algeria’s Fight for Independence, and the Origins of the Post-Cold War Era (New York: Oxford University Press, 2002) Connelly, Matthew, ‘Taking Off the Cold War Lens: Visions of North-South Conflict During the Algerian War for Independence’, American Historical Review, 105 (2000) 739–69 Cooper, Frederick and Randall Packard (eds), International Development and the Social Sciences: Essays on the History and Politics of Knowledge (Berkeley and Los Angeles, 1997) Cooper, Frederick, Decolonization and African Society: The Labor Question in British and French Africa (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1996) Cooper, J., Breaking the Heart of the World: Woodrow Wilson and the Fight for the League of Nations (New York: Cambridge University Press, 2001) Cueto, Marcos, ‘The Cycles of Eradication: the Rockefeller Foundation and Latin American Public Health’, in Weindling (ed.), International Health Organizations, pp. 222–243 Cumings, Bruce, Korea’s Place in the Sun: A Modern History (New York: W.W. Norton, 1997) Curtin, Philip, Death by Migration: Europe’s Encounter with the Tropical World in the Nineteenth Century (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1989) Das, V., R.K. Das and L. Coutinho, ‘Disease Control and Immunization: A Sociological Inquiry’, Economic and Political Weekly (19–26 February, 2000), 625–32 Davis, Mike, Late Victorian Holocausts: El Niño Famines and the Making of the Third World (London: Verso, 1999) Demeny, Paul, ‘Observations on Population Policy and Population Program in Bangladesh’, Population and Development Review, 1 (1975), 307–21 Demeny, Paul, ‘Social Science and Population Policy’, Population and Development Review, 14, 3 (1988), 451–79 Den Hartog, A.P., ‘Towards Improving Public Nutrition: Nutritional Policy in Indonesia Before Independence’, in G.M. van Heteren, A. de Knecht-van Eekelen, M.J.D. Poulissen (eds), Dutch Medicine in the Malay Archipelago, 1816–1942 (Amsterdam: Rodopi, 1989), pp. 105–18 De Silva, K.M., A History of Sri Lanka (London: Hurst, 1981) Devika, J., ‘Domesticating Malayalees: Family Planning, the Nation and HomeCentred Anxieties in Mid-20th Century Keralam’, Centre for Development Studies Working Paper 340 (Thiruvananthapuram, 2002)

Bibliography 245 Dikötter, Frank, ‘Race Culture: Recent Perspectives on the History of Eugenics’, American Historical Review, 103, 2 (1998), 467–78 Dirks, Nicholas, Castes of Mind: Colonialism and the Making of Modern India (Princeton: Princeton University Press, 2001) Drèze, Jean and Amartya Sen, India: Development and Participation (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2002) Duara, Prasenjit, Sovereignty and Authenticity: Manchukuo and the East Asian Modern (Lanham: Rowman & Littlefield, 2003) Dubin, M., ‘The League of Nations Health Organization’, in P. Weindling (ed.), International Health Organizations and Movements, 1919–1939 (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1995), pp. 56–80 Durbach, N., Bodily Matters: The Anti-Vaccination Movement in England, 1853–1907 (Durham, N.C.: Duke University Press, 2005) Ehrlich, Paul, The Population Bomb (New York: Ballantine Books, 1968) Emerson, D., ‘“Southeast Asia”: What’s in a Name?’ Journal of Southeast Asian Studies, 14 (1984), 1–21 Engerman, D.C., ‘The Romance of Economic Development and New Histories of the Cold War’, Diplomatic History, 28, 1 (2004), 23–54 Ernst, W. (ed.), Plural Medicine, Tradition and Modernity, 1800–2000 (London: Routledge, 2002) Escobar, Arturo, Encountering Development: The Making and Unmaking of the Third World (Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1995) Evans, R.J., ‘Epidemics and Revolutions: Cholera in Nineteenth Century Europe’, Past and Present, 120 (1988), 123–46. Farley, John, To Cast Out Disease: A History of the International Health Division of the Rockefeller Foundation (1913–1951) (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2004) Farley, John, ‘The International Health Division of the Rockefeller Foundation: the Russell Years’, in P. Weindling (ed.), International Health, pp. 203–21 Farley, John, Bilharzia: A History of Imperial Tropical Medicine (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1991) Fenner, F., D.A. Henderson et al., Smallpox and its Eradication (Geneva: WHO, 1978), full text of over 1,000 pages available at http://www.who.int/emc/ diseases/smallpox/Smallpoxeradication.html Ferguson, James, Expectations of Modernity: Myths and Meanings of Urban Life on the Zambian Copperbelt (Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press, 1999) Ferguson, James, The Anti-Politics Machine: ‘Development’, Depoliticization and Bureaucratic Power in Lesotho (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1990) Forbes, G., ‘Managing Midwifery in India’, in Engels and Marks (eds), Contesting Colonial Hegemony: State and Society in Africa and India (London: British Academic Press, 1994), pp. 152–71 Foucault, Michel, Society Must Be Defended: Lectures at the College de France, 1975–76 (David Macey, trans., London: Penguin, 2003) Foucault, Michel, ‘Governmentality’, in G. Burchill and C. Gordon (eds), The Foucault Effect: Studies in Governmentality (London: Harvester Wheatsheaf, 1991) Foucault, Michel, A History of Sexuality, Vol. 1: The Will to Knowledge, trans. W. Hurley (London: Penguin, 1990)

246 Bibliography Foucault, Michel, ‘The Politics of Health in the Eighteenth Century’, in P. Rabinow (ed.), The Foucault Reader (London: Penguin, 1984), pp. 273–89 Foucault, Michel, The Birth of the Clinic: An Archaeology of Medical Perception, trans. A. Sheridan (London: Tavistock, 1976) Foucault, Michel, The Archaeology of Knowledge (trans. A. Sheridan Smith [1972]; London: Routledge, 2003) Frankel, Francine, India’s Political Economy, 1947–77: The Gradual Revolution (Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1978) Gallagher, N.E., Egypt’s Other Wars: Epidemics and the Politics of Public Health (New York: Syracuse University Press, 1990) Ghosh, Amitav, The Calcutta Chromosome: A Novel of Fears, Delirium & Discovery (New York: Perennial, 2001 [1995]) Gillespie, James, ‘International Organizations and the Problem of Child Health, 1945–1960’ Dynamis, 23 (2003), 115–42 Gillespie, James, ‘Social Medicine, Social Security and International Health, 1940–60’, in E. Rodriguez-Ocana (ed.), The Politics of the Healthy Life: An International Perspective (Sheffield: European Association for the History of Medicine and Health Publications, 2002), pp. 219–39 Goodman, J. ‘Pharmaceutical Industry’, in R. Cooter and J. Picksone (eds), Medicine in the Twentieth Century (Amsterdam: Harwood, 2000) Gray, R.H., ‘The Decline of Mortality in Ceylon and the Demographic Effects of Malaria Control’, Population Studies, 28, 2 (1974), 205–29 Greenhalgh, Susan, ‘The Social Construction of Population Science: An Intellectual, Institutional and Political History of Twentieth-Century Demography’, Comparative Studies in Society and History 31, 1 (1996), 26–66 Greenough, Paul, ‘Intimidation, Coercion and Resistance in the Final Stages of the Smallpox Eradication Campaign, 1973–75’, Social Science and Medicine, 41, 5 (1995), 633–45 Greenough, Paul, Prosperity and Misery in Modern Bengal: The Famine of 1943–44 (New York: Oxford University Press, 1982) Guha, Ramachandra, Environmentalism: A Global History (New York: Harlow, Longman, 2000) Guha, Ramachandra, ‘The Wisest Man in India: Aspects of C. Rajagopalachari’, in The Last Liberal and Other Essays (Delhi: Permanent Black, 2004) Guha, Ranajit, Dominance Without Hegemony: History and Power in Colonial India (Cambridge: Harvard University Press, 1998) Guha, Sumit, Health and Population in South Asia: From the Earliest Times to the Present (London: Hurst & Co., 2001) Gupta, Akhil, Postcolonial Developments: Agriculture in the Making of Modern India (Durham NC & London: Duke University Press, 1998) Hardjono, J.M., Transmigration in Indonesia (Kuala Lumpur: Oxford University Press, 1977) Hardy, Andrew, ‘One Hundred Years of Malaria Control in Vietnam: A Regional Retrospective’, Parts 1 & 2, Mekong Malaria Forum, 5 (Jan 2000), and 6 (April 2000) Harper, T.N., The End of Empire and the Making of Malaya (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1999) Harris, Jose, ‘Political Thought and the Welfare State, 1870–1940: An Intellectual Framework for British Social Policy’, Past and Present, 135 (1992), 116–41

Bibliography 247 Harrison, Gordon, Mosquitoes, Malaria and Man: A History of the Hostilities Since 1880 (London: John Murray, 1978) Harrison, Mark and Michael Worboys, ‘A Disease of Civilization: Tuberculosis in Britain, Africa and India, 1900–1939’, in L. Marks and M. Worboys (eds), Migrants, Minorities and Health: Historical and Contemporary Studies (London/ New York: Routledge, 1997), pp. 93–124 Harrison, Mark, Medicine and Victory: British Military Medicine in the Second World War (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2004) Harrison, Mark, Public Health in British India: Anglo-Indian Preventive Medicine 1859–1914 (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1994) Hasan, K.A., Cultural Frontier of Health in Village India: Case Study of a North Indian Village (Bombay: Manaktalas, 1967) Hausman, G.J., ‘Making Medicine Indigenous: Homeopathy in South India’, Social History of Medicine, 15, 2 (2002), 303–22 Havinden, M. and D. Meredith, Colonialism and Development: Britain and its Tropical Colonies, 1850–1960 (London: Routledge, 1993) Hewa, S., Colonialism, Tropical Disease and Imperial Medicine: Rockefeller Philanthropy in Sri Lanka (Lanham, MD: University Press of America, 1995) Hills, J., J. Ditch and H. Glennester (eds) Beveridge and Social Security: An International Retrospective (Oxford: Clarendon Press, 1994) Hodges, Sarah, ‘Governmentality, Population and the Reproductive Family in Modern India’, Economic and Political Weekly, 39, 11 (13 March, 2004), 1157–63 Hodgson, D., ‘Demography as Social Science and Policy Science’, Population and Development Review, 9 (1983), 1–34 Hopkins, A.G. (ed.), Globalization in World History (London: Pimlico, 2002) Hunt, Nancy Rose, A Colonial Lexicon: Of Birth Ritual, Medicalization, and Mobility in the Congo (Durham: Duke University Press, 1999) Hutchinson, J., Champions of Charity: War and the Rise of the Red Cross (Boulder, CO.: Westview Press, 1996) Iliffe, John, East African Doctors: The History of a Profession (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1998) Iliffe, John, Africans: The History of a Continent (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1995) Illich, Ivan, Limits to Medicine (London: Marion Boyars, 1976) Iriye, Akira, Global Community: The Role of International Organizations in the Making of the Contemporary World (Berkeley: University of California Press, 2002) Iriye, Akira, Cultural Internationalism and World Order (Baltimore and London: The Johns Hopkins University Press, 1997) Jalal, Ayesha, Democracy and Authoritarianism in South Asia: A Comparative and Historical Perspective (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1995) Jeffery, Roger, The Politics of Health in India (Berkeley: University of California Press, 1988) Jeffrey, R., Politics, Women and Well-Being: How Kerala Became a Model (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1992). Jones, Margaret, ‘Infant and Maternal Health Services in Ceylon, 1900–1948: Imperialism or Welfare?’ Social History of Medicine, 15, 2 (2002), 263–89 Kahin, G. (ed.), Governments and Politics of Southeast Asia (Ithaca: Cornell Southeast Asia Program, 1959)

248 Bibliography Kahin, G., Nationalism and Revolution in Indonesia (Ithaca: Cornell University Press, 1952) Kamminga, H. and A. Cunningham (eds), Science and Culture of Nutrition, 1840–1940 (Amsterdam: Rodopi, 1995) Kaviraj, Sudipta, ‘In Search of Civil Society’, in Kaviraj and S. Khilnani (eds), Civil Society: History and Possibilities (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2001), pp. 287–323 Kaviraj, Sudipta, ‘Filth and the Public Sphere: Concepts and Practices about Space in Calcutta’, Public Culture 10, 1 (1997), pp. 83–113 Kaviraj, Sudipta, ‘On State Society and Discourse in India’, in J. Manor (ed.), Rethinking Third World Politics (London/New York: Longman, 1991), pp. 72–99 Klein, Ira, ‘Population growth and mortality in British India, Part II: The demographic revolution’, The Indian Economic and Social History Review, 27, 1 (1990), 33–63 Kleinman, Arthur, The Illness Narratives: Suffering, Healing and the Human Condition (New York: Basic Book, 1988) Klingensmith, Daniel, ‘Building India’s “Modern Temples”: Indians and Americans in the Dadomar Valley Corporation, 1945–60’, in K. Sivaramakrishnan and A. Agrawal (eds), Regional Modernities: The Cultural Politics of Development in India (Delhi: Oxford University Press, 2003), pp. 122–42 Kothari, R., ‘The Congress “System” in India’, Asian Survey, 4, 12 (1964), 1161–7 Koven, S. and S. Michel, ‘Womanly Duties: Maternalist Politics and the Origins of Welfare States in France, Germany, Great Britain, and the United States, 1880–1920’, American Historical Review, 95, 4 (1990), pp. 1076–110 Kratoska, P., R. Raben and H. Schulte Nordholt (eds), Locating Southeast Asia: Geographies of Knowledge and Politics of Space (Singapore: Singapore University Press, 2005) Kunitz, Stephen, ‘Explanations and Ideologies of Mortality Patterns’, Population and Development Review, 13 (1987), 379–408 Lal, Maneesha, ‘“The Ignorance of Women is the House of Illness”: Gender, Nationalism and Health Reform in Colonial North India’, in M. Sutphen and B. Andrews (eds), Medicine and Colonial Identity (London/New York: Routledge, 2003), pp. 14–40 Latour, Bruno, The Pasteurization of France, trans. A. Sheridan and J. Law (Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1988) Leach, Edmund, ‘The Frontiers of “Burma”’, Comparative Studies in Society and History, 3, 1 (1960), 49–86 Lee, K., Historical Dictionary of the World Health Organization (Lanham, MD.: Scarecrow Press, 1998) Lewis, Joanna, Empire State-Building: War and Welfare in Kenya, 1925–1952 (Oxford: James Currey, 2000) Litsios, Socrates, ‘Selskar Gunn and China: The Rockefeller Foundation’s “Other” Approach to Public Health’, Bulletin of the History of Medicine, 79, 2 (2005), 295–318 Litsios, Socrates, ‘Malaria Control, Rural Development and the Post-War Re-ordering of International Organizations’, Medical Anthropology, 14 (1997), 255–78

Bibliography 249 Lo, Ming-Cheng, Doctors Within Borders: Profession, Ethnicity and Modernity in Colonial Taiwan (Berkeley: UC Press, 2002) Louis, Wm. Roger, ‘India, Africa, and the Second World War’, Ethnic and Racial Studies, 9, 3 (1986), 306–20. Low, D.A., The Egalitarian Moment: Asia and Africa, 1950–1980 (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1995) Low, D.A., ‘Counterpart Experiences: Indian and Indonesian Nationalisms, 1920s–1950s’, Itinerario, 1 (1986), 117–44 Low, D.A. and J.M. Lonsdale, ‘Introduction: Towards the New Order, 1945–1963’, in D.A. Low and A. Smith (eds), History of East Africa, Vol. 3 (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1976), pp. 1–63 Lyons, M., ‘The Power to Heal: African Medical Auxiliaries in Colonial Belgian Congo and Uganda’, in D. Engels and S. Marks (eds), Contesting Colonial Hegemony: State and Society in Africa and India (London: British Academic Press, 1994), pp. 202–26 Mackie, Jamie, Bandung 1955: Non-Alignment and Afro-Asian Solidarity (Singapore: Editions Didier Millet, 2005) Mamdani, Mahmood, The Myth of Population Control: Family, Caste, and Class in an Indian Village (New York: Monthly Review Press, 1972) Manderson, Lenore, Sickness and the State: Health and Illness in Colonial Malaya, 1870–1940 (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1996) Manderson, Lenore, ‘Wireless Wars in the Eastern Arena: Surveillance, Disease Prevention and the Work of the Eastern Bureau of the League of Nations Health Organization, 1925–1942’, in P. Weindling (ed.), International Health Organizations and Movements, 1918–1939 (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1995), pp. 109–33 Mandle, J.R., ‘The Decline of Mortality in British Guyana, 1911–1960’, Demography, 7 (1980), 301–16 Marks, Shula and N. Andersson, ‘Industrialization, Rural Health, and the 1944 National Health Services Commission in South Africa’, in S. Feierman (ed.), Social Basis of Health and Healing in Africa (Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press, 1992), pp. 131–61 Marks, Shula, ‘What is Colonial About Colonial Medicine? And What has Happened to Imperialism and Health?’ Social History of Medicine, 10, 2 (1997), 205–9 Melrose, D., Bitter Pills: Medicines and the Third World Poor (Oxford: Oxfam, 1982) Mencher, J., ‘The Lessons and Non-Lessons of Kerala: Agricultural Labourers and Poverty’, Economic and Political Weekly, 15, special number (October), 1781–1802 Merrill, J., Bread and the Ballot: The United States and India’s Economic Development, 1947–1963 (Chapel Hill: University of North Carolina Press, 1990) Meyer, J.W., J. Boli, G.M. Thomas and F. Ramirez, ‘World Society and the Nation State’, The American Journal of Sociology, 103, 1 (1997), 144–81 Mitchell, Timothy, ‘Can the Mosquito Speak?’ in Rule of Experts: Egypt, Technopolitics, Modernity (Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press, 2002), pp. 19–53 Moore, Henrietta and Megan Vaughan, Cutting Down Trees: Gender, Nutrition and Agricultural Change in the Northern Province of Zambia, 1890–1990 (London: James Currey, 1994)

250 Bibliography Mrázek, Rudolf, Engineers of Happy Land: Technology and Nationalism in a Colony (Princeton: Princeton University Press, 2002) Murard, Lion, ‘Health Policy Between the International and the Local: Jacques Parisot in Nancy and Geneva’, in I. Borowy and W. Gruner (eds), Facing Illness in Troubled Times: Health in Europe in the Interwar Years (Berlin: Peter Lang, forthcoming) Murard, Lion and Patrick Zylberman, ‘French Social Medicine on the International Public Health Map in the 1930s’, in E. Rodriguez-Ocaña (ed.), The Politics of the Healthy Life: An International Perspective (Sheffield: European Association for the History of Medicine and Health Publications, 2002) Murard, Lion and Patrick Zylberman, ‘L’Autre Guerre (1914–1918). La Santé Publique En France Sous L’Oeil de l’Amérique’, Révue Historique 276 (1986), 367–98 Myrdal, Gunnar, Asian Drama: An Inquiry into the Poverty of Nations (London: Allen Lane/Penguin, 1968) Nair, Janaki, ‘Battles for Bangalore: Reterritorializing the City’ [no date], available at www.sephis.org/pdf/nairpap.pdf Nandy, Ashis ‘The Political Culture of the Indian State’, Daedalus (Winter 1989), 1–26 Nandy, Ashis, ‘Science as a Reason of State’, in A. Nandy (ed.), Science, Hegemony and Violence: A Requiem for Modernity (Delhi: Oxford University Press, 1988), pp. 1–26 Naraindas, Harish, ‘Crisis, Charisma and Triage: Extirpating the Pox’, Indian Economic and Social History Review, XL, 4 (2003), 425–58 Narayana, P.L., The Indian Pharmaceuticals Industry (Delhi: NCAER, 1984) Nichter, Mark, Anthropology and International Health: South Asian Case Studies (Amsterdam: Kluwer Academic Press, 1989) Packard, Randall and P. Gadelha, ‘A Land Filled with Mosquitoes: Fred L. Soper, the Rockefeller Foundation, and the Anopheles Gambiae Invasion of Brazil’ Medical Anthropology, 17 (1997), 215–38 Packard, Randall, ‘Postcolonial Medicine’, in R. Cooter and J. Pickstone (eds), Medicine in the Twentieth Century (Amsterdam: Rodopi, 2000), 97–112 Packard, Randall, ‘No Other Logical Choice: Malaria Eradication and the Politics of International Health’, Parassitologia, 40 (June 1998), 217–30 Packard, Randall, ‘Malaria Dreams: Postwar Visions of Health and Development in the Third World’, Medical Anthropology, 17 (1997), 279–96 Packard, Randall, White Plague, Black Labour: Tuberculosis and the Political Economy of Health and Disease in South Africa (Berkeley and Los Angeles: University of California Press, 1989) Pandey, G. (ed.), The Indian Nation in 1942 (Calcutta: Centre for Studies in Social Sciences, 1988) Pedersen, Susan, ‘Anti-Condescensionism’, London Review of Books, 27, 17, 1 Sept 2005, pp. 7–8 Phadke, A., Drug Supply and Use: Towards a Rational Policy in India (New Delhi: Sage, 1998) Porter, Dorothy, ‘Social Medicine and the New Society: Medicine and Scientific Humanism in mid-Twentieth Century Britain’, Journal of Historical Sociology, 9, 2 (June 1996), 168–87

Bibliography 251 Porter, Dorothy, ‘John Ryle: Doctor of Revolution?’ in D. Porter and R. Porter (eds), Doctors, Politics and Society: Historical Essays (Amsterdam: Rodopi, 1993), 229–47 Porter, Dorothy, ‘Enemies of the Race: Biologism, Environmentalism and Public Health in Edwardian England’, Victorian Studies, 34, 2 (1991) 159–78 Porter, Dorothy and Roy Porter, ‘What Was Social Medicine? An Historiographical Essay’, Journal of Historical Sociology, 1, 1 (1988), 90–106 Porter, Roy, The Greatest Benefit to Mankind: A Medical History of Humanity From Antiquity to the Present (London: HarperCollins, 1997) Power, Helen, ‘The Role of Chemotherapy in Early Malaria Control and Eradication Programmes in Thailand’, Parassitologia, 40, 1–2 (1998), 47–53 Prakash, Gyan, Another Reason: Science and the Imagination of Modern India (Princeton: Princeton University Press, 1999) Preston, S. and V. Nelson, ‘Structure and Change in Causes of Death: an International Summary’, Population Studies, 28, 1 (1974), 19–51 Preston, Samuel, ‘Mortality and Development Revisited’, Population Bulletin of the United Nations, 18 (1985), 34–40 Preston, Samuel, ‘The Changing Relation between Mortality and Level of Economic Development’, Population Studies, 29, 2 (1975), 231–48 Rao, Mohan, From Population Control to Reproductive Health: Malthusian Arithmetic (Delhi: Sage, 2005) Rao, Mohan, ‘The Structural Adjustment Programme and the World Development Report 1993: Implications for Family Planning in India’, in I. Qadeer, K. Sen and K.R. Nayar (eds), Public Health and the Poverty of Reforms (Delhi: Sage, 2001) Reynolds, David, One World Divisible: A Global History Since 1945 (London: Penguin, 2000) Ricklefs, M.C., History of Modern Indonesia Since c. 1200 (Basingstoke: Palgrave, 2001) Riley, James C., The Eighteenth-Century Campaign to Avoid Disease (New York: St. Martin’s Press, 1987) Rodgers, Daniel T., Atlantic Crossings: Social Politics in a Progressive Age (Cambridge, Mass.: Harvard University Press, 1998) Rose, Nikolas, Powers of Freedom: Reframing Political Thought (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press 1999) Rosenberg, Charles, ‘Anticipated Consequences: Historians, History and Health Policy’, in R. Stevens, C. Rosenberg and L. Burns (eds), Putting the Past Back In: History and Health Policy in the United States (Rutgers University Press, forthcoming) Rosenberg, Charles, Explaining Epidemics and Other Studies in the History of Medicine (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1992) Rothschild, Emma, ‘What is Security?’ Daedalus, 124 (1995), 53–98 Rothschild, Emma, ‘Psychological Modernity in Historical Perspective’, in L. Rodwin and D. Schon (eds), Rethinking the Development Experience: Essays Provoked by the Work of Albert O. Hirschman (Washington D.C.: Brookings Institute, 1994) Russell, E., War and Nature: Fighting Humans and Insects with Chemicals from World War I to Silent Spring (New York: Cambridge University Press, 2001) Ruzicka, L. and H. Hansluwka, ‘Mortality Transition in South and East Asia: Technology Confronts Poverty’, Population and Development Review, 8, 3 (1982), 567–88

252 Bibliography Schulte Nordholt, Henk, ‘A Genealogy of Violence’, in F. Colombijn and Th. Lindblad (eds), Roots of Violence in Indonesia (Leiden: KITLV Press, 2002), pp. 33–61 Scott, D., ‘Colonial Governmentality’, Social Text, 43 (1995), 191–220 Scott, James C., Seeing Like A State: How Certain Schemes to Improve the Human Condition Have Failed (New Haven: Yale University Press, 1998) Sen, Amartya, Poverty and Famines: An Essay in Entitlement and Deprivation (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1981) Sharma, V.P.uu and K.N. Mehrotra, ‘Malaria Resurgence in India: A Critical Study’, Social Science and Medicine, 22, 8 (1986), 835–45 Shlomowitz, R. and L. Brennan, ‘Mortality and Indian labour in Malaya, 1877–1933’, IESHR, 29 (1992) Siddiqi, Javed, World Health and World Politics: The World Health Organization and the UN System (London: Hurst, 1995) Simpson, A.W.B., Human Rights and the End of Empire: Britain and the Genesis of the European Convention (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 2001) Sinha, N., ‘Malaria eradication: What went wrong?’ Economic and Political Weekly (June 26, 1976) Sivarajah, A., Politics of Tamil Nationalism in Sri Lanka (Delhi: South Asian Publishers, 1996) Sivaramakrishnan, K. and A. Agrawal (eds), Regional Modernities: The Cultural Politics of Development in India (Delhi: Oxford University Press, 2003) Smith, R., ‘Biology and Values in Interwar Britain: C.S. Sherrington, Julian Huxley and the Vision of Progress’, Past and Present, 178 (2003), 210–42 Snowden, Frank, The Conquest of Malaria: Italy, 1900–1962 (New Haven: Yale University Press, 2006) Spielman, A. and M. D’Antonio, Mosquito: A Natural History of Our Most Persistent and Deadly Foe (New York: Faber & Faber, 2002) Srinivas, M.N., Indian Society Through Personal Writings (New Delhi: Oxford University Press, 1998) Stoler, Ann Laura, Race and the Education of Desire: Foucault’s History of Sexuality and the Colonial Order of Things (Durham: Duke University Press, 1995) Stedman Jones, Gareth, An End to Poverty? A Historical Debate (London: Profile Books, 2004) Szreter, Simon, ‘The Idea of Demographic Transition and the Study of Fertility: A Critical Intellectual History’, Population and Development Review, 19 (1993), 659–701 Taylor, R.H. (ed.), Burma: Political Economy Under Military Rule (London: Palgrave, 2001) Tinker, Hugh, Union of Burma: A Study of the First Years of Independence (London: Oxford University Press, 1957) Tinker, Hugh, The Foundations of Local Self-Government in India, Pakistan and Burma (London: Pall Mall Press, 1954) Van der Veer, Peter (ed.), Conversion to Modernities: The Globalization of Christianity (London/New York: Routledge, 1996) Van de Ven, Hans, ‘War in the Making of Modern China’, Modern Asian Studies, 30, 4 (1996), 737–56 Vaughan, Megan, Creating the Creole Island: Slavery in Eighteenth-Century Mauritius (Durham, N.C.: Duke University Press, 2005)

Bibliography 253 Vaughan, Megan, ‘Smallpox, Slavery and Revolution: 1792 on Ile de France’, Social History of Medicine, 13 (2000), 411–28 Vaughan, Megan, ‘Health and Hegemony: Representation of Disease and the Creation of the Colonial Subject in Nyasaland’, in D. Engels and S. Marks (eds), Contesting Colonial Hegemony: State and Society in Africa and India (London: British Academic Press, 1994), pp. 173–201 Vaughan, Megan, Curing Their Ills: Colonial Power and African Illness (Cambridge: Polity, 1991) Vernon, James, ‘The Ethics of Hunger and the Assembly of Society: The Technopolitics of the School Meal in Britain’, American Historical Review, 110, 3 (2005), 693–725 Vickers, Adrian, A History of Modern Indonesia (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2003) Walinsky, L.J. (ed.), Agrarian Reform as Unfinished Business: The Selected Papers of Wolf Ladejinsky (Washington DC, World Bank, 1977) Walker, S.L. and R.J. Hay, ‘Yaws – A Review of the Last 50 Years’, International Journal of Dermatology, 39, 4 (2000), 258 Washbrook, D.A., ‘The Rhetoric of Democracy and Development in Late Colonial India’, in S. Bose and A. Jalal (eds), Nationalism, Democracy and Development: State and Politics in India (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1999), pp. 36–49 Watt, Carey, Serving the Nation: Cultures of Service, Association and Citizenship (New Delhi: Oxford University Press, 2005) Webster, C., National Health Service: A Political History (Oxford: Oxford University Press, 1998) Weindling, Paul (ed.), International Health Organizations and Movements, 1918–39 (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 1995) Weindling, Paul, ‘Social Medicine at the League of Nations Health Organization and the International Labour Office Compared’, in P. Weindling (ed.), International Health Organizations, pp. 134–53 Whyte, S.R., S. van der Geest and A. Hardon, Social Lives of Medicines (Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, 2002) Williams, Raymond, Keywords: A Vocabulary of Culture and Society (rev. ed., London, 1983) Winner, Langdon, Autonomous Technology: Technics-out-of-control as a Theme in Political Thought (Cambridge, Mass.: MIT Press, 1977) Worboys, Michael, ‘The Discovery of Colonial Malnutrition’, in D. Arnold (ed.), Imperial Medicine and Indigenous Societies (Manchester: Manchester University Press, 1988), pp. 208–25 Wyatt, H.V., ‘The popularity of injections in the Third World: Origins and Consequences for Poliomyelitis’, Social Science and Medicine, 19 (1984), 911–15 Yeoh, Brenda, Contesting Space in Colonial Singapore: Power Relations and the Urban Built Environment (Singapore: National University of Singapore Press, 2003) Young, Robert J.C., Postcolonialism: An Historical Introduction (Oxford: Blackwell, 2001) Zachariah, Benjamin, Developing India: An Intellectual and Social History (Delhi: Oxford University Press, 2005)

254 Bibliography Zachariah, Benjamin, ‘Uses of Scientific Argument: The Case of “Development” in India, 1930–1950’, Economic and Political Weekly, 29 September 2001 Zurbrigg, Sheila, Rakku’s Story: Structures of Ill Health and the Source of Change (Bangalore: Centre for Social Action, 1984) Zylberman, Patrick, ‘Fewer Parallels than Antitheses: Rene Sand and Andrija Stampar on Social Medicine, 1919–1955’, Social History of Medicine, 17, 1 (2004), 77–93

Unpublished Theses and Papers Charrier, Philip, ‘Britain, India and the Genesis of the Colombo Plan, 1945–1951’ (unpublished Ph.D. dissertation, Cambridge University, 1995) Connelly, Matthew, ‘The Cutting Edge of Population Control: The Origins of Coercive Family Planning in India’ [forthcoming, 2006] Crofton, John, ‘Tuberculosis: Propter Koch, Post Koch: A Global Review’, Robert Koch Memorial Lecture of the International Union against Tuberculosis & Lung Disease, Mainz, June 1994 Jackson, J., ‘Regime Theory, Epistemic Communities, and International Health Decision-Making’ (unpublished Ph.D., University of Wales at Aberystwyth, 1997) Muraleedharan, V.R., ‘Malaria and the Rockefeller Foundation in South India: 1936–41’ [unpublished paper] Pedersen, Susan, ‘Settler Power: What Difference did the League of Nations Make?’ Paper presented at conference on ‘Settler Colonialisms in the Twentieth Century’, Harvard University, October 2002 Rothschild, Emma, ‘Age of Words: Histories of Human Security’ [unpublished draft] Seekings, J. ‘Welfare Reform in the 1940s: South Africa in Comparative Perspective’ [unpublished draft] Tilley, Helen, ‘Africa as a “Living Laboratory”: The African Research Survey and the British Colonial Empire: Consolidating Environmental, Medical, and Anthropological Debates, 1920–1940’ (University of Oxford Ph.D., 2001)

Index Afghanistan, 75, 101–2, 109, aid, foreign, 14, 84–5, 87, 102–5, 118, 174, 213n. Amrit Kaur, Rajkumari, 96 Andersen, Stig, 153–4, 162 Anderson, Benedict, 14, 109 Anderson, Carol, 87–8 Anderson, Warwick, 9, 138 antibiotics, 2, 16, 17, 101, 105, 150–2, 162, 172, 180, 185 Arnold, David, 8, 41, 101, 197 n. Asia: health conditions in, 1–4, 76–8, 146, 165, 176–8, 179–81 networks connecting, 2–3, 11–15, 21–2, 25–6, 28–9, 36–42, 43–4, 75, 76–8, 80, 81–2, 100–3, 108–10, 143, 149, 165, 186–7 compared with Africa, Latin America, 14–15 Asian Relations Conference (1947), 77–81, 84 auxiliaries, medical, see under health workers Aykroyd, W.R., 28, 33, 34–6, 38, 39, 45, 65 and Gandhi, 33, 45 see also nutrition Ayurveda, see under medicine: indigenous Bandung (Indonesia), 38 Inter-Governmental Conference on Rural Hygiene (1937), 36–42 Asian-African conference (1955), 106 Banerji, D., 153–4, 162 see also National Tuberculosis Institute Bangalore, 153, 163 BCG vaccination, 3, 17, 82–3, 98, 100, 102, 122, 125–6, 129, 136, 137, 146, 149, 174 opposition to, 137–46 see also Rajagopalachari, C.; tuberculosis

behavioural change: health and, 17, 30, 175, 187 Bengal Famine (1943–4), 69–71 Beveridge Report (1942), 56, 188 Bhore Committee (1944–6), 57–63, 79, 80, 92 Bhore, Sir Joseph, 57–8 biopolitics, 14, 29, 69, 82, 110 body, the, 9, 16, 17, 23, 28, 33, 43, 70, 137–8, 189 Bourdieu, Pierre, 17, 190–1 British government, 48, 49, 56, 61, 67–9, 74, 75 see also India: Government of British Empire, 14, 41, 46, 65, 110 British Medical Research Council, 151 Broadley, Sir Herbert, 95–6 see also under FAO Brown, Arthur E., 111–12 Burma, 14, 15, 22, 28, 36, 42, 80, 106–7, 109–10, 127–9, 164–5 civil war, 124, 127–8, 129 health conditions in, 42, 103, 106–7, 109, 112–13, 118, 124, 164–5 malaria in, 109, 118, 120, 127–8 migration within, 127, 128–9 Pyidawtha policy, 87 technical assistance missions to, 106–7, 109, 112–13, 115, 124 tuberculosis in, 128–9, 164–5 Cambodia, 111–12 technical assistance mission to, see under Brown, Arthur Canguilhem, Georges, 229n. Carson, Rachel, 168, 170, 188 see also DDT Ceylon, 41, 133 and BCG vaccination: resistance to, 138, 140, 143–4 DDT trials in, 50–2

255

256 Index Ceylon – continued health conditions in, 77, 146 see also entries for individual diseases malaria in, 50–2, 118, 119, 147, 167, 176, 180–1 mortality decline in, 146, 180–1 Tamil population of, 143–4 WHO campaigns in, 102, 109, 125, 138, 143–4 Chand, Gyan, 95 Chatterjee, G.C., 41 Chatterjee, Partha, 86, 190 Chellapah, Wilfred, 50–2 China: health conditions in, 12, 25, 26–7, 56, 60, 93, 128 health policies after 1949, 13, 15 and League of Nations, 12, 26–7, 65–6 relationship with WHO, 75 see also Stampar, Andrija Chisholm, Brock, 75, 89, 96, 98 Chopra, Ram Nath, 24 civil society, 10, 16, 87 Colbourne, M.J., 166 Cold War, 14, 72, 83–5, 88, 100 v. non-alignment, 14, 106 see also malaria; United States colonialism, 6, 7–11, 13–14, 15–16, 28–9, 34, 36, 43, 45–6, 57, 67–8, 70, 110–11 colonial discourse, 15–6, 76–7, 95, 106–8, 111–12, 136, 165, 182 colonial medicine, 2, 7–11, 21, 22–6, 28, 34–5, 38–42, 61–2, 106–8, 136, 140 legacies of, 15–16 Communism, 10, 29 community development, 87, 115, 130–5 Congress party (Indian National Congress), 44, 57, 63, 95, 115, 134 and National Planning Committee (1938–45), 44, 63, 92 consumption, 46, 175–8 see also pharmaceuticals

Davis, Kingsley, 180–2 DDT, 2–3, 16, 47–56, 98, 100–3, 104, 107, 110–11, 113–14, 131, 146, 166–9, 170, 180, 185, 188 trials of, 50–6 and malaria eradication, see under malaria resistance to, 117–20, 122–4, 166–9 decolonization, 12, 15, 46, 72 Delhi, 77–8, 81, 97, 120, 124, 161, development, 2, 4, 6, 21, 34–6, 39, 40–3, 46, 73, 85–98, 103, 111, 115, 132–3, 170, 172–4, 180–90 development economics, 18, 92–4 health and, 17, 18, 34–6, 39, 60, 72, 77, 89–90, 91–8, 103, 117, 173–4, 183–4, 186–7 ideologies of, 16, 17, 38, 45–6, 172–4, 183, 189–90 disease eradication, 1, 3–4, 17, 25, 48, 53, 83, 92, 98, 100, 108, 117–20, 125, 127–8, 136, 147, 165–71, 173–5, 176 criticism of, 117–20, 169–71, 187–9 see also Dubos, Rene; malaria; Soper, Fred Djakarta (Jakarta), 182–3 see also Toer, Pramoedya Ananta, doctors, 14, 22, 24, 29, 58, 62, 67, 110, 111, 134, 168 v. auxiliary workers, 18, 108, 125–6 Dubos, René, 136, 170–1, 187–9 Man Adapting, 170–1 education, 27, 40–1, 42, 77, 80, 92, 135 health education, 26, 40–1, 59, 60, 154, 186 medical education, 25, 61, 102 environment, 23, 39–40, 41, 51, 55, 72, 77, 82, 89, 106–7, 127, 150, 160, 162–5, 176, 182–3, 187–8 epidemics, 4–5, 6, 22, 38, 48, 49, 54, 71, 79, 81, 83, 129, 167 control of, see under public health see also under individual diseases evolution, 159–60, 170–1

Index 257 Food and Agriculture Organization (FAO), 65, 95–6 and nutrition, 65 relations with WHO, 75, 95–6 Foucault, Michel, 9, 30, 108, 129, 164, 194 n., 221 n. see also biopolitics, governmentality Frankel, Francine, 86, 133 Gandhi, Mohandas Karamchand, 21, 28, 32–4, 39, 43, 44, 87, 132 gender: international health and, 113 see also health: of mothers and children globalization, 7–8 governmentality, 9–11, 46, 187 Grant, John B., 59–60 see also Bhore committee; Rockefeller Foundation Great Depression, 21, 26, 27, 28–9, 36 Hansen, Kirsten, 125, 137, 144 health, see under medicine and public health health centres, 21, 29–30, 37, 60, 62, 134, 160, health workers, 18, 60–1, 114–15, 121, 126, 137, 147, 149, 167, 175–6, 177, 181 hospitals, 62–3, 79–80, 150, 160, 164, 168 human rights, 2, 74–5, 87–90 health and, 2, 74–5, 88–9 see also World Health Organization Hydrick, J.L., 29–32, 38, 39, 41 India, 1, 12–14, 15, 75, 110, 127, 130–5, 138, 162–4, 186, 196n colonial rule in, 8, 43, 139–40 Five-Year Plans, 86, 87 Government of: colonial and post-colonial, 13–14, 15, 38, 43, 69–71, 80–2, 96, 102–4, 105, 115, 126, 132–5, 139–40, 151, 153, 173 health conditions in, 13, 22–5, 34–6, 52–3, 57–63, 69–71,

79–80, 94, 118, 120, 146, 151–2, 165–6, 179, 181, 187 see also under specific diseases health policy, 10–11, 22–5, 29, 36, 41, 45–6, 57–63, 101, 102–4, 115, 118, 120, 126, 132–5, 156, 165–6, 167–9, 173, 190 see also Bhore Committee nationalism, Indian, 32–4, 43–4, 103–4, 115–16 Partition of (1947), 79–80, 127 relations with Southeast Asia, 14, 15, 81–2, 110 relations with United Nations, 82 relations with United States, 102–3 relations with WHO, 81–2 Indonesia (including Dutch East Indies), 9, 14, 15, 28–32, 38, 41, 43–4, 80, 100–5, 124–5, 127, 129, 135, 136, 182–3 health conditions in, 100, 118, 122–3, 136, 146, 181, 182–3, 198 n. see also under specific diseases technical assistance missions to, 100, 101–2, 104–5, 114, 122–5, 126, 135, 136 internationalism, 4–7, 46, 47, 70 International Labour Organization (ILO), 66, 67–8 Asian regional conference of (1947), 77–8 interest in public health, 27–8, 64–5, 77–8 see also League of Nations: Health Organization International Tuberculosis Campaign, 82–3 see also Red Cross; tuberculosis Kamath, Hari Vishnu, 137, 221–2 n. Kerala, 134, 168 Lashio, see under Burma: technical assistance missions to, Leach, Edmund, 128 League of Nations, 1, 5–6, 11–12, 186 collapse of, 64, 65, 68 as compared with WHO, 68, 73, 74, 75, 131

258 Index League of Nations – continued Health Organization, 6, 11–12, 25–8, 33, 34, 44–6, 53, 60, 62, 65–6, 68, 131, 186 see also under nutrition Inter-Governmental Conference on Rural Hygiene in the Far East, 36–42 relations with Rockefeller Foundation, 6–7 Loven, Frank, 128–9 Ludu U Hla, 128 MacKenzie, Melville, 68–9 Madras city: health conditions in, 150–6, 157–8, 164–5 slums of, 151–2, 164–5 see also Tuberculosis Chemotherapy Centre, Madras state, (Madras Presidency until 1947), 22, 24, 29, 35–6, 132, 138, 140–3, 151 ‘magic bullet’, 18, 53, 135, 140, 156, 184, 186 Mahler, Halfdan, 175, 177 malaria, 3, 39–41, 62, 94, 103, 130–1, 146, 174, 180 control, methods of, 39–41, 48–55, 83, 100–6, 113–15 see also DDT eradication of, 15, 83, 104–6, 110–11, 146, 174, 188 Malaria Eradication Programme (1955–1968), 3, 19–20, 113–15, 116–20, 124–7, 127–8, 165–9, 188 and health services, 150, 167–70 resurgence of, 127–8, 165–9, 184–5 resistant strains of, 120, 122–4, 166–7, 170–1 treatment of, 42, 177 Malaya, 1, 36, 166–7, Malthus, influence of, 44, 73, 90, 94, 182, 188, 189, mantri, 30–2, 114, 124–5, 126–7 Mara, Luigi, 110–11, 113–14 McCarrison, Sir Robert, 28, 33 see also under nutrition

medicine, 15, 18, 22–5, 29, 38–9, 61–3, 65–9, 72, 75, 77–80, 89–90, 96, 97–8, 106–10, 112–13, 130–1, 134, 136, 137, 139–40, 149–65, 167–8, 175–8, 184–7, 188–9 colonial, see under colonialism: colonial medicine indigenous, 23–4, 63, 132–3, 177, 228 n. globalization of, 4–7, 156–7, 175–8, 184–5 medical education, 14, 23–4, 60–1, 63 medical research, 21, 25, 149–65 military medicine, 48–56 tropical medicine, 72, 76–8, 100, 137, 166–7 see also social medicine; public health migration, 8, 104–5, 127–9, 131, 213 n. see also refugees, missionaries, 10, 16, 24–5, 41, 59, 60–1, 107, 111, 112, 115–16 Mitchell, Timothy, 54–5, 101, 121, 213 n. mortality, 10, 71, 76, 77, 87–8, 106, 171, 172, 182–3 mortality decline, 3, 24, 95, 146, 179–82, 184–5, 188 see also under specific diseases mosquitoes, 49, 51–2, 53, 117–18, 122, 123, 124, 128, 131, 149, 167, 185 see also under malaria Mudaliar, A. Lakshmanaswami, 58 municipal sanitation, see under sanitation; urban areas Myrdal, Gunnar, 94 Nair, T.M., 24, 197 n. nationalism, 1, 32–4, 43–6, 70 and public health, 103–6 see also entries for individual countries National Tuberculosis Institute (Bangalore), 151–64 see also Andersen, Stig; Banerji, D.; sociology Nehru, Jawaharlal, 70, 81–2, 115, 189–90 views on public health, 77, 105, 189–90

Index 259 on malaria, 124 and WHO, 81–2, 189–90 Notestein, Frank, 94–5 nursing, 31, 67, 79, 104, 161, 215 n. WHO and, 102, 112, 113, 125, 126, 144, 162 see also under mantri nutrition, 2, 9, 21, 24, 28, 29, 33–6, 39, 41, 42–4, 55–6, 60, 65, 88, 92, 96, 128–9, 132, 150, 152, 159–60, 171, 175, 184 nutritional research, 25–6 see also League of Nations; Gandhi, M.K.; Aykroyd, W.R. Pakistan, vis-à-vis India, 13–4, 79–80, 166 Pampana, Emilio, 37, 118 Pharmaceuticals (also drugs), 42, 47, 55, 149–64, 167, 175–8, 185, 187, 228 n. pharmaceutical industry, 105, 177–8 see also consumption Poerwokerto Health Centre (Java), 29–32 see also Hydrick, J.L. population, 9–10, 13, 48, 104–5, 106, 107, 127, 128 growth, 45, 124 control, 63, 171–5 v. public health, 4, 72, 73, 90–8 overpopulation, 3, 4, 90, 94–8 see also FAO; WHO: debates within public health: as responsibility of government, 2, 10–11, 12–14, 27–9, 36, 44–6, 61–3, 72–3, 76–81, 87–9, 99, 102, 115–16, 168–70 v. clinical medicine, 18, 106–8, 139–40, 157–9 debates about, 18, 41–2, 169–75 see also under social medicine economic justification for, 61–3, 72–3, 86–7, 90–4, 171–4 post-colonial, 7–16, 42–5, 46, 75–82, 103–8, 115, 186, 196 n. poverty and, 13, 17, 27, 28, 39–40, 44, 60, 72, 77–8, 95, 96, 122, 130–5, 151–2, 182–3, 189, 219 n.

Rajagopalachari, C., 122, 137–46 see also BCG vaccination Rajchman, Ludwik, 6, 27, 65–8 Ramakrishnan, C.V., 157–8 see also Tuberculosis Chemotherapy Centre (Madras) Red Cross, 5, 82–3, 145 see also International Tuberculosis Campaign refugees, health of, 79 Renu, Phanishvarnath, 122, 130, 145–6 rice, 28, 34–6, 39, 76, 152 Gandhi’s views on, 32–3 Rockefeller Foundation, 6–7, 12, 18, 25, 48–9, 54, 59–60, 79, 119 and India, 58–60 and League of Nations, 6–7, 25 and rural public health, 21, 26–7, 29–30, see also Grant, John B; Hydrick, J.L. rural reconstruction (also rural hygiene), 1, 21, 26, 27, 29–42, 43, 47, 60, 93, 132–3, 186 see also, community development; Gandhi, M.K.; Hydrick, J.L.; League of Nations Russell, Paul F., 116–19 Ryle, John, 58, 78, 88, 100, 188 sanitation, 34, 55, 160 in urban areas, 163–5 Scott, James C., 147 Second World War, 2, 16, 47–71, 82–3 and technological innovation, 2, 16, 48–55, 72 see also under DDT humanitarian relief, see under UNRRA importance to international health, 2, 47–8, 63–71 military medicine in, 48, 55 Sigerist, Henry E., 58–60, 61 Singh, Jaswant, 104–5, 122–3 Sircar, Sir Nil Rattan, 23–4 smallpox, 79, 169, 174–5 eradication of, 174–5 socialism, 26, 30, 44, 57, 87, 145–6

260 Index social medicine, 18, 26–7, 29, 30, 40, 46, 48, 58–60, 74–5, 93, 189–90 see also, public health; Ryle, John; Stampar, Andrija, sociology, medical, 153–6, 220 n. Soper, Fred L., 18, 48–9, 54, 147 sovereignty, 67, 69, 76, 79–83, 106, 110, 127–8, 139–40, 213–4 n. Soviet Union, 26, 60, 61–2, 63, 68, 83, 85, 174 Stampar, Andrija, 7, 26–7, 74, 85, 88, 131, 188 Sze, Szeming, 74 Tagore, Rabindranath, 133 Taiwan, 46 malaria eradication in, 166 technical assistance: attractions of, 84–7, 91–2, 104 characteristics of, 3, 72, 85–7, 88–90, 93–8, 101, 115–16, 121, 147–8, 158–60, 179–80 discourse of, 72, 85–7, 103–9, 115, 120, 121, 123–4, 127–9, 135–7 importance of improvisation in, 124–5 origins of, 84–7 as practiced in Asia, 99–100, 101–3, 104–5, 108–14, 146–7 and staff, 125–7 weaknesses of, 120, 122, 123–5, 133 techno-politics, 59, 100, 119–20, 121, 217 n. Tinker, Hugh, 22–3 Toer, Pramoedya Ananta, 136, 182–3 tropics, the, 8, 214 n. tropical medicine, see under medicine tuberculosis: causation of, 128–9 chemotherapy, 4, 150–64, 175–8, 185, 187 see also International Tuberculosis Campaign; Tuberculosis Chemotherapy Centre incidence of, 17, 82, 87, 128–9, 136, 146, 183 as social disease, 41, 87, 128–9, 169–70 vaccination against, see under BCG

Tuberculosis Chemotherapy Centre (Madras), 150–64 see also Ramakrishnan, C.V.; National Tuberculosis Institute UNICEF, 73, 82–3, 102–3, 105, 125, 159, 208 n. United Nations (UN), 2, 82, 83, 84, 86–90, 92–6, 106–8, 132–2, 173, 179–80 origins of, 66–8, 73 see also under individual UN agencies (FAO;UNICEF; UNRRA; WHO) United States, 6–7, 14, 26, 65 Cold War policies of, 83–4, 87–8, 101–2 colonial rule in Philippines, 9 foreign aid, 14, 56, 83–4, 85, 106, 132, 172 health conditions in, 25, 26, 87–8 support for malaria eradication, 87, 104, 120, 168, 169, 170, 216–17 n. relations with India, 14, 102–3, 104, 132 relations with WHO, 14–15, 68–9, 73–4, 85, 89, 104 UNRRA, 55–6, 64, 68–9, 70, 82 urban areas, 93, 162–5, 226 n. health conditions in, 151, 162–3, 164–5 see also sanitation urbanization, 129, 135, 163 Vaughan, Janet, 58, 62, 92 Vaughan, Megan, 8–9, 112, 221 n. venereal disease, 107, 182, 214 n. see also under yaws Viswanathan, D.K., 52–3, 101, 108–10, 114, 124–5 see also under malaria: control welfare, 1, 9–11, 13, 73, 76–80, 106, 107–8, 173, 189 welfare state, 56–7 Winslow, Charles-Edward Amery, 93–4, 98, 135 The Cost of Sickness, the Price of Health, 93–4

Index 261 World Health Organization (WHO), 2–4, 10, 12, 14–15, 19, 98, 99, 103–14, 135–7, 176–9, 180–1, 188–91 Budget of, 90–1 Constitution of, 2, 73–5, 190–1 debates within, 18, 87–90, 95–8, 116–20, 158–9, 169–70, 188–90 foundation of, 7, 12, 73–5, 174, 188–91 and human rights, 2, 87–90 policies of, 83, 96–7, 100–14, 122–9, 137–45, 146–8, 150–64, 174–5, 180–1 see also under specific diseases

Southeast Asian office, 81–2 see also entries for individual countries World Health Assembly, 75, 88, 90, 93–8, 117–19, 131, 169 X-ray, 55, 83, 112, 126, 154, 160 yaws, 3, 17, 39, 92, 98, 100, 101, 103, 113, 136, 146, 169, 176, 220–1 n. Yugoslavia, 27, 56, 83, 85, Zagreb School of Public Health, 26 see also Stampar, Andrija